advertisement
▼
Scroll to page 2
of 696
XC90 TWIN ENGINE O W N ER' S MA N UA L VÄLKOMMEN! We hope you will enjoy many years of driving pleasure in your Volvo. The car has been designed for the safety and comfort of you and your passengers. Volvo strives to build one of the safest cars in the world. Your Volvo is also designed to meet applicable safety and environmental requirements. To increase your enjoyment of your Volvo, we recommend that you read the instructions and maintenance information in this owner's manual. The owner's manual is also available as a mobile app (Volvo Manual) and on the Volvo Cars support site (support.volvocars.com). We encourage everyone to always wear their seatbelt in this and other cars. Please do not drive if you are under the influence of alcohol or medication – or have an impaired ability to drive in some other way. TABLE OF CONTENTS OWNER'S INFORMATION YOUR VOLVO 16 Volvo ID 26 Safety 42 Owner's manual in centre display 17 Creating and registering a Volvo ID 26 Safety during pregnancy 42 Navigate in the owner's manual in the centre display 18 Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure 28 Whiplash Protection System 43 Owner's Manual in mobile devices 20 IntelliSafe – driver support and safety 31 Seatbelts 44 Volvo Cars support site 21 Sensus - online connectivity and entertainment 32 Putting on and taking off seatbelts 45 Reading the owner's manual 21 Software updates 35 Seatbelt tensioner 47 The owner's manual and the environment 23 Recording data 35 Resetting the electric seatbelt tensioner 48 Terms & Conditions for Services 36 Door and seatbelt reminder 48 Customer Privacy Policy 36 Airbags 49 Important information on accessories and auxiliary equipment 37 Driver airbags 50 Passenger airbag 51 Activating and deactivating passenger airbag* 52 Side airbags 55 39 Inflatable curtains 55 39 Safety mode 56 Starting and moving the car after safety mode 57 Child safety 58 Child seats 58 Upper mounting points for child seats 59 Lower mounting points for child seats 60 i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats 60 Child seat positioning 61 Installation of accessories 37 Connection of equipment to the car's diagnostic socket 38 Showing the car's identification number Driver distraction 2 SAFETY Owner information DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Child seat mounting 62 Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts 64 Table for location of i-Size child seats 69 Table for location of ISOFIX child seats 71 Integrated child seat* 76 Folding up the seat cushion in the integrated child seat* 77 Folding down the seat cushion in the integrated child seat* 77 Instruments and controls in left-hand drive car 80 Instruments and controls in righthand drive car 81 Driver display 83 Driver display settings Fuel gauge 85 86 Hybrid gauge 86 Hybrid battery gauge 87 Trip computer 88 Show trip data in the driver display 90 Resetting the trip meter 91 Show trip statistics in the centre display 91 Settings for trip statistics 92 Date and time 92 Outside temperature gauge 93 Indicator symbols in the driver display 93 Warning symbols in the driver display 95 License agreement for the driver display 96 Overview of centre display 108 Managing the centre display 111 Activating and deactivating centre display 114 Navigating in the centre display's views 114 Managing subviews in centre display 118 Function view in centre display 121 Moving apps and buttons in centre display 123 Symbols in the centre display's status bar 123 Keyboard in centre display 125 Changing keyboard language in centre display 128 Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display 128 Changing the appearance in the centre display 130 Switching off and changing the volume of the system sound in the centre display 130 Changing system units 131 Changing system language 131 131 Application menu in driver display 102 Handling the application menu in the driver display 103 Other settings in the centre display's top view Messages in the driver display 104 Open contextual setup in the centre display 132 Managing messages in the driver display 105 106 Resetting user data for change of ownership 133 Handling a message saved from the driver display Resetting settings in the centre display 133 3 LIGHTING 134 Lighting control 150 Windows, glass and mirrors 164 Driver profiles 135 151 136 Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds 164 Selecting driver profile Adjusting light functions via the centre display Renaming a driver profile 136 Position lamps 151 Reset sequence for pinch protection 165 Protect driver profile 137 Daytime running lights 152 Power windows 165 Linking remote control key to driver profile 137 Dipped beam 153 Operating power windows 166 Using main beam 153 Using the sun blind* 167 167 Resetting settings in the driver profiles 139 Active main beam 154 Rearview and door mirrors Message in centre display 139 Using direction indicators 155 Adjusting rearview mirror dimming 168 Managing messages in the centre display 140 Active bending lights* 156 Angling the door mirrors 169 Handling a message saved from the centre display 140 Rear fog lamp 157 Panorama roof* 170 Head-up display* 141 Brake lights 157 Operating the panorama roof* 171 Activating and deactivating the headup display* 143 Emergency brake lights 158 174 Hazard warning flashers 158 Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's* sun blind Settings for head-up display* 143 Using home safe lighting 159 Wiper blades and washer fluid 174 Voice recognition 144 Approach light duration 159 Using windscreen wipers 175 Using voice recognition 145 Interior lighting 159 Using the rain sensor 176 Controlling a telephone with voice recognition 146 Adjusting interior lighting 161 Using the rain sensor's memory function 177 Voice control of radio and media 147 Using the rear window wiper and washer 178 148 Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing 179 Settings for voice recognition 4 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS Table showing centre display settings Using windscreen and headlamp washers 177 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL CLIMATE Manual front seat 182 Power* front seat 183 Lowering backrests in the third seat row* 198 Steering wheel controls and horn 199 Steering lock 199 Adjusting the steering wheel 200 Climate 202 Climate zones 202 Climate control - sensors 202 Perceived temperature 203 Controlling climate control with voice recognition 203 Adjusting the power* front seat 183 Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* 184 Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* 185 Air quality Massage settings* in the front seat 204 186 Clean Zone* 205 Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat 187 Clean Zone Interior Package* 206 Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat 188 Interior Air Quality System* 206 207 Adjusting the side support* in the front seat 189 Activating and deactivating the air quality sensor* Passenger compartment filter 207 Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat 189 Air distribution 207 Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* 191 Changing air distribution 208 Opening, closing and aiming the air vents 209 Table of air distribution options 210 Climate controls 213 Lowering backrests in the second seat row 192 Adjusting the head restraints in the second seat row 194 Activating and deactivating heated front seat* 215 Adjusting the seat longitudinally in the second seat row* 195 Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated front seat* 216 Adjusting the backrest inclination in the second seat row 196 Activating and deactivating heated rear seat* 216 Getting in/out of the third* seat row 197 Activating and deactivating ventilated front seat* 217 5 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Activating and deactivating the heated steering wheel* 218 Parking climate 229 Lock confirmation 244 Preconditioning 229 Lock indication setting Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated steering wheel* 218 245 Start and switch off preconditioning 230 Remote control key 245 Preconditioning time setting 231 247 219 Adding and editing time setting for preconditioning 232 Locking and unlocking with the remote control key Activating and deactivating time setting for air recirculation 220 233 Settings for remotely controlled and inside unlocking 248 Activating and deactivating time setting for preconditioning Activating and deactivating max defroster 220 234 Unlocking the tailgate with the remote control key 249 Activating and deactivating the heated windscreen* Removing time setting for preconditioning Remote control key range 221 249 Climate comfort when parking 234 250 222 Starting and switching off climate comfort when parking 235 Replacing the battery in the remote control key Ordering more remote control keys 253 Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors 222 Symbols and messages for parking climate control 236 Red Key - restricted remote control key* 254 223 238 254 Activating and deactivating automatic starting of the heated rear window and door mirrors Heater Settings for Red Key* Parking heater 239 Detachable key blade 255 223 240 257 Regulating fan level for front seat Additional heater Locking and unlocking with the detachable key blade Regulating fan level for rear seat 224 Activating and deactivating automatic start of auxiliary heater 241 Immobiliser 258 Regulating temperature for front seat 225 Type approval for the remote control key system 259 Regulating temperature for rear seat 226 Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* 268 Synchronising temperature 227 Keyless locking and unlocking* 269 Activating and deactivating air conditioning 228 Settings for Keyless entry* 270 Activating and deactivating climate for the third row of seats* 228 Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* 271 Antenna locations for the start and lock systems 271 Activating auto climate control Activating and deactivating air recirculation Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated windscreen* 6 218 DRIVER SUPPORT Locking and unlocking from inside the car 272 Unlocking the tailgate from the inside of the car 273 Activating and deactivating child safety locks 274 Automatic locking when driving 275 Driving support systems 290 Speed-dependent steering force 290 Reactivating cruise control from standby mode 306 Electronic stability control 291 Deactivating cruise control 307 Distance Warning* Electronic Stability Control in sport mode 292 308 Activating/deactivating Distance warning Activating/deactivating sport mode for Electronic Stability Control 293 309 Limitations of Distance Warning Symbols and messages for electronic stability control 309 294 Adaptive cruise control* 310 Stability system 296 Controls and display view for adaptive cruise control* 312 Activating and starting adaptive cruise control* 312 Deactivating/reactivating adaptive cruise control* 313 Opening and closing the power*operated tailgate 276 Programming maximum opening for power operated tailgate* 279 Speed limiter 296 Opening and closing the tailgate with foot movement* 279 Activating and starting the Speed Limiter 297 Private locking 281 Deactivate the speed limiter and set it in standby mode 298 Activating and deactivating private locking 282 Reactivating the speed limiter from standby mode 298 Limitations for adaptive cruise control* 315 315 Alarm* 283 Deactivating the speed limiter 299 Change between cruise control and adaptive cruise control* Activating and deactivating alarms* 284 Limitations for speed limiter 300 317 Reduced alarm level* 286 Automatic speed limiter 300 Symbols and messages for adaptive cruise control* Double lock* 286 301 Pilot Assist 319 Temporarily* deactivating double locks 287 Activate/deactivate Automatic Speed Limiter Controls and display view for Pilot Assist 321 Activating and starting Pilot Assist 322 Deactivating/activating Pilot Assist 323 Limitations of Pilot Assist 325 Changing the tolerance for the automatic speed limiter 302 Limitations for automatic speed limiter 303 Cruise control 303 Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist* 326 Activating and starting Cruise Control 305 Deactivate cruise control and set it in standby mode 328 305 Warning from driver support in the event of a collision risk Change of target with driver support 329 7 8 Set time interval for driver support 330 Limitations of Rear Collision Warning 360 Limitations of Driver Alert Control 378 Drive mode for driver support 331 BLIS* 361 Lane assistance 378 Set the stored speed for driver support 331 Activating or deactivating BLIS 362 Steering assistance with lane assistance 380 Automatic braking with driver support 332 Limitations of BLIS 363 Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid 380 Overtaking Assistance 333 Messages for BLIS 364 380 Use Overtaking Assistance 334 Cross Traffic Alert* 365 Select assistance option for lane assistance Radar unit 335 Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert 366 Limitations of Lane assistance 381 Type approval for radar device 336 Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert 366 Symbols and messages for lane assistance 382 Camera unit 340 Messages for Cross Traffic Alert 368 Limitations for camera and radar unit Road Sign Information* 369 Lane assistance symbols in the driver display 384 341 Recommended maintenance for camera and radar unit 345 Activating/deactivating Road Sign Information* 370 Steering assistance at risk of collision 385 386 City Safety™ 346 Road Sign Information and sign display* 371 Activating/deactivating Steering assistance in the event of a collision risk Parameters and subfunctions for City Safety 347 Road Sign Information and Sensus Navigation* 373 Steering assistance level in the event of a run-off risk 386 Setting the warning distance for City Safety 349 Road Sign Information with speed warning and settings* 373 Steering assistance upon risk of run-off 387 388 Detection of obstacles with City Safety 350 374 City Safety in cross traffic 352 Activating/deactivating Speed warning in Road Sign Information Steering assistance upon risk of head-on collision 375 Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end collision* 389 Road Sign Information with Speed Camera Information* 375 Limitations for steering assistance at risk of collision 390 Limitations of Road Sign Information* Symbols and messages for steering assistance upon risk of collision 391 Limitations for City Safety in cross traffic 353 City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are prevented 354 City Safety brakes for oncoming vehicles 355 Driver Alert Control 376 Limitations of City Safety 356 Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control 377 Park Assist* 392 Messages for City Safety 359 378 360 Park Assist Pilot front, rear and along the sides* 393 Rear Collision Warning Select rest stop guidance in the event of a warning from Driver Alert Control HYBRID INFORMATION STARTING AND DRIVING Activating/deactivating Park Assist Pilot* 394 General information about Twin Engine 416 Starting the car 438 Limitations of Parking assistance 395 Charging the hybrid battery 417 Switching off the car 440 Symbols and messages for Park Assist Pilot 396 Charging current 418 Ignition positions 440 Park assist camera* 397 Charging cable 419 Selecting ignition mode 441 Parking camera views* 398 Ground fault breaker in the charging cable 420 Alcohol lock* 442 Park assist lines for parking camera* 400 421 Bypass of the alcohol lock* 442 Sensor fields from Park Assist Pilot for parking camera 402 Temperature monitoring of the charging cable 443 422 Starting the park assist camera Brake functions 403 Opening and closing the hatch for the charging input socket Before starting the engine with the alcohol lock 443 Symbols and messages for Park assist camera 404 423 Foot brake 444 425 445 Park Assist Pilot* 405 Charging status in the car's charging input socket Brake assistance Braking on wet roads 446 Parking variants with Park Assist Pilot* 406 Charging status in the charging cable's control unit 427 Braking on gritted roads 446 Parking with Park Assist Pilot* 407 Charging status in the car's driver display 430 Brake system maintenance 446 Leaving parallel parking with Park Assist Pilot* 409 Stop charging of hybrid battery 432 Parking brake 447 410 Symbols and messages relating to Twin Engine in the driver display 434 447 Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* Activating and deactivating the parking brake Messages for Park Assist Pilot* 413 Long-term storage of vehicles with hybrid batteries 436 Automatic parking brake activation setting 449 Parking on a hill 449 In the event of a fault in the parking brake 449 Automatic braking when stationary 450 Activating and deactivating the automatic brake at a standstill 451 Help when starting on a hill 451 Start charging the hybrid battery 9 Auto braking after a collision 452 Gearbox 452 Factors that affect range when running on electricity 474 Gear positions for automatic gearbox 453 Hold and Charge function 475 Changing gear with steering wheel paddles* 455 Preparations for a long trip 476 Winter driving 476 Gear selector inhibitor 456 Driving in water 477 Kick-down function 457 Opening and closing the fuel filler flap 478 Gear shift indicator 457 Filling fuel 479 All-wheel drive 458 Handling of fuel 480 Drive systems 458 Petrol 481 Starting and stopping the combustion engine in Twin Engine 459 Petrol particle filter 482 Drive modes 460 Overheating in the engine and drive system 483 Changing drive mode 464 Overloading the starter battery 484 Energy distribution in hybrid drive using map data* 465 Using jump starting with another battery 484 Level control* and shock absorption 466 Towbar* 486 Settings for level control* 469 Specifications for towbar* 487 Low speed control 469 Activating and deactivating lowspeed driving using a function button 470 487 489 Trailer stability assist* 491 492 471 Checking trailer lamps Activating and deactivating hill descent control with the function button 472 Towbar-mounted bicycle rack* 493 Towing 494 Economical driving 472 Fitting and removing the towing eye 495 Recovery 496 Hill descent control 10 Extendable and retractable towbar* Driving with a trailer HomeLink®* Programming 496 HomeLink®* 497 Using HomeLink®* 499 Type approval for HomeLink®* 500 Compass* 500 Activating and deactivating the compass* 500 Calibrating the compass* 501 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Sound, media and Internet 504 Playing back DivX® Audio settings 504 Settings for video 521 Sound experience* 505 Media via Bluetooth® Apps 506 Downloading apps 507 Updating apps Switch between Bluetooth-connected phones 534 521 Removing devices connected to Bluetooth 535 Connecting a device via Bluetooth® 521 Managing phone calls 535 Media via USB port 522 Managing text messages 536 508 Connecting a device via USB port 522 Settings for text messages 537 Deleting apps 508 Technical specifications for USB devices 523 Managing the phone book 537 Radio 509 Compatible media formats 523 Settings for phone 538 Start radio 509 Apple® CarPlay®* 524 Settings for Bluetooth devices 539 Changing radio band and radio station 510 525 Internet-connected car* 539 Searching for radio stations Using Apple® CarPlay®* 511 Setting radio favourites 526 540 511 Connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-enabled phone Settings for radio 512 541 RDS radio 513 Connect the car to the Internet via a phone (Wi-Fi) Digital radio* 514 Connect the car to the Internet via car modem (SIM card) 541 Settings for car modem* 542 543 Settings for Apple® Tips for using 520 CarPlay®* Apple® CarPlay®* 527 Android Auto* 528 Using Android Auto* 528 Settings for Android Auto* 529 Tips for using Android Auto* 530 Phone 530 Sharing Internet access from the car via a Wi-Fi hotspot Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time 531 No or poor Internet connection 544 533 Remove Wi-Fi network 544 Wi-Fi technologies and security 545 545 Link between FM and digital radio* 515 Media player 515 Media playback 516 Controlling and changing media 517 Searching media 518 Gracenote® 519 Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth automatically CD player* 519 534 User terms and conditions and data sharing Video Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth manually 520 534 545 520 Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone Activating and deactivating data sharing Playing a video Storage space on hard disk 546 11 WHEELS AND TYRES License agreement for audio and media 12 547 Tyres 558 Emergency puncture repair kit 577 Dimension designation for tyre 559 Using a puncture repair kit 578 Dimension designation for wheel rim 560 581 Tyres' rotation direction 561 Inflating tyres with the compressor from the puncture repair kit Tread wear indicators on the tyres 561 Checking tyre pressure 562 Adjusting tyre pressure 562 Recommended tyre pressure 563 Tyre pressure monitoring system* 564 Saving a new tyre pressure in the monitoring system* 565 See tyre pressure status in the centre display* 567 Action in the event of warning for low tyre pressure 568 When changing wheels 569 Tool kit 569 Jack* 569 Wheel bolts 570 Removing a wheel 571 Fitting the wheels 573 Spare wheel* 574 Handling the spare wheel 575 Winter tyres 575 Snow chains 576 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Volvo service programme 604 Fuses in engine compartment 628 Data transfer between car and workshop via Wi-Fi 604 Fuses under glovebox 632 Download Center 605 Fuses in cargo area 635 Managing system updates via the Download Centre 605 Cleaning the interior 639 Cleaning the centre display 639 606 Cleaning the head up display* 640 Book service and repair 607 Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining 641 Sending car information to a workshop 608 Cleaning the seatbelts 641 610 Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats 641 612 Cleaning leather upholstery 642 Head up display when replacing the windscreen* 612 Cleaning the leather steering wheel 643 643 594 Opening and closing the bonnet 613 Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts 594 Engine compartment overview 614 Cleaning the exterior 644 597 Engine oil Polishing and waxing 644 Fitting and removing the safety net* 598 Checking and filling with engine oil Handwashing 645 First aid kit* 600 Topping up coolant Automatic car wash 646 600 Bulb replacement High-pressure washing 647 Cleaning the wiper blades 647 Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components 648 Cleaning wheel rims 649 Rustproofing 649 Car paintwork 650 Touching up minor paintwork damage 650 Passenger compartment interior 584 Tunnel console 585 Electrical sockets 586 Using electrical sockets 588 Using the glovebox 589 Sun visors 590 Cargo area 590 Recommendations for loading 591 Roof load and loading on load carriers 592 Bag hooks 593 Load retaining eyelets 593 Fitting and removing cargo cover* Operating cargo cover* Fitting and removing safety grilles* Warning triangle Car status Raise the car Servicing the climate control system Starter battery 615 616 617 619 620 Hybrid battery 624 Symbols on the batteries 625 Battery recycle 625 Fuses and central electrical units 626 Replacing a fuse 626 13 SPECIFICATIONS 14 ALPHABETICAL INDEX Colour codes 651 Type designations 658 Replacing the wiper blade, rear window 652 Dimensions 661 Replacing windscreen wiper blades 653 Weights 663 Wiper blades in service position 654 Towing capacity and towball load 664 Filling washer fluid 655 Engine specifications 666 Engine oil — specifications 667 Adverse driving conditions for engine oil 668 Coolant — specifications 669 Transmission fluid — specifications 669 Brake fluid — specifications 669 Fuel tank - volume 670 Air conditioning — specifications 670 Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions 672 Approved wheel and tyre sizes 674 Minimum permitted tyre load index and speed rating for tyres 675 Approved tyre pressures 676 Alphabetical Index 677 OWNER'S INFORMATION OWNER'S INFORMATION Owner information The car's centre display1 Owner's information is available in several different product formats, both digital and printed. The owner's manual is available in the car's centre display, as a mobile app and on the Volvo Cars support site. There is a Quick Guide and a supplement to the owner's manual available in the glovebox, with specifications and fuse information, amongst other things. A printed owner's manual can be ordered. In the centre display, drag down the top view and tap on Owner's manual. Available here are options for visual navigation with exterior and interior images of the car. The information is searchable and is also divided into categories. Mobile app In App Store or Google Play, search for "Volvo Manual", download the app to your smartphone or tablet and select the car. Available in the app are video tutorials and options for visual navigation with exterior and interior images of the car. It is easy to navigate between the different sections in the owner's manual and the content is searchable. Volvo Cars support site Go to support.volvocars.com and select your country. Here you can find owner's manuals, both online and in PDF format. On the Volvo Cars support site there are also video tutorials and further information and help regarding your Volvo and your car ownership. The page is available for most markets. 1A 16 complete printed manual is included with the car for markets without owner's manual in the centre display. Printed information There is a supplement to the owner's manual1 in the glovebox that contains information on fuses and specifications, as well as a summary of important and practical information. There is also a Quick Guide available in printed format that helps you to get started with the most commonly used functions in the car. Depending on equipment level selected, market, etc. additional owner's information may also be available in printed format in the car. A printed owner's manual and associated supplement can be ordered. Contact a Volvo dealer to order. IMPORTANT The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven safely in traffic and that applicable laws and regulations are followed. It is also important that the car is maintained and handled in accordance with Volvo's recommendations in the owner's information. If there should be a difference between the information in the centre display and the printed information then it is always the printed information that applies. OWNER'S INFORMATION NOTE Changing the language in the centre display may mean that some owner's information is not compliant with national or local laws and regulations. Do not switch to a language that is difficult to understand as this may make it difficult to find your way back through the screen structure. Related information • • • • Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17) Owner's Manual in mobile devices (p. 20) Volvo Cars support site (p. 21) Owner's manual in centre display A digital2 version of the owner's manual is available in the car's centre display. The digital owner's manual can be accessed from the top view, and in some cases the contextual owner's manual can also be accessed from the top view. To open the owner's manual - drag down the top view in the centre display and tap on Owner's manual. The information in the owner's manual can be accessed directly via the owner's manual homepage or its top menu. NOTE The digital owner's manual is not available while driving. Owner's manual Reading the owner's manual (p. 21) Top view with button for owner's manual. 2 Applies for most markets. }} 17 OWNER'S INFORMATION || Contextual owner's manual Related information • Navigate in the owner's manual in the centre display (p. 18) • Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 114) • Downloading apps (p. 507) Navigate in the owner's manual in the centre display The digital owner's manual can be accessed from the centre display top view in the car. The content is searchable and it is easy to navigate between different sections. Top view with button for contextual owner's manual. The contextual owner's manual is a shortcut to an article in the owner's manual that describes the active function shown on the screen. When the contextual owner's manual is available, it is shown to the right of Owner's manual in the top view. Tapping on the contextual owner's manual therefore opens an article in the owner's manual that is related to the content that is shown on the screen. E.g. tap on Navigation Manual – an article that is related to navigation opens. This only applies to some of the apps in the car. For downloaded third party apps, for example, it is not possible to access app-specific articles. 18 The owner's manual is accessed from the top view. – To open the owner's manual - drag down the top view in the centre display and tap on Owner's manual. There is a range of different options for finding information in the owner's manual. The options can be accessed from the owner's manual homepage and from the top menu. OWNER'S INFORMATION Opening the menu in the top menu – Press in the upper list in the owner's manual. > A menu with different options for finding information is opened: Homepage Tap on the symbol to go back to the start page in the owner's manual. Categories The articles in the owner's manual are structured into main categories and subcategories. The same article can be found in several appropriate categories so that it can be found more easily. 1. Quick Guide Press the symbol to access a page with links to a selection of articles that can be particularly useful to read in order to get to know the most common functions of the car. The articles can also be accessed via categories, but are collected here for quick access. Tap on an article in order to read it in its entirety. Hotspots for exterior and interior Exterior and interior overview images of the car. Different parts are designated with hotspots that lead to articles about those parts of the car. Tap on a main category ( ). > A list of subcategories ( ) and articles ( ) is shown. 3. Tap on an article to open it. To go back, press the back arrow. Tap on a hotspot. > The title of the article about the area is shown. 3. Tap on the title to open the article. To go back, press the back arrow. Favourites Press the symbol to access the articles saved as favourites. Tap on an article in order to read it in its entirety. Saving or deleting articles as favourites Save an article as favourite by pressing at the top right when an article is open. When an article has been saved as a favourite the star is filled in: . To remove an article as a favourite, press the star again in the current article. Press Categories. > The main categories are shown in a list. 2. 2. Video 1. Press Exterior or Interior. > Exterior or interior images are shown with so-called hotspots in place. The hotspot leads to articles about the corresponding part of the car. Swipe horizontally over the screen to browse among the images. Press the symbol to view brief instruction videos for various functions in the car. }} 19 OWNER'S INFORMATION || Owner's Manual in mobile devices Information Tap on the symbol to obtain information about which version of the owner's manual is available in the car as well as other useful information. The owner's manual is available as a mobile app3 from both the App Store and Google Play. The app is adapted for smartphones and tablets. in the owner's manual and the content is searchable. Using the search function in the top menu 1. in the top menu of the owner's Tap on manual. A keyboard appears in the lower part of the screen. 2. Type in a keyword, such as "seatbelt". > Suggestions for articles and categories are shown while letters are being entered. 3. Tap on the article or category to access it. Related information • • • Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17) Keyboard in centre display (p. 125) Reading the owner's manual (p. 21) The owner's manual can be downloaded as a mobile app from the App Store or Google Play. The QR code provided here takes you directly to the app. Alternatively, you can search for "Volvo manual" in the App Store or Google Play. The app contains a video along with exterior and interior images where different parts of the car are highlighted with so-called hotspots, which lead to articles about the area in question. It is easy to navigate between the different sections 3 20 For certain mobile devices. The mobile app is available from both the App Store and Google Play. Related information • Reading the owner's manual (p. 21) OWNER'S INFORMATION Volvo Cars support site More information on your car is available on the Volvo Cars website and support site. ments and warranties, amongst other things. Here there is also information about accessories and software adapted for your car model. Support on the Internet Related information Go to support.volvocars.com to visit the site. The support site is available for most markets. It contains support for functions such as webbased services and functions, Volvo On Call*, the navigation system* and apps. Videos and stepby-step instructions explain different procedures, e.g. how to connect the car to the Internet via a mobile phone. Downloadable information Maps For cars equipped with Sensus Navigation there is the facility to download maps from the support page. Owner's manuals as PDF Owner's manuals are available for download in PDF format. Select car model and model year to download the manual as required. Contact The support site contains contact details to customer support and your nearest Volvo retailer. Log in to Volvo Cars website Create a personal Volvo ID and log in to www.volvocars.com. When you have logged in it is possible to get an overview of service, agree- • Volvo ID (p. 26) Reading the owner's manual A good way of getting to know your new car is to read the owner's manual, ideally before your first journey. Reading the owner's manual is a good way to become familiar with new functions, get advice on how best to handle the car in different situations and learn how to make the best use of all the car's features. Please pay attention to the safety instructions contained in the owner's manual. The intention of this owner's information is to explain all possible functions, options and accessories included in a Volvo vehicle. It is not intended as an indication or guarantee that all of these features, functions and options are included in every vehicle. Some terminology used may not exactly match terminology used in sales, marketing and advertising materials. Development work is constantly underway in order to improve our product. Modifications may mean that information, descriptions and illustrations in the owner's manual differ from the equipment in the car. We reserve the right to make modifications without prior notice. Do not remove this manual from the car - if problems should arise then the necessary information about where and how to seek professional help will be missing. © Volvo Car Corporation }} * Option/accessory. 21 OWNER'S INFORMATION || Options/accessories Decals In addition to standard equipment, the owner's manual also describes options (factory fitted equipment) and certain accessories (retrofitted extra equipment). The car contains different types of decal which are designed to convey important information in a simple and clear manner. The decals in the car have the following descending degree of importance for the warning/information. All, at the time of publication known, options and accessories are marked with an asterisk: *. Risk of property damage Warning of personal injury The equipment described in the owner's manual is not available in all cars - they have different equipment depending on adaptations for the needs of different markets and national or local laws and regulations. In the event of uncertainty over what is standard or an option/accessory, contact a Volvo dealer. White ISO symbols and white text/image on black or blue warning field and message field. Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if the warning is ignored, may result in damage to property. Special texts WARNING Warning texts appear if there is a risk of injury. IMPORTANT "Important" texts appear if there is a risk of damage. Black ISO symbols on yellow warning field, white text/image on black message field. Used to indicate the presence of danger which, if the warning is ignored, may result in serious personal injury or fatality. NOTE NOTE texts give advice or tips that facilitate the use of e.g. features and functions. 22 * Option/accessory. OWNER'S INFORMATION Information car's appearance depending on equipment level and market. The owner's manual and the environment Related information The Owner's Manual is printed on paper originating from controlled forests. • • • Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17) Owner's Manual in mobile devices (p. 20) Volvo Cars support site (p. 21) The Forest Stewardship Council (FSC)® symbol shows that the paper pulp in a printed owner's manual comes from FSC®-certified forests or other controlled sources. White ISO symbols and white text/image on black message field. NOTE It is not intended that the decals illustrated in the owner's manual should be exact replicas of those in the car. They are included to show their approximate appearance and location in the car. The information that applies to your particular car is available on the respective decals for your car. Related information • Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure (p. 28) Illustrations and video clips Illustrations and video clips used in the owner's manual are sometimes schematic and are intended to provide an overall picture or example of a certain function. They may deviate from the 23 YOUR VOLVO YOUR VOLVO Volvo ID Volvo ID is a personal ID that gives access to a wide range of services via a single username and password. NOTE The services available may vary over time and depend on equipment level and market. Examples of services: • Volvo On Call app* – check the car with your phone. For example, you can check fuel level, show the nearest petrol station and lock the car remotely. • Send to Car – send addresses from map services on the Web, directly to the car. • Book service and repair – register your preferred workshop/dealer on volvocars.com and book service directly from the car. When a Volvo ID is registered in the car, several services will be made available. Several Volvo IDs can be used for the same car and several cars can even be connected to the same Volvo ID. Related information • • Creating and registering a Volvo ID (p. 26) Book service and repair (p. 607) Creating and registering a Volvo ID It is possible to create a Volvo ID in different ways. If the Volvo ID is created at volvocars.com or with Volvo On Call app2, the Volvo ID must also be registered to the car to enable use of the various Volvo ID services. Create a Volvo ID with the Volvo ID app 1. Download the Volvo ID app from Download Centre in the centre display's app view. 2. Start the app and register a personal email address. 3. Follow the instructions that are automatically sent to the specified email address. > A Volvo ID has now been created and automatically registered to the car. Volvo ID services can now be used. NOTE If the username/password for a service (e.g. Volvo On Call) is changed, then it is also changed automatically for other services. Volvo ID is created from the car, volvocars.com or the Volvo On Call app1. 1 2 26 If you have Volvo On Call*. Only applies to certain markets. * Option/accessory. YOUR VOLVO Create a Volvo ID on the Volvo Cars website 1. Go into www.volvocars.com and log in3 using the icon at the top right. Select Create Volvo ID. Registering your Volvo ID to the car 2. Enter a personal email address. 1. 3. Follow the instructions that are automatically sent to the specified email address. > A Volvo ID has now been created. Read below to learn how to register the ID to the car. Create a Volvo ID with the Volvo On Call app4 1. Download the latest version of the Volvo On Call app from a smartphone, via e.g. App Store, Windows Phone or Google Play. 2. Choose to create a Volvo ID from the app's start page and enter a personal email address. 3. Follow the instructions that are automatically sent to the specified email address. > A Volvo ID has now been created. Read below to learn how to register the ID to the car. If you created your Volvo ID via the web or the Volvo On Call app, register it to your car as follows: If not done already, download the Volvo ID app from Download Centre in the centre display's app view. NOTE To download apps, the car must be connected to the Internet. 2. Start the app and enter your Volvo ID/your email address. 3. Follow the instructions that are automatically sent to the email address linked to your Volvo ID. > Your Volvo ID is now registered to the car. Volvo ID services can now be used. Related information • • • • Volvo ID (p. 26) Downloading apps (p. 507) Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 605) Internet-connected car* (p. 539) 3 Available on certain markets. 4 Cars with Volvo On Call*. * Option/accessory. 27 YOUR VOLVO Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure Volvo Car Corporation is constantly working on the development of safer and more efficient Environmental care is one of Volvo Cars’ core values and influences all operations. The environmental work is based on the whole life cycle of the car and takes into account the environmental impact it has, from design to scrapping and recycling. Volvo Cars' basic principle is that every new product developed must have less impact on the environment than the product it replaces. Volvo's environmental management work has resulted in the development of more effective and less polluting drivelines Drive-E. Personal environment is also important to Volvo - the air 28 products and solutions in order to reduce the negative impact on the environment. inside a Volvo is, for example, cleaner than the air outside thanks to the climate control system. Your Volvo complies with stringent international environmental standards. All Volvo's manufacturing units must be ISO 14001 certified, and this supports a systematic approach to the operation's environmental issues, which leads to continuous improvement with reduced environmental impact. Holding the ISO certificate also means that environmental laws and regulations in force are complied with. Volvo also requires that its partners must also meet these requirements. Fuel consumption Since a large part of a car's total environmental impact stems from its use, the emphasis of Volvo Cars' environmental work is on reducing fuel consumption, carbon dioxide emissions and other air pollutants. Volvo cars have competitive fuel consumption in each of their respective classes. Lower fuel consumption generally results in lower emission of the greenhouse gas, carbon dioxide. YOUR VOLVO Contributing to a better environment An energy-efficient and fuel-efficient car not only contributes to a reduced impact on the environment, but also means reduced costs for the owner of the car. As the driver, it is easy to reduce fuel consumption and thereby save money and contribute to a better environment here is some advice: • Plan for an effective average speed. Speeds above approx. 80 km/h (approx. 50 mph) and below 50 km/h (approx. 30 mph) lead to increased energy consumption. Efficient emission control Your Volvo is manufactured following the concept "Clean inside and out" – a concept that encompasses a clean interior environment as well as highly efficient emission control. In many cases the exhaust emissions are well below the applicable standards. Clean air in the passenger compartment An air filter helps prevent dust and pollen entering the passenger compartment via the air intake. • Follow the Service and Warranty Booklet's recommended intervals for service and maintenance of the car. The Interior Air Quality System (IAQS)* ensures that the incoming air is cleaner than the air in the traffic outside. • Avoid letting the engine idle - switch off the engine when stationary for longer periods. Pay attention to local regulations. • Plan the journey - a lot of unnecessary stops and uneven speed contribute to increased fuel consumption. • Use preconditioning - it improves the range of the hybrid battery and reduces the energy requirement while driving. The system cleans the air in the passenger compartment from contaminants such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and ground-level ozone. If the outside air is contaminated then the air intake is closed and the air is recirculated. Such a situation may arise in heavy traffic, queues and tunnels for example. Also remember to always dispose of environmentally hazardous waste, such as batteries and oil, in an environmentally safe manner. Consult a workshop in the event of uncertainty about how this type of waste should be discarded - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP)*, which also includes a function that allows the fan to start when the car is unlocked with the remote control key. Interior The material used in the interior of a Volvo is carefully selected and has been tested in order to be pleasant and comfortable. Some of the details are hand-made, such as the seams of the steer- ing wheel that are sewn by hand. The interior is monitored in order not to emit strong odours or substances that cause discomfort in the event of e.g. high heat and bright light. Volvo workshops and the environment Regular maintenance creates the conditions for a long service life and low fuel consumption for your car. In this way you also contribute to a cleaner environment. When Volvo's workshops are entrusted with the service and maintenance of your car it becomes part of Volvo's system. Volvo makes clear demands regarding the way in which workshop premises shall be designed in order to prevent spills and discharges into the environment. The workshop staff have the knowledge and the tools required to guarantee good environmental care. Recycling Since Volvo works from a life cycle perspective, it is also important that the car is recycled in an environmentally sound manner. Almost all of the car can be recycled. The last owner of the car is therefore requested to contact a retailer for referral to a certified/approved recycling facility. Related information • Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 672) • • Economical driving (p. 472) Start and switch off preconditioning (p. 230) }} * Option/accessory. 29 YOUR VOLVO || 30 • The owner's manual and the environment (p. 23) • Air quality (p. 204) YOUR VOLVO IntelliSafe – driver support and safety IntelliSafe is the Volvo Cars concept for car safety. IntelliSafe comprises a number of systems5, whose purpose is to make a car journey safer, to prevent injuries and to protect passengers and other road users. WARNING The functions are supplementary aids - they cannot handle all situations in all conditions. The driver always bears responsibility that the vehicle is driven safely and that applicable road traffic rules and regulations are followed. Support With the aim of assisting the driver to drive the car in a safer way, IntelliSafe has the following functions. • • • • • • • • 5 6 Active main beam Tunnel detection Pilot Assist Cross Traffic Alert Blind Spot Information Park Assist* Park Assist Pilot* Park assist camera* • • • • • • • • • Road Sign Information* NOTE Electronic stability control Read the individual sections on each system in order to fully understand the functions and learn about important warnings. Roll Stability Control Speed limiter* Cruise control Adaptive cruise control* Rear Collision Warning Driver Alert Control All-wheel drive*6 Related information • • • Active main beam (p. 154) Safety (p. 42) Driving support systems (p. 290) Prevention With the aim of assisting the driver to avoid an accident, IntelliSafe has the following functions. • City Safety • Distance Warning* • Lane assistance • Collision Avoid. Assistance Protection With the aim of protecting the driver and passengers in certain situations in the event of an accident, IntelliSafe has the following collaborative functions. • • • Whiplash Protection System Seatbelts with seatbelt tensioners Airbags Some of the systems are fitted as standard, while others are options. This may vary depending on market, model year and car model. All Wheel Drive * Option/accessory. 31 YOUR VOLVO Sensus - online connectivity and entertainment Sensus makes it possible to use different types of apps and turn the car into a Wi-Fi hotspot. This is Sensus Sensus offers an intelligent interface and online connectivity with the digital world. An intuitive navigation structure makes it possible to receive relevant support, information and entertainment when it is necessary, without distracting the driver. Information when it is needed, where it is needed The different displays in the car provide information at the right time. The information is shown in different locations based on how it should be prioritised by the driver. Sensus covers all solutions in the car that are connected with entertainment, online connectivity, navigation* and the user interface between driver and car. It is Sensus that makes communication possible between you, the car and the outside world. 32 * Option/accessory. YOUR VOLVO Different types of information are shown in different displays depending on how the information should be prioritised. Head-up display* The head-up display shows selected information that the driver should deal with as soon as possible. Such information may, for example, include traffic warnings, speed information and navigation* information. Road Sign Information and incoming phone calls are also shown in the headup display. The display is operated via the righthand steering wheel keypad and via the centre display. Driver display The driver display shows information on speed and e.g. incoming calls or song tracks being }} * Option/accessory. 33 YOUR VOLVO || played. The display is operated via the two steering wheel keypads. Centre display Voice recognition system The voice recognition system can be used without the driver needing to take his/her hands off the steering wheel. The system can understand natural speech. Use voice recognition to, for example, play back a song, call someone, increase the temperature or read out a text message. Related information Many of the main functions of the car are controlled from the centre display, a touch screen which reacts to touch. The number of physical buttons and controls in the car is therefore minimal. The screen can even be operated while wearing gloves. • • • • • • Head-up display* (p. 141) Driver display (p. 83) Overview of centre display (p. 108) Voice recognition (p. 144) Internet-connected car* (p. 539) Sharing Internet access from the car via a Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 543) From here, for example, you can control the climate control system, the entertainment system and seat position*. The information that is shown in the centre display can be acted on by the driver or someone else in the car when the opportunity arises. 34 * Option/accessory. YOUR VOLVO Software updates Recording data So that you as a Volvo customer get the best experience of your car, Volvo continuously develops the systems in the cars and the services that you are offered. As part of Volvo's safety and quality assurance, certain information about the vehicle's operation, functionality and incidents are recorded in the car. You can update the software in your Volvo to the latest version when your car is serviced at an authorised Volvo dealer. The latest software update allows you to benefit from available improvements, including improvements from earlier software updates. This vehicle is equipped with an "Event Data Recorder" (EDR). Its primary purpose is to register and record data related to traffic accidents or collision-like situations, such as times when the airbag deploys or the vehicle strikes an obstacle in the road. The data is recorded in order to increase understanding of how vehicle systems work in these types of situations. The EDR is designed to record data related to vehicle dynamics and safety systems for a short time, usually 30 seconds or less. For more information about released updates and answers to frequently asked questions, please go to support.volvocars.com. NOTE Functionality after updating may vary depending on market, model, model year and options. Related information • Sensus - online connectivity and entertainment (p. 32) • Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 605) The EDR in this vehicle is designed to record data related to the following in the event of traffic accidents or collision-like situations: • • How the various systems in the car worked Whether the driver and passenger seatbelts were fastened/tensioned • The driver's use of the accelerator or brake pedal • The travel speed of the vehicle This information can help us better understand the circumstances in which traffic accidents, injuries and damage occur. The EDR only records data when a non-trivial collision situation occurs. The EDR does not record any data during normal driving conditions. Similarly, the system never registers who is driving the vehicle or the geographic location of the accident or near-miss situation. However, other parties, such as the police, could use the recorded data in combination with the type of personally identifiable information routinely collected after a traffic accident. Special equipment and access to either the vehicle or the EDR is required to be able to interpret the registered data. In addition to the EDR, the car is equipped with a number of computers designed to continually check and monitor the function of the car. They can record data during normal driving conditions, but in particular register faults affecting the vehicle's operation and functionality, or upon activation of the vehicle's driver support function (e.g. City Safety and the auto brake function). Some of the recorded data is required to enable service and maintenance technicians to diagnose and remedy any faults that occurred in the vehicle. The registered information is also needed to enable Volvo to satisfy legal requirements laid out in laws and by government authorities. Information registered in the vehicle is stored in its computer until the vehicle is serviced or repaired. In addition to the above, the registered information can be used in aggregate form for research and product development with the aim of continuously improving the safety and quality of Volvo cars. }} 35 YOUR VOLVO Volvo will not contribute to the above-described information being disclosed to third parties without the vehicle owner's consent. To comply with national legislation and regulations, Volvo may be forced to disclose information of this nature to the police or other authorities who may assert a legal right to access such. Special technical equipment which Volvo and workshops that have entered into agreements with Volvo have access to is required to be able to read and interpret the recorded data. Volvo is responsible that the information, which is transferred to Volvo during servicing and maintenance, is securely stored and managed and that its management complies with relevant legal requirements. For further information - contact a Volvo retailer. Terms & Conditions for Services Customer Privacy Policy Volvo offers services so that you can drive your Volvo as safely and as comfortably as possible. Volvo respects and safeguards the personal integrity of everyone visiting our website. These services include everything from assistance in emergencies to navigation and various maintenance services. This policy regards to the handling of customer data and personal information. The purpose is to give current, past and potential customers a general understanding of: Before using the services, it is important for you to read the Terms & Conditions for Services at support.volvocars.com. Related information • Customer Privacy Policy (p. 36) • • • • The circumstances in which we gather and process your personal data. The types of personal data we gather. The reason we gather your personal data. How we handle your personal data. This policy can be read in its entirety at support.volvocars.com. Related information 36 • User terms and conditions and data sharing (p. 545) • • Terms & Conditions for Services (p. 36) Recording data (p. 35) YOUR VOLVO Important information on accessories and auxiliary equipment WARNING The driver always bears the ultimate responsibility that the car is used safely and that laws and regulations in force are followed. The incorrect connection and installation of accessories and extra equipment can negatively affect the car's electronic system. We strongly recommend that Volvo owners only install Volvo approved original accessories, and that installation of accessories is only carried out by trained and qualified Volvo service technicians. Certain accessories only function when associated software is installed in the car's computer system. The equipment described in the owner's manual is not available in all cars - they have different equipment depending on adaptations for the needs of different markets and national or local laws and regulations. Options or accessories described in this manual are marked with an asterisk. In the event of uncertainty over what is standard or an option/ accessory, contact a Volvo retailer. It is also important that the car has maintenance and service according to Volvo's recommendations, the owner's information and the service and warranty booklet. If the on-board information differs from the printed owner's manual then the printed information always has precedence. Installation of accessories We strongly recommend that Volvo owners only install Volvo approved original accessories, and that installation of accessories is only carried out by trained and qualified Volvo service technicians. Certain accessories only function when associated software is installed in the car's computer system. • Volvo original accessories are tested to ensure that they function with the car systems for performance, safety and emissions control. In addition, a trained and qualified Volvo service technician knows where accessories may or may not be safely installed in your Volvo. Always seek the advice of a trained and qualified Volvo service technician before installing any accessories in or on your car. • Accessories that are not approved by Volvo may not have been specifically tested for use with your car. • Some of the car's performance or safety systems can be negatively affected if you install accessories that have not been tested by Volvo, or if you permit someone without experience of the car to install accessories. • Damage that is caused by accessories installed in a non-approved or incorrect way is not covered by any new car warranty. More warranty information can be found in the service and warranty booklet. Volvo does not accept Related information • • • Installation of accessories (p. 37) Connection of equipment to the car's diagnostic socket (p. 38) Reading the owner's manual (p. 21) }} 37 YOUR VOLVO any liability for deaths, personal injury or costs arising as a result of the installation of non-original accessories. || Related information • Important information on accessories and auxiliary equipment (p. 37) Connection of equipment to the car's diagnostic socket Incorrect connection and installation of software or diagnostic tools may have a negative effect on the car's electronic system. We strongly recommend that Volvo owners only install Volvo approved original accessories, and that installation of accessories is only carried out by trained and qualified Volvo service technicians. Certain accessories only function when associated software is installed in the car's computer system. Data link connector (On-board Diagnostic, OBDII) is under the instrument panel on the driver's side. 38 NOTE Volvo Cars accepts no liability for the consequences if unauthorised equipment is connected to the On-board Diagnostic socket (OBDII). This socket should only be used by trained and qualified Volvo service technicians. Related information • Important information on accessories and auxiliary equipment (p. 37) YOUR VOLVO Showing the car's identification number When contacting a Volvo dealer concerning your Volvo On Call subscription, for example, you will need the car's identification number (VIN7). 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Continue to System System Information Vehicle Identification Number. > The car's identification number is shown. Another way of finding the VIN is to look on the dashboard through the car's windscreen, on the first page of the service and warranty booklet or in the car's registration certificate. Driver distraction WARNING The driver is responsible for doing everything possible to ensure the safety of themselves, their passengers and other road users. Part of this responsibility is avoiding distractions such as carrying out an activity that is not related to operating the car in a driving environment. Your new Volvo is, or can be, equipped with content-rich entertainment and communications systems. This could be mobile phones with handsfree, navigation systems and audio systems with lots of functions. You may also have other portable electronic devices for your own convenience. Used correctly, in a safe way they can enrich the driving experience. If they are used in the wrong way they could distract you. We wish to give the following warnings regarding such systems, to indicate Volvo's concern for your safety. Never use a device or function in the car in such a way that it will distract you from the task of driving safely. Distractions can lead to serious accidents. Apart from these general warnings, we offer the following advice regarding the new functions that may be in the car: • Never use a hand-held mobile phone while driving. In some areas it is forbidden for the driver to use a mobile phone while the car is moving. • If the car is equipped with a navigation system you must only set and change the itinerary when the car is parked. • Never program the audio system while the car is moving. Program the radio's presets when the car is parked and then use the programmed presets for faster and simpler use of the radio. • Never use laptops or hand-held computers while the car is moving. Related information • Sound, media and Internet (p. 504) VIN is positioned in a similar place on all models. 7 Vehicle Identification Number 39 SAFETY SAFETY Safety WARNING The vehicle is equipped with several safety systems that work together to protect the vehicle's driver and passengers in the event of an accident. If the warning symbol remains illuminated or is switched on during driving and the message SRS airbag Service urgent Drive to workshop is shown in the driver display, it means that part of one of the safety systems does not have full functionality. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted as soon as possible. The car is equipped with a number of sensors that react in the event of an accident and activate different safety systems, such as different types of airbags and seatbelt tensioners. Depending on the specific accident situation, such as collisions at different angles, roll-over or driving off the road, the systems react in different ways to provide the best protection. It is important that the seatbelt is used correctly during pregnancy, and that pregnant drivers adjust their seating position. Seatbelt WARNING Never modify or repair the car's various safety systems yourself. Defective work in one of the systems can cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted. There are also mechanical safety systems such as Whiplash Protection System. The car is also constructed so that a large part of the force of a collision is distributed to beams, pillars, floor, roof and other parts of the body. If the specific warning symbol is broken then the general warning symbol is illuminated instead and the driver display shows the same message. The car's safety mode may be activated after a collision if an important function in the car has been damaged. 42 Safety during pregnancy Warning symbol in driver display Related information The warning symbol is illuminated in the driver display when the car's electrical system is set in ignition position II. The symbol is extinguished after approx. 6 seconds if the car's safety system is fault-free. • • • • • • Safety during pregnancy (p. 42) Seatbelts (p. 44) Airbags (p. 49) Whiplash Protection System (p. 43) Safety mode (p. 56) Child safety (p. 58) The diagonal section should wrap over the shoulder then be routed between the breasts and to the side of the abdomen. The lap section should lay flat over the thighs and as low as possible under the abdomen. – It must never be allowed to ride upward. Remove the slack from the seatbelt and ensure that it fits as close to the body as possible. In addition, check that there are no twists in the seatbelt. Seating position As the pregnancy progresses, pregnant drivers must adjust the seat and steering wheel such that they can easily maintain control of the vehi- SAFETY cle as they drive (which means that they must be able to easily operate the foot pedals and steering wheel). The aim should be to position the seat with as large a distance as possible between abdomen and steering wheel. Related information • • • • Safety (p. 42) Seatbelts (p. 44) Manual front seat (p. 182) Power* front seat (p. 183) Whiplash Protection System Whiplash Protection System (WHIPS) reduces the risk of whiplash injuries. The system consists of energy absorbing backrests and seat cushion, as well as a specially designed head restraint in the front seats. WHIPS is deployed in the event of a rear-end collision, where the angle and speed of the collision and the nature of the colliding vehicle all have an influence. WARNING Never modify or repair the seat or WHIPS yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted. If the front seats have been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the seats must be replaced. Some of the seats' protective properties may have been lost even if they do not appear damaged. When WHIPS is deployed, the front seat backrests are lowered backward and the seat cushions move downward to change the seating position of the driver and front seat passenger. Its movement helps to absorb some of the forces that can arise and cause whiplash. WARNING WHIPS is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt. Do not leave any objects on the floor behind or under the front seats or in the rear seat that may prevent WHIPS from functioning. }} * Option/accessory. 43 SAFETY || WARNING Do not squeeze rigid objects between the rear seat cushion and the front seat's backrest. If a backrest in the rear seat is lowered then any load must be secured to prevent it from sliding up to the front seat backrest in the event of a collision. WARNING If a backrest in the rear seat is lowered or a rear-facing child seat is used in the rear seat, the corresponding front seat must be moved forward so that it does not make contact with the lowered backrest or child seat. Seating position For optimum protection from WHIPS the driver and passenger must have the correct seating position and make sure that the system's function is not obstructed. Related information • • • • Safety (p. 42) Manual front seat (p. 182) Power* front seat (p. 183) Rear Collision Warning (p. 360) Seatbelts Heavy braking can have serious consequences if the seatbelts are not used. It is important that the seatbelt lies against the body so it can provide maximum protection. Do not lean the backrest too far back. The seatbelt is designed to protect in a normal seating position. WARNING Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt to hooks or other interior fittings, as this prevents the belt from tightening properly. WARNING The seatbelts and airbags interact. If a seatbelt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision. Set the correct seating position in the front seat before driving starts. Driver and front seat passenger should sit in the centre of the seat with as little space as possible between the head and the head restraint. WHIPS and child seats The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by WHIPS. 44 * Option/accessory. SAFETY WARNING Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted. If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective properties may have been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt must be type-approved and designed for installation at the same location as the replaced seatbelt. Related information • • • • Safety (p. 42) Seatbelt tensioner (p. 47) Putting on and taking off seatbelts (p. 45) Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 48) Putting on and taking off seatbelts Make sure that all passengers have fastened their seatbelts before starting to drive. Putting on seatbelts 1. Pull out the seatbelt slowly and make sure it is not twisted or damaged. Make sure that the seatbelt is correctly in the belt guide available for the second seat row's centre seat. 2. Lock the belt by inserting the locking tab in the intended buckle. > A loud "click" indicates that the belt has locked. WARNING Always insert the tongue of the seatbelt into the buckle on the correct side. The seatbelts and buckles would otherwise possibly not function as intended in the event of a collision. There is a risk of serous injury. NOTE The seatbelt is equipped with an inertia reel that is locked in the following situations: • • • • if the belt is extended too quickly. during braking and acceleration. if the car leans heavily. when driving in bends. }} 45 SAFETY || 3. In the front seats and in the outer seats in the second seat row the seatbelt can be adjusted for height. WARNING Each seatbelt is designed for only one person. WARNING Remember not to clip or hook the seatbelt to hooks or other interior fittings, as this prevents the belt from tightening properly. WARNING Do not make any damages on seatbelts nor insert any foreign objects into a buckle. The seatbelts and buckles would then possibly not function as intended in the event of a collision. There is a risk of serous injury. The seatbelt must pass over the shoulder (not down over the arm). 4. Press together the seat mounting and move the seatbelt up or down. Tension the hip strap over the lap by pulling the diagonal shoulder belt up towards the shoulder. Position the belt as high as possible without it chafing against your throat. Taking off seatbelts 1. Press the red button on the seatbelt buckle and then let the belt retract. 2. If the seatbelt does not retract fully, feed it in by hand so that it does not hang loose. Make sure that the seatbelt is correctly in the belt guide available for the second seat row's centre seat. Related information The hip strap must be positioned low down (not over the abdomen). 46 • • • Seatbelts (p. 44) Seatbelt tensioner (p. 47) Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 48) SAFETY Seatbelt tensioner The car is fitted with standard seatbelt tensioners and electric seatbelt tensioners that can tension the seatbelts in critical situations and collisions. sioner are restored automatically, but they can also be restored manually. City Safety™ (p. 346) Rear Collision Warning (p. 360) IMPORTANT If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger side will also be deactivated. Standard seatbelt tensioner All the seatbelts are equipped with a standard seatbelt tensioner. WARNING The seatbelt tensioner tensions the seatbelt in the event of a collision with sufficient force in order to more effectively restrain the occupant. Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted. Electric seatbelt tensioner If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective properties may have been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt must be type-approved and designed for installation at the same location as the replaced seatbelt. The driver and front passenger seatbelts are equipped with an electric seatbelt tensioner. The seatbelt tensioners work together and can be activated together with the driver support systems City Safety and Rear Collision Warning. In critical situations, such as panic braking, driving off the road (e.g. the car rolls into a ditch, lifts off the ground or hits something in the terrain), skidding, or risk of collision, the seatbelt can be tensioned by the seatbelt tensioner's electric motor. • • Related information The electric seatbelt tensioner helps to adjust the occupant to a better position, reducing the risk of striking the car's interior and improving the effect of safety systems, such as the car's airbags. • • • When the critical situation has come to an end, the seatbelt and the electric seatbelt preten- • Seatbelts (p. 44) Putting on and taking off seatbelts (p. 45) Resetting the electric seatbelt tensioner (p. 48) Activating and deactivating passenger airbag* (p. 52) * Option/accessory. 47 SAFETY Resetting the electric seatbelt tensioner The electric seatbelt tensioner is designed to be reset automatically, but the seatbelt tensioner can be reset manually if the belt remains extended. 1. Stop the car at a safe place. 2. Unfasten the seatbelt and then refasten it. > The seatbelt and electric seatbelt tensioner are reset. Door and seatbelt reminder Driver display graphics WARNING Visual reminder in the roof console. Never modify or repair the seatbelts yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted. If the seatbelt has been subjected to a major load, such as in conjunction with a collision, the entire seatbelt must be replaced. Some of the seatbelt's protective properties may have been lost even if the seatbelt does not appear damaged. The seatbelt must also be replaced if it shows signs of wear or damage. The new seatbelt must be type-approved and designed for installation at the same location as the replaced seatbelt. Related information • • 48 Seatbelt tensioner (p. 47) Seatbelts (p. 44) Seatbelt reminder The system reminds unbelted occupants to wear a seatbelt, and also warns about an open door, bonnet or lid. A visual reminder is given in the roof console and by means of the warning symbol in the driver display. Graphics in the driver display with different types of warnings. The warning colour on the door and tailgate is dependent on the vehicle's speed. The driver display's graphics show which seats in the car are occupied by belted and unbelted passengers. The same graphic also shows if the bonnet, tailgate, fuel filler flap or any door is open. The graphic can be acknowledged by pressing the O button on the right-hand steering wheel keypad. The acoustic reminder is dependent on speed, driving time and distance. The belt status of the driver and passengers is shown in the driver display graphics when a belt is buckled or unbuckled. Child seats are not covered by the seatbelt reminder system. Front seat A visual and acoustic reminder remind the driver and front seat passenger to use a seatbelt if either of them is not wearing one. SAFETY If the car is driven at a speed higher than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then the driver display's warning symbol illuminates. Rear seat The seatbelt reminder in the rear seat has two subfunctions: • • Provides information on which seatbelts are being used in the rear seat. The driver display's graphics are shown when the seatbelts are in use. Reminding that a seatbelt in the rear seat is unfastened during a journey by means of a visual and acoustic reminder. The reminder will cease once the seatbelt has been put on again. Any passenger not wearing a seatbelt behind the car's Lounge Console1 is reminded to put on their seatbelt by means of a visual and acoustic reminder when the rear door is closed. Reminder for doors, bonnet, tailgate and fuel filler flap If the bonnet, tailgate, fuel filler flap or a door is not closed properly, the driver display's graphics show what is open. Stop the car in a safe place as soon as possible and close the source of the warning. If the car is driven at a speed lower than approx. 10 km/h (6 mph) then the driver display's information symbol illuminates. 1 Available for XC90 Excellence Lounge only. Related information • • Seatbelts (p. 44) Putting on and taking off seatbelts (p. 45) Airbags The car is equipped with airbags and inflatable curtains for driver and passengers. NOTE The detectors react differently depending on the nature of the collision and whether or not the seatbelts are fastened. Applies to all belt positions. It is therefore possible that only one (or none) of the airbags may inflate in a collision. The detectors sense the force of the collision on the vehicle and the action is adapted accordingly so that none, one or more airbags are deployed. WARNING The airbag system's control module is located in the centre console. If the centre console is drenched with water or other liquid, disconnect the cables to the starter battery. Do not attempt to start the car since the airbags may deploy. Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo workshop. }} 49 SAFETY || Deployed airbags Driver airbags If any of the airbags have deployed, the following is recommended: As a supplement to the seatbelts, the car is equipped with steering wheel airbag and knee airbag on the driver's side. • Recovering the car. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not drive with deployed airbags. • Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo workshop to handle the replacement of components in the car's safety systems. • Always contact a doctor. To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and backs against the backrest. WARNING WARNING Never drive with deployed airbags. They can make steering difficult. Other safety systems may also be damaged. The smoke and dust created when the airbags are deployed can cause skin and eye irritation/injury after intensive exposure. In case of irritation, wash with cold water. The rapid deployment sequence and airbag fabric may cause friction and skin burns. Related information • • • • • 50 Safety (p. 42) Driver airbags (p. 50) Passenger airbag (p. 51) Side airbags (p. 55) Inflatable curtains (p. 55) WARNING The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted for repair. Defective work in the airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury. Steering wheel airbag and knee airbag on the driver's side in the front seat. In the event of a frontal collision, the airbags help to protect the head, neck, face and chest of the driver as well as the knees and legs. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the airbag/airbags is inflated. The airbag cushions the initial collision impact for the occupant. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. When this occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is completely normal. The entire process, including inflation and deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of a second. Steering wheel airbag location This airbag is fitted into the centre of the steering wheel. The steering wheel is marked AIRBAG. Knee airbag location The airbag is folded up in the lower part of the instrument panel on the driver's side. Its cover panel is marked AIRBAG. WARNING Do not place or attach any object on the top or front of the panel where the knee airbag is stowed. SAFETY Related information • • Airbags (p. 49) Passenger airbag (p. 51) Passenger airbag As a supplement to the seatbelts, the vehicle is equipped with an airbag on the passenger side in the front seat. WARNING The seatbelts and airbags interact. If the belt is not used or is used incorrectly, this may diminish the protection provided by the airbag in the event of a collision. To minimise the risk of injury if the airbag deploys, passengers must sit as upright as possible with their feet on the floor and backs against the backrest. WARNING Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted for repair. Defective work in the airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury. Front passenger airbag in front seat. In the event of a frontal collision, the airbag helps to protect the head, neck, face and chest of the passenger as well as the knees and legs. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the airbag is inflated. The airbag cushions the initial collision impact for the occupant. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. When this occurs, smoke escapes into the car. This is completely normal. The entire process, including inflation and deflation of the airbag, occurs within tenths of a second. Passenger airbag location The airbag is folded up into a compartment above the glovebox. Its cover panel is marked AIRBAG. WARNING Do not put objects in front of or above the dashboard where the passenger airbag is located. }} 51 SAFETY || Label for passenger airbag WARNING Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat. Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated. The passenger airbag can be deactivated if the car is equipped with a switch, Passenger Airbag Cut Off Switch (PACOS). Front-facing passengers (children and adults) must never sit on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is deactivated. The switch for the passenger airbag is located on the passenger end of the instrument panel and is accessible when the passenger door is open. Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury. Check that the switch is in the required position. Label on the passenger side's sun visor. Related information The warning label for the passenger airbag is positioned as shown above. • • • WARNING Activating and deactivating passenger airbag* Airbags (p. 49) Driver airbags (p. 50) Activating and deactivating passenger airbag* (p. 52) If the car is not equipped with a switch to activate/deactivate the passenger airbag, the airbag will always be activated. ON - the airbag is activated and all front-facing passengers (children and adults) can sit safely on the passenger seat. OFF - The airbag is deactivated and children in rear-facing child seats can sit safely on the passenger seat. 52 * Option/accessory. SAFETY WARNING Activating passenger airbag If the car is not equipped with a switch to activate/deactivate the passenger airbag, the airbag will always be activated. Pull the switch outward and turn from OFF to ON. > The driver display shows the message Passenger airbag on Please acknowledge. NOTE If the passenger airbag has been activated/ deactivated with the car in ignition position I or lower, a message is shown in the driver display and the following indicator in the roof console approx. 6 seconds after the car's electrical system has been set in ignition position II. 2. Confirm the message by pressing the righthand steering wheel keypad's O button. > A text message and a warning symbol in the roof console indicate that the airbag for the front passenger seat is activated. WARNING Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat when the airbag is activated. The passenger airbag must always be activated when front-facing passengers (children and adults) are sitting in the front passenger seat. Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury. }} 53 SAFETY || Deactivating passenger airbag Pull the switch outward and turn from ON to OFF. > The driver display shows the message Passenger airbag off Please acknowledge. NOTE If the passenger airbag has been activated/ deactivated with the car in ignition position I or lower, a message is shown in the driver display and the following indicator in the roof console approx. 6 seconds after the car's electrical system has been set in ignition position II. 2. Confirm the message by pressing the righthand steering wheel keypad's O button. > A text message and a symbol in the roof console indicate that the airbag for the front passenger seat is deactivated. WARNING Front-facing passengers (children and adults) must never sit on the passenger seat when the airbag is deactivated. Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury. IMPORTANT If the passenger airbag is deactivated, the electric seatbelt tensioner on the passenger side will also be deactivated. 54 Related information • • Seatbelt tensioner (p. 47) Child seats (p. 58) SAFETY Side airbags WARNING The side airbags on the driver's and passenger seats act to protect the chest and hips in the event of a collision. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted for repair. Defective work in the side airbag system could cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury. Inflatable curtains The Inflatable Curtain (IC), helps to prevent the driver and passengers from striking their heads on the inside of the car during a collision. WARNING Do not put objects in the area between the outside of the seat and the door panel, since this area is required by the side airbag. Volvo recommends the use only of car seat covers approved by Volvo. Other seat covers may impede the operation of the side airbags. WARNING The side airbags are fitted in the outer backrest frames of the front seats and help to protect the driver and passengers in the front seat. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the side airbags are inflated. The airbag inflates between the occupant and the door panel and thereby cushions the initial impact. The airbag deflates when compressed by the collision. The side airbag is normally only deployed on the side of the collision. Side airbags are a supplement the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt. Side airbags and child seats The protection provided by the car to children seated in a child seat or on a booster cushion is not diminished by the side airbag. Related information • Airbags (p. 49) The inflatable curtain is mounted along both sides of the headlining and helps protect the driver and outer seat passengers of the car. The panels are labelled with IC AIRBAG. A sufficiently violent collision trips the sensors and the inflatable curtain is inflated. WARNING Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted for repair. Defective work in the inflatable curtain system can cause malfunction and result in serious personal injury. }} 55 SAFETY || WARNING Never hang or attach heavy items onto the handles in the roof. The hooks are only designed for light coats and jackets (not for solid objects such as umbrellas). Do not screw or install anything onto the car's headlining, door pillars or side panels. This could compromise the intended protection. Volvo recommends only using Volvo genuine parts that are approved for fitting within these areas. WARNING Leave 10 cm (4 inches) space between the load and the side windows if the car is loaded to above the top edge of the door windows. Otherwise, the intended protection of the inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the headlining, may be compromised. Safety mode Related information • 56 Airbags (p. 49) Never attempt to repair your car or reset the electronics yourself if the car has been in safety mode. This could result in personal injury or the car not functioning as normal. Volvo recommends that engaging an authorised Volvo workshop to check and restore the car to normal status after Safety mode See Owner's manual has been shown. If the car has been in a collision, the message Safety mode See Owner's manual may be shown on the driver display with a warning symbol as long as the display is not damaged and the car's electrical system is still in working order. This message means that the car has reduced functionality. WARNING If the car is in safety mode it must not be towed. It must be transported from its location. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo workshop. WARNING Never, under any circumstances, attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the Safety mode See Owner's manual message is shown in the driver display. Leave the car at once. WARNING The inflatable curtain is a supplement to the seatbelts. Always use a seatbelt. WARNING Safety mode is a protective state that is triggered when a collision may have damaged any of the car's vital functions, such as the fuel lines, sensors for any of the safety systems, or the brake system. If the car is in safety mode, it is possible to attempt to reset the system in order to start and move the car for a short distance, if in a dangerous traffic situation for example. Related information • • • Safety (p. 42) Starting and moving the car after safety mode (p. 57) Recovery (p. 496) SAFETY Starting and moving the car after safety mode If the car is in safety mode, it is possible to attempt to reset the system in order to start and move the car for a short distance, if in a dangerous traffic situation for example. Starting the car after safety mode 1. Check the general damage situation of the car and whether any fuel has been leaking. There must be no smell of fuel either. If there is only minor damage and a check has revealed no fuel leaks, starting can be attempted. WARNING Never, under any circumstances, attempt to restart the car if it smells of fuel when the Safety mode See Owner's manual message is shown in the driver display. Leave the car at once. 2. Switch off the car. 3. Then try to start the car. > The car's electronics carry out a systems check and then try to resume normal status. The driver display shows the message Car start System check, wait during this time. This can take up to one minute. 4. Then try to start the car again when the message Car start System check, wait is no longer shown in the driver's display. IMPORTANT Related information • • • Safety mode (p. 56) Starting the car (p. 438) Recovery (p. 496) If the message Safety mode See Owner's manual is still shown on the display the car must not be driven or towed but a vehicle recovery service must then be used instead. Even if the car appears to be driveable, hidden damage may make the car impossible to control once moving. Moving the car after safety mode 1. If the driver display shows the message Normal mode The car is now in normal mode after a start attempt, the car can be carefully moved if standing in a dangerous position. 2. Do not move the car further than necessary. WARNING If the car is in safety mode it must not be towed. It must be transported from its location. Volvo recommends that it is transported to an authorised Volvo workshop. 57 SAFETY Child safety NOTE Children must always sit secure while travelling in the car. Volvo has child safety equipment (child seats and attachment devices) which is designed for fitting in this particular car. Using Volvo's child safety equipment, you obtain the optimum conditions for a child to travel safely in the car. In addition, the child safety equipment fits in well and is simple to use. The equipment that should be used is selected taking account of the weight and size of the child. Volvo recommends that children travel in a rearfacing child seat until as late an age as possible, at least until 3-4 years of age, and then in a front-facing child seat until the child is 140 cm (4 feet 7 inches) tall. When using child safety equipment, it is important to read the installation instructions included. In the event of questions when fitting child safety equipment, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions. Child seats Suitable child seats should always be used when children are travelling in the car. Children should sit comfortably and safely. Make sure that the child seat is positioned, mounted and used correctly. Look in the installation instructions for the child seat for the correct fitting. Children of all ages and sizes must always sit correctly secured in the car. Never allow a child to sit on the knee of a passenger. NOTE When using child safety equipment, it is important to read the installation instructions included. Related information • • • Safety (p. 42) In the event of questions when fitting child safety equipment, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions. Child seats (p. 58) Activating and deactivating child safety locks (p. 274) NOTE NOTE Legal provisions about the type of child seat that must be used for children of different ages and heights vary from country to country. Check what does apply. Never leave a child seat loose in the car. Always secure it according to the instructions for the child seat, even when it is not in use. Related information • • • 58 Child safety (p. 58) Integrated child seat* (p. 76) Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 59) * Option/accessory. SAFETY • • • • Lower mounting points for child seats (p. 60) Upper mounting points for child seats i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats (p. 60) The car is equipped with upper mounting points for child seats on the outer second row seats. Child seat positioning (p. 61) The upper mounting points are primarily intended for use with front-facing child seats. Activating and deactivating passenger airbag* (p. 52) WARNING The child seat's upper straps must be routed through the hole in the head restraint leg before they are tensioned at the mounting point. If this is not possible, follow the recommendations from the child seat manufacturer. Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the upper mounting points. NOTE Fold the head restraints in order to facilitate fitting this type of child seat in cars with folding head restraints on the outer seats. The location of the mounting points NOTE In cars with a cargo cover over the luggage compartment, this must be removed before child seats can be attached to the securing points. Related information • • Child seats (p. 58) Lower mounting points for child seats (p. 60) Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols on the rear of the backrest. • The mounting points are located on the rear of the outer second row seats. i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats (p. 60) • Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts (p. 64) * Option/accessory. 59 SAFETY Lower mounting points for child seats The vehicle is equipped with lower mounting points for child seats in the front seat* and the second row of seats. The mounting points in the front seat are only mounted if the vehicle is equipped with a switch to activate/deactivate the passenger airbag*. The lower mounting points are designed to be used in conjunction with certain rear-facing child seats. i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats The vehicle is equipped with i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats in the second row of seats. i-Size/ISOFIX2 is a fixture system for car child seats that is based on an international standard. Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points. Always follow the manufacturer's installation instructions when connecting a child seat to the lower mounting points. The location of the mounting points The location of the mounting points Mounting point locations in the second row of seats. The mounting points in the second row of seats are located on the rear section of the front seat's floor rails. Related information • • • Mounting point locations in the front seat. The mounting points in the front seat are located on the sides of the passenger seat's legroom. 2 60 • Child seats (p. 58) Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 59) i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats (p. 60) Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts (p. 64) Mounting point locations are indicated by symbols2 on the upholstery of the backrest. The mounting points for i-Size/ISOFIX are concealed behind the lower section of the second seat row's backrest, in the outer seats. Names and symbols change depending on market. * Option/accessory. SAFETY Press the seat cushion down to access the mounting points. Related information • • • • • Child seats (p. 58) Upper mounting points for child seats (p. 59) Child seat positioning It is important to position the child seat in the right place in the car. The choice of location depends, amongst other things, on the type of child seat and whether the passenger airbag is activated. Lower mounting points for child seats (p. 60) NOTE Regulations regarding the placement of children in cars vary from country to country. Check what does apply. WARNING Table for location of i-Size child seats (p. 69) Never allow anybody to stand or sit in front of the front passenger seat. Table for location of ISOFIX child seats (p. 71) Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the airbag is activated. Front-facing passengers (children and adults) must never sit on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is deactivated. Failure to follow the advice given above can endanger life or lead to serious personal injury. Rear-facing child seat and airbag are not compatible. Always fit rear-facing child seats in the second or third* seat row if the passenger airbag is activated. If a child is sitting on the front passenger seat then he/she could suffer serious injury if the airbag deploys. If the passenger airbag is deactivated then rearfacing child seats can be fitted on the front passenger seat. }} * Option/accessory. 61 SAFETY || Label for passenger airbag Child seat mounting NOTE It is important to remember a number of things when a child seat is mounted and used, which depend on where the child seat is positioned. WARNING Booster cushions/child seats with steel braces or some other design that could rest on the seatbelt buckle's opening button must not be used, as they could cause the seatbelt buckle to open accidentally. Label on the passenger side's sun visor. The warning label for the passenger airbag is positioned as shown above. Related information • • • Child seat mounting (p. 62) Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts (p. 64) • Table for location of i-Size child seats (p. 69) • Table for location of ISOFIX child seats (p. 71) 3 62 Child seats (p. 58) The accessory range varies depending on market. Do not secure the straps for the child seat into the seat's horizontal adjustment bar or in springs, rails or beams under the seat. Sharp edges may damage the straps. Do not allow the upper section of the child seat to rest against the windscreen. NOTE When using child safety equipment, it is important to read the installation instructions included. Never leave a child seat loose in the car. Always secure it according to the instructions for the child seat, even when it is not in use. Installation in the front seat • When fitting rear-facing child seats, check that the passenger airbag is deactivated. • When fitting front-facing child seats, check that the passenger airbag is activated. • Only use child seats that are recommended by Volvo, are universally approved or are semi-universal, and where the car is included on the manufacturer's vehicle list. • ISOFIX child seats can only be fitted when the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console3 accessory. • If the child seat is equipped with lower straps, Volvo recommends that the lower mounting points are used with these3. • If the child seat is equipped with support legs, always fit the support leg/support legs directly to the floor. Never fit a support leg to a footrest or other object. • The ISOFIX guide can be used in order to facilitate child seat installation. In the event of questions when fitting child safety equipment, contact the manufacturer for clearer instructions. SAFETY Installation in the second seat row • Only use child seats that are recommended by Volvo, are universally approved4 or are semi-universal, and where the car is included on the manufacturer's vehicle list. • A child seat with support legs must not be fitted in the centre seat. • The outer seats are equipped with the ISOFIX fixture system and are approved for iSize5. • • • 4 5 The outer seats are equipped with upper mounting points. Volvo recommends that child seat's upper straps should be pulled through the hole in the head restraint before being tensioned at the mounting point. If this is not possible, follow the recommendations from the child seat manufacturer. In cars with a third seat row*, the second seat row must be adjusted to its rearmost position. If a child seat is also used in the third row then an exception can be made. In which case, always check that the child seat is still fitted in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. If the child seat is equipped with lower straps, never adjust the position of the seat in front after the straps have been fitted in the lower mounting points. Always remember to remove the lower straps when the child seat is not installed. • If the child seat is equipped with support legs, always fit the support leg/support legs directly to the floor. Never fit a support leg to a footrest or other object. • The ISOFIX guide must not be used when fitting child seats. • Table for location of ISOFIX child seats (p. 71) Installation in the third seat row* • Only use child seats that are recommended by Volvo, are universally approved or are semi-universal, and where the car is included on the manufacturer's vehicle list. • Child seats with support legs must not be fitted in the third row of seats. • If necessary, adjust the second seat row forward in order to make enough space. If a child seat is also fitted on the second seat row, check that the child seat is still fitted in accordance with the manufacturer's instructions. Related information • • • Child seat positioning (p. 61) Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts (p. 64) Table for location of i-Size child seats (p. 69) Does not apply to the centre seat. Varies depending on market. * Option/accessory. 63 SAFETY Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts The table gives a recommendation for which child seats suit which locations, and for what size of child. NOTE Always read the owner's manual section on installing a child seat before installing one in the car. Table for XC90 Twin Engine Weight Group 0 max 10 kg Group 0+ max 13 kg Group 1 9-18 kg Group 2 15-25 kg 64 Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing child seats)A Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child seats)A Second row of seats, outer seat Second row of seats, centre seat UB, C X UC LC U UB, C X UC LC U LD UFB, E U, LD L U LD UFB, F UF, LD B*, G, LF UF Third seat row* * Option/accessory. SAFETY Weight Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing child seats)A Group 3 Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child seats)A Second row of seats, outer seat UFB, H UH X 22-36 kg Second row of seats, centre seat B*, G, LH Third seat row* UH U: Suitable for universal category restraints approved for use in this mass group. UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats. L: Suitable for particular child restraints. These restraints may be of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. B: Built-in restraint approved for this mass group. X: The seat is not suitable for children in this mass group. A B C D E F G H The seat cushion extension must always be retracted for the installation of child seats. Adjust the backrest to a more upright position. Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat (type approval E1 04301146). Volvo recommends: Volvo reversible seat in the rear-facing position (type approval E5 04192); Volvo rear-facing seat (type approval E5 04212). Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group. Volvo recommends: Volvo reversible seat in the front-facing position (type approval E5 04192); booster cushion with and without back (type approval E5 04216); Volvo booster cushion with backrest (type approval E1 04301169); Volvo booster seat (type approval E1 04301312). Volvo recommends: Integrated child seat (type approval E5 04218). Volvo recommends: Booster cushion with and without back (type approval E5 04216); Volvo booster cushion with backrest (type approval E1 04301169); Volvo booster seat (type approval E1 04301312). Table for XC90 Excellence Weight Group 0 max 10 kg Group 0+ max 13 kg Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing child seats)A Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child seats)A Rear seatA UB, C, L X UB, C, L UB, C, L X UB, C, L }} * Option/accessory. 65 SAFETY || Weight Group 1 9-18 kg Group 2 15-25 kg Group 3 22-36 kg Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing child seats)A Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child seats)A Rear seatA LD UFB, E UB, LD LD UFB, F UB, F, LD X UFB, G UB, G, L U: Suitable for universal category restraints approved for use in this mass group. UF: Suitable for front-facing universally approved child seats. L: Suitable for particular child restraints. These restraints may be of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. X: The seat is not suitable for children in this mass group. A B C D E F G 66 The seat cushion extension must always be retracted for the installation of child seats. Adjust the backrest to a more upright position. Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat (type approval E1 04301146). Volvo recommends: Volvo reversible seat in the rear-facing position (type approval E5 04192). Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group. Volvo recommends: Volvo reversible seat in the front-facing position (type approval E5 04191); booster cushion with and without back (type approval E5 04216); Volvo booster cushion with backrest (type approval E1 04301169). Volvo recommends: Booster cushion with and without back (type approval E5 04216); Volvo booster cushion with backrest (type approval E1 04301169). SAFETY Table for XC90 Excellence Lounge Weight Rear seatA, B Group 0 UC, D, L max 10 kg Group 0+ UC, D, L max 13 kg Group 1 UC, LE 9-18 kg Group 2 UC, F, LE 15-25 kg Group 3 UC, G, L 22-36 kg U: Suitable for universal category restraints approved for use in this mass group. L: Suitable for particular child restraints. These restraints may be of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. A B C D E F G When installing on the passenger side's outer seat, slide the car's Lounge Console forward to its front position. The seat cushion extension must always be retracted for the installation of child seats. Adjust the backrest to a more upright position. Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat (type approval E1 04301146). Volvo recommends: Volvo reversible seat in the rear-facing position (type approval E5 04192). Volvo recommends: Volvo reversible seat in the front-facing position (type approval E5 04191); booster cushion with and without back (type approval E5 04216); Volvo booster cushion with backrest (type approval E1 04301169). Volvo recommends: booster cushion with and without back (type approval E5 04216); Volvo booster cushion with backrest (type approval E1 04301169). WARNING Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated. Related information • • Child seat positioning (p. 61) • Table for location of i-Size child seats (p. 69) Child seat mounting (p. 62) }} 67 SAFETY || 68 • Table for location of ISOFIX child seats (p. 71) • Seatbelts (p. 44) SAFETY Table for location of i-Size child seats The child seat must be approved in accordance with UN Reg R129. The table gives a recommendation for which i-Size child seats suit which locations, and for what size of child. NOTE Always read the owner's manual section on installing a child seat before installing one in the car. Table for XC90 Twin Engine Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing child seats) Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child seats) Second row of seats, outer seat Second row of seats, centre seat Third seat row* i-Size child seats X X i-UA X X i-U: Suitable for i-Size "universal" child seat, front-facing and rear-facing. X: Not suitable for universally approved child seats. A Volvo recommends rear-facing child seats for this group. Table for XC90 Excellence Type of child seat Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing child seats) Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child seats) Rear seat i-Size child seats X X X X: Not suitable for universally approved child seats. }} * Option/accessory. 69 SAFETY || Table for XC90 Excellence Lounge Type of child seat Rear seat i-Size child seats X X: Not suitable for universally approved child seats. Related information • • • 70 Child seat positioning (p. 61) Child seat mounting (p. 62) Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts (p. 64) • Table for location of ISOFIX child seats (p. 71) • i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats (p. 60) SAFETY Table for location of ISOFIX child seats The table gives a recommendation for which ISOFIX child seats suit which locations, and for what size of child. The child seat must be approved in accordance with UN Reg R44 and the car model must be included in the manufacturer's vehicle list. NOTE Always read the owner's manual section on installing a child seat before installing one in the car. Table for XC90 Twin Engine Weight Group 0 max 10 kg Group 0+ max 13 kg Size classA Type of child seat E Rear-facing infant seat E Rear-facing infant seat C Rear-facing child seat D Rear-facing child seat Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing child seats)B, C Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child seats)B, C Second row of seats, outer seat Second row of seats, centre seat Third seat row* ILB, D, XE X ILD X X ILB, D, XE X ILD X X }} * Option/accessory. 71 SAFETY || Weight Group 1 9-18 kg Size classA Type of child seat A Front-facing child seat B Front-facing child seat B1 Front-facing child seat C Rear-facing child seat D Rear-facing child seat Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing child seats)B, C Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child seats)B, C Second row of seats, outer seat Second row of seats, centre seat Third seat row* X ILB, F, XE ILF, IUFF X X ILB, XE X ILG X X IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems. These child restraint systems are those of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group. X: Not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems. A B C D E F G 72 For child seats with the ISOFIX fixture system there is a size classification to help users choose the right type of child seat. The size class can be read on the child seat's label. Works for the installation of ISOFIX child seats that are semi-universally approved (IL) if the car is equipped with the ISOFIX console accessory (the accessory range varies depending on market). There are no upper mounting points for child seats here. The seat cushion extension must always be retracted for the installation of child seats. Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat secured using the ISOFIX fixture system (type approval E1 04301146). Applicable if the car is not fitted with an ISOFIX bracket. Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group. Volvo recommends: BeSafe iZi Kid X3 ISOfix (type approval E5 04200). * Option/accessory. SAFETY Table for XC90 Excellence Weight Group 0 max 10 kg Group 0+ max 13 kg Group 1 9-18 kg Size classA Type of child seat E Rear-facing infant seat E Rear-facing infant seat C Rear-facing child seat D Rear-facing child seat A Front-facing child seat B Front-facing child seat B1 Front-facing child seat C Rear-facing child seat D Rear-facing child seat Front seat (with deactivated airbag, only rear-facing child seats) Front seat (with activated airbag, only front-facing child seats) Rear seatB X X ILC X X ILC X X ILD, IUFD X X IL IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems. These child restraint systems are those of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group. X: Not suitable for ISOFIX child restraint systems. A B C D For child seats with the ISOFIX fixture system there is a size classification to help users choose the right type of child seat. The size class can be read on the child seat's label. The seat cushion extension must always be retracted for the installation of child seats. Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat secured using the ISOFIX fixture system (type approval E1 04301146). Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group. }} 73 SAFETY || Table for XC90 Excellence Lounge Weight Group 0 max 10 kg Group 0+ max 13 kg Group 1 9-18 kg Size classA Type of child seat E Rear-facing infant seat E Rear-facing infant seat C Rear-facing child seat D Rear-facing child seat A Front-facing child seat B Front-facing child seat B1 Front-facing child seat C Rear-facing child seat D Rear-facing child seat Rear seatB, C ILD ILD ILE, IUFE IL IL: Suitable for particular ISOFIX child restraint systems. These child restraint systems are those of the specific vehicle, restricted or semi-universal categories. IUF: Suitable for ISOFIX forward child restraint systems of universal category approved for use in the mass group. A B C D E 74 For child seats with the ISOFIX fixture system there is a size classification to help users choose the right type of child seat. The size class can be read on the child seat's label. When installing on the passenger side's outer seat, slide the car's Lounge Console forward to its front position. The seat cushion extension must always be retracted for the installation of child seats. Volvo recommends: Volvo infant seat secured using the ISOFIX fixture system (type approval E1 04301146). Volvo recommends rear-facing child seat for children in this mass group. SAFETY WARNING Never use a rear-facing child seat on the front passenger seat if the passenger airbag is activated. NOTE If an i-Size/ISOFIX child seat has no size classification, the car model must be included on the vehicle list for the child seat. NOTE Volvo recommends contacting an authorised Volvo dealer for information about which i-Size/ISOFIX child seats Volvo recommends. Related information • • • • • Child seat positioning (p. 61) Child seat mounting (p. 62) Table for location of child seats using the car's seatbelts (p. 64) Table for location of i-Size child seats (p. 69) i-Size/ISOFIX mounting points for child seats (p. 60) 75 SAFETY Integrated child seat* • The integrated child seat on the centre seat in the second seat row allows children to sit comfortably and safely. the seatbelt is in contact with the child's body and is not slack or twisted • the seatbelt does not lie across the child's throat or below the shoulder • the lap section of the seatbelt is positioned low over the pelvis to provide optimal protection. The child seat is specially designed to provide children with good safety, together with the car's seatbelt. The child seat is approved for children who weigh 15-36 kg (33-80 lbs) and are at least 97 cm (38 inches) tall. Correct position, the seatbelt should be positioned in on the shoulder. Check before driving that: • • 76 the seat cushion in locked in position Related information • • • Child seats (p. 58) Folding up the seat cushion in the integrated child seat* (p. 77) Folding down the seat cushion in the integrated child seat* (p. 77) WARNING Volvo recommends that repair or replacement of the integrated child seat is only performed by an authorised Volvo workshop. Do not make any modifications or additions to the child seat. If an integrated child seat has been subjected to a heavy load, e.g. in connection with a collision, then the seat cushion, seatbelt and backrest, or possibly the whole seat, must be replaced. Even if the child seat appears to be undamaged, it may not afford the same level of protection. This also applies if the seat cushion was in lowered position during a collision or similar. The seat cushion must also be replaced if it is heavily worn. WARNING If the instructions for the integrated child seat are not followed then the child could sustain serious injury in the event of an accident. the head restraint is adjusted at the same height as the child's head, if possible, so that it covers the entire back of the head * Option/accessory. SAFETY Folding up the seat cushion in the integrated child seat* Folding down the seat cushion in the integrated child seat* The seat cushion should always be folded up when the integrated child seat is in use. The seat cushion should be folded down into the rear seat when the integrated child seat is not being used. Press the seat cushion backwards to lock. WARNING If the instructions for the integrated child seat are not followed then the child could sustain serious injury in the event of an accident. Pull the handle forwards and upwards to release the seat cushion. Pull the handle forwards to release the seat cushion. Related information • • Integrated child seat* (p. 76) Folding down the seat cushion in the integrated child seat* (p. 77) }} * Option/accessory. 77 SAFETY || Press down with your hand in the centre of the seat cushion in order to lock it. IMPORTANT Check that there are no loose objects (e.g. toys) left behind in the space under the child seat's seat cushion before lowering. NOTE Before the rear backrest is lowered, the child seat's seat cushion must be lowered first. Related information • • 78 Integrated child seat* (p. 76) Folding up the seat cushion in the integrated child seat* (p. 77) * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Instruments and controls in lefthand drive car The overviews show where the displays and controls near the driver are located. Steering wheel and instrument panel Horn Left-hand steering wheel keypad Bonnet opening Display lighting, tailgate unlocking/opening*/ closing*, halogen headlamp levelling Roof console Centre display Hazard warning flashers, defrosting, media, glovebox opening Gear selector Position lamps, daytime running lights, dipped beam, main beam, direction indicators, rear fog lamp, resetting the trip meter Steering wheel paddles for manual gear changing in an automatic gearbox* Head-up display* Driver display Start knob Drive mode control Front reading lamps and interior lighting Panorama roof* Display in roof console, ON CALL button* Parking brake Automatic braking when stationary Driver's door Manual dimming of interior rearview mirror Wipers and washing, rain sensor* Right-hand steering wheel keypad Centre and tunnel console Steering wheel adjustment 80 * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Instruments and controls in righthand drive car Display lighting, tailgate unlocking/opening*/ closing*, halogen headlamp levelling The overviews show where the displays and controls near the driver are located. Bonnet opening Steering wheel and instrument panel Horn Steering wheel adjustment Left-hand steering wheel keypad Roof console Memories for power front seat*, door mirror and head-up display* settings Central locking Power windows, door mirrors, electric child safety lock* Adjusting front seat Related information • • • • • • • • Manual front seat (p. 182) Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 183) Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 200) Position lamps, daytime running lights, dipped beam, main beam, direction indicators, rear fog lamp, resetting the trip meter Steering wheel paddles for manual gear changing in an automatic gearbox* Head-up display* Lighting control (p. 150) Driver display Starting the car (p. 438) Wipers and washing, rain sensor* Driver display (p. 83) Overview of centre display (p. 108) Gearbox (p. 452) Front reading lamps and interior lighting Panorama roof* Display in roof console, ON CALL button* Manual dimming of interior rearview mirror Right-hand steering wheel keypad Centre and tunnel console }} * Option/accessory. 81 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Driver's door || Centre display Memories for power front seat*, door mirror and head-up display* settings Hazard warning flashers, defrosting, media, glovebox opening Central locking Gear selector 82 Start knob Power windows, door mirrors, electric child safety lock* Drive mode control Adjusting front seat Parking brake Related information Automatic braking when stationary • • • • • • • • Manual front seat (p. 182) Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 183) Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 200) Lighting control (p. 150) Starting the car (p. 438) Driver display (p. 83) Overview of centre display (p. 108) Gearbox (p. 452) * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Driver display • Open one of the doors. The driver display shows information about the car and driving. The driver display contains gauges, indicators and indicator and warning symbols. The content of the driver display depends on the car's equipment, settings and which functions are active at that time. The driver display is activated as soon as a door is opened, i.e. in ignition position 0. The driver display extinguishes after a while if it is not used. To reactivate it, proceed with one of the following: • • Depress the brake pedal. Activate ignition position I. WARNING If the driver display should extinguish, not illuminate on activation/start or be fully or partially illegible, the car must not be used. You should visit a workshop immediately. Volvo recommends an authorised Volvo workshop. WARNING In the event of a fault in the driver display the information on e.g. brakes, airbags or other safety systems may not be shown. In which case, the driver cannot check the status of the car's systems or receive current warnings and information. The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. Location in the driver display: On the left In the middle On the right Speedometer Indicator and warning symbols Tachometer/Hybrid gaugeA Trip meter Outside temperature gauge Gear shift indicator OdometerB Clock Drive mode Cruise control and speed limiter information Messages, in some cases with graphics Fuel gauge Road Sign Information* Door and seatbelt information Hybrid battery gauge – Charging status Distance to empty tank – Media player Distance to empty battery }} * Option/accessory. 83 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || A B On the left In the middle On the right – Navigation map* Instantaneous fuel consumption – Phone App menu (activated via steering wheel keypad) – Voice recognition – – CompassA – Depends on drive mode selected. Accumulated mileage. Dynamic symbol • The dynamic symbol in its basic form. The centre of the driver display contains a dynamic symbol that changes appearance for different types of message. An amber or red marker around the symbol indicates the degree of severity of a control or warning message. • • • Indicator symbols in the driver display (p. 93) Trip computer (p. 88) Messages in the driver display (p. 104) Handling the application menu in the driver display (p. 103) Examples of indicator symbol. With an animation, the basic shape can be turned into a graphic showing where a problem is situated, or in order to clarify information. Related information • • 84 Driver display settings (p. 85) Warning symbols in the driver display (p. 95) * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Driver display settings Settings via the centre display Settings for the driver display's display options can be made via the driver display's application menu and via the centre display's settings menu. Selecting information type 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. Settings via the driver display's app menu 2. Press My Car Displays Display Information. 3. Select what should be shown in the background: Driver Show no information in background • • Show information for current playing 2. These settings are personal and are saved automatically to the active driver profile. Related information • • media • Show navigation even if no route is set Tap on System System Languages and Units System Language to select language. > A change will affect the language in all displays. • Driver display (p. 83) Handling the application menu in the driver display (p. 103) Other settings in the centre display's top view (p. 131) Selecting theme 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. 2. The app menu is opened and controlled using the right-hand keypad on the steering wheel. Tap on My Car Themes. 3. Select a theme (appearance) for the driver display: In the app menu, you can choose which information is shown on the driver display from • • • • Trip computer media player phone navigation system*. • • • • Displays Display Glass Minimalistic Performance Chrome Rings Selecting language 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. * Option/accessory. 85 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Fuel gauge Hybrid gauge The fuel gauge in the driver display shows the fuel level in the tank. In drive modes Hybrid and Pure, the driver display shows a hybrid gauge that can help the driver to drive the car in a more energy-efficient way. Indicates the power level when the combustion engine starts. If the symbol is filled in, it means that the combustion engine is in use. Indicates the power level when the internal combustion engine is due to start. If the symbol is not filled in, it means that the combustion engine is not in use. Indicator that shows that the hybrid battery is being charged, e.g. if the brake pedal is gently depressed. Driver-requested power The beige zone in the fuel gauge indicates the quantity of fuel in the tank. When the fuel level is low and it is soon time to refuel, the fuel pump symbol illuminates and changes to amber. The trip computer also indicates the distance to empty tank. Related information • • • • 86 Driver display (p. 83) Hybrid battery gauge (p. 87) Filling fuel (p. 479) Fuel tank - volume (p. 670) The hybrid gauge shows in different ways the relationship between how much power is being taken from the electric motor and how much power is available. Symbols in the hybrid gauge Indicates current level for available electric motor power. If the symbol is filled in, it means that the electric motor is in use. If the symbol is not filled in, it means that the electric motor is not in use. The pointer in the hybrid gauge indicates the amount of engine power requested by the driver by regulating the accelerator pedal. The higher the reading on the scale, the more power is requested by the driver in the current gear. The marker between the lightning flash and the drop shows the point at which the internal combustion engine starts. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Hybrid battery gauge Example: The hybrid battery gauge shows how much energy there is in the hybrid battery. The car is started but stationary, no power is requested. The car generates current to the battery, the battery is charged, e.g. when the brake pedal is pressed lightly or during engine braking down a hill. Related information • • • • Drive modes (p. 460) Driver display (p. 83) Foot brake (p. 444) The energy in the hybrid battery is used for the electric motor, but also to cool or heat the car. The trip computer calculates an approximate distance for the energy left in the hybrid battery. Starting and stopping the combustion engine in Twin Engine (p. 459) The electric motor cannot supply the amount of engine power requested and the internal combustion engine starts. }} 87 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Symbols in the hybrid battery gauge Trip computer The car's trip computer records vales such as e.g. distance, fuel consumption and average speed whilst driving. In order to facilitate fuel-efficient driving, information is recorded about both instantaneous and average fuel consumption. The information from the trip computer can be shown in the driver display. Driver display (p. 83) Charging the hybrid battery (p. 417) Examples of trip computer information in the driver display.1 • • • 88 The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. Tourist - alternative speedometer Trip meter There are two trip meters, TM and TA. TM can be reset manually and TA is reset automatically if the car is not used for at least four hours. Mileage Driving time Average speed Average fuel consumption The values apply from the trip meter's latest reset. The following meters are included in the trip computer: 1 Distance to empty battery Units for distance, speed, etc. can be changed via system settings in the centre display. • • • • Related information Hold and Charge function (p. 475) Distance to empty tank The following information is registered while driving: The symbol in the hybrid battery gauge indicates that the Hold function is activated, and the symbol indicates that the Charge function is activated. • • • • • • Trip meter Odometer Instantaneous fuel consumption Odometer The odometer records the car's total mileage. This value cannot be reset to zero. Instantaneous fuel consumption This gauge shows the fuel consumption that the car has at the moment. The value is updated approximately every second. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Distance to empty tank The trip computer calculates the remaining mileage with the fuel available in the tank. The calculation is based on the average fuel consumption over the last 30 km (20 miles) and the remaining drivable fuel quantity. When the gauge shows "----", there is not enough fuel left to be able to calculate the remaining mileage. Refuel as soon as possible. NOTE There may be a slight deviation if the driving style has been changed. An economic driving style generally results in a longer driving distance. Distance to empty battery The approximate distance that can be driven with the remaining amount of energy in the hybrid battery is indicated adjacent to this symbol. The calculation is based on the average consumption of normally loaded vehicle, during normal driving and taking into account whether the air conditioning (AC) is switched on or off. When changing between the Hybrid and Pure drive modes, the calculated distance increases since the Pure mode has reduced climate settings (ECO climate). NOTE In addition to high current take-off in the passenger compartment, sudden acceleration and braking, high speed, heavy loads, low outside temperature and uphill gradients also reduce the possible driving distance. No guaranteed range on electric power remains when the gauge shows "----". NOTE There may be a slight deviation if the driving style has been changed. An economic driving style generally results in a longer driving distance. Start value for fully charged hybrid battery Since it is difficult to anticipate driving style and other factors that affect the range for electric operation, Volvo has decided to use a start value when the car is fully charged. The start value indicates an up-to figure instead of a forecast for the range for electric operation. The difference in start value between Hybrid and Pure is due to the car being allowed to use more energy from the hybrid battery in Pure mode, as well as that the car changes over to ECO climate. Mileage for electric operation In order to achieve the longest possible mileage for electric operation, the driver of an electrically powered car also has to think about energy conservation. The more consumers there are (stereo, electric heating in windows/mirrors/seats, very cold air from the climate control system, etc.) that are active - the shorter the potential mileage. Tourist - alternative speedometer The alternative digital speedometer makes it easier to drive in countries where speed limit signs are in a different unit than that shown in the car's instruments. The digital speed is then shown in the opposite unit to that shown in the analogue speedometer. If the analogue speedometer is graduated in mph, the digital speedometer shows the corresponding speed in km/h and vice versa. Related information • • • • • Show trip data in the driver display (p. 90) Resetting the trip meter (p. 91) Show trip statistics in the centre display (p. 91) Driver display (p. 83) Changing system units (p. 131) 89 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Show trip data in the driver display 1. The trip computer's recorded and calculated values can be shown in the driver display. (It is not possible to open the app menu while there is an unacknowledged message in the driver display. The message first has to be confirmed by pressing the O button (4) before the app menu can be opened.) The values are saved in a trip computer app. Via the app menu, you can choose which information is shown on the driver display. Open and navigate in the app menu2 using the righthand steering wheel keypad. App menu Left/right Open the app menu in the driver display by pressing (1). 2. Navigate to the trip computer app to left or right with (2). > The top four menu rows show measured values for trip meter TM. The next four menu rows show measured values for trip meter TA. Scroll up or down in the list with (3). 3. Scroll down to the option buttons to select which information to show in the driver display: • • • • • Up/down Confirm • Odometer Distance to empty tank Distance to empty battery Tourist (alternative speedometer) Mileage for trip meter TM, TA, or no display of mileage Instantaneous fuel consumption, average consumption for TM or TA, alternatively, no display of fuel consumption Select or deselect an option with the O button (4). The change is made immediately. 2 90 The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. Related information • • Trip computer (p. 88) Resetting the trip meter (p. 91) DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Resetting the trip meter Reset the trip meter using the left-hand stalk switch. Show trip statistics in the centre display Trip statistics from the trip computer are displayed graphically in the centre display and provide an overview that facilitates more fuel-efficient driving. Open the Driver performance app in app view in order to show the trip statistics. Each bar in the diagram symbolises a distance of 1, 10 or 100 km, alternatively miles. The bars are filled in from the right as driving progresses. The bar on the far right shows the value for the current distance. Reset all information in trip meter TM (i.e. mileage, average consumption, average speed and driving time) with a long press on the RESET button on the left-hand stalk switch. – A short press on the RESET button resets only the mileage. Trip statistics from the trip computer3. NOTE When driving with electric operation, fuel consumption can be indicated in the trip statistics if the additional heater4 is running. The average fuel consumption and total driving time are calculated since the last time the trip statistics were reset. Fuel and electricity consumption are shown in separate graphs. Electricity consumption is "net" consumption, i.e. energy consumed minus regenerated energy created during braking. Related information • • Settings for trip statistics (p. 92) Trip computer (p. 88) The trip meter TA can only be reset automatically when the car has not been used for four or more hours. Related information • 3 4 Trip computer (p. 88) The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater. 91 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Settings for trip statistics Date and time Reset or adjust settings for trip statistics. The clock is shown in both the driver display and the centre display. 1. 2. Open the Driver performance app in app view in order to show the trip statistics. • reset data after every trip. Performed when the car has been stationary for more than 4 hours. • reset data for the current trip. Units for distance, speed, etc. can be changed via system settings in the centre display. Related information 92 Related information change graph scale. Select resolution 1, 10 or 100 km/miles for the bar. Trip statistics, calculated average consumption and total driving time are always reset simultaneously. • • Summer time In certain countries, it is possible to select the Auto Daylight Saving Time setting for automatic setting of summer time. For other countries, the Daylight Saving Time setting can be selected manually. Press Preferences to • • Clock location Show trip statistics in the centre display (p. 91) Trip computer (p. 88) Resetting the trip meter (p. 91) is then adjusted automatically based on the location of the car. For certain types of navigation systems, the current location (country) must also be set to obtain the right time zone. If Auto Time is not selected, time and data are adjusted with arrow up or arrow down on the touch screen. • • In certain situations, messages and information may cover the clock in the driver display. In the centre display, the clock is located at the top right of the status bar. Date and time settings – Select Settings System Date and Time in the centre display's top view to change settings for time and date format. Adjust the date and time by pressing the up or down arrow on the touch screen. Automatic time for cars with GPS When the car is equipped with a navigation system, Auto Time can be selected. The time zone Driver display (p. 83) Other settings in the centre display's top view (p. 131) DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Outside temperature gauge Related information The outside temperature is shown in the driver display. • • A sensor detects the temperature outside of the car. Driver display (p. 83) Changing system units (p. 131) Indicator symbols in the driver display The indicator symbols alert the driver that a function is activated, that a system is operating, or that a fault or abnormal condition has occurred. Symbol Specification Information, read display text When one of the car's systems does not behave as intended, this information symbol illuminates and a text appears on the driver display. The information symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols. Fault in brake system If the car has been stationary, the gauge may display a temperature reading that is too high. When the outside temperature is in the range –5 °C to +2 °C (23 °F to 36 °F), a snowflake symbol lights up that warns of potentially slippery conditions. The symbol is also illuminated briefly in the headup display*, if the car is equipped with one. The symbol lights up when there is a fault in the parking brake. ABS fault If this symbol illuminates then the system is not working. The car's regular brake system continues to work, but without the ABS function. Change the unit for the temperature gauge, etc. via system settings in the centre display's top view. }} * Option/accessory. 93 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Symbol Specification Automatic brake on The symbol illuminates when the function is activated and the foot brake or parking brake is acting. The brake holds the car stationary when it has stopped. Tyre pressure system The symbol illuminates when tyre pressure is too low. If there is a fault in the tyre pressure system, the symbol will flash for approx. 1 minute and then illuminate with a constant glow. This may be because the system cannot detect or warn of low tyre pressure as intended. Emissions system If the symbol illuminates after the engine has been started then it may be due to a fault in the car's emissions system. Drive to a workshop for checking. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted. 94 Symbol Specification Left and right-hand direction indicator The symbols flash when the direction indicators are used. Symbol Specification Main beam On The symbol illuminates when main beam is on and with main beam flash. Active main beam on Position lamps The symbol lights up when the position lamps are switched on. Fault in the headlamp system The symbol illuminates if a fault has occurred in the ABL function (Active Bending Lights) or if another fault has occurred in the headlamp system. Active main beam on The symbol lights up blue when the automatic main beam is on. Active main beam off The symbol lights up white when the automatic main beam is off. The symbol lights up blue when active main beam is on. Position lamps are switched on. Active main beam off The symbol lights up white when active main beam is off. Position lamps are switched on. Main beam On The symbol lights up when main beam and the position lamps are switched on. Rear fog lamp on This symbol illuminates when the rear fog lamp is switched on. Rain sensor on This symbol illuminates when the rain sensor is on. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Symbol Specification Symbol Specification Preconditioning on Lane assistance The symbol illuminates when the engine block and passenger compartment heater/air conditioning are preconditioning the car. White symbol: Lane assistance is on and road lines are detected. Stability system Amber symbol: Lane assistance warns/intervenes. Grey symbol: Lane assistance is on but road lines are not detected. A flashing symbol indicates that the stability system is operating. If the symbol illuminates with constant glow then there is a fault in the system. Lane assistance and rain sensor White symbol: Lane assistance is on and road lines are detected. Rain sensor is on. Stability system, sport mode The symbol illuminates when the sport mode is activated. Sport mode allows for a more active driving experience. Grey symbol: Lane assistance is on but road lines are not detected. Rain sensor is on. Related information • • Driver display (p. 83) Warning symbols in the driver display (p. 95) Warning symbols in the driver display The warning symbols alert the driver that an important function is activated or that a serious fault or condition exists. Symbol Specification Warning The red warning symbol illuminates when a fault has been indicated which could affect the safety or drivability of the car. An explanatory text is shown on the driver display at the same time. The warning symbol can also illuminate in conjunction with other symbols. Seatbelt reminder This symbol illuminates or flashes if someone in a front seat has not put on their seatbelt or if someone in a rear seat has taken off their seatbelt. }} 95 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Symbol Specification Symbol Airbags Low oil pressure If the symbol remains illuminated or illuminates while driving, a fault has been detected in one of the car's safety systems. Read the message in the driver display. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted. If this symbol illuminates during driving then the engine's oil pressure is too low. Stop the engine immediately and check the engine oil level, top up if necessary. If the symbol illuminates and the oil level is normal, contact a workshop. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted. Fault in brake system If this symbol illuminates, the brake fluid level may be too low. Visit the nearest authorised workshop to have the brake fluid level checked and rectified. Alternator not charging This symbol illuminates during driving if a fault has occurred in the electrical system. Visit a workshop. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted. Parking brake applied This symbol illuminates with a constant glow when the parking brake is applied. A flashing symbol means that a fault has arisen. Read the message in the driver display. Collision risk City Safety warns of a risk of collision with other vehicles, pedestrians, cyclists or large animals. Related information • • 96 Specification Indicator symbols in the driver display (p. 93) Driver display (p. 83) License agreement for the driver display A license is an agreement for the right to operate a certain activity or the right to use someone else's entitlement according to the terms and conditions in the agreement. The following text is Volvo's agreement with the manufacturer or developer. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Boost Software License 1.0 Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person or organization obtaining a copy of the software and accompanying documentation covered by this license (the "Software") to use, reproduce, display, distribute, execute, and transmit the Software, and to prepare derivative works of the Software, and to permit third-parties to whom the Software is furnished to do so, all subject to the following: The copyright notices in the Software and this entire statement, including the above license grant, this restriction and the following disclaimer, must be included in all copies of the Software, in whole or in part, and all derivative works of the Software, unless such copies or derivative works are solely in the form of machine-executable object code generated by a source language processor. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS OR ANYONE DISTRIBUTING THE SOFTWARE BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. BSD 4-clause "Original" or "Old" License Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1990, 1991, 1993 The Regents of the University of California. All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must display the following acknowledgement: This product includes software developed by the University of California, Berkeley and its contributors. 4. Neither the name of the University nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE REGENTS AND CONTRIBUTORS ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE REGENTS OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. }} 97 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || BSD 3-clause "New" or "Revised" License Copyright (c) 2011-2014, Yann Collet. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. 3. Neither the name of the organisation nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derive from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR 98 SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. BSD 2-clause “Simplified” license Copyright (c) <YEAR>, <OWNER> All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. 2. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. The views and conclusions contained in the software and documentation are those of the authors and should not be interpreted as representing official policies, either expressed or implied, of the FreeBSD Project. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL FreeType Project License 1. 1 Copyright 1996-1999 by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg Introduction The FreeType Project is distributed in several archive packages; some of them may contain, in addition to the FreeType font engine, various tools and contributions which rely on, or relate to, the FreeType Project. This license applies to all files found in such packages, and which do not fall under their own explicit license. The license affects thus the FreeType font engine, the test programs, documentation and makefiles, at the very least. This license was inspired by the BSD, Artistic, and IJG (Independent JPEG Group) licenses, which all encourage inclusion and use of free software in commercial and freeware products alike. As a consequence, its main points are that: o We don't promise that this software works. However, we are be interested in any kind of bug reports. (`as is' distribution) o You can use this software for whatever you want, in parts or full form, without having to pay us. (`royalty-free' usage) o You may not pretend that you wrote this software. If you use it, or only parts of it, in a program, you must acknowledge somewhere in your documentation that you've used the FreeType code. (`credits') We specifically permit and encourage the inclusion of this software, with or without modifications, in commercial products, provided that all warranty or liability claims are assumed by the product vendor. Legal Terms 0. Definitions Throughout this license, the terms `package', `FreeType Project', and `FreeType archive' refer to the set of files originally distributed by the authors (David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg) as the `FreeType project', be they named as alpha, beta or final release. `You' refers to the licensee, or person using the project, where `using' is a generic term including compiling the project's source code as well as linking it to form a `program' or `executable'. This program is referred to as `a program using the FreeType engine'. This license applies to all files distributed in the original FreeType archive, including all source code, binaries and documentation, unless otherwise stated in the file in its original, unmodified form as distributed in the original archive. If you are unsure whether or not a particular file is covered by this license, you must contact us to verify this. The FreeType project is copyright (C) 1996-1999 by David Turner, Robert Wilhelm, and Werner Lemberg. All rights reserved except as specified below. 1. No Warranty THE FREETYPE ARCHIVE IS PROVIDED `AS IS' WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EITHER EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE. IN NO EVENT WILL ANY OF THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES CAUSED BY THE USE OR THE INABILITY TO USE, OF THE FREETYPE PROJECT. As you have not signed this license, you are not required to accept it. However, as the FreeType project is copyrighted material, only this license, or another one contracted with the authors, grants you the right to use, distribute, and modify it. Therefore, by using, distributing, or modifying the FreeType project, you indicate that you understand and accept all the terms of this license. 2. Redistribution Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: o Redistribution of source code must retain this license file (`licence.txt') unaltered; any additions, deletions or changes to the original files must be clearly indicated in accompanying documentation. The copyright notices of the unaltered, original files must be preserved in all copies of source files. o Redistribution in binary form must provide a disclaimer that states that the software is based in part of the work of the FreeType Team, in the distribution documentation. We also encourage you to put an URL to the FreeType web page in your documentation, though this isn't mandatory. These conditions apply to any software derived from or based }} 99 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL on the FreeType code, not just the unmodified files. If you use our work, you must acknowledge us. However, no fee need be paid to us. || 3. 4. 100 Advertising The names of FreeType's authors and contributors may not be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. We suggest, but do not require, that you use one or more of the following phrases to refer to this software in your documentation or advertising materials: `FreeType Project', `FreeType Engine', `FreeType library', or `FreeType Distribution'. Contacts There are two mailing lists related to FreeType: o [email protected] Discusses general use and applications of FreeType, as well as future and wanted additions to the library and distribution. If you are looking for support, start in this list if you haven't found anything to help you in the documentation. o [email protected] Discusses bugs, as well as engine internals, design issues, specific licenses, porting, etc. o http://www.freetype.org Holds the current FreeType web page, which will allow you to download our latest development version and read online documentation. You can also contact us individually at: David Turner <[email protected]> Robert Wilhelm <[email protected]> Werner Lemberg <[email protected]> Libpng License This copy of the libpng notices is provided for your convenience. In case of any discrepancy between this copy and the notices in the file png.h that is included in the libpng distribution, the latter shall prevail. COPYRIGHT NOTICE, DISCLAIMER, and LICENSE: libpng versions 0.97, January 1998, through 1.0.6, March 20, 2000, are Copyright (c) 1998, 1999 Glenn Randers-Pehrson, and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.96, with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors: Tom Lane If you modify libpng you may insert additional notices immediately following this sentence. Glenn Randers-Pehrson libpng versions 1.0.7, July 1, 2000, through 1.0.13, April 15, 2002, are Copyright (c) 2000-2002 Glenn Randers-Pehrson and are distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-1.0.6 with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors libpng versions 0.89, June 1996, through 0.96, May 1997, are Copyright (c) 1996, 1997 Andreas Dilger Distributed according to the same disclaimer and license as libpng-0.88, with the following individuals added to the list of Contributing Authors: Simon-Pierre Cadieux Eric S. Raymond Gilles Vollant and with the following additions to the disclaimer: There is no warranty against interference with your enjoyment of the library or against infringement. There is no warranty that our efforts or the library will fulfill any of your particular purposes or needs. This library is provided with all faults, and the entire risk of satisfactory quality, performance, accuracy, and effort is with the user. Willem van Schaik John Bowler Kevin Bracey Sam Bushell Magnus Holmgren Greg Roelofs Tom Tanner libpng versions 0.5, May 1995, through 0.88, January 1996, are Copyright (c) 1995, 1996 Guy Eric Schalnat, Group 42, Inc. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL For the purposes of this copyright and license, "Contributing Authors" is defined as the following set of individuals: 3. Andreas Dilger The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. specifically permit, without fee, and encourage the use of this source code as a component to supporting the PNG file format in commercial products. If you use this source code in a product, acknowledgment is not required but would be appreciated. Dave Martindale Guy Eric Schalnat Paul Schmidt Tim Wegner The PNG Reference Library is supplied "AS IS". The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. disclaim all warranties, expressed or implied, including, without limitation, the warranties of merchantability and of fitness for any purpose. The Contributing Authors and Group 42, Inc. assume no liability for direct, indirect, incidental, special, exemplary, or consequential damages, which may result from the use of the PNG Reference Library, even if advised of the possibility of such damage. Permission is hereby granted to use, copy, modify, and distribute this source code, or portions hereof, for any purpose, without fee, subject to the following restrictions: 1. The origin of this source code must not be misrepresented. 2. Altered versions must be plainly marked as such and must not be misrepresented as being the original source. This Copyright notice may not be removed or altered from any source or altered source distribution. A "png_get_copyright" function is available, for convenient use in "about" boxes and the like: printf("%s",png_get_copyright(NULL)); Also, the PNG logo (in PNG format, of course) is supplied in the files "pngbar.png" and "pngbar.jpg (88x31) and "pngnow.png" (98x31). Libpng is OSI Certified Open Source Software. OSI Certified Open Source is a certification mark of the Open Source Initiative. Glenn Randers-Pehrson [email protected] April 15, 2002 sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice and this permission notice shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE AUTHORS OR COPYRIGHT HOLDERS BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. MIT License Copyright (c) <year> <copyright holders> Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, }} 101 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || zlib License The zlib/libpng License Copyright (c) <year> <copyright holders> This software is provided 'as-is', without any express or implied warranty. In no event will the authors be held liable for any damages arising from the use of this software. Permission is granted to anyone to use this software for any purpose, including commercial applications, and to alter it and redistribute it freely, subject to the following restrictions: 1. The origin of this software must not be misrepresented; you must not claim that you wrote the original software. If you use this software in a product, an acknowledgment in the product documentation would be appreciated but is not required. 2. Altered source versions must be plainly marked as such, and must not be misrepresented as being the original software. 3. This notice may not be removed or altered from any source distribution. SGI Free Software B License Version 2.0. SGI FREE SOFTWARE LICENSE B (Version 2.0, Sept. 18, 2008) Copyright (C) [dates of first publication] Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated 102 documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice including the dates of first publication and either this permission notice or a reference to http:// oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc. Related information • Driver display (p. 83) Application menu in driver display Application menu (app menu) in the driver display provides quick access to commonly used functions for certain apps. The figure is schematic. The app menu in the driver display can be used instead of the centre display and is controlled using the right-hand keypad on the steering wheel. The app menu makes it easier to switch between different apps or functions within the apps without having to let go of the steering wheel. App menu functions Different apps give access to different types of functions. The following apps and their associated functions can be controlled from the app menu: DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL App Functions Trip computer Selection of trip meter, selection of what to show in the driver display, etc. Media player Selection of active source for the media player. Phone Calling a contact from the call list. Navigation Guide to destination, etc. Handling the application menu in the driver display NOTE It is not possible to open the app menu while there is an unacknowledged message in the driver display. The message has to be confirmed first before the app menu can be opened. The app menu closes automatically after a period of inactivity or after certain options have been selected. Driver display (p. 83) Overview of centre display (p. 108) Handling the application menu in the driver display (p. 103) Press on open/close (1). > The app menu opens/closes. – The application menu (the app menu) in the driver display is operated with the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. Related information • • • Opening/closing the app menu The app menu and the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. Navigating and selecting in the app menu 1. Navigate between the apps by pressing on the left or right (2). > Functions for previous/next app are shown in the app menu. Up/down 2. Browse through the functions for the selected app by tapping on up or down (3). Confirm 3. Confirm or highlight an option for the function by pressing on confirm (4). > The function is activated and for some options the app menu then closes. Open/close Left/right If the app menu is opened again, the functions of the most recently selected app are shown first. }} 103 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Related information • • Application menu in driver display (p. 102) Messages in the driver display (p. 104) Messages in the driver display The driver display can show messages to inform or assist the driver in the event of different events. Examples of messages in the driver display. The driver display shows messages that are of high priority for the driver. Messages can be shown in different parts of the driver display depending on what other information is currently being displayed. After a while, or when the message has been acknowledged/ action taken if required, the message disappears from the driver display. If a message needs to be saved, it is placed in the Car Status app, which is opened from the app view in the centre display. Message composition may vary and they can be shown together with graphics, symbols or buttons 104 for acknowledging the message or accepting a request, for example. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Service messages Shown below is a selection of important service messages and their meanings. Message Stop safelyA Turn off engineA Specification Service urgent Drive to workshopA Contact a workshopB to check the car immediately. Service requiredA Contact a workshopB to check the car as soon as possible. Regular maintenance Book time for maintenance Regular maintenance Time for maintenance Time for regular service contact a workshopB. Shown before the next service date. Specification Regular maintenance Time for regular service contact a workshopB. Shown when the service date has passed. Maintenance overdue Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of damage - consult a workshopB. Stop and switch off the engine. Serious risk of damage - consult a workshopB. Message Temporarily offA A B Managing messages in the driver display Messages in the driver display are handled using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. A function has been temporarily switched off and is reset automatically while driving or after starting again. Part of message, shown together with information on where the problem has arisen. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • Managing messages in the driver display (p. 105) • Handling a message saved from the driver display (p. 106) • Message in centre display (p. 139) Examples of messages in the driver display and the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. Left/right Confirm Some messages in the driver display contain one or more buttons for acknowledging the message or accepting a request, for example. Time for regular service contact a workshopB. Shown at the next service date. }} 105 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Managing a new message For messages with buttons: Handling a message saved from the driver display Reading a saved message To read a saved message immediately: 1. Navigate between the buttons by pressing on the left or right (1). – 2. Confirm the selection by pressing on confirm (2). > The message disappears from the driver display. Whether saved from the driver display or the centre display, messages are managed in the centre display. To read a saved message later: For messages without buttons: – Close the message by pressing on confirm (2), or allow the message to close automatically after a while. > The message disappears from the driver display. If a message needs to be saved, it is placed in the Car Status app, which is opened from the app view in the centre display. The message Car message stored in Car Status application is shown in the centre display in conjunction with this. Related information • • • 106 Messages in the driver display (p. 104) Handling a message saved from the driver display (p. 106) Message in centre display (p. 139) Press the button to the right of the Car message stored in Car Status application message in the centre display. > The saved message is shown in the Car Status app. Saved messages can be seen in the Car Status app. Messages that are shown in the driver display and that need to be saved are added in the Car Status app in the centre display. The message Car message stored in Car Status application is shown in the centre display in conjunction with this. 1. Open the Car Status app from the app view in the centre display. > The app is opened in the bottom tile of the home view. 2. Select the Messages tab in the app. > A list of saved messages is shown. 3. Tap on a message to expand/minimise. > More information on the message is shown in the list and the image to the left in the app shows information about the message graphically. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Related information Managing a saved message In maximised mode, some messages have two buttons available to book service or read the owner's manual. • • To book service for a saved message: • – Messages in the driver display (p. 104) Managing messages in the driver display (p. 105) Message in centre display (p. 139) In maximised mode for the message, press Request appoint./Call to make Appointment5 for help in booking service. > With Request appoint.: The Appointments tab opens in the app and creates a request to book service and repair work. With Call to make Appointment: The phone app is initiated and calls a service centre to book service and repair work. To read the owner's manual for a saved message: – In maximised mode for the message, press Owner's manual to read about the message in the owner's manual. > The owner's manual opens in the centre display and shows information linked to the message. Saved messages in the app are deleted automatically each time the engine is started. 5 Market dependent. Volvo ID and selected workshop also need to be registered. 107 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Overview of centre display Many of the car's functions are controlled from the centre display. Presented here is the centre display and its options. 108 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Three of the centre display's basic views. Swipe right or left to access the function or app view respectively6. Function view - car functions that are activated or deactivated with a press. Certain 6 The views are reversed for right-hand drive cars. functions are also so-called trigger functions, which means they open a window with set- ting options. Examples of these include Camera. Settings for the head-up display* }} * Option/accessory. 109 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || are also made from the function view, but adjustments are made using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. Extra subview - recently used apps or car functions that do not belong in any of the other subviews. Tap on the subview to expand it. Home view - the first view that is shown when the screen is started. Climate row - information and direct interaction to set temperature and seat heating for example*. Tap on the symbol in the centre of the climate row in order to open the climate view with more setting options. Application view (app view) - apps that have been downloaded (third-party apps) and apps for embedded functions, such as FM radio. Tap on an app icon to open the app. Status bar - the activities in the car are shown right at the top of the screen. Network and connection information is shown on the left-hand side of the status bar, while mediarelated information, the clock and indication about on-going background activity are shown on the right. Top view - drag the tab down in order to access the top view. Settings, Owner's manual, Profile and the car's saved messages are accessed from here. In some cases contextual settings (e.g. Navigation Settings) and the contextual owner's manual (e.g. Navigation Manual) can also be accessed in the top view. Navigation - leads to map navigation, with e.g. Sensus Navigation*. Tap on the subview to expand it. Media - recently used apps associated with media. Tap on the subview to expand it. Phone - the phone function can be reached from here. Tap on the subview to expand it. 110 • Changing the appearance in the centre display (p. 130) • • • • Changing system language (p. 131) Changing system units (p. 131) Cleaning the centre display (p. 639) Message in centre display (p. 139) Related information • • • • • Managing the centre display (p. 111) Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 114) Function view in centre display (p. 121) Apps (p. 506) Symbols in the centre display's status bar (p. 123) • Other settings in the centre display's top view (p. 131) • Open contextual setup in the centre display (p. 132) • • • • • Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17) Media player (p. 515) Phone (p. 530) Climate controls (p. 213) Switching off and changing the volume of the system sound in the centre display (p. 130) * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Managing the centre display ing apps can be performed by touching the screen in different ways. Many of the car's functions are controlled and regulated from the centre display. The centre display is a touch screen that reacts to touch. Using the touch screen functionality in the centre display The screen reacts differently depending on whether you press, drag or swipe across it. Actions such as browsing between different views, marking objects, scrolling in a list and movProcedure An infrared light curtain just above the surface of the screen enables the screen to detect a finger that is just in front of the screen. This technology makes it possible to use the screen even with gloves on. Two people can interact with the screen at the same time, e.g. to adjust the climate for the driver and passenger side respectively. IMPORTANT Do not use sharp objects on the screen as they may scratch it. The table below presents the different procedures for operating the screen: Execution Result Press once. Highlights an object, confirms a selection or activates a function. Press twice in quick succession. Zooms in on a digital object, such as the map. Press and hold. Grabs an object. Can be used to move apps or map points on the map. Press and hold your finger against the screen and at the same time drag the object to the desired location. Tap once with two fingers. Zooms out from a digital object, such as the map. }} 111 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Procedure Execution Result Drag Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Hold depressed and drag in order to move apps or map points on the map. Drag horizontally or vertically across the screen. Swipe/drag quickly Changes between different views, scrolls a list, text or view. Drag horizontally or vertically across the screen. Note that touching the upper section of the screen may cause the top view to open. 112 Drag apart Zooms in. Drag together Zooms out. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Returning to home view from another view 1. 2. Briefly press the home button below the centre display. > The last position of the home view is shown. drag the control to the desired temperature, • tap on the desired temperature on the control. tap on + or − in order to raise or lower the temperature gradually, or Related information Briefly press again. > All subviews of the home view are set to their default mode. NOTE In home view standard mode - briefly press the home button. An animation that describes access to the different views is shown on the screen. • • The scroll indicator appears in the centre display when it is possible to scroll in the view. • Activating and deactivating centre display (p. 114) • Moving apps and buttons in centre display (p. 123) • Keyboard in centre display (p. 125) Using the controls in the centre display Scrolling in a list, article or view When a scroll indicator is visible in the screen, it is possible to scroll downward or upward in the view. Swipe downwards/upwards anywhere in the view. Temperature control. The control is used for many of the car's functions. Regulate e.g. temperature by means of one of the following: 113 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Activating and deactivating centre display 1. The centre display can be dimmed and reactivated using the home button beneath the screen. 2. Give a long press on the physical home button below the screen. > The screen goes dark except for the climate row, which continues to be shown. All functions connected to the screen are still running. Reactivate the screen - briefly tap on the home button. > The view that was displayed before the screen was switched off will be shown again. NOTE The screen cannot be deactivated when a prompt to perform an action is shown on the screen. Home button for the centre display. The effect of using the home button that the screen dims and the touchscreen no longer reacts to touch. The climate row will still be shown. All functions connected to the screen are still running, such as climate, audio, guidance* and apps. When the centre display is dimmed, it is a good opportunity to clean the screen. The dimming function can also be used to fade the screen so that it does not disturb while driving. NOTE The centre display deactivates automatically when the engine is off and the driver's door is opened. Related information • • • 114 Cleaning the centre display (p. 639) Changing the appearance in the centre display (p. 130) Navigating in the centre display's views There are five different basic views in the centre display: home view, top view, climate view, application view (app view) and function view. The screen is started automatically when the driver's door is opened. Home view Home view is the view that is shown when the screen is started. It consists of four subviews: Navigation, Media, Phone and an extra subview. An app or car function selected from the app or function view starts in the respective subview of the home view. E.g. FM radio starts in the Media tile. The extra tile shows the last used app or car function that is not associated with any of the other three areas. The subviews show brief information about each different app. NOTE When the car is started, the home view's various sub-views show information on the current status of apps. Overview of centre display (p. 108) * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL NOTE In home view standard mode - briefly press the home button. An animation that describes access to the different views is shown on the screen. Status bar pressing on the tab or by dragging/swiping from the top downwards across the screen. In the top view, access is always available to: • Settings • Owner's manual • Profile • The car's saved messages. The activities in the car are shown at the top of the screen. Network and connection information is shown on the left-hand side of the status bar, while media-related information, the clock and indication that background activity is in progress are shown on the right. In the top view, access is given to the following in some cases: • Contextual setting (e.g. Navigation Settings). Change settings directly in the top view when an app (e.g. navigation) is running. Top view • Contextual Owner's Manual (e.g. Navigation Manual). Gain access directly in the top view to articles in the digital owner's manual that are related to the content displayed on screen. Climate view The climate row is always visible at the bottom of the screen. The most common climate settings can be made directly there, such as setting temperature and seat heating*. Press the symbol in the centre of the climate row to open the climate view and gain access to more climate settings. Press the symbol to close the climate view and return to the previous view. Exit the top view - press outside the top view, on the home button or at the bottom of the top view and drag upward. The underlying view is then visible and available for use again. NOTE Top view dragged down. A tab is located in the centre of the status bar at the top of the screen. Open the top view by The top view is not available during starting/ shutdown or when a message is shown on the screen. It is also not available when climate view is shown. }} * Option/accessory. 115 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Application view app view, such as the number of unread text messages for Messages. Function view Tap on an app to open it. The app then opens in the tile to which it belongs, e.g. Media. You can scroll down in the app view, depending on the number of apps. Do this by swiping/dragging from the bottom and up. Go back to the home view again by swiping from left to right7 across the screen, or by pressing the home button. Application view with the car's apps. left7 Swipe from right to across the screen in order to access the application view (app view) from the home view. Apps that have been downloaded (third-party apps) and apps for embedded functions, such as FM radio, are found here. Certain apps show brief information directly in the 7 116 The function view with buttons for different car functions. Swipe from left to right7 across the screen in order to access the function view from the home view. From here you can activate or deactivate different car functions, e.g. BLIS*, Lane Keeping Aid* and Park Assist*. Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction. * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Depending on the amount of functions, it is also possible here to scroll downward in the view. Do this by swiping/dragging from the bottom and up. Unlike in app view, where an app is opened with a press, a function is activated or deactivated by pressing the relevant function button. Some functions (trigger functions) open in a new window when pressed. Go back to the home view again by swiping from right to left7 across the screen, or by pressing the home button. Related information • Managing subviews in centre display (p. 118) • Symbols in the centre display's status bar (p. 123) • Other settings in the centre display's top view (p. 131) • Open contextual setup in the centre display (p. 132) • • • • • • Owner's manual in centre display (p. 17) 7 Driver profiles (p. 135) Climate controls (p. 213) Apps (p. 506) Function view in centre display (p. 121) Overview of centre display (p. 108) Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction. 117 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Managing subviews in centre display Home view consists of four subviews: Navigation, Media, Phone and an extra subview. These views can be expanded. 118 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Expanding a subview from default mode Standard mode and expanded mode of a subview in the centre display. }} 119 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Expanding a subview: – For tiles Navigation, Media and Phone: Press anywhere on the subview. When a tile is expanded, the extra tile in the home view is temporarily forced away. The other two tiles are minimised and only certain information is shown. When the extra tile is tapped, the other three tiles are minimised and only certain information is displayed. The expanded view provides access to the basic functions of the app. Closing an expanded subview: – The subview can be closed in three different ways. • Tap on the upper part of the expanded subview. • Tap on another tile (this tile will then open in expanded mode instead). • Briefly press the physical home button below the centre display. When a new subview is opened in full-screen mode, no information from the other subviews is shown. In expanded mode, open the app in full screen - press on the symbol. Press on the symbol to go back to the expanded mode, or press the home button at the bottom of the screen. Opening or closing a subview in full screen mode The extra tile8 and the tile for Navigation can be opened out in full screen mode, with even more information and more setting options. Home button for the centre display. 8 120 Does not apply to all apps or car functions opened via the extra tile. There is always the option to go back to home view by pressing the home button. To go back to the home view's standard view from full screen mode – press twice on the home button. Related information • • • Managing the centre display (p. 111) Activating and deactivating centre display (p. 114) Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 114) DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Function view in centre display All the buttons for car functions are located in the function view, one of the centre display's basic views. Navigate to the function view from home view by swiping from left to right across the screen9. Different types of buttons There are three different types of buttons for car functions; see below: Type of button Property Affects car function Function buttons Have on/off positions. Most buttons in function view are function buttons. When a function is running, an LED indicator illuminates to the left of the icon for the button. Press the button to activate/deactivate a function. Trigger buttons Do not have on/off positions. When a trigger button is depressed, a window for the function is opened. For example, it may be a window to change seat position. Parking buttons Have on, off and scan modes. Similar to the function buttons but with an extra position for parking scanning. 9 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction. • Camera • Headrest Fold • Head-up Display Adjustments • Park In • Park Out }} 121 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || The buttons' different modes When the LED indicator illuminates in green on a function or parking button, the function is activated. When a function is activated, extra text with an explanation for certain functions is shown. The text is shown for a few seconds and then the button is shown with the LED indicator illuminated. The function is deactivated when the LED indicator is extinguished. For Lane Keeping Aid, the text Works only at certain speeds is shown, for example, when the button is depressed. Press the button once briefly to activate or deactivate the function. When a warning triangle is shown in the righthand section of the button there is something not working as intended. Related information • • 122 Managing the centre display (p. 111) Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 114) DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Moving apps and buttons in centre display NOTE Hide the apps that you rarely or never use by moving them to the bottom, off the visible screen. This way it will be easier to find the apps you use more often. The apps and buttons for car functions in the app view and function view respectively can be moved and organised as desired. 1. 2. 3. Swipe from right to left10 to access the app view, or swipe from left to right10 to access the function view. Tap on an app or button and hold it down. > The app or button changes size and becomes slightly transparent. It is then possible to move it. Drag the app or button to a vacant space in the view. The maximum number of rows available for use in order to position apps or buttons is 48. To move an app or button outside the visible view, drag it to the bottom of the view. New rows are then added, where the app or button can be located. NOTE Apps and car function buttons cannot be added to locations that are already occupied. Related information • • • Function view in centre display (p. 121) Apps (p. 506) Managing the centre display (p. 111) An app or button can thus be located further down and is then not visible in the normal mode for the view. Swipe across the screen to scroll up or down in the view. Symbols in the centre display's status bar Overview of the symbols that can be shown in the centre display's status bar. The status bar shows activities in progress and, in some cases, their status. Not all symbols are shown all the time due to the limited space in the status bar. Symbol Specification Connected to the Internet. Roaming activated. Signal strength in mobile phone network. Bluetooth device connected. Bluetooth activated but no device connected. Information sent to and from GPS. Connected to Wi-Fi network. Tethering activated (Wi-Fi hotspot). The car then shares the available connection. 10 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction. }} 123 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Symbol Specification Car modem activated. • • • Connecting a device via USB port (p. 522) Phone (p. 530) Date and time (p. 92) USB sharing active. Process in progress. Timer for preconditioning active. Audio source being played back. Audio source stopped. Phone call in progress. Audio source muted. News is received from the radio channel. Traffic information is received. Clock. Related information • • • 124 Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 114) Message in centre display (p. 139) Internet-connected car* (p. 539) * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Keyboard in centre display The centre display keyboard makes it possible make entries using keys. It is also possible to "draw in" letters and characters on the screen by hand. The keyboard can be used to enter characters, letters and numbers, e.g. to write text messages from the car, enter passwords or search for articles in the digital owner's manual. The keyboard is only shown when entries can be made on the screen. }} 125 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || The image shows an overview of some of the buttons which may be shown in the keyboard. The appearance varies depending on language settings and the context in which the keyboard is being used. 126 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Row of suggested words or characters11. The suggested words are adjusted as new letters are being entered. Browse among the suggestions by pressing on the right and left arrows. Tap on a suggestion to select it. Note that this function is not supported by all language selections. If not available, the row will not be shown on the keyboard. The characters available on the keyboard depend on which language was selected (see point 7). Tap on a character to enter it. The button works in different ways, depending on the context in which the keyboard is used - either to enter @ (when an email address is entered) or to create a new row (for normal text input). Hides the keyboard. If this is not possible, the button is not shown. Used to enter capital letters. Press again to enter one capital letter and then continue with lower-case letters. Another press makes all letters capital letters. The next press restores the keyboard to lower-case letters. In this mode, the first letter after a full stop, exclamation mark or question mark is a capital letter. The first letter in the text field is also a capital letter. In text fields intended for names or addresses, each word automatically starts with a capital letter. In text fields for password, web address or email address 11 entry, all letters are automatically lower case unless otherwise set with the button. Variants of a letter or character Number entry. The keyboard (2) is then shown with numbers. Press , which in number mode is shown instead of , to to return to the letter keyboard, or open the keyboard with special characters. Changes text input language, e.g. EN. The available characters and word suggestions (1) vary depending on the selected language. To make it possible to change languages for the keyboard, the languages must first be added under Settings. Space. Undoes entered text. Pressing briefly deletes one character at a time. Hold the button depressed to delete characters more quickly. Changes keyboard mode to write letters and characters by hand instead. Pressing the confirmation button above the keypad (not visible in the illustration) confirms the entered text. The appearance of the button differs depending on context. Variants of a letter or character, e.g. é or è, can be entered by holding down the letter or character. A box is displayed showing possible variants of letters or characters. Press the required variant. If no variant is selected, the original letter/ character is entered. Related information • Changing keyboard language in centre display (p. 128) • Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display (p. 128) • • Managing the centre display (p. 111) Managing text messages (p. 536) Applies to Asiatic languages. 127 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Changing keyboard language in centre display Switching between different languages in the keyboard To make it possible to switch between different languages for the keyboard, the languages must first be added under Settings. When a number of languages have been selected in Settings, the button in the keyboard is used to switch between the different languages. Adding or deleting languages in settings The keyboard is automatically set to the same languages as the system language. The keyboard language can be manually adapted without affecting the system language. 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press System System Languages and Units Keyboard Layouts. 3. Select one or more languages from the list. > It is now possible to switch between the selected languages directly from the keyboard for text input. If no languages have been actively selected under Settings, the keyboard retains the same language as the car's system language. To change keyboard language with list: 1. Give a long press on the button. > A list opens. 2. Select the required language. If more than four languages have been selected under Settings, it is possible to scroll in the list from the keyboard. > The keyboard is adapted to the selected language and other word suggestions are given. – • • 128 Applies to certain system languages. The centre display keyboard allows you to enter characters, letters and words on the screen by "drawing" by hand. Press the button on the keyboard to change from typing with the keys to entering letters and characters by hand. To change the keyboard language without displaying the list: One short press of the button. > The keyboard is adapted to the next language in the list without displaying the list. Related information 12 Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display Changing system language (p. 131) Keyboard in centre display (p. 125) Area for writing characters/letters/words/ parts of word. The text field where the characters or word suggestions12 appear as they are written on screen (1). DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Suggestions for characters/letters/word/ part of word. It is possible to scroll through the list. Space. A space can also be created by entering a dash (-) in the area for hand-written letters (1). See the heading "Entering a space in the free text field with handwriting recognition" below. Undo entered text. Press briefly to delete one character/one letter at a time. Wait a moment before pressing again to delete the next character/letter, etc. Return to the keyboard with regular character input. Switch off/on sound when entering. Hide the keyboard. If this is not possible, the button is not shown. Change text input language. 13 Writing characters/letters/words by hand 1. Write a character, a letter, a word or parts of a word in the area for hand-written letters (1). Write a word or parts of a word above each other or on a line. > A number of suggested characters, letters or words is shown (3). The most likely choice is found at the top of the list. Deleting/changing characters/letters written by hand IMPORTANT Do not use sharp objects on the screen as they may scratch it. 2. Enter the character/letters/word by waiting a moment. > The character/letter/word at the top of the list is entered. It is also possible to select a different character by pressing the required character, letter or word in the list. For Arabic keyboard - swipe in the opposite direction. Swiping from right to left creates a space. Delete all characters in the text field (2) by swiping across the handwriting field (1). – There are several options for deleting/ changing characters/letters: • Press the intended letter or word in the list (3). • Press the text undo button (5) to delete the letter and begin again. • Swipe horizontally from right to left13 over the area for handwritten letters (1). Delete multiple letters by swiping over the area several times. • Pressing the X in the text field (2) deletes all of the entered text. }} 129 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Changing row in the free text field with handwriting Changing the appearance in the centre display The appearance of the screen in the centre display can be changed by selecting a theme. Change row by hand by drawing the above character in the handwriting field14. Entering a space in the free text field with handwriting recognition 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press My Car Themes. 3. Then select a theme, e.g. Minimalistic or Chrome Rings. Displays Display As a supplement to these appearances, it is possible to choose between Normal and Bright. With Normal, the screen background is dark and the text is light. This alternative is the default for all themes. A light variant can also be selected, in which the background is light and the text is dark. This alternative can be useful in e.g. strong daylight. This alternative is always available for the user and is not affected by the surrounding lighting. Related information • Other settings in the centre display's top view (p. 131) • Activating and deactivating centre display (p. 114) • Cleaning the centre display (p. 639) Enter a space by drawing a dash from left to right15. Related information • 14 15 130 Keyboard in centre display (p. 125) For Arabic keyboards - draw the same character, but reversed. For Arabic keyboard - draw the dash from right to left. Switching off and changing the volume of the system sound in the centre display The centre display can be used to change the volume of the system sound or switch off the system sound altogether. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press Sound 3. Under Touch Sounds, drag the control to change the volume/switch off screen touch sounds. Drag the control to the desired volume. System Volumes. Related information • • • Overview of centre display (p. 108) Other settings in the centre display's top view (p. 131) Audio settings (p. 504) DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Changing system units Changing system language Units settings are defined in the centre display's Settings menu. Language settings are defined in the centre display menu Settings. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Continue to System System Languages and Units Units of Measurement. 3. Select a unit standard: NOTE Changing the language in the centre display may mean that some owner's information is not compliant with national or local laws and regulations. Do not switch to a language that is difficult to understand as this may make it difficult to find your way back through the screen structure. • Metric - kilometres, litres and degrees Celsius. Other settings in the centre display's top view You can change settings and information for many of the car's functions via the centre display. 1. Open the top view by pressing on the tab at the top or by dragging/swiping from the top downwards across the screen. 2. Press Settings to open the settings menu. • Imperial - miles, gallons and degrees Celsius. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Continue to System and Units. 3. Select System Language. Languages that support voice recognition have a voice recognition symbol. > The language in the driver display, centre display and head-up display is changed. • US - miles, gallons and degrees Fahrenheit. > The units in the driver display, centre display and head-up display are changed. Related information • • • Overview of centre display (p. 108) Other settings in the centre display's top view (p. 131) Changing system language (p. 131) System Languages Related information • • • Top view with button for Settings. 3. Press on one of the categories and the subcategories to navigate to the required setting. 4. Change one or more settings. Different types of setting are changed in different ways. > The changes are saved immediately. Overview of centre display (p. 108) Other settings in the centre display's top view (p. 131) Changing system units (p. 131) }} 131 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Open contextual setup in the centre display 2. Press Navigation Settings. > A navigation settings page opens. It is possible to use contextual setup for most of the car's basic apps so that you can change settings directly in the top view in the centre display. 3. Change settings as desired and confirm the selections. Press Close or the physical home button beneath the centre display to close setup view. Most of the car's basic apps have this contextual setting option, but not all. Third party apps Third party apps are not included in the car's system from the beginning, but are the type that can be downloaded e.g. Volvo ID. Here the settings are always made inside the app and not from the top view. A subcategory in the settings menu with different types of settings (here, a multi-selector button and radio buttons). Related information • • • Overview of centre display (p. 108) Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 133) Table showing centre display settings (p. 134) Related information Other settings in the centre display's top view (p. 131) • • Overview of centre display (p. 108) • Downloading apps (p. 507) Top view with button for contextual setting. Contextual setting is a shortcut for accessing a specific setting relating to the active function shown on screen. The apps installed in the car from the beginning, e.g. FM radio and USB, are a part of Sensus and are part of the car's embedded functions. The settings for these apps can be changed directly via contextual setting in the top view. When contextual setup is available: 1. 132 • Drag down top view when an app is in expanded mode, e.g. Navigation. Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 133) DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Resetting user data for change of ownership Resetting settings in the centre display In the event of a change of ownership, user data and system settings should be restored to factory settings. It is possible to reset the defaults for all settings defined in the centre display settings menu. The settings in the car can be reset at different levels. Restore all user data and system settings to the original factory settings in the event of a change of ownership. In the event of a change of ownership it is also important to change the owner of the Volvo On Call* service. There are two different types of resets for settings in the settings menu: • Factory reset - clears all data and files and resets all settings to their default values. • Reset Personal Settings - clears personal data and resets personal settings to their default values. Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 133) • Resetting settings in the driver profiles (p. 139) Press OK to confirm the reset. For Reset Personal Settings, the reset must be confirmed by pressing Reset for the active profile or Reset for all profiles. > Selected settings are reset. Two types of reset Related information • 4. Related information • • • Overview of centre display (p. 108) Other settings in the centre display's top view (p. 131) Table showing centre display settings (p. 134) Resetting settings Follow these instructions to reset your settings. NOTE Factory reset is only possible when the car is stationary. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Continue to System 3. Select the required reset type. > A pop-up window is shown. Factory reset. * Option/accessory. 133 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Table showing centre display settings Subcategories Subcategories The settings menu in the centre display has a number of main categories and subcategories where settings and information for many of the car's functions are collected. Locking TV* Parking Brake and Suspension Video Wipers Communication There are seven main categories: My Car, Sound, Navigation, Media, Communication, Climate and System. Sound Subcategories Phone In turn, each category contains a number of subcategories and setting options. The tables below show the first level of subcategories. The setting options for a function or area are described in more detail in the corresponding section of the owner's manual. Tone Text Messages Balance Android Auto* System Volumes Apple CarPlay* Navigation Subcategories Bluetooth Devices Some settings are personal, which means that they can be saved to Driver Profiles. Other settings are global, which means they are not linked to a driver profile. Subcategories Wi-Fi Map Car Wi-Fi Hotspot Route and Guidance Car Modem Internet* My Car Traffic Volvo On Call* Subcategories Displays IntelliSafe Drive Preferences/Individual Drive Mode* Lights and Lighting Media Volvo Service Networks Subcategories Climate AM/FM radio The main category Climate has no subcategories. DAB* Gracenote® Mirrors and Convenience 134 * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL System Subcategories Driver Profile Date and Time System Languages and Units Privacy and Data Keyboard Layouts Voice Control* Factory reset System Information Related information • • • Overview of centre display (p. 108) Other settings in the centre display's top view (p. 131) Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 133) Driver profiles Many of the settings made in the car can be adapted according to the driver's personal preferences and can be saved in one or more driver profiles. The personal settings are automatically saved in the active driver profile. Each key can be linked to a driver profile. When the linked key is used, the car is adapted to the settings of that specific driver profile. What settings are saved in the driver profiles? Many of the settings defined in the car will be saved automatically in the active driver profile unless the profile is protected. In the car, the settings defined are either personal or global. Only personal settings are saved in driver profiles. Settings that can be saved in a driver profile include, amongst other things, screens, mirrors, front seats, navigation*, audio and media system, language and voice control. Some settings, referred to as global settings, can be changed but are not saved to a specific driver profile. Changes to global settings affect all profiles. They remain the same regardless of which driver profile is active. Keyboard layout settings are an example of global settings. If driver profile X is used to add additional languages to the keyboard, these remain available for use even if driver profile Y is used. The keyboard layout settings are not saved to a specific driver profile - the settings are global. Personal preferences If driver profile X was used to e.g. set centre display brightness, driver profile Y is not affected by this setting. It has been saved to driver profile X the brightness setting is a personal setting. Related information • • • Selecting driver profile (p. 136) Renaming a driver profile (p. 136) Linking remote control key to driver profile (p. 137) • • Protect driver profile (p. 137) • Table showing centre display settings (p. 134) Resetting settings in the driver profiles (p. 139) Global settings The global settings and parameters are not changed when changing between driver profiles. * Option/accessory. 135 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Selecting driver profile When the centre display has been started, the selected driver profile is shown at the top of the screen. The driver profile last used is the one that will be active next time the car is unlocked. It is possible to change to another driver profile after the car has been unlocked. However, if the remote control key has been linked to a driver profile then this is what is selected when the car is started. There are two options for changing to another driver profile. Option 1: 1. Tap on the name of the driver profile shown in the top of the centre display when the display has been started. > A list of selectable driver profiles is shown. 2. Select the driver profile required. 3. Press Confirm. > The driver profile is selected and the system loads the settings for the new driver profile. Option 2: 136 1. Drag down the top view in the centre display. 2. Press Profile. > The same list as for Option 1 is shown. 3. Select the driver profile required. 4. Press Confirm. > The driver profile is selected and the system loads the settings for the new driver profile. Option 3: 1. Drag down the top view in the centre display. 2. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 3. Press System Driver Profiles. > A list of selectable driver profiles is shown. 4. Select the driver profile required. 5. Press Confirm. > The driver profile is selected and the system loads the settings for the new driver profile. Renaming a driver profile It is possible to change the name of the different driver profiles used in the car. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press System 3. Select Edit Profile. > A menu opens, where the profile can be edited. 4. Tap in the box Profile Name. > A keyboard appears, and it is possible to change the name. Tap on to close the keyboard. 5. Save the name change by pressing Back or Close. > The name has now been changed. Related information • • • • Driver profiles (p. 135) NOTE Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 114) A profile name cannot start with a space, as the profile name will not then be saved. Renaming a driver profile (p. 136) Linking remote control key to driver profile (p. 137) Driver Profiles. Related information • • Selecting driver profile (p. 136) Keyboard in centre display (p. 125) DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Protect driver profile 5. In some cases it is preferable not to save various settings defined in the car to the active driver profile. In this case, it is possible to protect the driver profile. NOTE Protecting a driver profile is only possible when the car is stationary. To protect a driver profile: 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press System 3. Select Edit Profile. > A menu opens, where the profile can be edited. 4. Driver Profiles. Save your profile protection option by pressing Back/Close. > When the profile is protected, settings defined in the car will not be saved automatically to the profile. Instead, your changes must be saved manually under Settings System Driver Profiles Edit Profile by pressing Save current settings to the profile. When the profile is unprotected, on the other hand, your settings will be saved automatically to the profile. Related information • Driver profiles (p. 135) Linking remote control key to driver profile It is possible to link your key to a driver profile. The driver profile along with all of its settings will then be automatically selected every time the car is used with that specific remote control key. The first time the remote control key is used, it is not linked to any specific driver profile. When the car is started, the Guest profile will automatically be activated. A driver profile can be selected manually without linking it to the key. When the car is unlocked, the last active driver profile is activated. Once the key has been linked to a driver profile, a driver profile does not need to be selected when that specific key is used. Linking a remote control key to a driver profile Select Protect Profile to protect the profile. NOTE Connecting a remote control key to a driver profile is only possible when the car is stationary. First select the profile to be linked to the key, if the profile to be linked is not already active. The active profile can then be linked to the key. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. }} 137 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || 2. Press System 3. Select the desired profile. The display returns to the home view. The Guest profile cannot be linked to a key. 4. Driver Profiles. 5. Drag down the top view again and tap on Settings System Driver Profiles Edit Profile. Select Connect key to link the profile with the key. It is not possible to link a driver profile to a different key than the one currently being used in the car. If there are multiple keys in the car, the message More than one key is found, put the key you want to connect on backup reader will be displayed. Backup reader's location in the tunnel console. > When the message Profile connected to key is shown, the key and the driver profile are linked. 6. 138 Press OK. > This key is now linked to the driver profile and will remain linked as long as the Connect key box is not unticked. Related information • • • Driver profiles (p. 135) Renaming a driver profile (p. 136) Remote control key (p. 245) DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Resetting settings in the driver profiles Settings that have been saved to one or more driver profiles can be reset if the car is stationary. Message in centre display The centre display can show messages to inform or assist the driver in the event of different events. NOTE Related information Factory reset is only possible when the car is stationary. 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press System Factory reset Personal Settings. 3. Select one of the options Reset for the active profile, Reset for all profiles or Cancel. Reset Related information • • Driver profiles (p. 135) Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 133) Pop-up messages In some cases, a message is shown in the form of a pop-up window. Pop-up messages have higher priority than messages shown in the status bar and require acknowledgement/action before they disappear. • Managing messages in the centre display (p. 140) • Handling a message saved from the centre display (p. 140) • Messages in the driver display (p. 104) Example of a message in the centre display's top view. The centre display shows messages that are of lower priority for the driver. Most messages are shown above the centre display's status bar. After a while, or when any required action related to the message has been taken, the message disappears from the status bar. If a message needs to be saved, it is positioned in the top view in the centre display. Message composition may vary and they can be shown together with graphics, symbols or a button for activating/deactivating a function linked to the message. 139 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Managing messages in the centre display Messages in the centre display are handled in centre display views. For messages without buttons: – Close the message by tapping on it, or allow the message to close automatically after a while. > The message disappears from the status bar. Handling a message saved from the centre display Whether saved from the driver display or the centre display, messages are managed in the centre display. If a message needs to be saved, it is positioned in the top view in the centre display. Related information • • • Message in centre display (p. 139) Handling a message saved from the centre display (p. 140) Messages in the driver display (p. 104) Example of a message in the centre display's top view. Some messages in the centre display have a button (or several buttons in pop-up messages) for e.g. activating/deactivating a function linked to the message. Managing a new message For messages with buttons: – 140 Press the button to perform the action or allow the message to close automatically after a while. > The message disappears from the status bar. Examples of saved messages and possible options in the top view. Messages that are shown in the centre display that need to be saved are added in the top view of the centre display. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Reading a saved message 1. Open the top view in the centre display. > A list of saved messages is shown. Messages with an arrow to the right can be maximised. 2. Tap on a message to expand/minimise. > More information on the message is shown in the list and the image to the left in the app shows information about the message graphically. Head-up display* The head-up display supplements the car's driver display and projects information from the driver display onto the windscreen. The projected image can only be seen from the driver position. Managing a saved message Some messages have a button for e.g. activating/ deactivating a function linked to the message. – Press the button to perform the action. Related information • Message in centre display (p. 139) Managing messages in the centre display (p. 140) Messages in the driver display (p. 104) • • use of polarising sunglasses • • objects on the display unit's cover glass a driving position which means that the driver is not sitting centred in the seat unfavourable light conditions. IMPORTANT Saved messages in the top view are deleted automatically when the car is switched off. • • NOTE The driver's ability to see the information in the head-up display is impaired by the following The head-up display shows warnings and information relating to speed, cruise control functions, navigation, etc. in the driver's field of vision. Road Sign Information and incoming phone calls can also be shown in the head up display. The display unit from which the information is projected is located in the instrument panel. To avoid damage to the display unit's cover glass - do not store any objects on the cover glass and make sure that no objects fall down onto it. }} * Option/accessory. 141 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL The snowflake symbol illuminates in the event of a risk of icy conditions. || NOTE Certain visual defects may cause headaches and a feeling of stress during the use of the head-up display. Related information • Activating and deactivating the head-up display* (p. 143) • • Cleaning the head up display* (p. 640) Head up display when replacing the windscreen* (p. 612) City Safety in the head-up display Examples of what can be shown in the display. Speed Cruise control In the event of a collision warning, the information in the head-up display is replaced by the warning symbol for City Safety. This graphic is illuminated even if the head-up display is switched off. Navigation Road signs A number of symbols can be shown temporarily in the head-up display, e.g.: If the warning symbol illuminates - read the warning message in the driver display. If the information symbol illuminates read the message in the driver display. The warning symbol for City Safety flashes in order to attract the driver's attention if there is a risk of collision. 142 * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Activating and deactivating the head-up display* The head-up display can be activated and deactivated when the car has been started. Press the Head-up Display button in the centre display function view. An indicator in the button illuminates when the function is activated. Related information • • Settings for head-up display* Adjust the settings for the head-up display's projection onto the windscreen. Settings can be defined when the car has been started and a projected image is shown on the windscreen. Selecting display options Select which functions are to be shown in the head-up display. 1. Press the Head-up Display Adjustments button in the centre display function view. 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. 2. Press My Car Displays Display Options. Adjust the brightness and vertical position of the projected image in the driver's field of vision using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. 3. Select one or more functions: Settings for head-up display* (p. 143) Head-up display* (p. 141) Adjusting brightness and vertical position • • • • Head-Up Show Navigation Show Road Sign Information Show Driver Support Show Phone The setting is saved as a personal setting in the driver profile. Reducing the brightness Increasing the brightness Raising the position }} * Option/accessory. 143 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Lowering the position Voice recognition16 Confirm The driver can use voice recognition to control certain functions in the media player, Bluetoothconnected phone, climate system and Volvo's navigation system*. The brightness of the graphics is automatically adapted to their background light conditions. The brightness is also affected by the adjustment of the brightness in the car's other displays. Voice commands offer additional convenience and assist the driver to not be distracted so that he or she can concentrate on driving, the road and the traffic situation. The height position can be stored in the memory function for the power* front seat using the keypad in the driver's door. WARNING Calibrate the horizontal position Rotate anticlockwise The head-up display's horizontal position may need to be calibrated if the windscreen or display unit is replaced. Calibration means that the projected image is rotated clockwise or anticlockwise. 1. 2. 3. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. Select My Car Displays Head-Up Display Options Head-Up Display Calibration. Calibrate the image's horizontal position with the steering wheel's right keypad. Rotate clockwise The driver always holds overall responsibility for driving the vehicle in a safe manner and complying with all applicable rules of the road. Confirm Related information • • • • Head-up display* (p. 141) Activating and deactivating the head-up display* (p. 143) Driver profiles (p. 135) Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 184) Voice control system microphone 16 144 Applies to certain markets. * Option/accessory. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Voice control is done in dialogue form with the user saying commands and receiving verbal responses from the system. The voice recognition system uses the same microphone as Bluetoothconnected devices, and the voice recognition system's responses are given via the car's speakers. In some cases, a text message is also shown in the driver display. Functions are controlled from the right-hand steering wheel keypad. Settings are made via the centre display. Using voice recognition17 System updating The voice recognition system is continuously improved. Download updates for optimal performance from support.volvocars.com. • Speak after the tone with a normal voice at a normal tempo. • Do not speak while the system is replying (the system cannot understand commands during this time). • Avoid background noise in the passenger compartment by having the doors, windows and panoramic roof* closed. Related information • • • • • Using voice recognition (p. 145) Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 146) Voice control of radio and media (p. 147) Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 203) Settings for voice recognition (p. 148) Depress the steering wheel button for voice recognition to activate the system and initiate a dialogue using voice commands. Example of voice recognition control Remember the following: Voice recognition can be deactivated as follows: • • briefly press and say "Cancel". a long press on the steering wheel button for until you hear two beeps. voice control To speed up communication and skip the prompts from the system, press the steering wheel button for voice recognition when the system voice is speaking and say the next command. 17 Applies to certain markets. To change the system audio volume, turn the rotary volume knob when the voice speaks. It is possible to use other buttons during voice control. However, other sounds will be silenced during dialogue with the system, which means that it is not possible to execute any functions linked with audio using the buttons. Press , say "Call [Forename] [Surname] [number category]" - dials the selected contact from the phone book. If the contact has several phone numbers (e.g. home, mobile, work), the right category must be referred to. So press Mobile". and say "Call Robin Smith Commands/phrases The following commands can generally be used, regardless of the situation: • "Repeat" - repeats the last voice instruction in the ongoing dialogue. • • "Cancel" - discontinue the dialogue. "Help" - starts a help dialogue. The system replies with the commands available in the current situation, a prompt or an example. Commands for specific functions such as phone and radio are described in specific sections. }} * Option/accessory. 145 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL || Digits The number commands are stated differently depending on the function to be controlled: • • • Phone numbers and postcodes must be spoken individually, number by number, e.g. zero three one two two four four three (03122443). House numbers can be spoken individually or in groups, e.g. two two or twenty-two (22). For English and Dutch, several groups can be said in sequence, e.g. twenty-two twentytwo (22 22). For English, double or triple can be used, e.g. double zero (00). Numbers can be given within the range 0-2300. Frequencies can be spoken as ninety eight point eight (98.8), a hundred and four point two or hundred four point two (104.2). Speed and repetition mode It is possible to adjust the speed if the voice is speaking too quickly. Repetition mode can be enabled so that the system repeats what you have said. To change the speed or activate/deactivate repetition mode: 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press System settings. Voice Control and select • Repeat Voice Command • Speech Rate 146 Related information • • Voice recognition (p. 144) Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 146) • • Voice control of radio and media (p. 147) • Settings for voice recognition (p. 148) Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 203) Controlling a telephone with voice recognition18 Call a contact, have messages read aloud or dictate brief messages with voice control commands to a Bluetooth connected telephone. To specify a contact in the phone book, the voice recognition command must include contact information that is entered in the phone book. If a contact, e.g. Robyn Smith, has several phone numbers then the number category can also be stated, e.g. Home or Mobile: "Call Robin Smith Mobile". Press mands: and say one of the following com- • "Call [contact]" - dials the selected contact from the phone book. • "Call [phone number]" - dials the phone number. • • "Recent calls" - displays the call list. • "Read message" - message is read out. If there are several messages - select which message should be read out. "Message to [contact]" - users are requested to say a brief message. The message is then repeated aloud and the user can choose to send19 or revise the message. For this function to work, the car must be connected to the Internet. DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Related information • • • • • • Voice recognition (p. 144) Using voice recognition (p. 145) Voice control of radio and media (p. 147) Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 203) Settings for voice recognition (p. 148) Internet-connected car* (p. 539) Voice control of radio and media20 Commands for radio and media player device control are shown below. Tap on mands: • "Media" - starts a dialogue for media and radio and shows examples of commands. • "Play [artist]" - plays back music by the selected artist. • "Play [song title]" - plays back the selected song. • "Play [song title] from [album]" - plays back the selected song from the selected album. • "Play [TV channel name]" - starts the selected TV channel*21. • "Play [radio station]" - starts playing back the selected radio channel. • "Tune to [frequency]" - starts the selected radio frequency in the current frequency band. If no radio source is active, the FM band is started by default. • 18 19 20 21 and say one of the following com- • • • • • • • • • "Radio" - starts FM radio. "Radio FM" - starts FM radio. "DAB " - starts DAB radio*. "TV" - starts playback from TV*21. "CD" - starts playback from CD*. "USB" - starts playback from USB. "iPod" - starts playback from iPod. "Bluetooth" - starts playback from a Bluetooth-connected media source. "Similar music" — plays back music similar to the music currently playing back from USB devices. Related information • • • Voice recognition (p. 144) Using voice recognition (p. 145) Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 146) • Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 203) • Settings for voice recognition (p. 148) "Tune to [frequency] [wavelength]" starts the selected radio frequency in the selected frequency band. Applies to certain markets. Only certain phones can broadcast messages from the car. For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com. Applies to certain markets. Applies to certain markets. * Option/accessory. 147 DISPLAYS AND VOICE CONTROL Settings for voice recognition22 Related information Settings for the voice control system are selected here. • • • Settings System Voice Control Settings can be made within the following areas: • Repeat Voice Command • Gender • Speech Rate Audio settings Select audio settings under: Settings Sound Voice Control System Volumes Language settings Voice recognition is not possible for all languages. Languages available for voice recognition are marked with an icon in the language list . Changing the language also affects menu, message and help texts. Settings System System Languages and Units System Language 22 148 Applies to certain markets. • • • • Voice recognition (p. 144) Using voice recognition (p. 145) Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 146) Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 203) Voice control of radio and media (p. 147) Audio settings (p. 504) Changing system language (p. 131) LIGHTING LIGHTING Lighting control The different lighting controls are used to control both exterior and interior lighting. The left-hand stalk switch activates and adjusts the exterior lighting. The interior brightness is adjusted using a thumbwheel on the instrument panel. Exterior lighting Position Specification Position Daytime running lights. Specification Daytime running lights and position lamps in daylight. Main beam flash can be used. Dipped beam and position lamps in weak daylight or darkness, or when the front fog lamp* and/or rear fog lamp are activated. Daytime running lights and position lamps. Position lamps when the car is parked.A The Active main beam function can be activated. Main beam flash can be used. Main beam can be activated when dipped beam is switched on. Dipped beam and position lamps. Main beam can be activated. Main beam flash can be used. Main beam flash can be used. Active main beam on/off. A If the car is stationary but running, the rotating ring can be moved to position from another position to switch on only the position lamps instead of other lighting. Rotating ring in the left-hand stalk switch. When the car's electrical system is in ignition position II, the following functions are available for the rotating ring's different positions: Volvo recommends that when the vehicle is driven. mode is used WARNING The car's lighting system is not able to determine when daylight is too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in fog and rain, in all situations. The driver is always responsible for ensuring that the car is driven with a beam pattern suitable for the traffic situation and in accordance with applicable traffic regulations. 150 * Option/accessory. LIGHTING Thumbwheel in instrument panel Adjusting light functions via the centre display Several light functions can be adjusted and activated via the centre display. This applies to active main beam, home safe lighting and approach light, for example. 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Press My Car 3. Select Exterior Lights or Interior Lighting and then select the function that needs to be adjusted. Thumbwheel (to left) for adjusting interior brightness. Related information • • • • • • • • • • • Adjusting light functions via the centre display (p. 151) Interior lighting (p. 159) Position lamps (p. 151) Using direction indicators (p. 155) Using main beam (p. 153) Rear fog lamp (p. 157) Brake lights (p. 157) Emergency brake lights (p. 158) Hazard warning flashers (p. 158) Lights and Lighting. Related information • • • • • • Dipped beam (p. 153) Active bending lights* (p. 156) Position lamps Position lamps can be used so that other road users can see the car if it stops or is parked. The position lamp is switched on with the rotating ring on the stalk switch. • Lighting control (p. 150) Active main beam (p. 154) Using home safe lighting (p. 159) Stalk switch rotating ring in position lamps position. Approach light duration (p. 159) Turn the rotating ring to the position - the position lamps are switched on (number plate lighting is switched on at the same time). Using direction indicators (p. 155) Other settings in the centre display's top view (p. 131) Function view in centre display (p. 121) If the car's electrical system is in ignition position II then the daytime running lights are switched on instead of the front position lamps. When the rotating ring is in this position, the position lamps are switched on regardless of the ignition position of the car's electrical system. If the car is stationary but running, the rotating ring can be moved to the position lamp }} * Option/accessory. 151 LIGHTING || position from another position to switch on only the position lamps instead of other lighting. When driving for more than 30 seconds at max. 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), or if the speed exceeds 10 km/h (approx. 6 mph), the daytime running lights are switched on. The driver should . turn to a position other than If the tailgate is opened when it is dark outside, the rear position lamps come on (if not already switched on) to warn road users approaching from behind. This takes place irrespective of the position of the rotating ring or the ignition position of the car's electrical system. Daytime running lights The car has sensors that detect the light conditions in the surroundings. The daytime running lights are switched on when the rotating ring on , or the stalk switch is in position as well as when the car's electrical system is in ignition position II. In position , the headlamps change automatically to dipped beam in weak daylight or darkness. WARNING This system help to save energy - it cannot determine in all situations when daylight is too weak or sufficiently strong, e.g. in mist and rain. The driver is always responsible for ensuring that the car is driven with the correct beam pattern for the traffic situation and in accordance with applicable traffic regulations. Related information • • • Related information • • takes place if the front fog lamp* and/or rear fog lamp are activated. Lighting control (p. 150) Ignition positions (p. 440) Lighting control (p. 150) Ignition positions (p. 440) Dipped beam (p. 153) Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position. If the stalk switch rotating ring is in the position, the daytime running lights (DRL1) are switched on when the car is driven in daylight. The car automatically changes lighting from daytime running light to dipped beam in weak daylight or darkness. Changing to dipped beam also 1 152 Daytime Running Lights * Option/accessory. LIGHTING Dipped beam When driving with the stalk switch's rotating ring position, dipped beam is activated in the automatically in weak daylight or darkness or when the car's electrical system is in ignition position II. Note that the rotating ring in the left-hand stalk switch must be in mode for tunnel detection to work. Related information • • • Lighting control (p. 150) Using main beam Main beam is operated with the left-hand stalk switch. Main beam is the car's strongest lighting and should be used when driving in the dark for better visibility, as long as it does not dazzle other road users. Ignition positions (p. 440) Daytime running lights (p. 152) Stalk switch rotating ring in AUTO position. Steering wheel stalk switch with rotating ring. With the stalk switch's rotating ring in position, dipped beam is also activated automatically if the rear fog lamp is activated. Main beam flash With the stalk switch's rotating ring in the position, dipped beam is always activated when the car's electrical system is in ignition position II. Move the stalk switch backwards slightly to main beam flash position. Main beam comes on until the stalk switch is released. Tunnel detection The car detects when it is driven into a tunnel and switches from daytime running lights to dipped beam. }} 153 LIGHTING || Main beam Main beam can be activated when the steering wheel stalk switch's rotating ring is in 2 or . Activate main position beam by moving the stalk switch forwards. Deactivate by moving the stalk switch backwards. Active main beam Activate active main beam Active main beam is a function which uses a camera sensor at the top edge of the windscreen to detect the headlamp beams from oncoming traffic or the rear lights of vehicles in front, and then switches from main beam to dipped beam. Active main beam is activated and deactivated by turning the rotating ring on the right-hand stalk . The rotating ring then switch to position returns to position . When active main beam is activated, the symbol illuminates with a white glow in the driver display. When main beam is activated, the symbol shines blue. When main beam has been activated the symbol illuminates in the driver display. If active main beam is deactivated while main beam is on, the lighting is immediately reset to dipped beam. Related information • • Lighting control (p. 150) Adaptive functionality Active main beam (p. 154) For cars with LED3 headlamps*, active main beam has adaptive functionality4. In this case, unlike what happens during conventional dimming, the light beam continues to illuminate with main beam on both sides of oncoming traffic or vehicles ahead – only the part of the light beam that points directly to the vehicle is dimmed. The symbol represents active main beam. The function can start while driving in the dark when the car's speed is approx. 20 km/h (approx. 12 mph) or higher. The function can also take streetlights into account. When the camera sensor no longer detects any oncoming car or car in front, main beam is switched on again after about a second. 2 3 4 154 When dipped beam is activated. LED (Light Emitting Diode) Depending on the car's equipment level. * Option/accessory. LIGHTING The same applies if this symbol is shown together with the message Windscreen sensor Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual. Active main beam may be temporarily unavailable e.g. in situations with dense fog or heavy rain. When active main beam becomes available again, or the windscreen sensors are no longer blocked, symbol illuthe message goes out and the minates. Active main beam is an aid for using the optimum beam pattern when conditions are favourable. The main beam is partly dimmed, i.e. if the light beam shines with slightly more than dipped in the driver display beam, the symbol shines blue. The driver always bears responsibility for manually switching between main and dipped beam when traffic situations or weather conditions so require. Limitations for active main beam If this symbol is shown in the driver display, together with the message Active High Beam Temporarily unavailable, then switching between main and dipped beam must be performed mansymbol extinguishes when these ually. The message are shown. The car's direction indicators are operated with the left-hand stalk switch. The direction indicator lamps flash three times or continuously, depending on how far up or down the stalk switch is moved. WARNING Adaptive functionality: Dipped beam directly towards oncoming vehicle, but continued main beam on both sides of the vehicle. The camera sensor on which the function is based has limitations. Using direction indicators Related information • • • Lighting control (p. 150) Using main beam (p. 153) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) Direction indicators. Short flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to the first position and release. The direction indicator lamps flash three times. If the function is deactivated via the centre display, the lamps will flash once. }} 155 LIGHTING NOTE Active bending lights* • This automatic flashing sequence can be stopped by moving the stalk switch immediately in the opposite direction. • If the symbol for direction indicators in the driver display flashes more quickly than normal - see the message in the driver display. Active bending lights are designed to provide maximum illumination in bends and junctions. Cars with LED5 headlamps* can have active bending lights, depending on the car's equipment level. || The function is only active in weak daylight or darkness and only when the car is moving and dipped beam is switched on. Deactivating/activating the function The function is activated when the car is supplied from the factory and can be deactivated/activated via the centre display's function view. Press the Active Bending Lights button. Continuous flash sequence Move the stalk switch up or down to its end position. The stalk switch remains in its position and is moved back manually, or automatically by the steering wheel movement. Related information • Related information • • Hazard warning flashers (p. 158) Adjusting light functions via the centre display (p. 151) Adjusting light functions via the centre display (p. 151) Headlamp pattern with function deactivated (left) and activated (right) respectively. Active bending lights follow steering wheel movements to provide maximum illumination in bends and junctions and can thereby provide the driver with improved visibility. The function is activated automatically when the car is started. In the event of a fault in the funcsymbol illuminates in the driver tion, the display at the same time as the driver display shows an explanatory text. 5 156 LED (Light Emitting Diode) * Option/accessory. LIGHTING Rear fog lamp The rear fog lamp is considerably stronger than the normal rear lights and should only be used in reduced visibility due to fog, snow, smoke or dust so that other road users have an early warning of a vehicle ahead. ring on the stalk switch is set to the position. or NOTE Regulations on the use of rear fog lamps vary from country to country. Related information • • Lighting control (p. 150) Ignition positions (p. 440) Brake lights The brake light automatically comes on during braking. The brake light is illuminated when the brake pedal is depressed and when the car is braked automatically by one of the driver support systems. Related information • • • Emergency brake lights (p. 158) Brake functions (p. 443) Driving support systems (p. 290) Button for rear fog lamp. The rear fog lamp is a lamp at the rear of the car, on the driver's side. The rear fog lamp can only be switched on when ignition position II is active and the rotating ring on the stalk switch is in position or . Press the button to switch the lights on/off. The symbol in the driver display illuminates when the rear fog lamp is switched on. The rear fog lamp switches off automatically when the car is switched off or when the rotating 157 LIGHTING Emergency brake lights Hazard warning flashers Emergency brake lights are activated to alert vehicles behind about heavy braking. Hazard warning flashers warn other road users by means of all of the car's direction indicators being activated simultaneously. The function can be used to give a warning in the event of traffic hazards. The function means that the brake light flashes instead of - as in normal braking - shining with a constant glow. After the driver brakes to a low speed and then releases the brake, the brake light returns to normal glow. The car's hazard warning flashers are activated at the same time. These flash until the driver accelerates the car to a higher speed again or switches off the car's hazard warning flashers. Related information 158 Brake lights (p. 157) Foot brake (p. 444) Hazard warning flashers (p. 158) Related information • • The emergency brake lights are activated during heavy braking or if the ABS system is activated at high speeds. • • • NOTE Regulations for the use of hazard warning flashers may vary between countries. Button for hazard warning flashers. Press the button to activate the hazard warning flashers. The hazard warning flashers are automatically activated when the car brakes so powerfully that the emergency brake lights are activated and the speed is low. The hazard warning flashers start to flash after the emergency brake lights have stopped flashing and are then deactivated automatically when the car drives away again or are deactivated if the button is depressed. Emergency brake lights (p. 158) Using direction indicators (p. 155) LIGHTING Using home safe lighting Approach light duration Interior lighting Some of the exterior lighting can be kept switched on to work as home safe lighting after the car has been locked. Approach lighting is switched on when the car is unlocked and is used to switch on the car's lighting at a distance. To activate the function: The function is activated when the remote control key is used for unlocking. At which point, position lamps, exterior handle lighting*, number plate lighting, interior roof lamps, floor lamps and cargo area lighting are switched on. If a door is opened within the activation time, the time for the lighting in the outside handles* and the interior lighting will be extended. The interior is equipped with several different types of lighting to improve the experience. This includes, reading lamps, glovebox lighting and ground lighting. • the car has been switched off and its electrical system is in ignition position 0 • The function can be activated and deactivated via the centre display. the car has been unlocked but it has not been started. Front roof lighting 1. Switch off the car. 2. Move the left-hand stalk switch forward toward the instrument panel and release. 3. Get out of the car and lock the door. When the function is activated, a symbol illuminates in the driver display and position lamps, exterior handle lighting* and number plate lighting are switched on. The length of time that home safe lighting remains on can be set via the centre display. Related information • • Adjusting light functions via the centre display (p. 151) All lighting in the passenger compartment can be switched on and off manually at least 5 minutes from when: Related information • Adjusting light functions via the centre display (p. 151) • • Using home safe lighting (p. 159) Remote control key (p. 245) Approach light duration (p. 159) Controls in roof console for the front reading lamps and passenger compartment lighting. Reading lamp, left-hand side Passenger compartment lighting }} * Option/accessory. 159 LIGHTING || Auto function for passenger compartment lighting The passenger compartment lighting goes off when: Reading lamp, right-hand side • • • Reading lighting The reading lamps on the right and left-hand sides can be turned on and off by briefly pressing the buttons in the roof console. Brightness is adjusted by holding the button pressed in. Passenger compartment lighting The floor lighting and interior roof lighting are switched on or off with a short press on the button in the roof console. the car is locked the car is started a side door is closed. Rear roof lighting The rear area of the car has reading lighting, which is also used as passenger compartment lighting. In cars with panorama roof* there are two lamp units, one on each side of the roof.7 Auto function for passenger compartment lighting The automatic function is activated by a short press on the AUTO button in the roof console. With the automatic system activated, the light indicator in the button illuminates and the passenger compartment lighting is switched on and off according to the following. The passenger compartment lighting comes on when: • • • • 6 7 160 the car is unlocked the car is switched off a side door is opened remains on for 2 minutes if one of the side doors is open. The reading lamps are switched on or off by briefly pressing the button on the lamp. Brightness is adjusted by holding the button pressed in. Glovebox lighting Glovebox lighting is switched on and off respectively when the lid is opened or closed. Sun visor mirror lighting* Reading lamps above the rear seat6. The lighting for the mirror in the sun visor is switched on and off respectively when the cover is opened or closed. Ground lighting* The ground lighting is switched on or off when the corresponding door is opened or closed. Reading lamps are also available above the third seat row*. Does not apply to the third seat row*. * Option/accessory. LIGHTING Door sill lighting The door sill lighting is switched on or off when a door is opened or closed. Lighting in the tunnel console's front cup holder The lighting in the cargo area is switched on or off when the tailgate is opened or closed. The lighting in the front cup holders is switched on when the car is unlocked and is switched off when the car is locked. The brightness can be precisely adjusted using the thumbwheel in the instrument panel. Decor lighting Related information Lighting in the cargo area The ambient light is switched on when you open the doors and is switched off when the car is locked. The intensity of the decor lighting can be adapted in the centre display and also precisely adjusted using the thumbwheel in the instrument panel. Ambience lights* The car is equipped with LEDs that make it possible to change the colour of the light. These lights are switched on when the car is running. The ambience light can be adapted in the centre display and also precisely adjusted using the thumbwheel in the instrument panel. Lighting in storage compartments in doors The lighting in the storage compartments in the doors is switched on when you open the doors and is switched off when the car is locked. The brightness can be precisely adjusted using the thumbwheel in the instrument panel. • • • • Adjusting interior lighting The lamps inside the car come on differently depending on the ignition position used. The interior lighting can be adjusted with a thumbwheel in the instrument panel, and certain light functions can also be adjusted via the centre display. The thumbwheel on the instrument panel, to the left of the steering wheel, is used to adjust the brightness of the display light, control light, ambient light and ambience light* Adjusting interior lighting (p. 161) Lighting control (p. 150) Ignition positions (p. 440) Passenger compartment interior (p. 584) Adjusting ambient decor illumination 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting Interior Lighting. 3. Choose between the following settings: • Under Ambient Light Intensity, select from Off, Low and High. • Under Ambient Light Level, select from Reduced and Full. Adjusting ambience light* The car is equipped with a number of LEDs that make it possible to change the colour of the light. These lights are switched on when the car is running. }} * Option/accessory. 161 LIGHTING || Changing the brightness of the lights 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting. 3. Under Interior Mood Light Intensity, select from Off, Low and High. Changing the colour of the light 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press My Car Lights and Lighting Interior Lighting Interior Mood Lighting. 3. Choose between By Temperature and By Colour in order to change the colour of the light. With the By Temperature option, the light changes according to the set passenger compartment temperature. With the By Colour option, the Theme Colours subcategory can be used to adjust further. Related information • • • 162 Interior lighting (p. 159) Adjusting light functions via the centre display (p. 151) Ignition positions (p. 440) WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS Windows, glass and mirrors • The car contains controls for windows, glass and mirrors. Some of the windows in the car are laminated. Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 177) Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds • Activating and deactivating the heated windscreen* (p. 221) Laminated glass • Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors (p. 222) All power windows and sun blinds* have pinch protection which is deployed if they are blocked by any object while opening or closing. The windscreen has laminated glass, and laminated glass is available as an option for certain other glass areas. Laminated glass is reinforced, which provides better protection against breakins and improved sound insulation in the passenger compartment. The panoramic roof* also has laminated glass. In the event of blocking, the movement stops and then reverses automatically to approx. 50 mm (approx. 2 inches) from the blocked position (or to full ventilation position). It is possible to force pinch protection when closing has been cancelled, e.g. when ice is formed, by continuing to press the control in one and the same direction. If any fault arises with the pinch protection, a reset sequence can be tested. The symbol is shown on the windows where the glass is laminated1 WARNING If the starter battery is disconnected, the automatic opening and closing function must be reset to work properly. A reset must take place for pinch protection to work. Related information • • • • • • • 1 164 Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds (p. 164) Panorama roof* (p. 170) Power windows (p. 165) Related information Rearview and door mirrors (p. 167) • Using the sun blind* (p. 167) Head-up display* (p. 141) Using windscreen wipers (p. 175) • • • Reset sequence for pinch protection (p. 165) Operating power windows (p. 166) Using the sun blind* (p. 167) Panorama roof* (p. 170) Does not apply to the windscreen or panorama roof* which are always laminated and thus do not have this symbol. * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS Reset sequence for pinch protection If a problem occurs with the electrical functions for the electric windows, a reset sequence can be tested. Power windows WARNING The power windows are operated using the control panels in each respective door. The driver's door has controls for operating all windows and also to activate the child safety locks. Children, other passengers or objects may be trapped by the moving parts. • • WARNING If the starter battery is disconnected, the automatic opening and closing function must be reset to work properly. A reset must take place for pinch protection to work. • • If a problem persists, or if it concerns the panoramic roof or sunroof, contact a workshop2. • Reset the power window 1. Start with the window in closed position. 2. Then operate the controls in the manual position 3 times upwards to closed position. > The system is initialised automatically. Related information • • • 2 Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds (p. 164) Operating power windows (p. 166) Using the sun blind* (p. 167) Driver's door control panel. Electric child safety locks* that deactivate the controls in the rear doors to prevent doors or windows from being opened from the inside. Controls for rear windows. Always operate the windows with caution. Do not allow children to play with the controls. Never leave children alone in the car. Remember to always switch off the power supply to the power windows by setting the car's electrical system in ignition position 0, and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car. Never put an object or part of the body through the windows, even if the car's electrical system is fully disconnected. Related information • • • Operating power windows (p. 166) Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds (p. 164) Reset sequence for pinch protection (p. 165) Controls for front windows. The power windows are equipped with pinch protection. If any fault arises with the pinch protection, a reset sequence can be tested. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. * Option/accessory. 165 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS Operating power windows WARNING Using the driver's door control panel, all power windows can be operated - using the control panels in the other doors operates the power window in the individual door. Check that children or other passengers are not at risk of crushing when all the windows are closed with a remote control key or keyless opening* with a door handle. The power windows are equipped with pinch protection. If any fault arises with the pinch protection, a reset sequence can be tested. NOTE One way to reduce the pulsating wind noise when the rear windows are open is to also open the front windows slightly. WARNING Children, other passengers or objects may be trapped by the moving parts. • • • • • Always operate the windows with caution. Do not allow children to play with the controls. Never leave children alone in the car. Remember to always switch off the power supply to the power windows by setting the car's electrical system in ignition position 0, and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car. Never put an object or part of the body through the windows, even if the car's electrical system is fully disconnected. Operating the power windows. Operating with auto. Move one of the controls up or down to the end position and release it. The window runs automatically to its end position. In order for the power windows to be used, the ignition position must be I or II. The power windows can be operated for a few minutes after the car has been switched off and after the ignition has been switched off - although not after a door has been opened. It is only possible to operate one control at a time. It can also be operated using a remote control key or keyless opening* with the door handle. 166 NOTE Operating without auto. Move one of the controls gently up or down. The power windows move up or down as long as the control is held in position. The windows cannot be opened at speeds above approx. 180 km/h (approx. 112 mph), but they can be closed. The driver always bears responsibility for following traffic regulations in force. NOTE It may not be possible to operate windows at low temperatures. Related information • • Power windows (p. 165) • Reset sequence for pinch protection (p. 165) Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds (p. 164) * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS • • Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 269) Using the sun blind* Rearview and door mirrors Locking and unlocking with the remote control key (p. 247) The sun blinds are built into each rear door. The rearview mirrors and door mirrors are used to give the driver better visibility to the rear. Rear door – manually operated Interior rearview mirror The interior rearview mirror is adjusted by angling it manually. The interior rearview mirror can be fitted with HomeLink*, automatic dimming* and compass*. Door mirrors WARNING Both mirrors are bent to provide optimal vision. Objects may appear to be further away than they actually are. The figure is schematic - the version may vary. Hook with associated catch – Pull up the sun blind and attach it to the hook in the upper door frame. The window can still be opened and closed with the sun blind up. Related information • • • Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds (p. 164) Reset sequence for pinch protection (p. 165) Power windows (p. 165) The door mirror positions are adjusted with the joystick in the driver's door control panel. There are also a number of automatic settings that can be linked to the memory function buttons for the power seat*. Related information • • • • HomeLink®* (p. 496) Compass* (p. 500) Adjusting rearview mirror dimming (p. 168) Angling the door mirrors (p. 169) }} * Option/accessory. 167 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS • • Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 184) Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors (p. 222) Adjusting rearview mirror dimming Automatic dimming* Bright light from behind could be reflected in the rearview mirrors and dazzle the driver. Use dimming when disturbed by light from behind. Bright light from behind is automatically dimmed by the interior rearview and door mirrors. Automatic dimming is always active while driving, apart from when gearbox reverse position is selected. Manual dimming The interior rearview mirror can be dimmed with a control in the mirror's lower edge. NOTE When sensitivity is changed there is no immediately noticeable change in dimming, but the change takes place gradually. Dimming sensitivity will affect both the interior rearview mirror and the door mirrors. To change dimming sensitivity: Control for manual dimming. 1. Use dimming by moving the control in towards the passenger compartment. 2. Return to normal mode by moving the control towards the windscreen. The control for manual dimming is not available on mirrors with automatic dimming. 168 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press My Car 3. Under Rearview Mirror Auto Dimming, select Normal, Dark or Light. Mirrors and Convenience. The interior rearview mirror contains two sensors - one forward facing and one rearward facing that work together to identify and eliminate dazzling light. The forward facing sensor detects ambient light, while the rearward facing sensor detects the light from vehicle headlights behind. For the door mirrors to be equipped with automatic dimming, the interior rearview mirror must also be equipped with automatic dimming. * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS NOTE If the sensors are obscured by e.g. parking permits, transponders, sun visors or objects in the seats or in the cargo area in such a way that light is prevented from reaching the sensors, then the dimming function of the interior rearview and door mirrors is reduced. Angling the door mirrors To ensure better visibility to the rear, the door mirrors need to be set to the preferences of the driver. There are a number of automatic settings that can also be linked to the memory function buttons for the power seat*. Using controls for door mirrors 3. Folding in rearview mirrors electrically* The mirrors can be retracted for parking/driving in narrow spaces. 1. Depress the L and R buttons simultaneously. 2. Release them after approximately 1 second. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully retracted position. Related information • • Rearview and door mirrors (p. 167) Press the L or R button again. The light should no longer be illuminated. Fold out the mirrors by pressing down the L and R buttons simultaneously. The mirrors automatically stop in the fully extended position. Angling the door mirrors (p. 169) Resetting to neutral Mirrors that have been moved out of position by an external force must be reset electrically to the neutral position for electric retracting/extending* to work correctly. Controls for door mirrors. 1. The door mirror positions are adjusted with the joystick in the driver's door control panel. Ignition position must be at least I. Fold in the door mirrors by pressing down the L and R buttons simultaneously. 2. Fold them out again by pressing the L and R buttons simultaneously. 1. 3. Repeat the above procedure as necessary. 2. Press the L button for the left-hand door mirror or the R button for the right-hand door mirror. The light in the button illuminates. The mirrors are now reset in neutral position. Adjust the position with the joystick in the centre. }} * Option/accessory. 169 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS || Angling during parking3 Automatic retraction when locking* Panorama roof* A door mirror can be angled down for the driver to view the side of the road when parking, for example. When the car is locked/unlocked with the remote control key, the door mirrors can be automatically retracted/extended. The panorama roof is divided into two glass sections. The front section can be opened vertically at the rear edge (ventilation position) or horizontally (open position). The rear section is fixed roof glass. – Engage reverse gear and press the L or R button. Note that the button may need to be pressed twice, depending on whether it was already preselected. The button flashes when the door mirror is angled down. When reverse gear is disengaged, the door mirror automatically starts to return after approx. 3 seconds and then reaches its original position after approx. 8 seconds. Automatic angling during parking3 With this setting, the door mirror is automatically angled down when reverse gear is selected. The folded position is preset and cannot be adjusted. You can make the door mirror return to its original position by pressing the L or R button twice. 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Press My Car 3. Under Exterior Mirror Tilt at Reverse, select Off, Driver, Passenger or Both to activate/deactivate and to select which review mirror should be angled. 3 Only 170 Mirrors and Convenience. 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Press My Car 3. Select Fold Mirror When Locked to activate/deactivate. Mirrors and Convenience. The panoramic roof has a wind deflector and a sun blind made of perforated fabric and located under the glass roof to provide extra protection from factors such as strong sunlight. Related information • • • • Rearview and door mirrors (p. 167) Adjusting rearview mirror dimming (p. 168) Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 184) Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors (p. 222) The panoramic roof and sun blind are operated with a control located in the roof. In order that the panoramic roof and the sun blind can be operated, the car's electrical system must be in ignition position I or II. in combination with power seat with memory buttons*. * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS WARNING Wind deflector • • • • • Always operate the windows with caution. WARNING Do not allow children to play with the controls. Children, other passengers or objects may be trapped by the moving parts. Never leave children alone in the car. Remember to always switch off the power supply to the power windows by setting the car's electrical system in ignition position 0, and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car. Operating the panorama roof* The panoramic roof and sun blind are operated with a control in the roof panel and both are equipped with pinch protection. Children, other passengers or objects may be trapped by the moving parts. • • Never put an object or part of the body through the windows, even if the car's electrical system is fully disconnected. The panorama roof has a wind deflector that is raised when the panorama roof is in the open position. IMPORTANT • • • • Related information • Do not open the panoramic roof when load carriers are fitted. • Do not place any heavy objects on the panoramic roof. IMPORTANT • Remove ice and snow before opening the panoramic roof. Take care not to scratch surfaces or damage strips. • Do not operate the panoramic roof if it has frozen closed. Operating the panorama roof* (p. 171) Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's* sun blind (p. 174) • Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds (p. 164) • • Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 269) Locking and unlocking with the remote control key (p. 247) • Always operate the windows with caution. Do not allow children to play with the controls. Never leave children alone in the car. Remember to always switch off the power supply to the power windows by setting the car's electrical system in ignition position 0, and then take the remote control key with you when leaving the car. Never put an object or part of the body through the windows, even if the car's electrical system is fully disconnected. IMPORTANT • Do not open the panoramic roof when load carriers are fitted. • Do not place any heavy objects on the panoramic roof. }} * Option/accessory. 171 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS || IMPORTANT • Remove ice and snow before opening the panoramic roof. Take care not to scratch surfaces or damage strips. • Do not operate the panoramic roof if it has frozen closed. In order that the panoramic roof and the sun blind can be operated, the car's electrical system must be in ignition position I or II. It can also be operated using a remote control key or keyless opening* with the door handle. WARNING Check that children or other passengers are not at risk of crushing when all the windows are closed with a remote control key or keyless opening* with a door handle. ment of both panoramic roof and sun blind are also stopped if the roof control is operated again in the opposite direction to the current direction of movement. Open and close ventilation position The panoramic roof and the sun blind are also equipped with pinch protection. If any fault arises with the pinch protection, a reset sequence can be tested. NOTE For manual opening, the sun blind must be fully open before the panoramic roof can be opened. When the procedure is reversed, the panoramic roof must be fully closed before the sun blind can be fully closed. NOTE It may not be possible to operate windows at low temperatures. IMPORTANT Check that the panoramic roof is properly closed when closing. Ventilation position, vertically at the rear edge. Open by pressing the control upward once. Close by pressing the control downward once. When the ventilation position is selected the front glass cover is raised at its rear edge. If the sun blind is fully closed when ventilation position is selected, then it opens automatically approx. 50 mm (approx. 2 inches). The sun blind follows automatically if the panoramic roof is closed from ventilation position. The movement of the roof is stopped if the control is released during manual operation, or when the glass reaches the comfort position4 or the maximum opening or closing position. The move- 4 172 Comfort position is a position where wind noise and resonance noise are at a comfortably low level while driving. * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS Fully open and close the panoramic roof using the roof control Operation, manual mode Operation, automatic mode Manual operation 1. To open the sun blind - press the control backwards to the position for manual opening. Automatic operation 1. Open the sun blind to maximum position press the control backward to the position for automatic opening and release. 2. Open the panoramic roof to comfort position - press the control backwards a second time to the position for automatic opening and release. 3. Open the panoramic roof to maximum position - press the control backwards a third time to the position for automatic opening and release. • • Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds (p. 164) Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 269) Locking and unlocking with the remote control key (p. 247) Close by repeating the preceding procedure in reverse order - press the control forward/downward to the automatic closing position instead. Automatic operation - rapid opening or closing The panoramic roof and sun blind can be opened or closed simultaneously: – To open - press the control rearward to the automatic operation position twice and release. To close - press the control forward/downward to the automatic operation position twice and release. 2. Open the panoramic roof to comfort position - press the control backwards a second time to the position for manual opening. – 3. Open the panoramic roof to maximum position - press the control backwards a third time to the position for manual opening. Related information Close by repeating the preceding procedure in reverse order - press the control forward/downward to the manual closing position instead. • • • Panorama roof* (p. 170) Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's* sun blind (p. 174) * Option/accessory. 173 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS Automatic closing of the panoramic roof's* sun blind With this function, the sun blind is closed automatically 15 minutes after the car has been locked if it is parked in hot weather. This is in order to lower the passenger compartment temperature and protect the car's upholstery from sun-fading. The function is deactivated when the car is supplied from the factory and can be activated or deactivated in the centre display. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press My Car Locking. Select Auto Close Sunroof Curtain to activate/deactivate. The washer nozzles are heated* automatically in cold weather to prevent the washer fluid from freezing. Information indicating that the washer fluid needs topping up appears in the driver display when there is approx. 1 litre (1 qt) of washer fluid remaining. Related information • • Using the rain sensor (p. 176) Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 177) • Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 177) • Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 178) Filling washer fluid (p. 655) Operating the panorama roof* (p. 171) • • • • Pinch protection for windows and sun blinds (p. 164) • Using windscreen wipers (p. 175) Related information 174 Wiper blades and washer fluid Together with the washer fluid, the wipers are used to improve visibility as well as headlamp pattern. Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 179) NOTE • Locking and unlocking with the remote control key (p. 247) • The sun blind is also closed when all windows are closed using the remote control key or keyless opening* with a door handle. • • • • Panorama roof* (p. 170) Wiper blades in service position (p. 654) Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 653) Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 652) Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 269) * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS Using windscreen wipers Continuous wiping Raise the stalk switch for the wipers to sweep at normal speed. The windscreen wipers clean the windscreen. Different settings for the windscreen wipers are set using the right-hand stalk switch. Raise the stalk switch further for the wipers to sweep at high speed. • • • • Filling washer fluid (p. 655) Wiper blades in service position (p. 654) Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 653) Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 652) IMPORTANT Before activating the wipers - ensure that the wiper blades are not frozen in, and that any snow or ice on the windscreen and rear window is scraped away. IMPORTANT Use plenty of washer fluid when the wipers are cleaning the windscreen. The windscreen must be wet when the windscreen wipers are operating. Right-hand stalk switch. The thumbwheel is used to set rain sensor sensitivity and wiper swipe frequency. Single sweep Lower the stalk switch and release to make one sweep. Windscreen wipers off Move the stalk switch to position 0 to switch off the windscreen wipers. Intermittent wiping Set the number of sweeps per time unit with the thumbwheel when intermittent wiping is selected. Related information • • Using the rain sensor (p. 176) Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 177) • Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 179) • • Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 174) • Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 178) Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 177) 175 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS Using the rain sensor The rain sensor automatically starts the windscreen wipers based on how much water it detects on the windscreen. Rain sensor sensitivity can be adjusted with the thumbwheel on the right-hand stalk switch. Activate the rain sensor by pressing the rain sensor button . Move the lever down to make the wipers move. Turn the thumbwheel upward for higher sensitivity and downward for lower sensitivity. An extra sweep is made when the thumbwheel is turned upward. Deactivating the rain sensor Deactivate the rain sensor by pressing the rain sensor button or moving the stalk switch up to another wiper program. The rain sensor is deactivated automatically in ignition position 0 or when the engine is switched off. Right-hand stalk switch. Rain sensor button Thumbwheel sensitivity/frequency When the rain sensor is activated, the rain sensor is shown in the driver display. symbol Activating the rain sensor When activating the rain sensor, the car must be running or in ignition position I or II while the windscreen wiper stalk switch is in position 0 or in the position for a single sweep. 176 The rain sensor is deactivated automatically when wiper blades are set in service position. The rain sensor is reactivated when service mode has been deactivated. IMPORTANT The windscreen wipers could start and be damaged in an automatic car wash. Deactivate the rain sensor while the car is running or when the car's electrical system is in ignition position I or II. The symbol in the driver display extinguishes. Related information • Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 177) • Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 179) • • Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 174) • Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 178) • • • • Filling washer fluid (p. 655) • Using windscreen wipers (p. 175) Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 177) Wiper blades in service position (p. 654) Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 653) Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 652) WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS Using the rain sensor's memory function • • Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 653) The rain sensor automatically starts the windscreen wipers based on how much water it detects on the windscreen. • Using windscreen wipers (p. 175) Activating/deactivating the memory function The memory function for the rain sensor can be activated in such a way that the rain sensor button does not need to be depressed each time the car is started: 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press My Car 3. Select Rain Sensor Memory to activate/ deactivate the memory function. Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 652) Using windscreen and headlamp washers Windscreen and headlamp washers clean the windscreen and headlamps. Windscreen and headlamp washers are started using the righthand stalk switch. Starting windscreen and headlamp washers Wipers. Related information • • Using the rain sensor (p. 176) Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 177) • Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 179) • • Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 174) • • Filling washer fluid (p. 655) Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 178) Washing function, right-hand stalk switch. – Move the right-hand stalk switch toward the steering wheel to start the windscreen and headlamp washers. > The windscreen wipers will make several more sweeps once the stalk switch has been released. Wiper blades in service position (p. 654) }} 177 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS || IMPORTANT Avoid activating the washer system when it is frozen or the washer reservoir is empty, otherwise there is a risk of damaging the pump. Headlamp washing* To save fluid, the headlamps are washed automatically at a defined interval when the headlamps are switched on. Reduced washing If only approx. 1 litre (1 qt) of washer fluid remains in the reservoir and the message Washer fluid Level low, refill, together with the symbol, is shown in the driver display, then the supply of washer fluid to the headlamps is switched off. This is to prioritise cleaning the windscreen and the visibility through it. The headlamps are only washed if main or dipped beam is switched on. • • • • Filling washer fluid (p. 655) • Using windscreen wipers (p. 175) Wiper blades in service position (p. 654) Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 653) Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 652) Using the rear window wiper and washer Rear window wiper and washer clean the rear window. Washing/wiping is started and settings are changed by means of the right-hand steering wheel stalk switch. Activating the rear window wiper and washer NOTE The rear window wiper motor is equipped with overheating protection which means that it is switched off if it overheats. The rear window wiper works again after a cooling-down period. Related information • • 178 Using the rain sensor (p. 176) Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 179) • • Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 174) • Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 178) Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 177) * Option/accessory. WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS Select for intermittent wiping with the rear window wiper. – Select for continuous speed with the rear window wiper. Move the right-hand steering wheel stalk switch forward to start rear window washing and wiping. Wiper blades in service position (p. 654) • Using windscreen wipers (p. 175) Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 653) Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 652) Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing Engaging reverse gear while the windscreen wipers are on initiates rear window wiping. The function stops when reverse gear is disengaged. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press My Car 3. Select Auto Rear Wiper to activate/deactivate wiping when reversing. Wipers. If the rear windscreen wiper is already operating at a constant speed, no change takes place when reverse gear is selected. Related information • • Using the rain sensor (p. 176) Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 177) Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 174) Using the rain sensor (p. 176) • • Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 177) • Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 178) • • • Filling washer fluid (p. 655) Related information • • • • • • Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 179) • Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 177) • • Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 174) Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 177) Wiper blades in service position (p. 654) Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 653) Filling washer fluid (p. 655) }} 179 WINDOWS, GLASS AND MIRRORS || 180 • Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 652) • Using windscreen wipers (p. 175) SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL Manual front seat The car's front seats have different setting options for optimum seating comfort. Raise/lower the seat by means of adjusting the control up/down. • Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 189) Change the backrest inclination by turning the control knob. • Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* (p. 191) WARNING Adjust the position of the driver's seat before setting off, never while driving. Make sure that the seat is in locked position in order to avoid personal injury in the event of heavy braking or an accident. Related information Raise/lower the front edge of the seat cushion* by pumping up/down.1 Change the length* of the seat cushion by pulling the lever up and moving the seat cushion forward/backward by hand. Adjust the seat forward/backward by lifting the handle and adjusting the distance to the steering wheel and pedals. Check that the seat is locked after the position has been adjusted. Change the lumbar support* by pressing the button upward/downward/forward/back2. 1 2 182 • • • Power* front seat (p. 183) Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 183) Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 184) • Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 185) • Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 187) • Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 188) • • Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 186) Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 189) Only applies to the driver's seat. Applicable to four-way lumbar support*. Two-way lumbar support* is adjusted forwards/backwards. * Option/accessory. SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL Power* front seat The car's front seats have different setting options for optimum seating comfort. The power seat can be moved forwards/backwards and upwards/downwards. The front edge of the seat cushion can be raised/lowered as well as adjusted in length* and the backrest inclination can be changed. The lumbar support* can be adjusted upward/downward/forward/backward.3 Seat setup can take place when the engine is running and within a certain time after unlocking the door without the engine running. Adjustment can also be performed within a certain time after the engine has been switched off. • Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 187) • Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 188) • • Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 186) • Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 189) • Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* (p. 191) Adjusting the power* front seat Set the preferred seat position using the control on the front seat's seating section. To set the various comfort functions, turn the multifunction control4 up/down. Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 189) IMPORTANT The power seats have overload protection that is triggered if any seat is blocked by an object. If this happens, remove the object and then move the seat again. Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 183) In cars with four-way lumbar support*, turn the multifunction control4 up/down to set the different comfort functions. In cars with twoway lumbar support*, use the round button to adjust the lumbar support forward/backward. Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 184) Raise/lower the seat cushion front edge by adjusting the control up/down. Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 185) Raise/lower the seat by means of adjusting the control up/down. Related information • • • • 3 The illustration shows the controls from a car with fourway lumbar support*. Cars with two-way lumbar support* do not have the rotatable multifunction control. Manual front seat (p. 182) Applicable to four-way lumbar support*. Two-way lumbar support* is adjusted forwards/backwards. }} * Option/accessory. 183 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL Move the seat forward/backward by adjusting the control forward/backward. || Change the backrest inclination by adjusting the control forward/backward. Only one movement (forward/back/up/down) can be made at a time. The backrests of the front seats cannot be lowered fully forward. Related information • • • You can store the position for power* seat, door mirrors and head-up display* in the memory buttons. Store three different positions for the power* seat, the door mirrors and the head-up display* using the memory buttons. The buttons are located on the inside of one of the front doors or both*. Storing a position 1. Adjust seat, door mirrors and head-up display to the desired position. 2. Press and hold the M button depressed. The light indicator in the button illuminates. 3. Within three seconds, press and hold the 1, 2 or 3 button. > When the position has been stored in the selected memory button, an acoustic signal can be heard and the light indicator in the M button extinguishes. Manual front seat (p. 182) If none of the memory buttons is depressed within three seconds then the M button extinguishes and no storing takes place. Power* front seat (p. 183) Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 184) • Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 185) • Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 187) • Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 188) • • Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 186) Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 189) The seat, the door mirrors or the head-up-display must be readjusted before a new memory can be set. Related information Memory button. • • • • Memory button. Manual front seat (p. 182) Power* front seat (p. 183) Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 183) Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 185) • Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 189) Memory button. • Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 187) • Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* (p. 191) Button M for storing settings. • Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 188) 4 184 Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* Not available in cars with two-way lumbar support*. * Option/accessory. SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL • • Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 186) • Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 189) • Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* (p. 191) • • Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 189) Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* If the positions for the power* seat, the door mirrors and the head-up display* have been stored, they can be activated simply by using the memory buttons. Using a stored setting Angling the door mirrors (p. 169) Closed front door – Hold one of the memory buttons 1 - 3 depressed until seat, door mirrors and headup display stop in the positions that are stored in the selected memory button. If the memory button is released, the movement of the seat, door mirrors and head-up display will be stopped. WARNING Settings for head-up display* (p. 143) • Because the driver's seat can be adjusted with the ignition off, children should never be left unattended in the vehicle. • Movement of the seat can be STOPPED at any time by pressing any button on the power seat control panel. • • A stored setting can be used with the front door either open or closed: Open front door – Press one of the memory buttons 1 - 3 with a brief touch. Power seat, door mirrors and head-up display move and then stop at the positions stored in the selected memory button. Do not adjust the seat while driving. Make sure there is nothing under the seats when they are being adjusted. Related information • • • • • Manual front seat (p. 182) Power* front seat (p. 183) Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 183) Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 184) Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 187) }} * Option/accessory. 185 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL • Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 188) • • Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 186) • Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 189) • Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* (p. 191) • • Angling the door mirrors (p. 169) Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 189) Massage settings* in the front seat Both the multi-function control on the side of the seat and the centre display can be used in order to change the settings. The range of settings is shown in the centre display. • Speed: Select between Slow, Normal and Fast. Restarting massage The massage function is deactivated automatically after 20 minutes. Reactivation of the function is performed manually. – Settings for head-up display* (p. 143) Tap on Restart, which is shown in the centre display, to restart the selected massage program. > The massage program restarts. If no action is taken, the message remains shown in the top view. Related information Multi-function control, located on the side of the seat's seating section. Settings for massage The following setting options are available for massage: • On/Off: Select On/Off in order to switch on/off the massage function. • Programs 1-5: There are 5 preset massage programs. Select between Swell, Tread, Advanced, Lumbar and Shoulder. • Intensity: Select between Low, Normal and • • • • Manual front seat (p. 182) Power* front seat (p. 183) Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 183) Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 184) • Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 185) • Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 187) • Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 188) • Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 189) High. 186 * Option/accessory. SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL • Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 189) Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat • Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* (p. 191) Both the multi-function control on the seat and the centre display can be used in order to change the settings. The range of settings is shown in the centre display. 2. Select Massage in the seat settings view. 3. To choose between the different massage functions, select either directly in the centre display or by moving the cursor up/down / using the multi-function control's upper lower button. Change the setting in the selected function directly in the centre display, by pressing the arrows, or by using the /rear multi-function control's front button. Adjusting massage settings in the front seat The front seat has massage in the backrest. The massage is performed by air cushions that can massage with different settings. The massage function can only be activated when the car's engine is running. 1. Activate the multi-function control by turning the control upwards/downwards. The seat settings view will be shown in the centre display. Related information • • • • Manual front seat (p. 182) Power* front seat (p. 183) Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 183) Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 184) • Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 185) • Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 188) • • Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 186) • Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 189) • Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* (p. 191) Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 189) * Option/accessory. 187 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat 2. Depending on equipment level selected, seat cushion length is adjusted either using the multifunction control* on the side of the seat's seat cushion, or manually using a control on the front of the seat cushion. Adjusting the length of the seat cushion using the multifunction control 188 Select Cushion extension in the seat settings view. • Press the front section of the four-way to extend the seat cushion. button • Press the rear section of the four-way button to retract the seat cushion. Adjusting the length of the seat cushion manually Multifunction control, located on the side of the seat cushion. Control for seat cushion adjustment. 1. 1. Grip the handle on the front of the seat and pull upwards. 2. Adjust the length of the seat cushion. 3. Release the handle and make sure that the seat cushion has reached the correct position. Activate the multi-function control by turning upwards/downwards. The the control seat settings view will be shown in the centre display. Related information • • • • Manual front seat (p. 182) Power* front seat (p. 183) Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 183) Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 184) • Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 185) • Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 187) • • Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 186) • Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 189) • Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* (p. 191) Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 189) * Option/accessory. SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL Adjusting the side support* in the front seat 2. Increase comfort in the front seat by adjusting the sides of the backrest. Select Side bolsters in the seat settings view. • Press the front section of the four-way . button to increase side support • Press the rear section of the four-way button to decrease side support . Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat The lumbar support is adjusted using a control on the side of the seat cushion. Related information • • • • Multi-function control, located on the side of the seat's seating section. The sides of the backrest can be adjusted to provide side support. Both the multi-function control on the seat and the centre display can be used in order to change the settings. The range of settings is shown in the centre display. Activate the multi-function control by turning . The seat settings view the it up/down will be shown in the centre display. Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 183) Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 184) • Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 185) • Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 187) • Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 188) • • Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 186) • Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* (p. 191) To adjust the side support: 1. Manual front seat (p. 182) Power* front seat (p. 183) Multifunction control in cars with four-way lumbar support*. Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 189) Control in cars with two-way lumbar support*. }} * Option/accessory. 189 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL || The lumbar support is adjusted using the multifunction control in cars with four-way lumbar support*, or using the round button in cars with twoway lumbar support*. The control is located on the side of the seat's seating section. Depending on the equipment level selected, the lumbar support can be adjusted forward/back and up/down (four-way lumbar support) or forward/back (twoway lumbar support). 2. Adjust the lumbar support in the car using the four-way lumbar support Adjust the lumbar support in the car using the two-way lumbar support 1. 190 Activate the multi-function control by turning upwards/downwards. The the control seat settings view will be shown in the centre display. Select Lumbar in the seat settings view. • /down Press the round button up to move the lumbar support upwards/ downwards. • Press the front section of the button to increase lumbar support. • of the button to Press the rear section decrease lumbar support. 1. Press the front section of the round button to increase lumbar support. 2. Press the rear section of the round button to decrease lumbar support. Related information • • • • Manual front seat (p. 182) Power* front seat (p. 183) Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 183) Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 184) • Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 185) • Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 187) • Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 188) • • Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 186) • Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* (p. 191) Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 189) * Option/accessory. SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL Adjusting the passenger seat from the driver's seat* • • Massage settings* in the front seat (p. 186) The front passenger seat can be adjusted from the driver's seat. • Adjusting the lumbar support* in the front seat (p. 189) Activating the function Adjusting the side support* in the front seat (p. 189) The function is activated via the function view in the centre display: Press the Adjust Passenger Seat button to activate. Move the passenger seat forward/backward by adjusting the control forward/backward. Change the passenger seat's backrest inclination by adjusting the control forward/backward. Adjust passenger seat From activation of the function, the driver must adjust the passenger seat within 10 seconds. If no adjustment is made within this time the function is deactivated. The driver adjusts the passenger seat using the controls on the driver's seat: Related information • • • • Manual front seat (p. 182) Power* front seat (p. 183) Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 183) Storing position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 184) • Using a stored position for seat, door mirrors and head-up display* (p. 185) • Adjusting massage settings* in the front seat (p. 187) • Adjusting* the length of the seat cushion in the front seat (p. 188) * Option/accessory. 191 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL Lowering backrests in the second seat row The second seat row has three individual seats. The backrests can be lowered forward individually. WARNING • • • • Adjust the seat and fix it before driving away. Take care when adjusting the seat. Uncontrolled or careless adjustment can lead to trapping injuries. When loading long objects, they must always be strapped in securely to avoid injury and damage during sudden braking. Always switch off the engine and apply the parking brake when loading and unloading the car. For cars with automatic gearbox, set the gear selector in P to prevent it from being moved by mistake. IMPORTANT There must be no objects on the rear seat when the backrest is to be folded down. The seat belts must not be connected either. Otherwise there is a risk of damaging the rear seat upholstery. 192 IMPORTANT Centre seat The seat cushion on the integrated child seat* must be in lowered position before lowering the centre seat backrest. The armrest* for the centre seat must be raised before lowering the seat. NOTE The front seats may need to be pushed forwards, and/or the backrests adjusted upwards, in order that the rear backrests can be fully folded forward. To lower the backrest: The rear seats may also need to be moved backwards. 1. Lower the head restraint manually. The seats must be in raised position when the second seat row is lowered, they should not be lowered when they are tilted forward for entry/exit to/from the third seat row. 2. Pull the strap located on the centre seat's right-hand side. 3. Lower the backrest forward until it locks into position. The seat cushion folds down/ forward when the backrest is lowered in order to create a flat surface. To raise the backrest to the upright position: 1. Pull the strap. 2. Raise the backrest and release the strap. Slide the backrest until the catch engages. 3. If necessary, raise the head restraint. * Option/accessory. SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL Outer seats 2. Make sure that the backrest with head restraint does not come into contact with the front seat when lowered. Lower the backrest forward until it locks into position. > The seat cushion folds down/forward when the backrest is lowered in order to create a flat surface. The head restraint lowers automatically when the rear seat is lowered. WARNING Check that the backrests and head restraints in the rear seat are locked properly after being folded up. The head restraints of the outer seats must always be raised when there are passengers on any of the rear seats. WARNING WARNING The head restraints on the outer seats in the second seat row must always be raised when the third seat row* is occupied by passengers. Make sure the backrests are properly locked after they are lowered. To lower the backrest: To raise the backrest to the upright position: NOTE When lowering the second seat row, always start from the seat's normal position. Do not use lowering lever for the seat when the seat is in entry/exit position for the third seat row. 1. Pull the handle on the side of the seat upwards and hold the handle in the raised position while lowering the backrest. 1. 2. Pull the handle on the side of the seat upwards and hold the handle in the raised position while raising the backrest. Make sure that the backrest with head restraint does not come into contact with the front seat when raised. Raise the backrest and release the handle. 3. Push the backrest until the lock engages. 4. Raise the head restraint manually. Related information • Adjusting the head restraints in the second seat row (p. 194) • Adjusting the seat longitudinally in the second seat row* (p. 195) • Adjusting the backrest inclination in the second seat row (p. 196) • • Getting in/out of the third* seat row (p. 197) Lowering backrests in the third seat row* (p. 198) * Option/accessory. 193 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL Adjusting the head restraints in the second seat row Electrical lowering of the rear seat's outer head restraints* Adjust the centre seat head restraint according to the height of the passenger. Fold down the outer seat head restraints* to improve rearward visibility. Adjusting the head restraint, centre seat To lower the head restraint, the button (located in the centre between the backrest and head restraint, see illustration) must be pressed in while the head restraint is pressed down carefully. The outer head restraints can be retracted via the centre display's function view. You can lower the head restraints in ignition position 0. WARNING The centre seat's head restraint must be adjusted according to the passenger's height so that, if possible, the whole of the back of the head is covered. Slide it up manually as required. 194 The centre seat head restraint must be in its lowest position when the centre seat is not used. When the centre seat is used, the head restraint must be correctly adjusted to the height of the passenger so that it covers the whole of the back of the head if possible. * Option/accessory. SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL Press the Headrest Fold button to activate/deactivate lowering. Move the head restraint back manually until a click is heard. • • Getting in/out of the third* seat row (p. 197) Lowering backrests in the third seat row* (p. 198) Adjusting the seat longitudinally in the second seat row* In a car with 7 seats*, the seats in the second seat row can be adjusted forward or back individually in order to create optimal legroom for the second and third row passengers. It is not possible to adjust the rear seat longitudinally in a car with 5 seats. WARNING Do not lower the outer head restraints if there are passengers in any of the outer rear seats. WARNING The head restraint must be in locked position after being folded up. WARNING The head restraints on the outer seats in the second seat row must always be raised when the third seat row* is occupied by passengers. Lift the handle that is located under the seat. Slide the seat forward or backward to the desired position. Related information • Lowering backrests in the second seat row (p. 192) 3. Release the handle and slide the seat until the catch engages. • Adjusting the seat longitudinally in the second seat row* (p. 195) Check that the seat is locked after the position has been adjusted. • Adjusting the backrest inclination in the second seat row (p. 196) }} * Option/accessory. 195 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL || WARNING • Adjust the seat and fix it before driving away. Take care when adjusting the seat. Uncontrolled or careless adjustment can lead to trapping injuries. • When loading long objects, they must always be strapped in securely to avoid injury and damage during sudden braking. • Always switch off the engine and apply the parking brake when loading and unloading the car. • For cars with automatic gearbox, set the gear selector in P to prevent it from being moved by mistake. Adjusting the backrest inclination in the second seat row Backrest inclination can be adjusted individually for each seat in the second seat row. Centre seat Related information • Lowering backrests in the second seat row (p. 192) 1. • Adjusting the head restraints in the second seat row (p. 194) Pull the strap located on the centre seat's right-hand side. 2. • Adjusting the backrest inclination in the second seat row (p. 196) Adjust the backrest inclination forward/backward by reducing/increasing the load against the backrest. 3. Release the strap to lock the backrest position and slide the backrest until the catch engages. • • 196 Getting in/out of the third* seat row (p. 197) Lowering backrests in the third seat row* (p. 198) Outer seats 1. Pull the handle on the side of the seat upwards. 2. Adjust the backrest inclination forward/backward by reducing/increasing the load against the backrest. 3. Release the handle to lock the backrest position and slide the backrest until the catch engages. Check that the seat is locked after the position has been adjusted. Check that the seat is locked after the position has been adjusted. * Option/accessory. SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL WARNING Getting in/out of the third* seat row • Adjust the seat and fix it before driving away. Take care when adjusting the seat. Uncontrolled or careless adjustment can lead to trapping injuries. In order to smoothly and easily be able to get in and out of the third seat row*, the second seat row can be adjusted. • When loading long objects, they must always be strapped in securely to avoid injury and damage during sudden braking. • Always switch off the engine and apply the parking brake when loading and unloading the car. • For cars with automatic gearbox, set the gear selector in P to prevent it from being moved by mistake. Related information • Lowering backrests in the second seat row (p. 192) • Adjusting the head restraints in the second seat row (p. 194) • • • NOTE If the backrest in the centre seat row cannot be locked on its return after entry/exit, it may need to be moved forward again and then back with slightly more force. WARNING Check that the backrests and head restraints in the rear seat are locked properly after being folded up. The head restraints of the outer seats must always be raised when there are passengers on any of the rear seats. Related information To lower the backrest: 1. Pull upward/forward on the handle located at the top of the outer seats in the second seat row. Adjusting the seat longitudinally in the second seat row* (p. 195) 2. Fold the backrest forward and slide the whole seat forward. Getting in/out of the third* seat row (p. 197) To raise the seat to the upright position: Lowering backrests in the third seat row* (p. 198) – Slide the seat backwards until it reaches the stop. The backrest must fall easily back into the correct position. • Lowering backrests in the second seat row (p. 192) • Adjusting the head restraints in the second seat row (p. 194) • Adjusting the seat longitudinally in the second seat row* (p. 195) • Adjusting the backrest inclination in the second seat row (p. 196) • Lowering backrests in the third seat row* (p. 198) * Option/accessory. 197 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL Lowering backrests in the third seat row* 2. The third seat row has two individual seats. These can be lowered forward individually. IMPORTANT To be able to lower the third seat row backrests, it may be necessary to change the position and angle of the seats in the second seat row. Make sure that the backrest with head restraint does not come into contact with the seat in front when lowered. Fold the backrest forward. > The seat cushion folds down/forward when the backrest is lowered in order to create a flat surface. The head restraint lowers automatically when the rear seat is lowered. • Getting in/out of the third* seat row (p. 197) To raise the seat, raise the backrest manually until it locks. The head restraint is raised manually. WARNING Check that the backrests and head restraints in the rear seat are locked properly after being folded up. The head restraints of the outer seats must always be raised when there are passengers on any of the rear seats. Related information 1. 198 Pull upward/forward on the handle that is located on the top of the backrest. • Lowering backrests in the second seat row (p. 192) • Adjusting the head restraints in the second seat row (p. 194) • Adjusting the seat longitudinally in the second seat row* (p. 195) • Adjusting the backrest inclination in the second seat row (p. 196) * Option/accessory. SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL Steering wheel controls and horn Horn The steering wheel houses the horn and controls for e.g. the driver support systems and voice recognition. Steering lock The steering wheel lock makes it difficult to steer the car if it is stolen, for example. A mechanical noise can be perceived when the steering lock is locked or unlocked. Activating the steering lock The steering lock is activated when the car is locked from the outside and the engine is switched off. If the car is left unlocked then the steering lock will be activated automatically after a while. The horn is located in the centre of the steering wheel. Related information Keypads and paddles* in the steering wheel. • • Steering lock (p. 199) Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 200) Controls for driver support systems5 Paddle shifter* for manual gear changing in an automatic gearbox. Controls for voice recognition, head-up display settings, and menu, message and phone handling. 5 Deactivating the steering lock The steering lock is deactivated when the car is unlocked from outside. If the car is not locked, the steering wheel lock will be deactivated as long as the remote control key is in the passenger compartment and the car is started. Related information • • Steering wheel controls and horn (p. 199) Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 200) Speed Limiter, Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control*, Distance Warning* and Pilot Assist. * Option/accessory. 199 SEATS AND STEERING WHEEL Adjusting the steering wheel The steering wheel can be adjusted in different positions. Lever for steering wheel adjustment. The steering wheel can be adjusted for height and for depth. WARNING Adjust the steering wheel and fix it before driving away. The steering wheel must never be adjusted while driving. With speed related power steering the level of steering force can be adjusted. Steering force is regulated according to the car's speed in order to give the driver enhanced road responsiveness. 200 1. Push the lever forwards to release the steering wheel. 2. Adjust the steering wheel to the position that suits you. 3. Pull the lever back to fix the steering wheel in place. If the lever is stiff, press the steering wheel lightly at the same time as you move the lever back. Related information • • • Steering lock (p. 199) Steering wheel controls and horn (p. 199) Adjusting the power* front seat (p. 183) * Option/accessory. CLIMATE CLIMATE Climate Climate zones Climate control - sensors The car is equipped with electronic climate control. The climate control system cools or heats as well as dehumidifies the air in the passenger compartment. The number of climate zones that the car is divided into governs the options for setting different temperatures for different parts of the passenger compartment. The climate control system has a number of sensors to help control the climate in the car. All climate control system functions are controlled from the centre display and physical buttons in the centre console. 4-zone climate Sensor location Some functions for the rear seat can also be controlled from the climate controls* at the rear of the tunnel console. Related information • • • • • • • • • Climate zones (p. 202) Climate control - sensors (p. 202) Perceived temperature (p. 203) Controlling climate control with voice recognition (p. 203) Parking climate (p. 229) Heater (p. 238) Air quality (p. 204) Air distribution (p. 207) Climate controls (p. 213) Climate zones with 4-zone climate. With 4-zone climate the temperature in the passenger compartment can be set separately for the left and right-hand sides in both the front and rear seat. Related information • Climate (p. 202) Sun sensor - on the upper side of the instrument panel. Moisture sensor - in the casing by the interior rearview mirror. Outside temperature sensor - in the righthand door mirror. Temperature sensor for the passenger compartment - by the physical buttons in the centre console. NOTE Do not cover or block the sensors with clothing or other objects. 202 * Option/accessory. CLIMATE With the Interior Air Quality System* there is also an air quality sensor that is fitted into the climate control system air intake. Related information • • Climate (p. 202) Interior Air Quality System* (p. 206) Perceived temperature The climate control system regulates the climate in the passenger compartment based on the perceived temperature, not on actual temperature. The temperature you select in the passenger compartment corresponds to the physically perceived temperature as affected by factors such as the ambient temperature, air speed, humidity, solar radiation, etc. in and around the car at the time. The system includes a sun sensor which detects on which side the sun is shining into the passenger compartment. This means that the temperature can differ between the right and left-hand side's air vents despite the controls being set for the same temperature on both sides. Controlling climate control with voice recognition1 Voice recognition commands for the climate control system to e.g. change temperature, activate a heated seat* or change fan level. Press mands: • "Climate" - starts a dialogue for climate control and shows examples of commands. • "Set temperature to X degrees" - sets the desired temperature. • "Raise temperature"/"Lower temperature" - raise/lower the temperature setting one step. • "Sync temperature" - synchronises the temperature for all climate zones in the car with the temperature set for the driver's side. • "Air on feet"/"Air on body" - opens the desired air flow. • "Air on feet off"/"Air on body off" - closes the desired air flow. • "Set fan to max"/"Turn off fan" - changes the air flow to Max/Off. • "Raise fan speed"/"Lower fan speed" raises/lowers the fan level one step. • "Turn on auto" - activates automatic regulation of the climate control. Related information • 1 Applies to certain markets. Climate (p. 202) and say one of the following com- }} * Option/accessory. 203 CLIMATE || • • "Recirculation on"/"Recirculation off" activates/deactivates the air circulation. • "Turn on defroster "/"Turn off defroster" - activates/deactivates defrosting of windows and door mirrors. • • 204 "Air condition on"/"Air condition off" activates/deactivates the air conditioning. "Turn on max defroster"/"Turn max defroster off" - activates/deactivates the max defroster. "Turn on electric defroster"/"Turn off electric defroster" - activates/deactivates the heated windscreen*. • "Turn on rear defroster"/"Turn off rear defroster" - activates/deactivates the heated rear window and door mirrors. • "Turn steering wheel heat on"/"Turn steering wheel heat off" - activates/deactivates the heated steering wheel*. • "Raise steering wheel heat"/"Lower steering wheel heat" - raises/lowers the setting for the heated steering wheel* one step. • "Turn on seat heat"/"Turn off seat heat" - activates/deactivates the heated seat*. • "Raise seat heat"/"Lower seat heat" raises/lowers the setting for the heated seat* one step. • • "Turn on seat ventilation"/"Turn off seat ventilation" - activates/deactivates the seat ventilation*. "Raise seat ventilation"/"Lower seat ventilation" - raises/lowers the setting for the ventilated seat* one step. Related information • • • • Climate (p. 202) Voice recognition (p. 144) Using voice recognition (p. 145) Settings for voice recognition (p. 148) Air quality The materials selected for the passenger compartment and the air cleaning system ensure that the air quality in the passenger compartment is high. Materials in the passenger compartment The interior of the passenger compartment is designed to be pleasant and comfortable, even for people with contact allergies and for asthma sufferers. Tested materials have been developed in order to minimise the quantity of dust in the passenger compartment and to contribute to making the passenger compartment easier to keep clean. The carpets in both the passenger compartment and the cargo area are removable and easy to remove and clean. Use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo to clean the interior. Air cleaning system In addition to the passenger compartment filter, Clean Zone Interior Package* and the Interior Air Quality System* also help to maintain high air quality in the passenger compartment. Related information • • Climate (p. 202) Clean Zone* (p. 205) * Option/accessory. CLIMATE • • • Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 206) Clean Zone* • Interior Air Quality System* (p. 206) The Clean Zone function checks and indicates whether or not all conditions have been met for good air quality in the passenger compartment. That the air quality system Interior Air Quality System* is activated. • • That the ventilation fan is activated. Passenger compartment filter (p. 207) That the air recirculation is deactivated. NOTE Clean Zone does not indicate that the air quality is good. It only indicates that the conditions for good air quality have been met. Related information The indicator is visible in the climate view in the centre display. • • • • Air quality (p. 204) Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 206) Interior Air Quality System* (p. 206) Passenger compartment filter (p. 207) The indicator is visible in the climate row when the climate view is not open. If the conditions have not been met then the Clean Zone text is white. When all conditions have been met, this is indicated by the text changing colour to blue. Conditions that need to be met: • • That all doors and the tailgate are closed. That all side windows and the panorama roof* are closed. * Option/accessory. 205 CLIMATE Clean Zone Interior Package* Interior Air Quality System* Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) comprises a series of modifications that keep the passenger compartment even clearer from allergy and asthma-inducing substances. Interior Air Quality System (IAQS) is a fully automatic air quality system that separates gases and particles to reduce the levels of odours and contaminants in the passenger compartment. The following is included: IAQS is a part of the Clean Zone Interior Package (CZIP) and cleans the air in the passenger compartment from contaminants such as particles, hydrocarbons, nitrous oxides and groundlevel ozone. • • An enhanced fan function that means that the fan starts when the car is unlocked with the remote control key. The fan fills the passenger compartment with fresh air. The function starts when required and is disengaged automatically after a time or when one of the passenger compartment doors is opened. The amount of time the fan runs is reduced gradually due to reduced need up until the car is 4 years old. Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 206) Passenger compartment filter (p. 207) If the air quality sensor senses that the outside air is contaminated, the air intake is closed and air recirculation is activated. NOTE The air quality sensor must always be enabled to ensure the best air in the passenger compartment. The fully automatic air quality system Interior Air Quality System (IAQS). Related information • • • • • • In a cold climate recirculation is limited so as to prevent misting. Air quality (p. 204) Clean Zone* (p. 205) In the event of misting, the defrost functions for windscreen, side windows and rear window should be used. Interior Air Quality System* (p. 206) Passenger compartment filter (p. 207) Related information • • • 206 Activating and deactivating the air quality sensor* (p. 207) Air quality (p. 204) Clean Zone* (p. 205) * Option/accessory. CLIMATE Activating and deactivating the air quality sensor* The air quality sensor is part of the fully automatic air quality system Interior Air Quality System (IAQS). It is possible to set whether the air quality sensor should be activated/deactivated. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press Climate. 3. Select Air Quality Sensor to activate/deactivate the air quality sensor. Passenger compartment filter Air distribution All air entering the car's passenger compartment is cleaned with a filter. The climate control system distributes the incoming air via a number of different vents in the passenger compartment. Replacing the passenger compartment filter To maintain high climate system performance, the filter must be changed at regular intervals. Follow the Volvo Service Programme for the recommended replacement intervals. If the car is used in a severely contaminated environment, it may be necessary to replace the filter more often. NOTE With auto-regulated climate control running the air distribution takes place automatically. If necessary, the air distribution can be controlled manually. Adjustable air vents Some of the air vents in the car are adjustable, which means that you can open/close the vent to aim the air flow. There are different types of passenger compartment filter. Make sure that the correct filter is fitted. Related information • Automatic and manual air distribution Interior Air Quality System* (p. 206) Related information • • • • Air quality (p. 204) Clean Zone* (p. 205) Clean Zone Interior Package* (p. 206) Interior Air Quality System* (p. 206) Location of adjustable air vents in the passenger compartment. With five seats - four on the instrument panel, two at the rear of the tunnel console }} * Option/accessory. 207 CLIMATE and one on each of the door pillars between the front and rear doors. || Addition with seven seats - one on each of the door pillars behind the rear doors. Changing air distribution The air distribution can be changed manually if required. Related information Climate (p. 202) • • • Changing air distribution (p. 208) • Table of air distribution options (p. 210) Opening, closing and aiming the air vents (p. 209) 1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row. The air distribution buttons in the climate view. Air distribution - windscreen defroster vents Air distribution - air vents in instrument panel and centre console Air distribution - air vents in the floor 2. Press one or more of the air distribution buttons in order to open/close the corresponding air flow. > The air distribution is changed and the buttons illuminate/extinguish. Related information 208 • • Air distribution (p. 207) • Table of air distribution options (p. 210) Opening, closing and aiming the air vents (p. 209) CLIMATE Opening, closing and aiming the air vents Some air vents in the passenger compartment can be opened, closed and aimed individually. If the car's outer vents are aimed at the side windows then misting can be eliminated. If the car's outer vents are aimed inwards then, in a hot climate, a comfortable environment is obtained in the passenger compartment. Opening and closing the air vents – Roll the thumbwheel under the air vent in order to open/close the air flow from the vent. The longer the white lines on the thumbwheel that are visible, the higher the air flow. Aiming the air vents – Move the lever in the middle of the air vent horizontally/vertically to direct the air flow from the vent. Related information • • • Air distribution (p. 207) Changing air distribution (p. 208) Table of air distribution options (p. 210) 209 CLIMATE Table of air distribution options The air distribution can be changed manually if required. The following options are available for setting. Air distribution Purpose If all air distribution buttons are deselected in manual mode, the climate control system returns to automatically regulated climate control. 210 Main air flow from the defroster vents. Some air flows from other air vents. Counteracts misting and icing in a cold and humid climate (to achieve this, fan level must not be low). Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel. Some air flows from other air vents. Provides efficient cooling in a hot climate. Main air flow from the air vents at the floor. Some air flows from other air vents. Provides heat or cooling to the floor. CLIMATE Air distribution Purpose Main air from the defroster vents and air vents in the instrument panel. Some air flows from other air vents. Provides good comfort in hot and dry climates. Main air flow from the defroster vents and air vents at the floor. Some air flows from other air vents. Provides good comfort and good demisting in a cold or humid climate. Main air flow from the air vents in the instrument panel and air vents at the floor. Some air flows from other air vents. Provides good comfort in sunny weather with cool outdoor temperatures. Main air flow from the defroster vents, from the air vents in the instrument panel and air vents at the floor. Gives balanced comfort in the passenger compartment. }} 211 CLIMATE || 212 Related information • • Air distribution (p. 207) • Changing air distribution (p. 208) Opening, closing and aiming the air vents (p. 209) CLIMATE Climate controls Main climate In addition to the climate row's functions, other main climate functions can also be controlled in the Main climate tab. The climate control system's functions are controlled from physical buttons in the centre console, the centre display and the climate controls at the rear of the tunnel console. Physical buttons in centre console Temperature controls for driver and passenger side. Controls for heated* and ventilated* driver and front passenger seat, as well as heated steering wheel*. Button for heated windscreen* and max defroster. Button for heated rear window and door mirrors. Climate row in centre display The most common climate functions can be regulated from the climate row. Button for access to the climate view. The graphic on the button shows activated climate settings. Climate view in centre display Open climate view by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row. Depending on equipment level, the climate view can be divided into several tabs. Change between the tabs by swiping left/right or by pressing the respective heading. Max, Electric, Rear - Controls for defrosting the windows and door mirrors. AC - Controls for air conditioning. Recirc - Controls for air recirculation. Controls for air distribution. }} * Option/accessory. 213 CLIMATE || Climate controls at rear of tunnel console Fan controls for front seat. AUTO - Auto regulating the climate. Rear climate control All climate functions for the rear seat can be regulated in the Rear climate tab. Controls for heated rear seat*. Fan controls for rear seat. Temperature controls for rear seat. 2nd row climate - Controls for climate functionality in the rear seat, second seat row. Fan controls for rear seat, second seat row. 3rd row climate - Controls for climate functionality in the rear seat, third seat row*. Temperature controls for rear seat. Controls for heated rear seat*. Locking/unlocking button on the climate panel. The climate panel has a screen lock to prevent unintentional change of fan speed and temperature. When the screen is locked, only the seat controls* and the unlocking button are shown. After unlocking, the fan speed and temperature can be changed via the climate panel and all selected climate settings are shown. The screen locks automatically after a period of inactivity. Parking climate The car's parking climate control can be regulated in the Parking climate tab. 214 * Option/accessory. CLIMATE Related information • • Climate (p. 202) Activating and deactivating heated front seat* (p. 215) • Activating and deactivating heated rear seat* (p. 216) • Activating and deactivating ventilated front seat* (p. 217) • Activating and deactivating the heated steering wheel* (p. 218) • • Activating auto climate control (p. 218) • Activating and deactivating max defroster (p. 220) • Activating and deactivating the heated windscreen* (p. 221) • Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors (p. 222) • • • • • Activating and deactivating heated front seat* The seats can be heated in order to increase comfort for driver and passengers when it is cold. Related information 1. Activating and deactivating air recirculation (p. 219) Regulating fan level for front seat (p. 223) Regulating fan level for rear seat (p. 224) Synchronising temperature (p. 227) Activating and deactivating air conditioning (p. 228) WARNING Heated seats must not be used by people who find it difficult to perceive an increase in temperature due to a lack of sensation or who otherwise have problems operating the controls for the heated seats. Otherwise they may suffer burn injuries. Press the left or right-hand side's steering wheel and seat button in the climate row in the centre display in order to open the controls for seat and steering wheel. • • Climate controls (p. 213) Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated front seat* (p. 216) If the car is not equipped with ventilated seats or heated steering wheel (for the driver's side), the button for heated seats is immediately available in the climate row. 2. Repeatedly press the button for heated seats in order to change between the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low. > The level changes and the button shows the set level. Activating and deactivating climate for the third row of seats* (p. 228) * Option/accessory. 215 CLIMATE Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated front seat* Activating and deactivating heated rear seat* The seats can be heated in order to increase comfort for driver and passengers when it is cold. The seats can be heated in order to increase comfort for driver and passengers when it is cold. It is possible to set whether automatic start of heated seats should be activated/deactivated when the engine is started. With automatic start activated, heating will start in the event of low ambient temperature. Activating and deactivating the heated rear seat from the front seat 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press Climate. 3. Select Auto Driver Seat Heating Level and Auto Passenger Seat Heating Level to activate/deactivate automatic start of heated driver's and passenger seat. > An "A" is shown at each button for heated front seats in the climate row when automatic starting has been activated. 4. Select Low, Medium or High to select level after the function has been activated. Related information • • 216 Climate controls (p. 213) Activating and deactivating heated front seat* (p. 215) 1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row. 2. Select the Rear climate tab. Activating and deactivating the heated rear seat from the rear seat Seat heating indication and controls on the climate panel at the rear of the tunnel console. – 3. Repeatedly press the button for heated seats in order to change between the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low. > The level changes and the button shows the set level. Press repeatedly on the left or right-hand side's buttons for heated seats on the tunnel console's climate panel to switch between the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low. > The level changes and the screen in the climate panel shows the set level. WARNING Heated seats must not be used by people who find it difficult to perceive an increase in temperature due to a lack of sensation or who otherwise have problems operating the controls for the heated seats. Otherwise they may suffer burn injuries. * Option/accessory. CLIMATE Related information • Climate controls (p. 213) Activating and deactivating ventilated front seat* Related information • Climate controls (p. 213) The seats can be ventilated to provide increased comfort in a hot climate, for example. The ventilation system consists of fans in the seats and backrests that draw air through the seat upholstery. The cooling effect increases the cooler the passenger compartment air becomes. The system can be activated when the engine is running. 1. Press the left or right-hand side's steering wheel and seat button in the climate row in the centre display in order to open the controls for seat and steering wheel. If the car is not equipped with heated seats or heated steering wheel (for the driver's side), the button for ventilated seats is immediately available in the climate row. 2. Repeatedly press the button for ventilated seats in order to change between the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low. > The level changes and the button shows the set level. * Option/accessory. 217 CLIMATE Activating and deactivating the heated steering wheel* The steering wheel can be heated in order to increase comfort for the driver when it is cold. 1. Press the driver's side steering wheel and seat button in the climate row of the centre display in order to open the controls for seat and steering wheel. If the car is not equipped with heated seats or ventilated seats, the button for heated steering wheel is immediately available in the climate row. 2. Repeatedly press the button for heated steering wheel in order to change between the four levels: Off, High, Medium and Low. > The level changes and the button shows the set level. Related information • • 218 Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated steering wheel* Activating auto climate control With auto climate control activated, multiple climate functions are controlled automatically. The steering wheel can be heated in order to increase comfort for the driver when it is cold. It is possible to set whether automatic start of heated steering wheel should be activated/deactivated when the engine is started. With automatic start activated, heating will start in the event of low ambient temperature. 1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Give a short or long press on AUTO Climate. 2. Press Climate. 3. Select Auto Steering Wheel Heating Level to activate/deactivate automatic start of heated steering wheel. > An "A" is shown at the button for heated steering wheel in the climate row when automatic starting has been activated. 4. Select Low, Medium or High to select level after the function has been activated. Related information • • Short press - air recirculation, air conditioning and air distribution are controlled automatically. Long press - air recirculation, air conditioning and air distribution are controlled automatically, temperature and fan speed are changed to standard settings: 22 °C (72 °F) and level 3 (level 2 in the rear seat). > Auto-regulation of the climate is activated and the button illuminates. • Activating and deactivating the heated steering wheel* (p. 218) Climate controls (p. 213) Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated steering wheel* (p. 218) * Option/accessory. CLIMATE NOTE Temperature and fan speed can be changed without deactivating the automatically-regulated climate control system. The automaticallyregulated climate control system is deactivated when the air distribution is changed manually or when maximum defroster is activated. Related information • Climate controls (p. 213) Activating and deactivating air recirculation Air recirculation shuts out bad air, exhaust gases, etc. from outside the car by the climate control system reusing the air in the passenger compartment. 1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row. 2. Press Recirc. > Air recirculation is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes. Related information • • Climate controls (p. 213) Activating and deactivating time setting for air recirculation (p. 220) IMPORTANT If the air in the car is recirculated for too long then there is a risk of misting on the insides of the windows. NOTE It is not possible to activate air recirculation when max defroster is activated. 219 CLIMATE Activating and deactivating time setting for air recirculation Activating and deactivating max defroster Air recirculation shuts out bad air, exhaust gases, etc. from outside the car by the climate control system reusing the air in the passenger compartment. Max defroster is used to quickly remove mist and ice from windows. It is possible set whether the air recirculation timer should be activated/deactivated. When the timer is activated, air recirculation is automatically switched off after 20 minutes. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press Climate. 3. Select Recirculation Timer to activate/ deactivate the air recirculation timer. Related information • Activating and deactivating air recirculation (p. 219) Max defroster deactivates auto-regulation of the climate and air recirculation, activates air conditioning and changes the fan level to 5 and the temperature to HI. NOTE Changing the fan level to 5 increases the noise level. Physical button in the centre console. Cars without heated windscreen: Press the button. > Max defroster is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes. When max defroster is deactivated, the climate control system returns to the previous settings. – Activating and deactivating max defroster from centre console Cars with heated windscreen: There is a physical button in the centre console for quick access to max defroster. – With heated windscreen* the max defroster can only be activated individually from the climate view in the centre display. Press the button repeatedly in order to switch between the three levels: • • Activated heated windscreen Activated heated windscreen and max defroster Deactivated. > Heated windscreen and max defroster are activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes. • 220 * Option/accessory. CLIMATE NOTE Max defroster starts with a certain delay in order to avoid a short increase in fan level if the heated windscreen is deactivated by two quick presses of the button. Activating and deactivating max defroster from centre display 1. Activating and deactivating the heated windscreen* Activating and deactivating heated windscreen from centre display A heated windscreen is used to quickly remove mist and ice from the window. Activating and deactivating heated windscreen from centre console 1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row. 2. Press Electric. > Heated windscreen is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes. In the centre console is a physical button for rapid access to the heated windscreen. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row. NOTE 2. Press Max. > Max defroster is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes. Related information • Climate controls (p. 213) Physical button in the centre console. – Press the button repeatedly in order to switch between the three levels: • • Activated heated windscreen Activated heated windscreen and max defroster Deactivated. > Heated windscreen and max defroster are activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes. • A triangular area at the end of each side of the windscreen is not electrically heated, where de-icing may take longer. NOTE The heated windscreen may affect the performance of transponders and other communication equipment. }} * Option/accessory. 221 CLIMATE || Related information • • Climate controls (p. 213) Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated windscreen* (p. 222) Activating and deactivating automatic start of heated windscreen* Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors A heated windscreen is used to quickly remove mist and ice from the window. The heated rear window and door mirrors are used to quickly remove mist and ice from the windows and mirrors. It is possible to set whether automatic start of heated windscreen should be activated/deactivated when the engine is started. With automatic start activated, heating will start when there is a risk of ice or misting on the windscreen/window. The heating switches off automatically when the windscreen/window is sufficiently warm and the ice or misting is gone. 1. Activating and deactivating heated rear window and door mirrors from centre console In the centre console is a physical button for rapid access to the heated rear window and door mirrors. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press Climate. 3. Select Auto Front Defroster to activate/ deactivate automatic start of heated windscreen. Related information • Activating and deactivating the heated windscreen* (p. 221) Physical button in the centre console. – 222 Press the button. > Heated rear window and door mirrors are activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes. * Option/accessory. CLIMATE Activating and deactivating heated rear window and door mirrors from centre display Activating and deactivating automatic starting of the heated rear window and door mirrors Regulating fan level for front seat The fan can be set to several different automatically controlled fan speeds for the front seat. The heated rear window and door mirrors are used to quickly remove mist and ice from the windows and mirrors. 1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row. 2. Press Rear. > Heated rear window and door mirrors are activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes. Related information • • It is possible to set whether automatic start of heated rear window and door mirrors should be activated/deactivated when the engine is started. With automatic start activated, heating will start when there is a risk of ice or misting on the windscreen/window. The heating switches off automatically when the windscreen/window is sufficiently warm and the ice or misting is gone. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press Climate. 3. Select Auto Rear Defroster to activate/ deactivate automatic start of heated rear window and door mirrors. Climate controls (p. 213) Activating and deactivating automatic starting of the heated rear window and door mirrors (p. 223) Related information • Activating and deactivating the heated rear window and door mirrors (p. 222) 1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row. Fan control buttons in the climate view. 2. Tap on the desired fan level, Off, 1-5 or Max. > Fan level is changed and the buttons for the selected level illuminate. }} 223 CLIMATE || IMPORTANT If the fan is fully switched off then the air conditioning is not engaged, which results in a risk of misting on the insides of the windows. Regulating fan level for rear seat The fan can be set to several different automatically controlled fan speeds for the rear seat. Regulating the fan level for the rear seat from the front seat NOTE The climate control system automatically adjusts the air flow within the selected fan level based on requirements. This means that the fan speed may change even though the fan level is the same. Related information • Climate controls (p. 213) 1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row. 2. Select the Rear climate tab. The fan control buttons in the tab Rear climate in the climate view. 3. Tap on the desired fan level, 1-5. The fan level for the second and third seat row* can be switched off by tapping on 2nd row climate. Third seat row fan level follows the level for the second seat row, but can be deactivated separately by tapping on 3rd row climate. > Fan level is changed and the buttons for the selected level illuminate. Regulating the fan level for the rear seat from the rear seat 1. 224 Press the unlocking button on the tunnel console climate panel to access the controls. * Option/accessory. CLIMATE NOTE The climate control system automatically adjusts the air flow within the selected fan level based on requirements. This means that the fan speed may change even though the fan level is the same. Regulating temperature for front seat The temperature can be set to the desired number of degrees for the front seat's climate zones. Related information • Climate controls (p. 213) Fan controls on the climate panel at the rear of the tunnel console. 2. Tap on the desired fan level, 1-5. > Fan level is changed and the buttons for the selected level illuminate. NOTE The fan level for the rear seat cannot be set if the fan level for the front seat is in position Off. Temperature buttons in the climate row. 1. Press the left or right-hand side temperature button in the centre display's climate row to open the controls. The rear seat fan speed can only be switched off from the climate view in the centre display. }} 225 CLIMATE Regulating temperature for rear seat || The temperature can be set to the desired number of degrees for the rear seat's climate zones. Regulating temperature for rear seat from front seat 1. Temperature control. 2. Regulate the temperature by either of the following: • 2. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row. Select the Rear climate tab. Temperature control. 4. drag the control to the desired temperature, or • press +/− to raise/lower the temperature gradually. > The temperature changes and the button shows the set temperature. • Regulating temperature for rear seat from rear seat NOTE Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by selecting a higher or lower temperature than the actual desired temperature. • 226 Climate controls (p. 213) drag the control to the desired temperature press +/− to raise/lower the temperature gradually. > The temperature changes and the button shows the set temperature. • Related information Regulate the temperature by means of the following: 1. Temperature buttons in the Rear climate tab in the climate view. 3. Press the left or right-hand side temperature button to open the control. Press the unlocking button on the tunnel console climate panel to access the controls. CLIMATE Synchronising temperature Related information The temperature in the car's different climate zones can be synchronised with the temperature set on the driver's side. • Climate controls (p. 213) Temperature control on the climate panel at the rear of the tunnel console. 2. Press the left or right-hand side </> buttons on the tunnel console's climate panel in order to lower/raise the temperature gradually. > The temperature changes and the screen in the climate panel shows the set temperature. NOTE Heating or cooling cannot be hastened by selecting a higher or lower temperature than the actual desired temperature. Related information • Climate controls (p. 213) Synchronisation button on the driver's side temperature controls. 1. Press the driver's side temperature button in the centre display's climate row in order to open the controls. 2. Press Synchronise temperature. > The temperature for all zones in the car is synchronised with the temperature set for the driver's side and the synchronisation symbol is shown adjacent to the temperature button. The synchronisation is stopped by means of a further press on Synchronise temperature or by means of changing the temperature settings for a climate zone other than the driver's. 227 CLIMATE Activating and deactivating air conditioning NOTE It is not possible to activate the air conditioning when the fan control is in Off position. The air conditioning cools and dehumidifies incoming air as required. When the air conditioning is activated, the climate control system automatically controls starting and switching off as required. 1. 2. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row. Related information • Activating and deactivating climate for the third row of seats* The third seat row has separate air conditioning that cools and dehumidifies incoming air when necessary. Climate controls (p. 213) 1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row. 2. Select the Rear climate tab. 3. Press 3rd row climate. > The air conditioning is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes. Press AC. > The air conditioning is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes. NOTE The air conditioning for the third seat row is activated automatically if anyone in the third seat row puts on a seatbelt. NOTE It is not possible to manually activate the third seat row's air conditioning if the main air conditioning is deactivated or the second seat row's climate control is deactivated. Close all side windows and the panoramic roof* for air conditioning to work optimally. Related information • 228 Climate controls (p. 213) * Option/accessory. CLIMATE Parking climate Preconditioning Parking climate control is a generic term for various functions that improve the passenger compartment climate when the car is parked, e.g. preconditioning. Preconditioning is a climate function which, if possible, attempts to reach comfort temperature in the passenger compartment before departure. Functions belonging to the parking climate control are controlled from the Parking climate in climate view in the centre display. Open climate view by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row. Preconditioning can use direct start or be set via the timer. Climate (p. 202) • In a cold climate, the parking heater warms up the passenger compartment to a comfortable temperature. • The air conditioning, in a hot climate, cools the passenger compartment to the comfort temperature. Preconditioning (p. 229) Climate comfort when parking (p. 234) Symbols and messages for parking climate control (p. 236) • Activation of heated steering wheel* and heated seats* for driver and passenger can be selected. • Heated windscreen, rear window and door mirrors are automatically activated as required. During preconditioning in a hot climate, condensation from the air conditioning may drip under the car. This is normal. 2 If the car is not connected to an electrical socket, it is still possible to cool the passenger compartment briefly in a warm climate by starting preconditioning directly. The function utilises several systems in different cases: Related information • • • • NOTE Preconditioning is available only when the car is connected to an electrical socket2. A charging station which is not always active, e.g. on account of a timer, may cause preconditioning to malfunction. NOTE During preconditioning of the passenger compartment, the car works to reach comfort temperature and not the temperature set in the climate control system. Related information • • • Parking climate (p. 229) Start and switch off preconditioning (p. 230) Preconditioning time setting (p. 231) Applicable to electric heater. * Option/accessory. 229 CLIMATE Start and switch off preconditioning Preconditioning heats or cools the passenger compartment, if possible, prior to driving. The function can use direct start from the centre display or a mobile phone. Start and switch off from car 1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row. 2. Select the Parking climate tab. 3. Select whether seat heating and steering wheel heating should be activated during preconditioning by ticking/unticking the boxes for the respective function. 4. Press Preconditioning. > Preconditioning is started/switched off and the button is illuminated/extinguished. NOTE Preconditioning is available only when the car is connected to an electrical socket3. A charging station which is not always active, e.g. on account of a timer, may cause preconditioning to malfunction. If the car is not connected to an electrical socket, it is still possible to cool the passenger compartment briefly in a warm climate by starting preconditioning directly. NOTE The car's doors and windows should be closed during the preconditioning of the passenger compartment. WARNING Do not use preconditioning4: • In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater starts. • In locations with combustible or flammable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite. • When there is a risk that the heater’s exhaust line may be blocked. For example, deep snow inside the front right-hand wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s ventilation. Remember that the preconditioning can be started by a timer that has been set for a long time in advance. Starting from the app* Start of preconditioning and information about the selected settings can be managed from a device that has the Volvo On Call* app. Preconditioning heats or cools the passenger compartment (using the car's air conditioning) to comfort temperature. The passenger compartment can also be preconditioned with the car remote start function (Engine Remote Start - ERS)5 via the Volvo On Call* app. 3 4 5 230 Applicable to electric heater. Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater. Certain markets. * Option/accessory. CLIMATE Related information • • • Parking climate (p. 229) Preconditioning (p. 229) Preconditioning time setting (p. 231) Preconditioning time setting The timer can be set so that the preconditioning is finished at a predetermined time. • Removing time setting for preconditioning (p. 234) The timer can handle up to 8 different settings for: • • A time on a single date A time on one or more days of the week, with or without repetition. NOTE Preconditioning is available only when the car is connected to an electrical socket6. A charging station which is not always active, e.g. on account of a timer, may cause preconditioning to malfunction. If the car is not connected to an electrical socket, it is still possible to cool the passenger compartment briefly in a warm climate by starting preconditioning directly. Related information • • • 6 Preconditioning (p. 229) Adding and editing time setting for preconditioning (p. 232) Activating and deactivating time setting for preconditioning (p. 233) Applicable to electric heater. 231 CLIMATE Adding and editing time setting for preconditioning 3. The timer for preconditioning can manage up to 8 time settings. Adding a time setting Press Add timer. > A pop-up window is shown. 7. NOTE It is not possible to add a time setting if there already are 8 settings entered for the timer. Delete a time setting in order to be able to add a new one. 4. Tap on Date to set the time for a single date. WARNING Do not use preconditioning7: • In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater starts. • In locations with combustible or flammable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite. • When there is a risk that the heater’s exhaust line may be blocked. For example, deep snow inside the front right-hand wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s ventilation. Tap on Days to set the time for one or more days of the week. With Days: Activate/deactivate repetition by ticking/unticking the box for Repeat weekly. The button to add a time setting in the Parking climate tab in the climate view. 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. 2. Select the Parking climate tab. 5. With Days: Select the days of the week for preconditioning by tapping on the buttons for the days of the week. 6. 7 232 Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater. With Date: Select the date for preconditioning by scrolling the date list with the arrows. Set the time when the preconditioning should be finished by scrolling with the arrows. Tap on Confirm in order to add the time setting. > The time setting is added to the list and is activated. Remember that the preconditioning can be started by a timer that has been set for a long time in advance. Editing a time setting 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. 2. Select the Parking climate tab. 3. Press the time setting that is to be changed. > A pop-up window is shown. 4. Edit the time setting in the same way as described in "Adding a time setting" above. CLIMATE Related information • • • • Preconditioning (p. 229) Preconditioning time setting (p. 231) Activating and deactivating time setting for preconditioning (p. 233) Activating and deactivating time setting for preconditioning WARNING Do not use preconditioning8: A time setting in the timer for preconditioning can be activated or deactivated based on need. Removing time setting for preconditioning (p. 234) • In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater starts. • In locations with combustible or flammable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite. • When there is a risk that the heater’s exhaust line may be blocked. For example, deep snow inside the front right-hand wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s ventilation. Remember that the preconditioning can be started by a timer that has been set for a long time in advance. The timer buttons in the Parking climate tab in the climate view. 1. 8 Open the climate view in the centre display. 2. Select the Parking climate tab. 3. Activate/deactivate a time setting by tapping on the timer button to the right of the setting. > The time setting is activated/deactivated and the button illuminates/extinguishes. Related information • • • • Preconditioning (p. 229) Preconditioning time setting (p. 231) Adding and editing time setting for preconditioning (p. 232) Removing time setting for preconditioning (p. 234) Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater. 233 CLIMATE Removing time setting for preconditioning • A time setting for preconditioning that is no longer required can be deleted. • Adding and editing time setting for preconditioning (p. 232) Activating and deactivating time setting for preconditioning (p. 233) Climate comfort when parking The climate in the car's passenger compartment can be maintained while the car is parked, e.g. if the engine needs to be switched off but the driver or passenger(s) wants to remain in the car and maintain the level of climate comfort. Starting climate comfort retention is only possible via direct start. The function utilises several systems in different cases: • Residual heat from the engine, in a cold climate, heats the passenger compartment to comfort temperature. • When it is warm, the ventilation cools the passenger compartment by blowing in air from outside the car. The button for editing the list/deleting the time setting in the tab Parking climate in the climate view. 1. Open the climate view in the centre display. 2. Select the Parking climate tab. 3. Press Edit list. 4. Press the delete icon to the right in the list. > The icon changes to the text Delete. 5. Press Delete to confirm. > The time setting is removed from the list. Related information • • 234 Preconditioning (p. 229) Preconditioning time setting (p. 231) NOTE Climate comfort retention is switched off when the car is locked from the outside to avoid using residual heat unnecessarily. Use of the function is intended to maintain climate comfort when driver or passengers remain inside the car. Related information • • Parking climate (p. 229) Starting and switching off climate comfort when parking (p. 235) CLIMATE Starting and switching off climate comfort when parking NOTE Climate comfort retention is switched off when the car is locked from the outside to avoid using residual heat unnecessarily. Use of the function is intended to maintain climate comfort when driver or passengers remain inside the car. Climate comfort retention maintains the climate in the passenger compartment after driving. The function can use direct start from the centre display. Related information 1. Open climate view in the centre display by pressing the symbol in the middle of the climate row. 2. Select the Parking climate tab. 3. Press Keep climate comfort. > Climate comfort retention is started/ switched off and the button illuminates/ extinguishes. • Climate comfort when parking (p. 234) NOTE It is not possible to start climate comfort retention if there is not enough residual heat in the engine to maintain the passenger compartment climate, or if the outside temperature is above approx. 20°C (68°F). 235 CLIMATE Symbols and messages for parking climate control A number of symbols and messages regarding parking climate control can be shown in the driver display. Symbol Specification Parking climate Parking climate control is disengaged. Contact a workshopA to check the function as soon as possible. Parking climate Temporarily unavailable Parking climate Unavailable Fuel level too lowB Parking climate Unavailable Charge level too low 236 This symbol illuminates in the driver display9 when the parking heater is active. Message Service required 9 Messages relating to parking climate control can also be displayed in a device which has the Volvo On Call* app. Parking climate control is temporarily disengaged. If the problem persists for some time, contact a workshopA to check the function. Parking climate control cannot be activated when the fuel level is too low to start the parking heater. Fill the vehicle's fuel tank. Parking climate control cannot be activated if the charge level of the hybrid battery is too low to start the parking heater. Start the car. Applies to fuel-driven heater. * Option/accessory. CLIMATE Symbol Message Specification Parking climate The parking climate control cannot be activated if the charging cable is not connected. Connect the charging cable. Unavailable, not connected to the mainsC Parking climate Limited Charge level too low A B C The running time for parking climate control is limited when the state of charge in the hybrid battery is low. Start the car. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Applies to fuel-driven heater. Applies to electric heater. Related information • Parking climate (p. 229) 237 CLIMATE Heater Battery and charging The heater has two subfunctions that help to heat the passenger compartment or engine in different situations. The heater is powered by the car's hybrid battery. If the charge level of the hybrid battery is too low, then the heater is switched off automatically and the driver display shows a message. The heater has two subfunctions: • • Parking heater - heats the passenger compartment, if necessary, when the parking climate control's preconditioning is activated. Additional heater - heats the passenger compartment and engine, if necessary, during driving. NOTE If the car is parked on a steep hill, the front of the car should point downhill to ensure that there is a supply of fuel to the heater. If the level in the fuel tank is too low then the heater is switched off automatically and the driver display shows a message. NOTE Make sure that there is enough charge in the battery if the heater needs to be used. Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's fuel tank if the heater needs to be used. Fuel and refuelling12 WARNING Either a fuel-driven heater or an electric heater is used, depending on the market10. Fuel which spills out could be ignited. Switch off the fuel-driven heater before starting to refuel. The heater is fitted in the front right-hand wheel housing. Check in the driver display that the heater is switched off. This symbol is lit when it is working as a parking heater. NOTE When the heater is running11, smoke may be emitted from the right-hand front wheel housing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking sound from the fuel pump may also be heard from the rear section of the car. This is perfectly normal. 10 11 12 238 Related information Warning label on fuel filler flap. The heater uses fuel from the car's normal fuel tank. An authorised Volvo dealer has information regarding which markets use which type of heater. Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater. Applies to fuel-driven heater. • • • Climate (p. 202) Parking heater (p. 239) Additional heater (p. 240) CLIMATE Parking heater The parking heater heats the passenger compartment as necessary before driving if the car's preconditioning is activated. The parking heater is one of two subfunctions of the car's heater. The heater is fitted in the front right-hand wheel housing. When this symbol illuminates in the driver display, the parking heater may be active13. NOTE When the heater is running14, smoke may be emitted from the right-hand front wheel housing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking sound from the fuel pump may also be heard from the rear section of the car. This is perfectly normal. The parking heater starts automatically if the parking climate's preconditioning is activated and the passenger compartment needs to be heated up. 13 14 15 16 17 Applies to fuel-driven heater. Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater. Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater. Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater. Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater. It switches off automatically when a set timer time expires, or if the car is started. NOTE WARNING Do not use preconditioning16: • Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's fuel tank if the parking heater needs to be used15. In unventilated spaces indoors. Exhaust gases are emitted if the heater starts. • Make sure that there is enough charge in the hybrid battery if the parking heater needs to be used. In locations with combustible or flammable material nearby. Fuel, gas, long grass, sawdust, etc. may ignite. • When there is a risk that the heater’s exhaust line may be blocked. For example, deep snow inside the front right-hand wheel housing can obstruct the heater’s ventilation. Remember that the preconditioning can be started by a timer that has been set for a long time in advance. WARNING If there is a smell of fuel, unusual amounts of smoke, black smoke, or unusual sounds coming from the parking heater17, switch off the heater and, if possible, pull out its fuse. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted for repair. }} 239 CLIMATE || Related information • • Heater (p. 238) Additional heater (p. 240) Additional heater Related information The auxiliary heater helps to heat the passenger compartment and engine while driving. • • • The additional heater is one of two subfunctions of the car's heater. The heater is fitted in the front right-hand wheel housing. NOTE When the heater is running18, smoke may be emitted from the right-hand front wheel housing and a low hum may be heard. A ticking sound from the fuel pump may also be heard from the rear section of the car. This is perfectly normal. The additional heater starts and is controlled automatically when heating is required while the car is being driven. It switches off automatically when the car is switched off. NOTE Make sure there is enough fuel in the car's fuel tank if the auxiliary heater needs to be used19. 18 19 240 Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater. Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater. Heater (p. 238) Parking heater (p. 239) Activating and deactivating automatic start of auxiliary heater (p. 241) CLIMATE Activating and deactivating automatic start of auxiliary heater The auxiliary heater helps to heat the passenger compartment and engine while driving. It is possible to set whether automatic start for the additional heater should be activated/deactivated. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press Climate. 3. Select Additional Heater to activate/deactivate automatic start of the additional heater. NOTE Volvo recommends that the automatic start for the additional heater should be switched off for short driving distances20. NOTE If the auxiliary heater's automatic starting is deactivated, this may impede comfort in the passenger compartment as the climate control system will then have no heat source during electrical operation. Related information • 20 Additional heater (p. 240) Applicable to fuel-driven auxiliary heater. 241 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Lock confirmation The car indicates with hazard warning flashers when the car is locked or unlocked. Lock and alarm indicator on the instrument panel Indication in lock buttons The lock and alarm indicator shows the status of the locking system: Lock buttons with indicator lamp in the front door. Front door Exterior indication Locking • The car's hazard warning flashers indicate locking by flashing and retracting the door mirrors1. Unlocking • The car's hazard warning flashers indicate unlocking by two flashes and extending the door mirrors1. All doors, the tailgate and the bonnet must be closed for the car to indicate that it is locked. If locking takes place with just the driver door closed2, locking will take place but the lock indication with hazard warning flashers will only take place when all doors, the tailgate and the bonnet have been closed. 1 2 244 • • • A long flash indicates locking. Short flashes indicate that the car is locked. An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button of either front door indicates that all doors are locked. If any door is opened, the lamp will extinguish in both doors. Rapid flashes after disarming the alarm* indicate that the alarm has been triggered. Only for cars with retractable power door mirrors. Not applicable to with cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*. * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Rear door* Lock indication setting Remote control key It is possible to select various options for how the car confirms locking and unlocking in the settings menu in the centre display. The remote control key locks and unlocks the doors and tailgate. The remote control key needs to be inside the car for it to be started. To change the locking response setting: 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Press My Car 3. Press Visible Locking Feedback to select when the car is to give a visible response: • Lock • Unlock • Both Lock button with indicator lamp in the rear door. An illuminated indicator lamp in the lock button for one of the doors indicates that the door in question is locked. If any door is unlocked, its lamp will extinguish while the others will continue to illuminate. Other indication Locking. Or switch off the function by selecting Off . To change the setting for retractable rearview mirrors* when locking: The home safe lighting and approach light functions can also be activated when locking and unlocking. 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Press My Car Related information 3. Select Fold Mirror When Locked to activate or deactivate the function. • • • 3 Lock indication setting (p. 245) Approach light duration (p. 159) Using home safe lighting (p. 159) The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. Mirrors and Convenience. Related information • Remote control key3 or key tag (Key Tag)*. The remote control key is not physically used when starting since the car is equipped with support for keyless starting (Passive Start) as standard. You simply need to have the key in the front part of the passenger compartment. For cars equipped with keyless locking and unlocking (Passive Entry)* the key can be anywhere in the car to start the car. In this case, a slightly smaller, lighter key tag (Key Tag) is also supplied. Lock confirmation (p. 244) }} * Option/accessory. 245 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || The remote control keys can be linked to different driver profiles to save personal preferences in the car. Remote control key buttons Tailgate - Unlocks the tailgate only and disarms its alarm. On cars with power operated tailgate*, the tailgate is opened automatically when the button is held depressed. The tailgate is also closed with a long press – acoustic warning signals sound. Panic function – Used to attract attention in an emergency. Press and hold the button for at least 3 seconds or press it twice within 3 seconds to activate the direction indicators and the horn. The function can be turned off with the same button once it has been active for at least 5 seconds. Otherwise the function switches off automatically after 3 minutes. The remote control key has four buttons - one on the left-hand side and three on the right-hand side. Locking - Pressing the button locks the doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap and also arms the alarm*. Press and hold to close all of the windows and the panorama roof* simultaneously. Unlocking – Pressing the button unlocks the doors, tailgate and fuel filler flap and also deactivates the alarm. A longer press opens all windows simultaneously. This total airing function can be used, for example, to quickly air the car in hot weather. 246 WARNING If anyone is left in the car, make sure the power windows and panoramic roof* are deenergised by always taking the remote control key with you when you leave the car. NOTE Be aware of the risk of locking the remote control key in the car. • A remote control key or key tag left in the car will be deactivated when the car is locked and the alarm is armed using another valid key. The "Double lock" function is also deactivated. The key left behind is reactivated when the car is unlocked. • A Red Key left in the car will be deactivated even when the car is locked using Volvo On Call, and reactivated when the car is unlocked using Volvo On Call or with another valid key. Button-less key (Key Tag)* The key tag provided with the keyless locking and unlocking function works in the same way as the standard remote control key as regards keyless starting and locking and unlocking. The key is waterproof to a depth of approx. 10 metres (30 feet) for up to 60 minutes. It has no detachable key blade and the battery cannot be replaced. Red Key - restricted remote control key* A Red Key is a key that makes it possible to set restrictions for some of the car's properties, e.g. the car's maximum speed and the loudspeaker system's maximum volume. A key for any car * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM owner who wants their car to be driven responsibly even when someone else is driving it. Interference Remote control key functions for keyless starting and keyless locking and unlocking* can be disrupted by electromagnetic fields and screening. NOTE Avoid storing the remote control key close to metal objects or electronic apparatus, e.g. mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers preferably no closer than 10-15 cm (4-6 inches). Related information • Locking and unlocking with the remote control key (p. 247) • • Remote control key range (p. 249) • • • Replacing the battery in the remote control key (p. 250) Detachable key blade (p. 255) Locking and unlocking with the remote control key The buttons on the remote control key can be used to lock and unlock all doors and the tailgate simultaneously. Locking with the remote control key Immobiliser (p. 258) Linking remote control key to driver profile (p. 137) If there is still interference - use the remote control key's detachable key blade to unlock and then place the key in the backup reader in the cup holder to disarm the car. NOTE When the remote control key is placed in the cup holder, make sure that no other car keys, metal objects or electronic apparatus (e.g. mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers) are in the cup holder. Several car keys close to each other in the cup holder can cause interference with each other. 4 If the car is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking* then all side doors must be closed. The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. – Press the remote control key lock the car. button to For the lock sequence to be activated, the driver door must be closed4. If any of the other doors or the tailgate are open, these are locked and alarmed* only when they are closed. The alarm's movement detectors* are activated when all the doors and the tailgate are closed and locked. }} * Option/accessory. 247 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || Automatic relocking NOTE Be aware of the risk of locking the remote control key in the car. • • A remote control key or key tag left in the car will be deactivated when the car is locked and the alarm is armed using another valid key. The "Double lock" function is also deactivated. The key left behind is reactivated when the car is unlocked. A Red Key left in the car will be deactivated even when the car is locked using Volvo On Call, and reactivated when the car is unlocked using Volvo On Call or with another valid key. Locking when the tailgate is open If the car has been locked while the tailgate is open, be careful not to leave the remote control key in the cargo area when the tailgate is closed and the car is completely locked5. Unlocking with the remote control key – 5 248 Press the remote control key unlock the car. If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within 2 minutes of unlocking, they are locked automatically. This function prevents the car from being left unlocked unintentionally. It is possible to select different sequences for remotely controlled unlocking. When the remote control key does not work 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Press My Car Locking Interior Unlock. 3. Select option: NOTE Always try moving closer to the car and making another unlock attempt. button to To change setting: Remote and • All Doors - unlocks all doors simultaneously. If it is not possible to lock or unlock with the remote control key, the battery may be discharged - in which case, lock or unlock the driver's door with the detachable key blade. Related information NOTE Settings for remotely controlled and inside unlocking • Single Door - unlocks the driver's door. Unlocking all of the doors requires two presses on the remote control key's unlock button. • Settings for remotely controlled and inside unlocking (p. 248) The settings made here also affect central unlocking via opening handles from the inside. • Unlocking the tailgate with the remote control key (p. 249) • Locking and unlocking with the remote control key (p. 247) • Locking and unlocking from inside the car (p. 272) • • Remote control key (p. 245) • Locking and unlocking with the detachable key blade (p. 257) Replacing the battery in the remote control key (p. 250) Related information If the car is equipped with keyless locking/unlocking and the key is detected inside the car, the tailgate will not lock when it is closed.* * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Unlocking the tailgate with the remote control key 2. It is possible to unlock just the tailgate by pressing a button on the remote control key. With the power operated tailgate option* - Remote control key range Long press (approx. 1.5 seconds) on the button remote control key's > The tailgate is unlocked and opened, while the side doors remain locked and their alarm functions armed. In order for the remote control key to work properly it needs to be within a certain distance from the car. Related information • Locking and unlocking with the remote control key (p. 247) • Opening and closing the power*-operated tailgate (p. 276) For manual use The remote control key's functions for e.g. locking/unlocking that are activated by pressing on or have a range that extends approx. 20 metres (65 feet) from the car. If the car does not verify a button being pressed move closer and try again. For keyless* use 1. Press the remote control key's button. > The tailgate is unlocked but remains closed. The side doors are still locked and the alarm is armed*. The lock and alarm indicator on the instrument panel extinguishes in order to show that the entire car is not locked. Lightly grasp the rubberised pressure plate beneath the tailgate handle to open the tailgate. If the tailgate is not opened within 2 minutes then it is relocked and the alarm is re-armed. The marked area in the illustration shows areas covered by the system's antennas. For keyless use, a remote control key or the button-less key (Key Tag) must be within a semicircular area with a radius of approx. 1.5 metres }} * Option/accessory. 249 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || (5 feet) on both long sides and approx. 1 metre (3 feet) from the tailgate. NOTE Replacing the battery in the remote control key The battery in the remote control key needs to be replaced when it has become discharged. The remote control key functions may be disrupted by surrounding radio waves, buildings, topographical conditions, etc. The car can always be locked/unlocked with the key blade. NOTE All batteries have a limited service life and must eventually be replaced (does not apply to Key Tag). The service life of the battery varies depending on how often the vehicle/key is used. If the remote control key is removed from the car If the remote control key is removed from the car when the engine is running, the warning message Car key not found Removed from car is shown in the driver display and an acoustic reminder sounds when the last door is closed. The message extinguishes when the key is returned to the car, followed by a press of the right-hand keypad's O button, or when the last door is closed. Related information • • • 6 250 Remote control key (p. 245) Antenna locations for the start and lock systems (p. 271) Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* (p. 268) The battery in the button-less key6 (Key Tag) cannot be replaced - a new key can be ordered from an authorised Volvo workshop. IMPORTANT A discharged Key Tag must be handed over to an authorised Volvo workshop. The key must be deleted from the car since it is still possible to use it to start the car via back-up start. The battery for the remote control key should be replaced if • the information symbol illuminates and the message Car key battery low is shown in the driver display • the locks repeatedly do not react to signals from the remote control key within 20 metres (65 feet) of the car. NOTE Always try moving closer to the car and making another unlock attempt. Supplied with cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*. * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Opening the key and changing the battery Hold the remote control key with the front visible and the Volvo logo facing the right way - slide the button at bottom edge by the key ring to the right. Slide the front side's shell a few millimetres upwards. Turn the key, move the button to the side and slide the back shell a few millimetres upwards. Use a screwdriver or similar to turn the battery cover anticlockwise until the markings meet at the OPEN text. The shell will then come free and can be lifted off the key. Carefully lift away the battery cover by pressing e.g. a fingernail into the recess. Then prize the battery cover upwards. The shell will then come free and can be lifted off the key. }} 251 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || NOTE Volvo recommends that the batteries to be used in the remote control key fulfil UN Manual of Test and Criteria, Part III, subsection 38.3. Batteries fitted in the factory or replaced by an authorised Volvo workshop fulfil the above criteria. The battery (+) side is facing upwards. Then carefully prize loose the battery as illustrated. IMPORTANT Avoid touching new batteries and their contact surfaces with your fingers as this may impair their function. Install a new battery with the (+) side up. Avoid touching the remote control key's battery contacts with your fingers. Place the battery in the holder with the edge down. Then slide the battery forwards so that it fastens under the two plastic catches. Press the battery down so that it fastens under the upper black plastic catch. NOTE Use batteries with the designation CR2032, 3 V. 252 Refit the battery cover and turn it clockwise until the marking aligns with the CLOSE text. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Ordering more remote control keys The car is supplied with two remote control keys. A button-less key is supplied if the car is equipped with keyless locking and unlocking*. Additional keys can be ordered. Reposition the rear side's shell and press it down until a clicking sound can be heard. Turn the remote control key over and refit the front side's shell by pressing it down until a clicking sound can be heard. Then slide the shell back. > A further click will indicate that the shell is properly positioned and securely attached. Then slide the shell back. > A further click will indicate that the shell is securely attached. IMPORTANT Make sure that exhausted batteries are disposed of in a manner which is kind to the environment. Related information • Remote control key (p. 245) A total of twelve keys can be programmed and used for one single car. If additional keys are ordered, additional driver profiles are added - one per new remote control key. This also applies for the key tag. Loss of a remote control key If you lose a remote control key then a new one can be ordered at a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The remaining remote control keys must be taken to the workshop. The code of the missing key must be erased from the system as a theft prevention measure. The current number of keys registered to the car can be checked via driver profiles in the centre display's top view, select Settings System Driver Profiles. Related information • Remote control key (p. 245) * Option/accessory. 253 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Red Key - restricted remote control key* A Red Key makes it possible for the car's owner to set limitations for certain of the car's properties. The limitations are intended to encourage the car to be driven in a safe manner, e.g. when being loaned out. Driver profile for Red Key Settings for Red Key* A Red Key is connected to a special Red Key driver profile, and when it is active, the key's settings cannot be changed. It is not possible to change to another driver profile either; this requires a normal remote control key. The holder of a regular remote control key can change settings for a Red Key. However, certain driver support functions are always active. The Red Key driver profile is activated when the car is unlocked with a Red Key without a normal remote control key in the vicinity. 1. Unlock the car with the normal remote control key. 2. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 3. Press System Driver Profiles Red Key. > The following settings can be defined: To change setting: NOTE In the event of a change of driver, the car must be locked and unlocked in order to activate a new driver profile. Ordering Red Key For a Red Key, it is possible to define the car's maximum speed, set speed reminders and determine the loudspeaker system's maximum volume. In addition, some of the car's driver support systems will always be active. Other functions of the key are the same as those of a normal remote control key. The restrictions are intended to act as measures to reduce the risk of accidents, thereby making it feel safer to hand over the car to e.g. young drivers, valet parking or a workshop. 254 One or more Red Key can be ordered from a Volvo dealer. A total of eleven keys with restrictions can be programmed and used for a single car - at least one must be a normal remote control key. Related information • • Settings for Red Key* (p. 254) Remote control key (p. 245) • Set Time Gap For Adaptive Cruise Control* • Reduced Maximum Volume • Max Speed Limit • Speed Limit Warning Details and settings on first use Set Time Gap For Adaptive Cruise Control Set the time gap (1 is the shortest and 5 is the longest gap). On first use, the setting is 5.0. Reduced Maximum Volume Lower maximum volume for media sources. On first use, the function is "On". * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Max Speed Limit Set a maximum speed for this key. On first use, the function is "On" and the speed is 120 km/h (75 mph). • • Setting interval: 50-250 km/h (30-160 mph) Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph) Speed restriction symbol. Related information • Red Key - restricted remote control key* (p. 254) Detachable key blade The remote control key contains a detachable key blade of metal with which a number of functions can be activated and some operations carried out. The key blade's unique code is provided by authorised Volvo workshops, which are recommended when ordering new key blades. Speed Limit Warning Warns when car moves above set values. On first use, the function is "On" and the values are 50, 70 and 90 km/h (30, 45 and 55 mph). • • • Setting interval: 0-250 km/h (0-160 mph) Increments: 1 km/h (1 mph) Max. number of simultaneous reminders: 6 Driver support functions The following driver support functions will always be active for the user of a Red Key: • • • • • • Blind Spot Information (BLIS)* Lane assistance (LKA)* Distance Warning* City Safety Driver Alert Control (DAC)* Road Sign Information* }} * Option/accessory. 255 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || The key blade's application areas Detaching the key blade Using the remote control key's detachable key blade • • • the left-hand7 front door can be opened manually if central locking cannot be activated with the remote control key all doors are emergency-locked the rear doors' mechanical child safety locks can be activated and deactivated. The button-less key8 does not have a detachable key blade. If necessary, use the detachable key blade from the normal remote control key. Return the key blade to its intended position in the remote control key after use. Hold the remote control key with the front visible and the Volvo logo facing the right way - slide the button at bottom edge by the key ring to the right. Guide the front side's shell a few millimetres upwards. Refit the shell by pressing it downward until a clicking sound is heard. Then slide the shell back. > A further click will indicate that the shell is securely attached. The shell will then come free and can be lifted off the key. Related information • Locking and unlocking with the detachable key blade (p. 257) • Remote control key (p. 245) Detach the key blade by angling it up. 7 8 256 This applies whether the car is left-hand drive or right-hand drive. Supplied with cars equipped with keyless locking/unlocking*. * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Locking and unlocking with the detachable key blade 5. Amongst other things, the detachable key blade can be used to unlock the car from the outside e.g. if the remote control key's battery has become discharged. Locking will be performed in the same way, but with an anticlockwise turn 45 degrees instead of clockwise in step (3). Unlocking Pull out the handle. > The door opens. Switching off the alarm* NOTE When the door is unlocked using the key blade and is then opened, the alarm is triggered. 2. Then turn the start knob clockwise and release it. > The alarm signal stops sounding and the alarm is switched off. Locking It is also possible to lock the car with the remote control key's detachable key blade e.g. in the event of a loss of power or if the key's battery has become discharged. The left-hand front door can be locked with its lock cylinder and the detachable key blade. Other doors have no lock cylinders and instead have a lock switch on the end of each door which must be depressed using the key blade - they are then mechanically locked/blocked to prevent them being opened from outside. Pull out the front door handle on the lefthand side9 to its end position so that the lock cylinder become visible. The doors can still be opened from the inside. Insert the key in the lock cylinder. Turn clockwise 45 degrees so that the key blade is pointing straight back. Turn the key back 45 degrees to its starting position. Remove the key from the lock cylinder and release the handle so that the rear section of the handle is resting against the car again. 9 This applies whether the car is right-hand drive or left-hand drive. The backup reader's location in the cup holder. Deactivate the alarm as follows: 1. Place the remote control key on the key symbol in the backup reader in the bottom of the cup holder in the tunnel console. }} * Option/accessory. 257 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM NOTE Immobiliser • A door's lock reset only locks that particular door - not all doors simultaneously. • A manually locked rear door with activated manual or electric child safety locks cannot be opened from either the outside or the inside. A rear door that is locked in this way can only be unlocked with the remote control key or central locking button. The electronic immobiliser is a theft protection system that prevents an unauthorised person from starting the car. || Manual locking of the door. Not to be mixed up with the child safety locks. – Remove the detachable key blade from the remote control key. Insert the key blade in the hole for lock reset and press the key in until it bottoms, approx. 12 mm (0.5 inches). The door can be opened from both the outside and the inside. The door is blocked against opening from the outside. To return to position A, the inner door handle must be opened. The car can only be started with the correct remote control key. The following error message in the driver display is related to the electronic immobiliser: Symbol Related information Detachable key blade (p. 255) • • • Activating and deactivating alarms* (p. 284) • Remote control key (p. 245) Message Specification Car key not found Error reading the remote control key during starting place the key on the key symbol in the cup holder and try again. See Owner's manual Replacing the battery in the remote control key (p. 250) Related information • • Remote control key (p. 245) Ordering more remote control keys (p. 253) The doors can also be unlocked with the unlock button on the remote control key or with the central locking button on the driver's door. 258 * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Type approval for the remote control key system Type approval for the car's remote key system can be seen in the following tables. Lock system keyless start (Passive Start) and keyless locking/unlocking (Passive Entry*) For more information about type approval, see support.volvocars.com. CEM marking for the remote control key system. For supplementary type approval numbers, see following tables. Country/Area Type approval Europe Delphi Deutschland GmbH, 42367 Wuppertal hereby declares that this VO3-134TRX conforms to the essential property requirements and other relevant provisions contained in directive 2014/53/EU (RED). The full text of the EU declaration of conformity can be found at support.volvocars.com. Jordan TRC/LPD/2014/250 Serbia P1614120100 Argentina CNC ID: C-14771 }} * Option/accessory. 259 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || Country/Area Type approval Brazil MT-3245/2015 Indonesia Nomor: 38301/SDPPI/2015 Malaysia RAAT/37A/1215/S(15-5198) Mexico IFETEL: RLVDEVO15-0396 Russia The United Arab Emirates ER37847/15 DA0062437/11 260 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Country/Area Type approval Namibia TA-2016-02 South Africa TA-2014-1868 Remote control key Country/Area Type approval Europe Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG hereby declares that this type of radio equipment HUF8423 conforms to directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity can be found at support.volvocars.com. Wavelength: 433.92 MHz Maximum radiated transmission power: 10 mW Manufacturer: Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG, Steeger Str. 17, 42551 Velbert, Germany Jordan TRC/LPD/2015/104 }} 261 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || Country/Area Type approval Morocco AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC Numéro d’agrément: MR 10668 ANRT 2015 Date d’agrément: 24/07/2015 Mexico IFETEL Marca: HUF Modelo (s): HUF8423 NOM-121-SCT1-2009 La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada. Namibia 262 TA-2015-102 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Country/Area Type approval Oman Serbia }} 263 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || Country/Area Type approval South Africa TA-2015-432 The United Arab Emirates Key Tag Country/Area Type approval Europe Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG hereby declares that this type of radio equipment HUF8432 conforms to directive 2014/53/EU. The full text of the EU declaration of conformity can be found at support.volvocars.com. Wavelength: 433.92 MHz Maximum radiated transmission power: 10 mW Manufacturer: Huf Hülsbeck & Fürst GmbH & Co. KG, Steeger Str. 17, 42551 Velbert, Germany Jordan 264 TRC/LPD/2015/107 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Country/Area Type approval Morocco AGREE PAR L'ANRT MAROC Numéro d’agrément: MR 10667 ANRT 2015 Date d’agrément: 24/07/2015 Mexico IFETEL Marca: HUF Modelo (s): HUF8432 NOM-121-SCT1-2009 La operación de este equipo está sujeta a las siguientes dos condiciones: (1) es posible que este equipo o dispositivo no cause interferencia perjudicial y (2) este equipo o dispositivo debe aceptar cualquier interferencia, incluyendo la que pueda causar su operación no deseada. Namibia TA-2015-103 }} 265 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || Country/Area Oman Serbia 266 Type approval KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Country/Area Type approval South Africa TA-2015-414 The United Arab Emirates Related information • Remote control key (p. 245) 267 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* With the keyless locking and unlocking function, carrying the remote control key in a pocket or bag will suffice. The car is locked or unlocked via a touch-sensitive surface on the door handle. Touch-sensitive surfaces Door handle The outside of the door handles contains a recess for locking, while the inside contains a touch-sensitive surface for unlocking. Touch-sensitive recess for locking Touch-sensitive surface for unlocking 268 NOTE It is important that only one touch-sensitive surface is activated at a time. Gripping the handle while touching the lock surface risks giving double commands. This means that the requested activity (locking/unlocking) will not be executed, or will be executed with a delay. Related information • • Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 269) Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* (p. 271) Tailgate handle The tailgate handle has a rubberised pressure plate that is only used for unlocking. NOTE Be aware that the system may be activated in connection with car washing if the remote control key is in range. * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Keyless locking and unlocking* NOTE With keyless locking and unlocking, it is sufficient to touch the door handle's touch-sensitive surface to lock or unlock the car. NOTE One of the car's remote control keys must be within range for locking and unlocking to work. Be aware that the system may be activated in connection with car washing if the remote control key is in range. Keyless locking All side doors must be closed to be able to lock the car. The tailgate, on the other hand, can be open when locking the car with a side door handle. – Touch-sensitive recess for locking Locking when the tailgate is open NOTE If the car has been locked while the tailgate is open, be careful not to leave the remote control key in the cargo area when the tailgate is closed. If the key is detected inside the car, the tailgate will not lock when it is closed. Touch the marked surface towards the rear on the outside of a door handle after the butdoor has been closed. Or press the ton on the underside of the tailgate10 before it closes. > The lock indicator on the instrument panel starts to flash to indicate the car is locked. To close all side windows and the panoramic roof* simultaneously - place a finger against the touch-sensitive recess on the outside of the door handle and hold it there until all of the side windows and the panoramic roof have been closed. Touch-sensitive surface for unlocking 10 Applies with power operated tailgate*. }} * Option/accessory. 269 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || Keyless unlocking – Grasp a door handle or gently press the rubberised pressure plate beneath the tailgate handle to unlock the car. > The lock indicator on the instrument panel stops flashing to indicate that the car is unlocked. • Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* (p. 268) Settings for Keyless entry* It is possible to select different sequences for Keyless entry. To change setting: 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Tap on My Car Unlock 3. Select option: Locking Keyless • All Doors - unlocks all doors simultaneously. • Single Door - unlocks selected door. Related information • • Rubberised pressure plate on the tailgate can only be used for unlocking. Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 269) Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* (p. 268) Automatic relocking If none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within 2 minutes of unlocking, they are locked automatically. This function prevents the car from being left unlocked unintentionally. Related information • • 270 Settings for Keyless entry* (p. 270) Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* (p. 271) * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Keyless unlocking of the tailgate* 2. With keyless locking and unlocking, it is sufficient to touch the touch-sensitive surface on the tailgate handle to unlock the tailgate. Lift by the outside handle in order to open the tailgate. IMPORTANT NOTE One of the car's remote control keys must be within range behind the car for unlocking to work. • Minimal force is required to release the rear hatch lock - just gently press the rubberised panel. • Do not place the lift force on the rubber panel when opening the rear hatch - lift the handle. Using too much force may damage the electrical contacts on the rubber panel. Antenna locations for the start and lock systems An antenna for the keyless starting system and antennas for the keyless locking system* are built into the car. It is also possible to unlock the tailgate handsfree with a foot movement under the rear bumper, see separate section. WARNING Do not drive with an open tailgate! Toxic exhaust fumes could be drawn into the car through the cargo area. The tailgate is held closed by an electrical lock. To open: 1. Press gently on the rubberised pressure plate beneath the tailgate handle. > The lock is released. Related information • • • • Keyless locking and unlocking* (p. 269) Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* (p. 268) Remote control key range (p. 249) Opening and closing the tailgate with foot movement* (p. 279) }} * Option/accessory. 271 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || Antenna locations: Under the cup holder in the front section of the tunnel console In the upper front section of the left-hand rear door11 In the upper front section of the right-hand rear door11 Locking and unlocking from inside the car Alternative unlocking method The doors and tailgate can be locked and unlocked from inside using the central locking controls in the front doors. Central locking In the centre of the rear seat's backrest11 WARNING People with pacemaker operations should not come closer than 22 cm (9 inches) to the keyless system's antennas with their pacemaker. This is to prevent interference between the pacemaker and the keyless system. Related information • Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* (p. 268) • Remote control key range (p. 249) Opening handle for alternative unlocking in the side door12. – Locking and unlocking button with indicator lamp in the front door. Unlocking using a button in the front door – 11 12 272 Press the button to unlock all side doors and the tailgate. Pull the opening handle on one of the side doors and release. > Depending on the settings in the remote control key, either all doors will be unlocked or only the selected door will be unlocked and opened. To change this setting, tap on Settings My Car Locking Remote and Interior Unlock in the centre display's top view. Only in cars equipped with keyless locking and unlocking*. The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Locking using a button in the front door Related information Press the button - both front doors must be closed. > All doors and the tailgate are locked. • Settings for remotely controlled and inside unlocking (p. 248) • Locking using a button in the rear door* Unlocking the tailgate from the inside of the car (p. 273) • Activating and deactivating child safety locks (p. 274) – Locking button with indicator lamp in the rear door. Unlocking the tailgate from the inside of the car The tailgate can be unlocked from inside by pressing the button on the instrument panel. – The rear door lock buttons lock their respective rear door. Unlocking the rear door – 13 Pull the opening handle. > The rear door is unlocked and opened13. Provided that the child safety lock is not activated. Brief press on the button on the instrument panel. > The tailgate can be unlocked and opened from the outside by grasping the rubberised pressure plate. With the power operated tailgate option*: – Long press on the button on the instrument panel. > The tailgate is opened. }} * Option/accessory. 273 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || Related information • • Locking and unlocking from inside the car (p. 272) Opening and closing the power*-operated tailgate (p. 276) Activating and deactivating child safety locks The child safety locks prevent the rear doors being opened from inside. The child safety locks may be either manual or electric*. Activating and deactivating manual child safety locks NOTE • A door's knob control only blocks that particular door - not both rear doors simultaneously. • Cars with an electric child safety lock do not have a manual child lock. Activating and deactivating electric* child safety locks The electric child safety locks can be activated and deactivated in all ignition positions higher than 0. Activation and deactivation can be performed up to 2 minutes after switching off the car, provided that no door is opened. Manual child safety locks. Not to be confused with manual door locks. – Use the remote control key's detachable key blade to turn the knob. The door is blocked against opening from the inside. The door can be opened from both the outside and the inside. 274 Button for electric activation and deactivation. 1. Start the car or choose an ignition position higher than 0. * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM 2. Press the button in the driver's door control panel. > The driver display shows the message Rear child lock Activated and the button's lamp illuminates - the locks are active. Symbol When the electric child safety lock is active then the rear Message Specification Rear child lock Activated Child safety locks are activated. Rear child lock Deactivated Child safety locks are deactivated. • windows can only be opened with the driver's door control panel Related information • doors cannot be opened from inside. • Locking and unlocking from inside the car (p. 272) • Detachable key blade (p. 255) To deactivate the locks: – Press the button in the driver's door control panel. > The driver display shows the message Rear child lock Deactivated and the button's lamp goes out - the locks are deactivated. Automatic locking when driving The doors and tailgate are locked automatically when the car starts to move. To change this setting: 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Press My Car 3. Select Auto Lock Doors While Driving to deactivate or activate this function. Locking. Related information • Locking and unlocking from inside the car (p. 272) When the car is switched off, the current setting is stored – if the child safety locks are activated when the car is switched off, the function will continue to be activated next time the car is started. 275 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Opening and closing the power*operated tailgate Function where the tailgate can be opened and closed at the touch of a button. Opening Choose one of the following options to open the power operated tailgate: – – 276 – Foot movement* under the rear bumper. Closing Choose one of the following options to close14 the power operated tailgate: Long press on the remote control key's button. Keep it depressed until the tailgate starts to open. – 14 Long press on the instrument panel's button. Keep it depressed until the tailgate starts to open. Light press on the tailgate handle. A car with keyless locking and unlocking* has one button for closing and one button for closing and locking. * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Press the button on the underside of the tailgate to close. > The tailgate closes automatically and remains unlocked. – – Long press on the button on the remote control key. > The tailgate closes automatically and acoustic signals sound – the tailgate remains unlocked. – Long press on the button on the instrument panel. > The tailgate closes automatically and acoustic signals sound – the tailgate remains unlocked. – Foot movement* under the rear bumper. > The tailgate closes automatically and acoustic signals sound – the tailgate remains unlocked. NOTE 14 • The button is active 24 hours after the hatch has been left open. Thereafter, it must be closed manually. • If the flap has been open for more than 30 minutes, it will close at a slow speed. A car with keyless locking and unlocking* has one button for closing and one button for closing and locking. Closing and locking – Press the button on the underside of the tailgate to close it and simultaneously lock14 the tailgate and doors (all doors must be closed for locking). > The tailgate closes automatically – the tailgate and doors are locked, and the alarm* is armed. }} * Option/accessory. 277 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || NOTE • • One of the car's remote control keys must be within range for locking and unlocking to work. When using keyless* locking or closing, three signals will sound if the key is not detected sufficiently close to the tailgate. IMPORTANT During manual tailgate operation, open or close it slowly. Do not use force to open/ close it if there is resistance. It may be damaged and stop working correctly. Cancel opening or closing Cancel opening or closing in one of the following ways: If the tailgate is stopped close to closed position, the next activation will open the tailgate. Pre-tensioned springs Pinch protection If something with sufficient resistance prevents the tailgate from opening or closing then the pinch protection is activated. • During opening - movement is interrupted, the tailgate stops and a long acoustic signal sounds. • During closing - movement is interrupted, the tailgate stops, a long acoustic signal sounds and the tailgate returns to the programmed max. position. The pre-tensioned springs for the power operated tailgate. WARNING WARNING Watch out for the risk of crushing when opening and closing. Do not open the pre-tensioned springs for the power operated tailgate. They are pre-tensioned with high pressure and can cause injury if opened. • • • Press the button on the instrument panel. Check that there is nobody near the tailgate before starting to open or close it as a crush injury may have severe consequences. Press the remote control key's button. Always operate the tailgate with caution. Press the closing button on the underside of the tailgate. • Programming maximum opening for power operated tailgate* (p. 279) • Press the rubberised pressure plate beneath the outside handle. • Opening and closing the tailgate with foot movement* (p. 279) • Using a foot movement*. • Remote control key range (p. 249) Related information The tailgate's movement is interrupted and stops. The tailgate can then be operated manually. 278 * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Programming maximum opening for power operated tailgate* NOTE • Adapt the tailgate's opening position to low roof height. To adjust max. opening: 1. Open the tailgate - stop it in the open position. NOTE It is not possible to program an opening position lower than half-open tailgate. 2. button on the underside of Press the the tailgate for at least 3 seconds. > Two short acoustic signals sound to indicate that the set position has been saved. To reset max. opening: – Manually move the tailgate to its highest possible position – press and hold the button on the tailgate for at least 3 seconds. > Two acoustic signals sound to indicate that the set position has been cleared. The tailgate will then assume its maximum position when opened. If the system has been operating continuously for a long time, it is switched off to avoid overload. It can be used again after about 2 minutes. Related information • Opening and closing the power*-operated tailgate (p. 276) Opening and closing the tailgate with foot movement* A function which allows the tailgate to open and close by moving a foot under the rear bumper makes life easier when your hands are full. If the car is equipped with keyless locking and unlocking* then you can unlock the tailgate with a foot movement. The function with both opening and closing of the tailgate is also available when the car is equipped with power operated tailgate*. NOTE The foot-operated tailgate function is available in two versions: • • Opening and closing with foot movement Only unlocking with foot movement (lift up the tailgate manually to open it) Note that the function for opening and closing with foot movement requires power operated tailgate*. }} * Option/accessory. 279 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Opening and closing with foot movement || Cancelling opening or closing with foot movement – Make one slow forward kicking motion when opening or closing is in progress in order to stop the movement of the tailgate. The remote control key does not have to be in the vicinity of the car to cancel opening or closing of the tailgate. If the tailgate is stopped close to closed position, the next activation will open the tailgate. NOTE The sensor is located on left of centre in the bumper15. One of the car's remote control keys must be within range behind the car, approx. 1 metre (3 feet), for opening and closing to be possible. This also applies to an already unlocked car in order to avoid accidental opening e.g. in a car wash. Kicking motion within the detector's activation area. – Make one slow, forward kicking motion under the left part of the rear bumper. Then take a step back. The bumper must not be touched. > A short acoustic signal sounds when opening or closing is activated - the tailgate is opened/closed. If several kicking motions take place without an approved remote control key being located behind the car, opening will not be possible until after a certain delay. Do not leave your foot positioned under the car during the kicking motion. This could cause activation to fail. 15 280 There is a risk of reduced function, or no function, if the rear bumper is loaded with large amounts of ice, snow, dirt or similar. For this reason, make sure you keep it clean. NOTE Pay attention to the possibility that the system may be activated in a car wash or similar if the remote key is within range. Cars with the skid plate* accessory If the car is equipped with skid plate the sensor is located out on the left-hand corner of the bumper. If the car is equipped with skid plate* the sensor is located out on the left-hand corner of the bumper. * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Related information To activate opening or closing with a foot movement on a car equipped with skid plate, the kicking motion is made from the side of the car. One of the car's remote control keys must be within range (approx. 1 metre (3 feet)) for opening and closing to be possible. • Keyless and touch-sensitive surfaces* (p. 268) • Opening and closing the power*-operated tailgate (p. 276) • Remote control key range (p. 249) Private locking The tailgate and glovebox can be locked with the private locking function which prevents them from being opened, e.g. when the car is taken in for service, left at a hotel or similar. The private locking function button is located in the centre display function view. Depending on the current status of the lock, Private Locking Unlocked or Private Locking Locked is shown. Related information • Activating and deactivating private locking (p. 282) Kicking motion within the detector's valid activation area. * Option/accessory. 281 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Activating and deactivating private locking To create a security code: 1. Private locking is activated with a function button in the centre display and an optional PIN code. 2. Press the button for private locking in the function view. NOTE The car needs to be in ignition mode I as a minimum for the private locking function to be activated. Deactivate private locking 1. > A pop-up window is shown. Private locking has two codes: • A security code is created the first time the function is used. • A new PIN code is selected every time the function is activated. Enter the security code before using for the first time A security code needs to be selected during the first time the function is used. It can then be used to deactivate private locking if the selected PIN code has been forgotten or lost. The security code acts as a PUK code for all subsequent PIN codes set for the private locking function. Save the security code in a safe place. Enter the code to be used in order to unlock the glovebox and tailgate after locking and tap on Confirm. > The glovebox and the tailgate are locked. Confirmation of locking takes place by means of a green indicator being shown by the button in the function view. 2. Enter the preferred security code and press Confirm. > The security code is saved. The private locking function is now ready for activation. Activate private locking 1. Press the button for private locking in the function view. > A pop-up window is shown. Press the button for private locking in the function view. 2. > A pop-up window is shown. Forgotten PIN code Enter the code that was used for locking and tap on Confirm. > The glovebox and the tailgate are unlocked. Confirmation of unlocking takes place by means of the green indicator by the button in the function view extinguishing. If the PIN code has been forgotten or the wrong PIN code has been entered more than three times, the security code can be used to deactivate private locking. 282 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM If the car is unlocked via Volvo On Call* or the Volvo On Call app, private locking will be deactivated automatically. Forgotten security code If the security code has also been forgotten, contact an authorised Volvo dealer for help with deactivating private locking. Related information • Alarm* Alarm indicator The alarm provides audible and visual warnings if anyone enters the car without a valid remote control key or manipulates the starter battery or alarm siren. When armed, the alarm is triggered if: • • Private locking (p. 281) a door, the bonnet or the tailgate is opened16 a movement is detected in the passenger compartment (if fitted with a movement detector*) • the car is raised or towed away (if fitted with a tilt detector*) • • the starter battery's cable is disconnected the siren is disconnected. A red LED on the instrument panel indicates the alarm system's status: • • LED not lit – alarm not armed. Alarm signals When the alarm has been triggered, the following happens: • After the alarm has been disarmed, the LED flashes rapidly for a maximum of 30 seconds or until ignition position I has been activated - the alarm has been triggered. • A siren sounds for 30 seconds or until the alarm is switched off. • Hazard warning flashers flash for 5 minutes or until the alarm is switched off. The LED flashes once every other second – alarm is armed. If the cause of alarm activation is not rectified, the alarm cycle is repeated up to 10 times16. 16 Applies to certain markets. }} * Option/accessory. 283 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM || Movement and tilt sensors* In the event of an alarm system fault Activating and deactivating alarms* Movement and tilt sensors react to movements inside the car, if the window is broken or if anyone tries to steal the wheels or tow the vehicle away. If there is a fault in the alarm system, the driver display shows the symbol and the message Alarm system failure Service required. In which case, contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The alarm is armed when the car is locked. The movement sensor triggers an alarm in the event of movement in the passenger compartment - air currents are also registered. For this reason the alarm is triggered if the car is left with a window or the panoramic roof* open or if the passenger compartment heater is used. NOTE Do not attempt to repair or alter components in the alarm system yourself. Any such attempts may affect the terms of the insurance. To avoid this: • Close the window and panoramic roof when leaving the car. • If the passenger compartment or parking heater is to be used – direct the airflow from the air vents so that they do not point upwards in the passenger compartment. Related information • • • Activating and deactivating alarms* (p. 284) Arming the alarm Lock and arm the car alarm as follows • press the remote control key's lock button . • touch the marked surface on the outside of the door handles or the tailgate's rubberised pressure plate17. If the car is equipped with both keyless locking/ unlocking* and a power-operated tailgate*, the button on the underside of the tailgate can also be used to lock the car and arm the car alarm. Reduced alarm level* (p. 286) Double lock* (p. 286) Alternatively, use a reduced alarm level to temporarily deactivate the movement and tilt sensors. Also switch off the movement and tilt sensors when the car is being transported on a ferry or train as these movements may affect the car and trigger the alarm. A red LED on the instrument panel flashes once every two seconds when the car is locked and the alarm is armed. 17 284 Applies to cars with keyless locking and unlocking*. * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Deactivate the alarm 3. Unlock and disarm the car alarm as follows • press the remote control key's unlock button • grip one of the door handles or press gently on the tailgate's rubberised pressure plate17. Deactivate the alarm without a functioning remote control key The car can be unlocked and disarmed even if the remote control key does not work, e.g. if the remote control key's battery is dead. 1. Open the driver's door with the detachable key blade. > The alarm is triggered. Turn the start knob clockwise and release it. > The alarm is deactivated. Related information • Alarm* (p. 283) Switching off a triggered alarm – Press the remote control key's unlock button or set the car in ignition position I by turning the start knob clockwise and then releasing. Automatic arming and rearming of the alarm Automatic rearming of the alarm prevents the car being left with the alarm disarmed unintentionally. If the car is unlocked with the remote control key (which disarms the alarm) but none of the doors or the tailgate is opened within two minutes, then the alarm is automatically re-armed. The car is relocked at the same time. In certain markets, the alarm is armed automatically after a certain delay after the driver's door has been opened and closed without being locked. To change this setting: The backup reader's location in the cup holder. 2. 17 Place the remote control key on the key symbol in the backup reader in the tunnel console's cup holder. 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Press My Car 3. Select Passive Arming Deactivation to deactivate the function temporarily. Locking. Applies to cars with keyless locking and unlocking*. * Option/accessory. 285 KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Reduced alarm level* Double lock* Related information A reduced alarm level means that the movement and tilt sensors are temporarily switched off. Double lock means that all opening handles are released mechanically when locking from the outside, which makes it impossible to open the doors from the inside. • Temporarily* deactivating double locks (p. 287) • Alarm* (p. 283) Switch off the movement and tilt detectors in order to avoid accidental triggering of the alarm e.g. if a dog is left in a locked car or during transport on a car train or car ferry. Press the Reduced Guard button in the centre display function view to switch off the movement and tilt sensors when subsequently locking the car. At the same time, the double lock function is deactivated, i.e. unlocking from inside is possible. If the car is unlocked and then locked again, the reduced alarm level must be reactivated. Double lock is activated when locking with a remote control key or with keyless locking*, and takes place with a delay of approx. 10 seconds after the doors have locked. If a door is opened within the delay time then the sequence is interrupted and the alarm is deactivated. The car can only be unlocked with a remote control key, keyless unlocking* or the Volvo On Call* app when double lock is activated. The front left door can also be unlocked with the detachable key blade. If the car is unlocked with the detachable key blade, the alarm will be triggered. Related information • • NOTE Alarm* (p. 283) Double lock* (p. 286) • Remember that the alarm is activated when the car is locked. • The alarm is triggered if anyone attempts to open the doors from inside. WARNING Do not allow anyone to remain in the car without first deactivating the function in order to avoid the risk of anyone being locked in. 286 * Option/accessory. KEY, LOCKS AND ALARM Temporarily* deactivating double locks The system is reset the next time the engine is started. If someone is going to stay in the car but the doors must be locked from the outside, then the double lock function should be deactivated, to allow unlocking from the inside. • • Related information Double lock* (p. 286) Alarm* (p. 283) WARNING Do not allow anyone to remain in the car without first deactivating the function in order to avoid the risk of anyone being locked in. Press the Reduced Guard button in the centre display's function view in order to deactivate the double lock function temporarily. This also means that the alarm's movement and tilt detectors* are switched off. After this, Reduced Guard is shown in the centre display and double locks are temporarily deactivated in the subsequent locking of the car. In conventional locking, the electrical sockets are deactivated immediately, but when double locks are temporarily deactivated, they will be active for a maximum of 10 minutes after locking. If the car is unlocked and then locked again, the double lock function must be deactivated again. * Option/accessory. 287 DRIVER SUPPORT DRIVER SUPPORT Driving support systems The car is equipped with different driver support systems which can assist the driver in different situations, either actively or passively. For example, the systems can help the driver to: • • maintain a set speed maintain a certain time interval to the vehicle ahead • prevent a collision by giving a warning to the driver and braking the car • help the driver to park. Some of the systems are fitted as standard while others are options – which alternative applies is market dependent. Related information • • • • • • • • • • • 290 IntelliSafe – driver support and safety (p. 31) Speed-dependent steering force (p. 290) Stability system (p. 296) Electronic stability control (p. 291) Speed limiter (p. 296) Automatic speed limiter (p. 300) Distance Warning* (p. 308) • • • • • • • • • Camera unit (p. 340) Speed-dependent steering force City Safety™ (p. 346) Speed related power steering causes the steering wheel force to increase with the speed of the car in order to give the driver enhanced sensitivity. • • • Park Assist* (p. 392) Rear Collision Warning (p. 360) BLIS* (p. 361) Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 365) Road Sign Information* (p. 369) Driver Alert Control (p. 376) Lane assistance (p. 378) Steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 385) Park assist camera* (p. 397) Park Assist Pilot* (p. 405) On motorways the steering feels firmer. When parking and at low speed steering is light and requires only a slight effort. NOTE In rare situations the power steering may become too hot and then needs to be temporarily cooled – during this time the power steering operates with reduced power and turning the steering wheel may then be perceived to be slightly heavier. In parallel with the temporarily reduced steering assistance, the driver display shows the message Power steering Assistance temporarily reduced as well as this symbol. While the power steering is working at reduced power, the driver support functions and steering assistance system are not available. Cruise control (p. 303) Adaptive cruise control* (p. 310) Pilot Assist (p. 319) Radar unit (p. 335) * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Electronic stability control WARNING If the temperature increases too much, the servo may be forced to switch off completely. In such a situation, the driver display shows the Power steering failure Stop safely message, combined with a symbol. Change the steering force level* Electronic Stability Control (ESC1) helps the driver to avoid skidding and improves the car's traction. • The driver display shows this symbol when the system is engaged. The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. Braking from the system may be heard as a pulsing sound, and the car may accelerate more slowly than expected when applying the throttle. 2. Select My Car Force. The system consists of the following subfunctions: Steering wheel resistance can be adjusted when using INDIVIDUAL drive mode. Drive Modes Steering Steering wheel resistance selection can only be accessed if the car is stationary or is moving at low speed and in a straight line. Related information • • Driving support systems (p. 290) Drive modes (p. 460) • • • • WARNING Stability function2 Spin control and traction control system Engine Drag Control Trailer stability assist Stability function2 The function checks the driving and brake force of the wheels individually in order to stabilise the car. Spin control and traction control system The function is active at low speed and brakes the drive wheels that spin so that additional trac- 1 2 Electronic Stability Control Also known as Active Yaw Control. }} * Option/accessory. 291 DRIVER SUPPORT || tion shall be transferred from the drive wheels that are not spinning. • Symbols and messages for electronic stability control (p. 294) Electronic Stability Control in sport mode The function also prevents the driving wheels from spinning against the road surface during acceleration. • Trailer stability assist* (p. 491) The stability system (ESC6) is always activated – it cannot be switched off. However, the driver can select ESC Sport Mode, which allows for a more active driving experience. Engine Drag Control Engine Drag Control (EDC3) prevents involuntary wheel locking, e.g. after shifting down or engine braking when driving in low gear on slippery road surfaces. Involuntary wheel locking while driving can, amongst other things, impair the driver's ability to steer the car. Trailer stability assist*4 Trailer stability assist (TSA5) stabilises a car towing a trailer in situations where they begin snaking. NOTE Trailer Stability Assist is deactivated if ESC Sport Mode is activated. Related information • • When ESC Sport Mode is selected, the function can be considered as deactivated, despite the function continuing to help the driver in many cases. NOTE With ESC Sport Mode selected, Trailer Stability Assist (TSA7) is deactivated. ESC Sport Mode also provides maximum traction if the car has become bogged down or is driving on a loose surface, such as in sand or deep snow. Driving support systems (p. 290) Activating/deactivating sport mode for Electronic Stability Control (p. 293) 3 Engine Drag Control 4 Trailer stability assist is 5 Trailer Stability Assist 292 With the ESC Sport Mode subfunction selected, intervention from the system is reduced and the car is allowed to skid more and greater control than normal is thus transferred to the driver. included when the Volvo genuine towbar is installed. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT The ESC Sport Mode function cannot be selected when one of the following functions is activated: • • • • Speed limiter Cruise control Adaptive cruise control* Activating/deactivating sport mode for Electronic Stability Control The stability system (ESC8) is always activated – it cannot be switched off. However, the driver can select sport mode, which allows for a more active driving experience. Activate or deactivate the function using this button in the centre display's function view. Pilot Assist Related information • • Electronic stability control (p. 291) • Trailer stability assist* (p. 491) Activating/deactivating sport mode for Electronic Stability Control (p. 293) • GREEN button indication – the function is activated. • GREY button indication – the function is deactivated. The driver display indicates activated ESC Sport Mode by displaying this symbol with a constant glow until the function is deactivated or the engine is switched off. The next time the engine is started, the system is back in its normal mode again. Related information 6 7 8 • Electronic Stability Control in sport mode (p. 292) • Electronic stability control (p. 291) Electronic Stability Control Trailer Stability Assist Electronic Stability Control * Option/accessory. 293 DRIVER SUPPORT Symbols and messages for electronic stability control The following table shows some examples. A number of symbols and messages regarding electronic stability control (ESC9) can be shown on the driver display. Symbol Message Specification Constant glow for approx. 2 seconds. System check when the engine is started. Flashing light. The system is being activated. Constant glow. Sport mode is selected. NOTE: The system is not deactivated in this mode — it is partly reduced. ESC Temporarily off The system has been temporarily reduced due to excessive brake temperature - the function is reactivated automatically when the brakes have cooled. See the message in the driver display. 9 294 ESC The system is disengaged. Service required • Electronic Stability Control Stop the car in a safe place, switch off the engine and start it again. DRIVER SUPPORT A text message can be cleared by briefly pressbutton, located in the centre of the ing the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • Electronic stability control (p. 291) 295 DRIVER SUPPORT Stability system Speed limiter The stability system (RSC10) minimises the risk of overturning, for example during a sudden evasive manoeuvre or if the car skids. A speed limiter (SL11) can be likened to a reverse cruise control - the driver regulates the speed using the accelerator pedal but is prevented from accidentally exceeding a preselected/set maximum speed by the speed limiter. The system registers if and how much the car's lateral inclination changes. This information is used to calculate the risk of the car overturning. If the car is at risk, its electronic stability control system engages, the engine torque is reduced and one or more wheels are braked until the car has regained its stability. : From active mode – deactivates/ changes the speed limiter to standby mode : Reduces stored maximum speed Marker for stored max speed The car's current speed Stored maximum speed WARNING • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. WARNING Under normal driving conditions, the system improves the car's road safety, but this must not be taken as a reason to increase speed. Always follow the normal precautions for safe driving. Related information • Electronic stability control (p. 291) Buttons and symbols for the function. : Activates the speed limiter from standby mode and resumes stored maximum speed : Increases the stored maximum speed : From standby mode – activates the speed limiter and stores current speed 10 11 296 Roll Stability Control Speed Limiter DRIVER SUPPORT Related information • • • • • Driving support systems (p. 290) Limitations for speed limiter (p. 300) Activating and starting the Speed Limiter Activating and starting the Speed Limiter (p. 297) The speed limiter function (SL12) must first be selected and activated in order to be able to regulate the speed. Deactivating the speed limiter (p. 299) Set the speed limiter in standby mode Deactivate the speed limiter and set it in standby mode (p. 298) – symbol is shown – press and the the steering wheel button (2). > The Speed Limiter starts and the current speed is stored as the maximum speed. Related information • Reactivating the speed limiter from standby mode (p. 298) • • • • Set the stored speed for driver support (p. 331) • • Automatic speed limiter (p. 300) – When the speed limiter is in standby mode Speed limiter (p. 296) Deactivating the speed limiter (p. 299) Reactivating the speed limiter from standby mode (p. 298) Deactivate the speed limiter and set it in standby mode (p. 298) Press ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to browse to the sym(4). bol/function for speed limiter > Symbol (4) is shown and the speed limiter is set in standby mode. Start the Speed Limiter The speed limiter cannot be activated until after the engine has been started. The lowest maximum speed that can be stored is 30 km/h (20 mph). 12 Speed Limiter 297 DRIVER SUPPORT Deactivate the speed limiter and set it in standby mode The speed limiter (SL13) can be temporarily deactivated and set in standby mode. To deactivate the Speed Limiter and set it in standby mode: – Press the steering wheel button (2). > The speed limit markings and symbols in the driver display change colour from WHITE to GREY – the speed limiter is now temporarily deactivated and the driver can exceed the maximum speed setting. Temporary deactivation with the accelerator pedal The speed limiter can also be temporarily deactivated and overridden with the accelerator pedal 13 298 Speed Limiter without the speed limiter first having to be set in standby mode - e.g. to be able to quickly accelerate the car out of a situation. In which case, proceed as follows: 1. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and release it to interrupt acceleration when the desired speed has been reached. > In this mode, the speed limiter is still activated and the driver display's symbol is therefore WHITE. 2. Fully release the accelerator pedal when the temporary acceleration is finished. > The car is then engine-braked automatically to below the last stored maximum speed. Reactivating the speed limiter from standby mode The speed limiter (SL14) can be reactivated after having been temporarily deactivated and placed in standby mode. Related information • • Speed limiter (p. 296) Reactivating the speed limiter from standby mode (p. 298) • Activating and starting the Speed Limiter (p. 297) • Deactivating the speed limiter (p. 299) To reactivate the Speed Limiter from standby mode: – or Press the steering wheel button (1). > The driver display's speed limit markings change colour from GREY to WHITE - the car's speed is then limited again by the last stored maximum speed. DRIVER SUPPORT – Press the steering wheel button (2). > The speed limiter indicators and symbols in the driver display change colour from GREY to WHITE – the car will now apply its current speed as the maximum speed. Deactivating the speed limiter Related information The speed limiter (SL15) can be deactivated. • • • Reactivating the speed limiter from standby mode (p. 298) • Deactivate the speed limiter and set it in standby mode (p. 298) Related information • • Speed limiter (p. 296) Deactivate the speed limiter and set it in standby mode (p. 298) • Activating and starting the Speed Limiter (p. 297) • Deactivating the speed limiter (p. 299) Speed limiter (p. 296) Activating and starting the Speed Limiter (p. 297) To deactivate the cruise control: 14 15 1. (2). Press the steering wheel button > The speed limiter is set in standby mode. 2. Press the steering wheel button ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to change to another function. > The driver display's symbol and indicator for speed limiter (4) are switched off which deletes the set/stored maximum speed. 3. Press the steering wheel button again. > Another function is activated. (2) Speed Limiter Speed Limiter 299 DRIVER SUPPORT Limitations for speed limiter On steep downhill gradients the speed limiter’s (SL16) braking effect may be inadequate and hence the stored maximum speed may be exceeded. In this case, the driver is alerted by the message Speed limit exceeded in the driver display. NOTE A text message that the maximum speed is exceeded will be activated if the speed has been exceeded by at least 3 km/h (approx. 2 mph). Related information • 16 17 18 19 300 Speed limiter (p. 296) Automatic speed limiter The Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL17) function helps the driver to adapt the car's maximum speed to the speed shown on the road signs. WARNING • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. The Speed Limiter function (SL18) can be changed to Automatic Speed Limiter (ASL). The automatic speed limiter uses speed information from the Road Sign Information* (RSI19) function to automatically adapt the car's maximum speed. WARNING • Even if the driver clearly sees the speedrelated road sign, the speed information from the Road Sign Information* (RSI) function to ASL may be incorrect – in such cases the driver must intervene him/herself and accelerate or brake to a suitable speed. Speed Limiter Automatic Speed Limiter Speed Limiter Road Sign Information * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Is SL or ASL active? Symbols in the driver display show which speed limiter function is active: Symbol SL ASL Colour of sign symbol Meaning Greenish yellow ASL is active Grey ✓ ✓ Amber/Orange A ✓ Sign symbol after "70" = ASL is activated. A 20 21 Automatic Speed Limiter Speed Limiter The automatic speed limiter function (ASL20) can be activated and deactivated as a supplement to the speed limiter (SL21). Activate ASL ASL is in temporary standby mode - e.g. due to a traffic sign not being read. The Speed Sign Assist button is located in the function view of the centre display. Related information • • WHITE symbol: Function active, GREY symbol: Standby mode. The ASL symbol The sign symbol (displayed alongside the stored speed, "70", in the centre of the speedometer) can be shown in three colours with the following meanings: ASL has been set in standby mode Activate/deactivate Automatic Speed Limiter Driving support systems (p. 290) Activate/deactivate Automatic Speed Limiter (p. 301) • Changing the tolerance for the automatic speed limiter (p. 302) • Limitations for automatic speed limiter (p. 303) • • Speed limiter (p. 296) Road Sign Information* (p. 369) To activate the automatic speed limiter: 1. Press the Speed Sign Assist button. > ASL is set in standby mode, a green indicator appears on the button, and the driver display shows a sign symbol in the centre of the speedometer. 2. Press the steering wheel button . > ASL is activated with the car’s current speed. }} * Option/accessory. 301 DRIVER SUPPORT || NOTE • If the automatic speed limiter function is activated, Road Sign Information* is shown in the driver display even if RSI22 is not activated. • To remove road sign information from the driver display, you must deactivate both automatic speed limiter and RSI. • When the Automatic Speed Limiter function is activated but RSI is deactivated, no warnings are given from RSI. RSI must also be activated in order to receive warnings. Related information • • • • Speed limiter (p. 296) Automatic speed limiter (p. 300) Limitations for automatic speed limiter (p. 303) Road Sign Information* (p. 369) Changing the tolerance for the automatic speed limiter The Automatic Speed Limiter function (ASL23) can be set for different tolerance levels. It is possible to increase/decrease the signed speed limit. If, for example, the car follows a signed speed limit of 70km/h (43 mph) the driver can instead choose to allow the car to maintain 75 km/h (47 mph). Deactivate ASL To deactivate the automatic speed limiter: – Tap on the Speed Sign Assist button in the function view. > ASL is deactivated and the button's indication becomes GREY - SL is activated instead. Buttons and symbols for the function. WARNING After switching from ASL to SL the car will no longer follow the signed speed limit but only the maximum speed stored in memory. 22 23 302 Road Sign Information – RSI Automatic Speed Limiter * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT – Press the steering wheel button (1) until 70 km/h (43 mph) in the centre of the speedometer (4) changes to 75 km/h (47 mph). > After which, the car uses the selected tolerance 5 km/h (4 mph) as long as signs passed are showing 70 km/h (43 mph). The tolerance is followed until a road sign with a lower or higher speed is passed then the car follows the new signed speed limit instead and the tolerance is deleted from the memory. If the Road Sign Information*24 function is activated, the signed speed limit will also be shown with a coloured indicator on the speedometer. The tolerance is adjusted in the same way as the speed setting is in the speed limiter. NOTE The maximum selectable tolerance is +/- 10 km/h (5 mph). Related information • • • 24 Automatic speed limiter (p. 300) Limitations for automatic speed limiter (p. 303) Road Sign Information* (p. 369) Road Sign Information – RSI Limitations for automatic speed limiter Automatic speed limitation (ASL25) takes place using speed information from the Road Sign Information function* (RSI26) – not from the speed limit road signs that the car passes. Cruise control The cruise control (CC27) helps the driver maintain an even speed, which can result in more relaxed driving on motorways and long, straight roads in regular traffic flows. Overview If RSI cannot interpret and provide speed information to the ASL, then the ASL is set in standby mode and changes over to SL. In such cases the driver must intervene and brake to a suitable speed. The ASL will be reactivated when the RSI function can once again interpret and provide speed information to the ASL. Related information • • • Speed limiter (p. 296) Automatic speed limiter (p. 300) Road Sign Information* (p. 369) Buttons and symbols for the function. : Activates cruise control from standby mode and resumes stored speed : Increases the stored speed : From standby mode – activates cruise control and stores current speed : From active mode – deactivates/ changes cruise control to standby mode : Reduces stored speed }} * Option/accessory. 303 DRIVER SUPPORT Marker for stored speed || The car's current speed WARNING • Stored speed NOTE In cars equipped with adaptive cruise control* (ACC28), it is possible to switch between cruise control and adaptive cruise control. • • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. Using engine braking instead of the foot brake With Cruise Control, speed is regulated with less frequent application of the foot brake. On a downhill gradient it may sometimes be desirable to start moving a little faster and limit the acceleration by engine braking. In this case the driver 25 26 27 28 304 can temporarily disable foot brake application by Cruise Control. To do so, proceed as follows: – Depress the accelerator pedal about halfway down and release. > Cruise Control will disengage its automatic foot braking and then uses engine braking only. Related information • • Driving support systems (p. 290) Activating and starting Cruise Control (p. 305) • Deactivate cruise control and set it in standby mode (p. 305) • Reactivating cruise control from standby mode (p. 306) • • Deactivating cruise control (p. 307) • Change between cruise control and adaptive cruise control* (p. 315) Set the stored speed for driver support (p. 331) Automatic Speed Limiter Road Sign Information – RSI Cruise Control Adaptive Cruise Control * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Activating and starting Cruise Control 30 km/h (20 mph) or higher. The lowest speed that can be stored is 30 km/h (20 mph). Deactivate cruise control and set it in standby mode The cruise control function (CC29) must first be selected and activated in order to be able to regulate the speed. To start the cruise control: Cruise control (CC30) can be temporarily deactivated so that it is set in the standby mode and can be reactivated later. – With the symbol/function displayed, press the steering wheel button (2). > Cruise Control starts and the current speed becomes the stored speed. NOTE Cruise Control cannot be enabled at speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph). Related information Set cruise control in standby mode To set cruise control in standby mode: – Press ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to browse to the symbol/function (4). > The symbol is shown and the cruise control can then be activated. • • • • Cruise control (p. 303) Deactivating cruise control (p. 307) Deactivate cruise control and set it in standby mode (p. 305) Reactivating cruise control from standby mode (p. 306) To set cruise control in standby mode: – Press the steering wheel button (2). > The cruise control markings and symbols in the driver display change colour from WHITE to GREY – cruise control is now temporarily deactivated and the driver must then manually control the speed. Activating/starting cruise control In order to start the cruise control from the standby mode, the car's current speed must be 29 30 Cruise Control Cruise Control }} 305 DRIVER SUPPORT || Standby mode on driver intervention The cruise control is temporarily deactivated and set in standby mode if: • • • • Related information • • the foot brake is used Cruise control (p. 303) Reactivating cruise control from standby mode (p. 306) the gear selector is moved to N position • the clutch pedal is held depressed for longer than 1 minute Activating and starting Cruise Control (p. 305) • Deactivating cruise control (p. 307) Reactivating cruise control from standby mode Cruise control (CC31) can be temporarily deactivated so that it is set in the standby mode and can be reactivated later. the driver maintains a speed higher than the stored speed for longer than 1 minute. The driver must then control the speed himself/ herself. A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released. Automatic standby mode Cruise control is temporarily disengaged and set in standby mode if: • • • • wheels lose traction 306 – engine speed is too low/high brake temperature is too high speed falls below 30 km/h (20 mph). The driver must then control the speed himself/ herself. 31 To start cruise control from standby mode: Cruise Control or Press the steering wheel button (1). > The cruise control markings and symbols in the driver display change colour from GREY to WHITE — the car will now follow the most recently stored speed again. DRIVER SUPPORT To start cruise control from standby mode: – Press the steering wheel button (2). > The cruise control markings and symbols in the driver display change colour from GREY to WHITE — the car will now follow the current speed. Deactivating cruise control Related information Cruise control (CC32) can be deactivated. • • • Activating and starting Cruise Control (p. 305) • Reactivating cruise control from standby mode (p. 306) • Deactivate cruise control and set it in standby mode (p. 305) WARNING A significant increase in speed may follow when the speed is resumed with the steering wheel button. Cruise control (p. 303) Change between cruise control and adaptive cruise control* (p. 315) Related information • • • • Cruise control (p. 303) Deactivating cruise control (p. 307) Deactivate cruise control and set it in standby mode (p. 305) Activating and starting Cruise Control (p. 305) Buttons and symbols for the function. To deactivate cruise control: 1. (2). Press the steering wheel button > Cruise control is set in standby mode. 2. Press the steering wheel button ◀ (1) or ▶ (3) to change to another function. > The driver display's symbol for cruise con(4) is extinguished - which trol deletes the set/stored speed. 3. 32 Press the steering wheel button again. > Another function is activated. (2) Cruise Control * Option/accessory. 307 DRIVER SUPPORT Distance Warning*33 The Distance Warning function can assist the driver to notice that the time interval to the vehicle ahead may be too short. This requires the car to be equipped with a head-up display* to be able to display Distance Warning. vehicle ahead travelling in the same direction. No distance information is provided for oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles. NOTE Distance warning is deactivated during the time the adaptive cruise control (ACC34) or Pilot Assist is active. WARNING Distance warning only reacts if the time window to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the preset value – the speed of the driver's vehicle is not affected. Related information Warning light for Distance Warning on the windscreen. Distance Warning symbol on the windscreen with headup display. In cars equipped with head-up display, a symbol is shown on the windscreen for as long as the time interval to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the preset value. However, this assumes that the Show Driver Support function is activated via the settings in the car's menu system. Distance warning is active at speeds above 30 km/h (20 mph) and only reacts to the 33 34 308 Even if the car is not equipped with a head-up display, a warning light appears on the windscreen and shines steadily if the time interval to the vehicle in front is shorter than a preset value. NOTE • • First aid kit* (p. 600) Activating/deactivating Distance warning (p. 309) Limitations of Distance Warning (p. 309) • • • Set time interval for driver support (p. 330) • Head-up display* (p. 141) Warning from driver support in the event of a collision risk (p. 328) Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is not looking straight ahead may make the visual warning signal in the windscreen difficult to recognise. Distance Alert Adaptive Cruise Control * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Activating/deactivating Distance warning35 The distance warning function can be deactivated. The function is only available in cars that can show information on the windscreen with a so-called head-up display*. Activate or deactivate the function using this button in the centre display's function view. • GREEN button indication – the function is activated. • GREY button indication – the function is deactivated. Distance Warning is activated automatically each time the engine is started. Related information • • 35 36 Distance Warning* (p. 308) Limitations of Distance Warning (p. 309) Distance Alert Distance Alert Limitations of Distance Warning36 The Distance Warning function may have limitations in certain situations. The function is only available in cars that can show information on the windscreen with a so-called head-up display*. WARNING • • A vehicle's size may affect the ability to be detected, e.g. motorcycles, which could mean that the warning lamp illuminates at a shorter time window than set or that the warning is temporarily absent. Extremely high speeds can cause the lamp to illuminate at a shorter time window than that set due to limitations in radar unit range. WARNING • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. NOTE This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations. }} * Option/accessory. 309 DRIVER SUPPORT || Related information • • • Distance Warning* (p. 308) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) Head-up display* (p. 141) Adaptive cruise control*37 (ACC38) The adaptive cruise control helps the driver to maintain an even speed combined with a pre-selected time interval to the vehicle ahead. An adaptive cruise control can provide a more relaxing driving experience on long journeys on motorways and long straight main roads in smooth traffic flows. The camera and radar unit measures the distance to the vehicle ahead. The driver selects the desired speed and a time interval to the vehicle ahead. If the camera and radar unit detects a slower vehicle in front of the car, the speed is adapted automatically via the preset time interval to the vehicle. When the road 37 38 310 is clear again the car returns to the selected speed. WARNING • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. Adaptive Cruise Control regulates the speed with acceleration and braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a low sound when they are being used to adjust the speed. This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market. Adaptive Cruise Control * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT The adaptive cruise control aims to control the speed in a smooth way. In situations that demand sudden braking the driver must brake himself/ herself. This applies in cases of large speed differences or if the vehicle in front brakes suddenly. Due to the limitations of the radar unit, braking may come unexpectedly or not at all. WARNING • • The adaptive cruise control aims to follow the vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time interval set by the driver. If the radar unit cannot see any vehicle in front then the car will instead maintain the speed set and stored by the driver. This also takes place if the speed of the vehicle ahead increases and exceeds the stored speed. • This is not a collision avoidance system. The driver is always responsible and must intervene if the system does not detect a vehicle ahead. The function does not brake for humans or animals, and not for small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for low trailers, oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles and objects. Do not use the function in demanding situations, such as in city traffic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on slip roads. • Limitations for adaptive cruise control* (p. 315) • Symbols and messages for adaptive cruise control* (p. 317) • Warning from driver support in the event of a collision risk (p. 328) • • Set time interval for driver support (p. 330) • Automatic braking with driver support (p. 332) • • Change of target with driver support (p. 329) Set the stored speed for driver support (p. 331) Overtaking Assistance (p. 333) IMPORTANT Maintenance of driver support components may only be performed at a workshop39. Related information • • • 39 Driving support systems (p. 290) Controls and display view for adaptive cruise control* (p. 312) Activating and starting adaptive cruise control* (p. 312) An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. * Option/accessory. 311 DRIVER SUPPORT Controls and display view for adaptive cruise control* Reduces the time interval to vehicles ahead Target vehicle indicator: the function has detected and is following a target vehicle at the preset time interval A summary of how adaptive cruise control is controlled using the left-hand keypad on the steering wheel and how the function is shown in the display. Symbol for time interval to vehicles ahead Driver display : From standby mode - activates and stores the current speed Indication of speeds. Stored speed : From active mode - deactivates/ changes to standby mode Speed of vehicle ahead. : Activates the function from standby mode and resumes stored speed : Increases the stored speed : Reduces stored speed Current speed of your car. Related information • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 310) Activating and starting adaptive cruise control* Adaptive cruise control (ACC40) must first be activated and then started if it is to control the speed and distance. Setting the adaptive cruise control in standby mode Immediately after the engine is started the Adaptive Cruise Control is in the standby mode. To set it in standby mode from active mode, proceed as follows: – Press steering wheel button ◀ (2) or ▶ (3) to (4). scroll to the symbol/function > The symbol is displayed and Adaptive Cruise Control is set in standby mode. Increases the time interval to vehicles ahead 312 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Starting/activating the adaptive cruise control – In order to start the ACC the following requirements apply: • The driver's seatbelt must be buckled and the driver's door must be closed. • There must be a vehicle (the "target vehicle") within reasonable distance in front of the car, or the current speed must be at least 15 km/h (9 mph). • For cars with manual gearbox. Speed must be at the lowest 30 km/h (20 mph). With the symbol/function (4) displayed, press the steering wheel button (1). > Adaptive cruise control starts and the current speed is stored, which is shown in figures in the centre of the speedometer. The time interval is only adjusted to the vehicle ahead by the ACC when the distance symbol shows two vehicles. Deactivating/reactivating adaptive cruise control* The Adaptive cruise control (ACC41) can be temporarily deactivated so that it is set in the standby mode and can later be reactivated. Deactivate Adaptive Cruise Control and set it in standby mode At the same time a speed range is marked. The higher speed is the stored/selected speed and the lower speed is that of the vehicle ahead (target vehicle). Related information • • • 40 41 Adaptive Cruise Control Adaptive Cruise Control Adaptive cruise control* (p. 310) Deactivating/reactivating adaptive cruise control* (p. 313) Change between cruise control and adaptive cruise control* (p. 315) }} * Option/accessory. 313 DRIVER SUPPORT || To temporarily switch off Adaptive Cruise Control and set it in standby mode: Press the steering wheel button (2). > The symbol on the driver display changes colour from WHITE to GREY and the stored speed in the centre of the speedometer changes from BEIGE to GREY. – WARNING • • With the adaptive cruise control is in standby mode, the driver must intervene and regulate both speed and distance to the vehicle ahead. the clutch pedal is depressed for approx. 1 minute - applies to cars with manual gearbox. • A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released. Automatic standby mode Adaptive cruise control is dependent on other systems, e.g. stability control/anti-skid ESC42. If any of these other systems stops working, adaptive cruise control is switched off automatically. WARNING With automatic standby mode, the driver is warned via an acoustic signal and a message on the driver display. When the adaptive cruise control is in standby mode and the car comes too close to a vehicle ahead, the driver may be warned of the short distance by the Distance Warning* function instead. • • • • • • • • • speed is reduced to below 30 km/h (20 mph) - only applies to cars with manual gearbox. the driver opens the door. the driver takes off the seatbelt. engine speed is too low/high. one or more wheels lose traction. brake temperature is high. the parking brake is applied. the camera and radar unit is covered by e.g. snow or heavy rainfall (camera lens/radio waves are blocked). Reactivating adaptive cruise control from standby mode The driver must then regulate the car's speed, apply the brakes as needed and maintain a safe distance to other vehicles. Automatic standby mode may occur if: Standby mode on driver intervention The Adaptive cruise control is temporarily deactivated and set in standby mode if: • • • 42 314 • the speed is below 5 km/h ((3 mph)) and ACC is uncertain whether the vehicle ahead is a stationary vehicle or an object, such as a speed bump. • the speed is below 5 km/h ((3 mph)) and the vehicle ahead turns off so that ACC no longer has a vehicle to follow. the foot brake is used. the gear selector is moved to N position. the driver maintains a speed higher than the stored speed for longer than 1 minute. Electronic Stability Control * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT To reactivate ACC from standby mode: – Press the steering wheel button (1). > The speed is then set to the most recently stored speed. WARNING A significant increase in speed may follow when the speed is resumed with the steering wheel button. Related information • • • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 310) Limitations for adaptive cruise control* Change between cruise control and adaptive cruise control* Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC43) may have limitations in certain situations. In a car with Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC44) the driver can change between Cruise Control (CC45) and ACC. Steep roads and/or heavy load Bear in mind that the adaptive cruise control is primarily intended for use when driving on level road surfaces. The function may have difficulty in keeping the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes - in which case, be extra attentive and ready to brake. • Activating and starting adaptive cruise control* (p. 312) Change between cruise control and adaptive cruise control* (p. 315) Do not use adaptive cruise control if the car has a heavy load or a trailer is connected to the car. Miscellaneous • Drive mode Off Road cannot be selected when the adaptive cruise control is activated. A symbol in the driver display shows which cruise control is active: CC ACC A Cruise control A A Adaptive cruise control WHITE symbol: Function active, GREY symbol: Standby mode Changing from ACC to CC Proceed as follows: 1. Set adaptive cruise control to standby mode using steering wheel button . NOTE This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations. Related information • • 43 44 45 Adaptive Cruise Control Adaptive Cruise Control Cruise Control Adaptive cruise control* (p. 310) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) }} * Option/accessory. 315 DRIVER SUPPORT || 2. Press the Cruise Control button in the centre display's function view - the button's indicator changes colour from GREY to GREEN. > The symbol in the driver display changes from ACC to CC. Adaptive Cruise Control is now switched off and Cruise Control is set to standby mode. 3. . Press the steering wheel button > Cruise control starts and stores the current speed. WARNING Switching from ACC to CC means that the car: • no longer maintains a preset time interval to the vehicle ahead. • only follows the stored speed, and the driver must therefore apply the brakes when necessary. 2. Tap on the Cruise Control button in the function view - the button's indicator changes colour from GREEN to GREY. > The symbol in the driver display changes from CC to ACC. Adaptive Cruise Control is now activated and set to standby mode. 3. . Press the steering wheel button > Adaptive cruise control starts and stores the current speed, together with the preset time interval to the vehicle ahead. Related information • • Adaptive cruise control* (p. 310) Cruise control (p. 303) If CC is active when the engine is switched off, ACC will be activated automatically the next time the engine is started. Changing from CC to ACC Proceed as follows: 1. 316 Set cruise control to standby mode using the steering wheel button. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Symbols and messages for adaptive cruise control* A number of symbols and messages regarding the adaptive cruise control (ACC46) can be shown via the driver display and/or the head-up display*. The previous illustration shows that the adaptive cruise control is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and that there is no vehicle ahead to follow. In the following illustrative example, the RSI* (Road Sign Information) function informs the driver that the maximum permitted speed is 130 km/h (80 mph). The previous illustration shows that the adaptive cruise control is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and at the same time is following a vehicle ahead which is keeping the same speed. 46 Adaptive Cruise Control }} * Option/accessory. 317 DRIVER SUPPORT || Symbol Message Specification The symbol is WHITE. The car is maintaining the stored/selected speed. Adaptive Cruise Contr. Adaptive cruise control is set to standby mode. Unavailable The symbol is GREY. Adaptive Cruise Contr. Service required The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The symbol is GREY. Windscreen sensor Clean the windscreen in front of the camera and radar unit's detectors. Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • 318 Adaptive cruise control* (p. 310) * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Pilot Assist47 Pilot Assist helps the driver to drive the car between the lane's side markings using steering assistance as well as to maintain an even speed, combined with a preselected time interval to the vehicle ahead. How Pilot Assist works The Pilot Assist function is primarily intended for use on motorways and similar major roads where it can contribute to more comfortable driving and a more relaxed driving experience. The driver selects the desired speed and a time interval to the vehicle ahead. Pilot Assist scans the distance to the vehicle ahead and the lane's side markings on the road surface using the camera and radar unit. The preset time interval is maintained with automatic speed adjustment whilst the steering assistance helps to position the car in the lane. Pilot Assist steering assistance takes into account the speed of the preceding car and the lane markings. The driver can at any time ignore the Pilot Assist steering recommendation and steer in another direction, e.g. to change lane or avoid an obstruction on the road. If Pilot Assist cannot interpret the lane unambiguously, e.g. if the camera and radar unit does not see the lane's side markings, Pilot Assist temporarily deactivates steering assistance, but resumes it if the lane can be interpreted again although the speed and distance control functions remain active. The current status of steering assistance is indicated by the colour of the steering wheel's symbol: • GREEN steering wheel indicates active steering assistance • GREY steering wheel (as in illustration) indicates deactivated steering assistance. WARNING Pilot Assist must only be used if there are clear lane lines painted on each side of the lane. All other use involves increased risk of contact with surrounding obstacles that cannot be detected by the function. WARNING The camera and radar unit measures the distance to the vehicle ahead and detects side markings. Camera and radar unit Pilot Assist steering assistance is automatically deactivated and is resumed without prior warning. Distance readers Readers, side markings 47 This function can be either standard or optional, depending on market. }} 319 DRIVER SUPPORT || WARNING • • • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. Pilot Assist regulates the speed with acceleration and braking. It is normal for the brakes to emit a low sound when they are being used to adjust the speed. Pilot Assist attempts to regulate the speed smoothly. In situations that demand sudden braking the driver must brake himself/herself. This applies in cases of large speed differences or if the car in front brakes suddenly. Due to the limi48 320 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. tations of the camera and radar unit, braking may come unexpectedly or not at all. Pilot Assist aims to follow the vehicle ahead in the same lane at a time interval set by the driver. If the radar unit cannot see any vehicle in front then the car will instead maintain the speed set and stored by the driver. This also takes place if the speed of the vehicle ahead increases and exceeds the stored speed. WARNING IMPORTANT Maintenance of driver support components may only be performed at a workshop48. Round bends and when the road splits Pilot Assist interacts with the driver, who should therefore not wait for the steering assistance from Pilot Assist but should always be prepared to increase his/her own steering input, especially in bends. When the car approaches an exit or if the lane splits, the driver should steer towards the desired lane in order to specify the desired direction to Pilot Assist. • This is not a collision avoidance system. The driver is always responsible and must intervene if the system does not detect a vehicle ahead. • • The function does not brake for humans or animals, and not for small vehicles such as bicycles and motorcycles. Nor for low trailers, oncoming, slow or stationary vehicles and objects. Pilot Assist strives to keep the car in the middle of the lane • Do not use the function in demanding situations, such as in city traffic, at junctions, on slippery surfaces, with a lot of water or slush on the road, in heavy rain/snow, in poor visibility, on winding roads or on slip roads. When Pilot Assist helps to steer, it strives to position the car in between the lane markings and therefore it is recommended to let the car find the optimal placement to achieve as smooth a driving experience as possible. The driver checks that the car is positioned safely in the lane, and always has the ability to adjust the position by making his/her own steering corrections. • If Pilot Assist does not position the car in an appropriate way in the lane, it is recommended to turn Pilot Assist off or switch to Adaptive cruise control. DRIVER SUPPORT Related information • • Driving support systems (p. 290) Controls and display view for Pilot Assist (p. 321) • • • Activating and starting Pilot Assist (p. 322) • Warning from driver support in the event of a collision risk (p. 328) • • • Change of target with driver support (p. 329) • Automatic braking with driver support (p. 332) • Overtaking Assistance (p. 333) Limitations of Pilot Assist (p. 325) Controls and display view for Pilot Assist A summary of how Pilot Assist is controlled using the left-hand keypad on the steering wheel and how the function is shown in the display. Controls Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist* (p. 326) : Reduces stored speed Increases the time interval to vehicles ahead Reduces the time interval to vehicles ahead ◀: Switches from Pilot Assist to adaptive cruise control Function symbol Symbols for target car Symbol for time interval to vehicles ahead Symbol for activated/deactivated steering assistance Set time interval for driver support (p. 330) Set the stored speed for driver support (p. 331) Buttons and symbols for the function. ▶: Switches from adaptive cruise control to Pilot Assist : From standby mode - activates Pilot Assist and stores the current speed : From active mode - deactivates/ changes Pilot Assist to standby mode : Activates Pilot Assist from standby mode and resumes the stored speed and time interval : Increases the stored speed }} * Option/accessory. 321 DRIVER SUPPORT || Driver display Activating and starting Pilot Assist Pilot Assist must first be activated and then started to be able to control speed and distance and to give steering assistance. With the adaptive cruise control in standby mode: 1. Press the steering wheel button ▶ (6). > The symbol changes to Pilot Assist in standby mode (8). 2. Press the steering wheel button (2). > Pilot Assist is started and current speed is stored, which is shown with figures in the centre of the speedometer. ...or... With the Adaptive cruise control started: Indication of speeds. – Stored speed Speed of vehicle ahead Current speed of your car Related information • Pilot Assist (p. 319) NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. In order to start the Pilot Assist it is required that: • The driver's seatbelt must be buckled and the driver's door must be closed. • There must be a vehicle (the "target vehicle") within reasonable distance in front of the car, or the current speed must be at least 15 km/h (9 mph). • 322 For cars with manual gearbox. Speed must be at the lowest 30 km/h (20 mph). Press the steering wheel button ▶ (6). > Pilot Assist is started. Pilot Assist steering assistance is only active when the steering wheel symbol (2) has changed from GREY to GREEN. Pilot Assist only regulates the time interval to the vehicle ahead when the distance symbol shows a vehicle (1) above the steering wheel symbol. At the same time a speed range is marked. The higher speed is the stored/selected speed and the lower speed is that of the vehicle ahead (target vehicle). DRIVER SUPPORT Hands on the steering wheel Deactivating/activating Pilot Assist In order for Pilot Assist to function, the driver’s hands must be on the steering wheel. Pilot Assist can be temporarily deactivated so that it is set in the standby mode and can be reactivated later. If Pilot Assist detects that the driver is not holding the steering wheel, the driver is prompted after a pause to actively steer the car, via a symbol and a text message. Deactivating and setting Pilot Assist in standby mode If the driver's hands still cannot be detected on the steering wheel after a few seconds, the prompt to actively steer the car is repeated, supplemented by an acoustic warning signal. If Pilot Assist cannot detect the driver's hands on the steering wheel after a further few seconds, the warning signal becomes intensive and the steering function is deactivated. Pilot Assist must then be restarted using the steering wheel button . NOTE Note that Pilot Assist only works when the driver has hands on the steering wheel. Related information • • Pilot Assist (p. 319) Deactivating/activating Pilot Assist (p. 323) Press the steering wheel button ◀ (3). > Pilot Assist is switched off and changes to the Adaptive cruise control in active mode. – WARNING • With Pilot Assist in standby mode, the driver must intervene and steer, regulating both speed and distance to the vehicle ahead. • When Pilot Assist is in standby mode and the car comes too close to a vehicle ahead, the driver is warned of the short distance by the distance warning* function instead. NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. To temporarily switch off Pilot Assist and set it in standby mode: – Press the steering wheel button (2). > Pilot Assist is set in standby mode - the symbol (8) in the driver display changes colour from WHITE to GREY and the stored speed in the centre of the speedometer changes from BEIGE to GREY. ...or... }} * Option/accessory. 323 DRIVER SUPPORT || Standby mode on driver intervention Pilot Assist is temporarily deactivated and set in standby mode if: • • • the foot brake is used. With automatic standby mode, the driver is warned via an acoustic signal and a message on the driver display. the gear selector is moved to N position. • • the driver maintains a speed higher than the stored speed for longer than 1 minute. • the clutch pedal is depressed for approx. 1 minute - applies to cars with manual gearbox. the direction indicators are used for longer than 1 minute. A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released. When the direction indicators are used, Pilot Assist steering assistance is temporarily disengaged. When this is no longer the case, steering assistance is automatically reactivated if the lane's side markings can still be detected. Automatic standby mode Pilot Assist is dependent on other systems, e.g. stability control/anti-skid ESC49. If any of these other systems stops working, Pilot Assist is switched off automatically. 49 324 WARNING Electronic Stability Control The driver must then regulate the car's speed, apply the brakes as needed and maintain a safe distance to other vehicles. • the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the vehicle ahead turns off so that Pilot Assist no longer has a vehicle to follow. • speed is reduced to below 30 km/h (20 mph) - only applies to cars with manual gearbox. Reactivating Pilot Assist from the standby mode Automatic standby mode may occur if, for example: • • • • • • • • • the driver opens the door. brake temperature is high. the driver's hands are not on the steering wheel. the parking brake is applied. engine speed is too low/high. the driver takes off the seatbelt. one or more wheels lose traction. the camera and radar unit is covered by e.g. snow or heavy rainfall (camera lens/radio waves are blocked). NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and Pilot Assist is uncertain whether the vehicle ahead is a stationary vehicle or an object, such as a speed bump. – To reactivate Pilot Assist: Press the steering wheel button (1). > The speed is then set to the most recently stored speed. DRIVER SUPPORT WARNING A significant increase in speed may follow when the speed is resumed with the steering wheel button. Related information • • Pilot Assist (p. 319) Activating and starting Pilot Assist (p. 322) Limitations of Pilot Assist The Pilot Assist function may have limitations in certain situations. The Pilot Assist function is an aid which can help the driver in many situations. But the driver is at all times responsible for maintaining a safe distance to surrounding objects and a correct position in the lane. WARNING In certain situations, Pilot Assist steering assistance may have difficulty helping the driver in the right way or it may be automatically deactivated - in which case, the use of Pilot Assist is not recommended. Examples of such situations may be that: • the lane markings are worn, missing or cross each other. • lane division is unclear, for example, when the lanes divide or merge or at exits or in the event of multiple sets of markings. • edges or other lines than lane markings are present on or near the road, e.g. kerbs, joints or repairs to the road surface, edges of barriers, roadside edges or strong shadows. • • • the lane is narrow or winding. the lane contains ridges or holes. weather conditions are poor, e.g. rain, snow or fog or slush or impaired view with poor light conditions, back-lighting, wet road surface etc. The driver should also note that Pilot Assist has the following limitations: • High kerbs, roadside barriers, temporary obstacles (traffic cones, safety barriers, etc.) are not detected. Alternatively, they may be detected incorrectly as lane markings, with a subsequent risk of contact }} 325 DRIVER SUPPORT between the car and such obstacles. The driver must ensure him/herself that the car is at a suitable distance from such obstacles. || • The camera and radar sensor does not have the capacity to detect all oncoming objects and obstacles in traffic environments, e.g. potholes, stationary obstacles or objects which completely or partially block the route. • Pilot Assist does not "see" pedestrians, animals, etc. • The recommended steering input is force limited, which means that it cannot always help the driver to steer and keep the car within the lane. • In cars equipped with Sensus Navigation*, the function has the option of using information from map data, which may result in varied performance. • Steep roads and/or heavy load Bear in mind that Pilot Assist is primarily intended for use when driving on level road surfaces. The function may have difficulty in keeping the correct distance from the vehicle ahead when driving on steep downhill slopes - in which case, be extra attentive and ready to brake. • Symbols and messages for Pilot Assist* A number of symbols and messages regarding Pilot Assist can be shown via the driver display and/or the head-up display*. Do not use Pilot Assist if the car has a heavy load or a trailer is connected to the car. NOTE Pilot Assist cannot be activated if a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is connected to the car's electrical system. Miscellaneous • Off Road drive mode cannot be selected when Pilot Assist is activated. NOTE Pilot Assist is switched off if the power steering for speed related steering force is working with reduced power – e.g. during cooling due to overheating. This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations. Related information The driver always has the possibility of correcting or adjusting a steering intervention imposed by Pilot Assist and can turn the steering wheel to the desired position. 326 • • • • Pilot Assist (p. 319) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) Speed-dependent steering force (p. 290) Drive modes (p. 460) * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Here are some examples50. The previous illustration51 shows that Pilot Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and that there is no vehicle ahead to follow. Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance since the lane's side markings cannot be detected. 50 51 The previous illustration51 shows that Pilot Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and at the same time is following a vehicle ahead which is keeping the same speed. The previous illustration51 shows that Pilot Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and at the same time is following a vehicle ahead which is keeping the same speed. Pilot Assist provides no steering assistance since the lane's side markings cannot be detected. Here, Pilot Assist also provides steering assistance since the lane's side markings can be detected. In the following illustrative example, the RSI (Road Sign Information) function informs the driver that the maximum permitted speed is 130 km/h (80 mph). NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. }} 327 DRIVER SUPPORT Warning from driver support in the event of a collision risk || The driver support systems Pilot Assist, and Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*52 can warn the driver if the distance to the vehicle ahead suddenly becomes too short. and acoustic warning are activated to alert the driver that immediate intervention is required. WARNING The driver support systems only warn of vehicles which their radar unit has detected – hence a warning may not be given, or it may be given with a certain delay. Never wait for a warning. Apply the brakes when the situation requires. The previous illustration51 shows that Pilot Assist is set to maintain 110 km/h (68 mph) and that there is no vehicle ahead to follow. Pilot Assist provides steering assistance as the lane markings can be detected. Related information • Pilot Assist (p. 319) Warning light for collision warning on the windscreen. Audio-visual warning signal in the event of a collision risk Distance measurement with the camera and radar unit The driver support uses approx. 40% of the foot brake's capacity. If the car needs to be braked more heavily than the driver support is capable of and the driver does not brake, the warning lamp 51 52 328 Symbol for collision warning on the windscreen. In cars equipped with a head up display*, the warning is shown on the windscreen by a flashing symbol. NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. Adaptive Cruise Control * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT NOTE Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is not looking straight ahead may make the visual warning signal in the windscreen difficult to recognise. Change of target with driver support WARNING The driver supports of Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*53 and Pilot Assist, in combination with automatic transmission, have a change of target function at certain speeds. When the driver supports are following another vehicle at speeds in excess of approx. 30 km/h (20 mph) and the target is changed from a moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle, the driver supports will ignore the stationary vehicle and instead accelerate to the stored speed. Change of target Related information • • • • • • Driving support systems (p. 290) The driver must then intervene him/ herself and brake. Adaptive cruise control* (p. 310) Automatic standby mode with change of target The driver supports are disengaged and set in standby mode: Pilot Assist (p. 319) Distance Warning* (p. 308) Head-up display* (p. 141) If the target vehicle in front suddenly turns then there may be stationary traffic in front. When the driver supports are following another vehicle at speeds below 30 km/h (20 mph) and changes target vehicle – from a moving vehicle to a stationary vehicle – the driver supports will slow down for the stationary vehicle. • when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the driver supports are uncertain whether the target object is a stationary vehicle or another object, such as a speed bump. • when the speed is below 5 km/h (3 mph) and the vehicle ahead turns off so that the driver supports no longer have a vehicle to follow. Related information • • • 53 Driving support systems (p. 290) Adaptive cruise control* (p. 310) Pilot Assist (p. 319) Adaptive Cruise Control * Option/accessory. 329 DRIVER SUPPORT Set time interval for driver support NOTE It is possible to set the time interval to the vehicle ahead to be maintained by the Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*54, Pilot Assist and Distance Warning* functions. When the symbol in the driver display shows two cars, ACC is following the vehicle in front at a pre-set time interval. When only one car is shown, there is no vehicle within a reasonable distance ahead. Different time intervals to the vehicle in front can be selected and shown in the driver display as 1-5 horizontal lines - the more lines the longer the time interval. One line represents about 1 second to the vehicle in front, 5 lines represents about 3 seconds. The adaptive cruise control allows the time interval to vary significantly in certain situations in order to allow the car to follow the vehicle in front smoothly and comfortably. At low speed, when the distances are short, the adaptive cruise control increases the time interval slightly. NOTE • The higher the speed the longer the calculated distance in metres for a given time interval. • Only use the time intervals permitted by local traffic regulations. • If the driver supports do not seem to respond with a speed increase when activated, it may be because the time window to the vehicle ahead is shorter than the set time window. NOTE When the symbol in the driver display shows a car and a steering wheel, Pilot Assist follows a vehicle in front at a preset time gap. When only one steering wheel is shown, there is no vehicle within a reasonable distance ahead. Control for time interval. Decrease time interval WARNING • Only use a time window that suits the current traffic conditions. • The driver should be aware that short time windows limit the amount of time available to react and take action in an unexpected traffic situation. Increase time interval Distance indicator – 54 330 Press the steering wheel button (1) or (2) to increase or decrease the time interval. > The distance indicator (3) shows the current time interval. Adaptive Cruise Control * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Related information • • • • • Driving support systems (p. 290) Adaptive cruise control* (p. 310) Pilot Assist (p. 319) Distance Warning* (p. 308) Head-up display* (p. 141) Drive mode for driver support The driver can select different driving styles for how driver support should maintain the preset time interval to the vehicle ahead. Selection is made via the drive mode control DRIVE MODE. Set the stored speed for driver support It is possible to set stored speed for the Speed Limiter, Cruise Control, Adaptive Cruise Control (ACC)*55 and Pilot Assist functions. Select one of the following options: • Pure – The driver support focuses on optimal fuel economy, which means longer time interval to the vehicle ahead. • Hybrid – The driver support focuses on following the set time interval to the vehicle ahead as smoothly as possible. • Power – The driver support focuses on following the set time interval to the vehicle ahead more closely, which in certain cases may mean heavier acceleration and braking. Related information • • 55 Adaptive Cruise Control Driving support systems (p. 290) Drive modes (p. 460) : Increases the stored speed. : Reduces stored speed. Stored speed. }} * Option/accessory. 331 DRIVER SUPPORT || – Change a set speed with short presses on (1) or the steering wheel buttons (2) or by pressing and holding them. • • • Short presses: Each press changes the speed in increments of +/- 5 km/h (+/- 5 mph). Press and hold: Release the button when the speed indicator (3) has moved to the desired speed. The speed set after the last button press is stored in the memory. If the driver increases the car's speed using the accelerator pedal before pressing the steering wheel button (1), the speed stored will be the car's speed when the button is depressed, provided the driver's foot is on the accelerator pedal at the moment when the button is depressed. A temporary increase in speed with the accelerator pedal, e.g. during overtaking, does not affect the setting - the car returns to the last stored speed when the accelerator pedal is released. Note that the lowest programmable speed is 30 km/h (20 mph) – even though it is capable of following another vehicle down to 0 km/h, a speed lower than 30 km/h (20 mph) cannot be selected/stored. Manual gearbox the driver support functions can follow another vehicle at speeds from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to 200 km/h (125 mph). Automatic braking with driver support Pilot Assist and adaptive cruise control* (ACC56) have a special brake function in slow traffic and while stationary. Brake function in slow queues and while stationary The lowest programmable speed is 30 km/h (20 mph) – the maximum speed is 200 km/h (125 mph). For shorter stops in connection with inching in slow traffic or at traffic lights, driving is automatically resumed if the stops do not exceed approx. 3 seconds - if it takes longer before the vehicle in front starts moving again then the driver support function is set in standby mode with automatic braking. Related information – Pilot Assist can give steering assistance from 30 km/h (20 mph) up to 140 km/h (87 mph). • • • • • Driving support systems (p. 290) Speed limiter (p. 296) Cruise control (p. 303) Adaptive cruise control* (p. 310) Pilot Assist (p. 319) The function is reactivated in one of the following ways: • • Press the steering wheel button . Depress the accelerator pedal. > The function resumes following the vehicle ahead if it starts moving forward within approx. 6 seconds. Automatic gearbox The driver support functions can follow another vehicle at speeds from 0 km/h up to 200 km/h (125 mph). Pilot Assist can give steering assistance from almost stationary up to 140 km/h (87 mph). 56 332 Adaptive Cruise Control * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT NOTE The driver supports can hold the car stationary for a maximum of 5 minutes – then the parking brake is applied and the function is disengaged. Before the driver supports can be reactivated, the parking brake must be released. Cessation of automatic braking In some situations, automatic braking ceases on coming to a standstill and the function is set in standby mode. This means that the brakes are released and the car may start to roll - the driver must therefore intervene and brake the car himself/herself to keep it stationary. This takes place if the function is holding the car stationary with the foot brake and: • the driver opens the door or takes off his/her seatbelt • the function has kept the car stationary for more than approx. 5 minutes • • the brakes have overheated Related information • • • • This may take place in the following situations: • the driver puts his/her foot on the brake pedal • • the parking brake is applied • the driver switches the engine off manually. the gear selector is moved to P, N, or R position the driver sets the function in the standby mode. Driving support systems (p. 290) Adaptive cruise control* (p. 310) Pilot Assist (p. 319) Brake functions (p. 443) Overtaking Assistance Overtaking Assistance can help the driver when overtaking other vehicles. This function can be used with Pilot Assist or adaptive cruise control* (ACC57). How overtaking assistance works When Pilot Assist or ACC is following another vehicle and the driver indicates the intention to overtake by activating the direction indicator58, the systems help by accelerating the vehicle towards the vehicle in front before the driver’s vehicle reaches the overtaking lane. The function then delays reducing speed in order to avoid premature braking when the driver’s car is approaching a slower vehicle. The function remains active until the driver’s vehicle has cleared the overtaken vehicle. WARNING Be aware that this function can be activated in more situations than during overtaking, e.g. when a direction indicator is used to indicate a change of lane or exit to another road – the car will then accelerate briefly. Automatic activation of parking brake In certain situations, the parking brake is applied in order to keep the car stationary. 57 58 Adaptive Cruise Control On left flash only in left-hand-drive car, or right flash in right-hand-drive car. }} * Option/accessory. 333 DRIVER SUPPORT || Related information • • • • Driving support systems (p. 290) Use Overtaking Assistance (p. 334) Adaptive cruise control* (p. 310) Pilot Assist (p. 319) Use Overtaking Assistance WARNING There are a number of criteria if Overtaking Assistance is to be used. When using the Overtaking Assistance System, the driver should be aware that there may be undesired acceleration if the conditions suddenly change. The following conditions must exist for Overtaking Assistance to be activated: • there must be a vehicle in front (the “target vehicle”) • your car's current speed is at least 70 km/h (43 mph) • the stored speed must be high enough for overtaking to take place safely. Some situations should therefore be avoided, such as if: • the car is approaching an exit for turn-of that is in the same direction as overtaking would normally occur • the vehicle ahead slows down before the driver's car has crossed over into the overtaking lane. • the traffic in the overtaking lane slows down. • a right-hand drive car is driven in a county with left-hand traffic (or vice versa). To start the Overtaking Assistance: – Activate the direction indicator. Use the left-hand direction indicator in a lefthand drive car right in a right-hand drive car. > Overtaking Assistance is started. Situations of this type are avoided by temporarily setting adaptive cruise control or Pilot Assist to standby mode. Related information • • • 334 Overtaking Assistance (p. 333) Adaptive cruise control* (p. 310) Pilot Assist (p. 319) * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Radar unit Related information The radar unit is used by several driver support systems and has the task of sensing other vehicles. • • Driving support systems (p. 290) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) • Recommended maintenance for camera and radar unit (p. 345) • Type approval for radar device (p. 336) Radar unit location. The radar unit is used by the following functions: • • • • • Distance Warning* Adaptive cruise control* Lane assistance Pilot Assist* City Safety Modification of the radar unit could result in its use being illegal. * Option/accessory. 335 DRIVER SUPPORT Type approval for radar device The type approval for the car's radar units in the ACC59, PA60 and BLIS61 functions can be read out here. Market ACC & PA BLIS Symbol Type approval Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário, isto é, não tem direito à proteção contra interferência prejudicial, mesmo de estações do mesmo tipo, e não pode causar interferência a sistemas operando em caráter primário. ✓ Modelo: L2C0054TR 4122-14-8645 Brazil EAN: (01)07897843840855 Modelo: L2C0055TR ✓ 1500-15-8065 EAN: 07897843840978 Hereby, Delphi Electronics and Safety declares that L2C0054TR / L2C0055TR are in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU (RED). The original declaration of conformity can be accessed at the following link www.delphi.com/automotive-homologation. Europe ✓ ✓ Frequency Band: 76GHz – 77GHz Maximum Output Power: 55dBm EIRP The Declaration of Conformity may be consulted at Delphi Electronics & Safety / 2151 E. Lincoln Road / Kokomo, Indiana 46902 USA 59 60 61 336 Adaptive Cruise Control Pilot Assist Blind Spot Information DRIVER SUPPORT Market ACC & PA BLIS Type approval REGISTERED No: ER37536/15 ✓ The United Arab Emirates (UAE) Symbol DEALER No: DA37380/15 ✓ REGISTERED No: ER37357/15 DEALER No: DA37380/15 37295/POSTEL/2014 ✓ 4927 Indonesia ✓ 38806/SDPPI/2015 4927 Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2014/255 ✓ Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD) Jordan ✓ Type Approval No.: TRC/LPD/2015/3 Equipment Type: Low Power Device (LPD) Certification No. ✓ MSIP-CMI- DPH-L2C0054TR Korea ✓ Certification No. MSIP-CMI-DPH-L2C0055TR AGREE PAR L’ANRT MAROC Morocco ✓ ✓ NUMÉRO D’AGRÉMENT: MR 9929 ANRT 2014 DATE D’AGRÉMENT: 26/12/2014 }} 337 DRIVER SUPPORT || Market Mexico Moldova ACC & PA BLIS ✓ Singapore И011 14 ✓ ✓ И011 15 ✓ TA-2014/1824 ✓ APPROVED South Africa ✓ 338 IFETEL: RLVDEL215-0314 ✓ ✓ Serbia Type approval IFETEL: RLVDEL215-0299 ✓ ✓ Symbol TA-2014/2390 APPROVED DRIVER SUPPORT ACC & PA Market BLIS ✓ Taiwan Symbol Type approval CCAB15LP0560T3 ✓ CCAB15LP0680T0 Delphi і ✓ Ukraine ✓ і ( 2009 .) Д є, щ і і ь ) і і і і RACAM/SRR2 і і є і і і (П КМ № 679 і 24 ь і Delphi П і : Delphi. Type approval for radio equipment Market Europe Symbol Type approval Hereby, Volvo cars, declares that all radio equipment's are in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of Directive 2014/53/EU. Related information • Radar unit (p. 335) 339 DRIVER SUPPORT Camera unit Related information The camera unit is used by several driver support systems and has the task of for example detecting lane lines or traffic signs. • • • Driving support systems (p. 290) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) Recommended maintenance for camera and radar unit (p. 345) Location of the camera unit. The camera unit is used by the following functions: • • • • • • • • 340 Adaptive cruise control* Pilot Assist* Lane assistance* Steering assistance at risk of collision City Safety Driver Alert Control* Road Sign Information* Active main beam* * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Limitations for camera and radar unit The camera and radar unit has certain limitations – which in turn also limit those functions that use the unit. A driver should be aware about the following examples of limitations. Camera and radar Blocked unit The camera unit is placed inside the upper section of the windscreen together with the car's radar unit. The following table presents examples of possible causes for a message being shown, along with the appropriate action: Do not place, stick or mount anything on the inside or outside of the windscreen, in front of or around the camera and radar unit – this may interfere with camera and radar-based functions. This may result functions being reduced, being switched off completely or giving incorrect function responses. If the driver display shows this symbol and the message "Windscreen sensor Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual", this means that the camera and radar unit cannot detect other vehicles, cyclists, pedestrians and large animals in front of the car, and that the car's camera-based and radar-based functions may be disrupted, reduced, completely deactivated or give an incorrect function response. The marked area must be cleaned regularly and kept free from stickers, objects, shade film, etc. Cause Action The windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit is dirty or covered with ice or snow. Clean dirt, ice and snow from the windscreen surface in front of the camera and radar unit. Thick fog and heavy rain or snow block the radar signals or the camera view. No action. Sometimes the unit does not work during heavy rain or snowfall. }} 341 DRIVER SUPPORT || Cause Action Water or snow from the road surface swirls up and blocks the radar signals or camera view. No action. Sometimes the unit does not work on a very wet or snow-covered road surface. Dirt has appeared between the inside of the windscreen and the camera and radar unit. Visit a workshop to have the windscreen inside the unit's cover cleaned - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Strong oncoming light No action. The camera unit is reset automatically in more favourable light conditions. High temperature At very high temperatures the camera and radar unit can temporarily be switched off for about 15 minutes after the engine is started so as to protect the unit's electronics. The camera and radar unit restarts automatically when the temperature has fallen sufficiently. The following is also applicable so as not to risk incorrect or reduced function or function failure for the driver supports that use the radar unit: • Damaged windscreen NOTE If not rectified it can lead to reduced performance for the driver support systems that use the camera and radar unit. This may result functions being reduced, being switched off completely or giving incorrect function responses. 62 342 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. If a scratch, crack or stone chip appears on the windscreen in front of any of the "windows" for the camera and radar unit and covers an area of approx. 0.5 × 3.0 mm (0.02 × 0.12 in.) or more, a workshop62 must be contacted so that the windscreen can be replaced. • Volvo recommends not repairing cracks, scratches or stone chips in the area in front of the camera and radar unit – the entire windscreen should be replaced instead. • Before replacing a windscreen, contact a workshop62 to verify that the correct windscreen has been ordered and will be fitted. • The same type of windscreen wipers or windscreen wipers approved by Volvo must be fitted when the windscreen is replaced. • When replacing the windscreen, the camera and radar unit must be recalibrated by a workshop62 to ensure that all the camera and radar-based systems in the car function. Radar Vehicle speed The radar unit's ability to detect a vehicle ahead is greatly reduced if the speed of the vehicle ahead is very different to the speed of your own car. DRIVER SUPPORT Limited field of vision The radar unit has a limited field of vision. In some situations another vehicle is not detected, or the detection is made later than expected. that drives in between your car and the vehicle ahead. Small vehicles, such as motorcycles, or vehicles not driving in the centre of the lane can remain undetected. In bends, the radar unit may detect the wrong vehicle or lose a detected vehicle from view. Low trailers the functions of camera-dependent systems could be significantly reduced or temporarily disengaged. Strong oncoming light, reflections in the carriageway, snow or ice on the road surface, dirty road surfaces or unclear lane markings can also significantly reduce camera function when it is used to scan the carriageway to detect pedestrians, cyclists, large animals and other vehicles. Low trailer in radar shadow. Low trailers can also be difficult for the radar unit to detect, or are not detected at all - the driver should therefore be particularly careful when driving behind low trailers when the adaptive cruise control or Pilot Assist is activated. The radar unit's field of vision. Sometimes the radar unit is late at detecting vehicles at close distances - e.g. a vehicle Camera Impaired vision The cameras have limitations similar to the human eye, i.e. may "see" worse in for example intense snowfall or rain, dense fog, heavy dust storms and snow flurries. Under such conditions, }} 343 DRIVER SUPPORT || Park assist camera* Blind sectors Defective camera If a camera sector is black and contains this symbol then it means that the camera is out of order. and quality. Poor light conditions can result in reduced image quality. Rear parking camera WARNING The following illustration shows an example. Pay additional attention while reversing when this symbol is shown if a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is mounted and electrically connected to the car. The symbol indicates that the parking assistance sensors rearward are switched off and will not warn of any obstacles. There are "blind" sectors between the cameras' fields of vision. In the park assist camera's 360° view* obstacles/ objects may "vanish" in the gaps between the individual cameras. NOTE A bike carrier or other accessory mounted on the rear of the car could obscure the camera's view. The car's left-hand camera is out of order. WARNING Pay attention to the possibility that, even if it only looks like a relatively small part of the image is obscured, a relatively large sector could be hidden from view. An obstacle could thereby go undetected until the car is very close to it. A black camera sector is also shown in the following instances, but then without the symbol for defective camera: • • • open door open tailgate • • • folded-in door mirror. Light conditions The camera image is adjusted automatically according to prevailing light conditions. Because of this, the image may vary slightly in brightness 344 Related information • Camera unit (p. 340) Radar unit (p. 335) Recommended maintenance for camera and radar unit (p. 345) Park assist camera* (p. 397) * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Recommended maintenance for camera and radar unit • Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) In order that the camera and radar unit shall function correctly, they must be kept clear of dirt, ice and snow, and be cleaned regularly with water and car shampoo. • Park assist camera* (p. 397) NOTE Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may cause incorrect warning signals, reduced or no function. Location of rear radar units. Keep the surface indicated clean – on both the left and right-hand sides of the car. • To ensure optimal functionality, the surfaces in front of the sensors must be kept clean. • Do not affix any objects, tape or labels in the area of the sensors. • Clean camera lenses regularly with lukewarm water and car shampoo - be careful not to scratch the lenses. IMPORTANT Maintenance of driver support components may only be performed at a workshop63. Location of the parking sensors. Related information • • 63 Camera unit (p. 340) Radar unit (p. 335) An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. * Option/accessory. 345 DRIVER SUPPORT City Safety™ Safety64 City can alert the driver using a visual, acoustic and brake pulse warning to help him/her detect pedestrians, cyclists, larger animals and vehicles that suddenly appear - the car then attempts to brake automatically unless the driver acts within a reasonable time him/herself. The function helps the driver by automatically braking the car in the event of an imminent risk of collision if the driver does not react in time by braking and/or swerving. WARNING • The City Safety auto-brake function can prevent a collision or reduce collision speed, but to ensure full brake performance the driver should always depress the brake pedal – even when the car autobrakes. • The warning and steering assistance are only activated if there is a high risk of collision – you must therefore never wait for a collision warning or for City Safety to intervene. • The warning and brake intervention for pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). • City Safety does not activates any autobrake functions in the event of heavy acceleration. City Safety activates a short, sharp braking procedure, normally stopping the car just behind the vehicle in front. City Safety is activated in situations where the driver should have started braking earlier, which is why it cannot help the driver in every situation. City Safety is designed to be activated as late as possible in order to avoid unnecessary intervention. The driver or passengers are not normally aware of City Safety - it only intervenes in a situation where a collision is immediately imminent. Location of the radar unit. City Safety can prevent a collision or reduce collision speed. City Safety is an aid to assist a driver who is at risk of colliding with a pedestrian, large animal, cyclist or a vehicle. The City Safety function can help the driver to avoid a collision when driving in queues, e.g. when changes in the traffic ahead, combined with a lapse in attention, could lead to an incident. 64 346 The function is not available in all markets. DRIVER SUPPORT WARNING • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. Related information • • Driving support systems (p. 290) Parameters and subfunctions for City Safety (p. 347) • Setting the warning distance for City Safety (p. 349) • Detection of obstacles with City Safety (p. 350) • City Safety brakes for oncoming vehicles (p. 355) • City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are prevented (p. 354) Parameters and subfunctions for City Safety • • City Safety in cross traffic (p. 352) • • Limitations of City Safety (p. 356) City Safety can avoid a collision with a vehicle, a cyclist, a pedestrian or a larger animal in front by reducing the car's speed with the auto-brake function. Limitations for City Safety in cross traffic (p. 353) Messages for City Safety (p. 359) If the speed difference is greater than the following specified speeds, the City Safety auto-brake function cannot prevent a collision but mitigates the consequences of it. Vehicles For a vehicle in front, City Safety can reduce the speed by up to 60 km/h (37 mph). cyclists For a cyclist, City Safety can reduce the speed by up to 50 km/h (30 mph). Pedestrians For a pedestrian, City Safety can reduce speed by up to 45 km/h (28 mph). Large animals In the event of a risk of a collision with a large animal, City Safety can reduce the car's speed by up to 15 km/h (9 mph). The brake function for large animals is primarily intended to reduce the force of the impact at higher speeds and is most effective at speeds above 70 km/h (43 mph) but less effective at lower speed. }} 347 DRIVER SUPPORT || Subfunctions for City Safety In cars equipped with a head up display*, the warning is shown on the windscreen by a flashing symbol. driver's attention is alerted by means of a visual, acoustic and brake pulse warning. There is no brake pulse warning at lower speeds, sudden driver braking or acceleration. The brake pulse frequency varies according to the car's speed. 2 - Brake support If the risk of collision has increased further after the collision warning then the brake support is activated. Brake support reinforces the driver’s braking action if the system considers that the braking is not sufficient to avoid a collision. Function overview. Audio-visual warning signal in the event of a collision risk Distance measurement with the camera and radar unit City Safety carries out three steps in the following order: 1. Collision warning 2. Brake support 3. Auto Brake The following text explains what happens during the three steps: 1 - Collision warning The driver is first warned of a potentially imminent collision. Symbol for collision warning on the windscreen. NOTE Strong sunlight, reflections, extreme light contrasts, the use of sunglasses, or if the driver is not looking straight ahead may make the visual warning signal in the windscreen difficult to recognise. City Safety can detect pedestrians, cyclists or vehicles that are stationary or moving in the same direction as the car and are ahead. City Safety can also detect pedestrians, cyclists or large animals that are crossing the road in front of the car. In the event of a risk of collision with a pedestrian, larger animal, cyclist or vehicle/vehicles the 348 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT 3 - Auto Brake The automatic brake function is activated last. If in this situation the driver has not yet started to take evasive action and the risk of collision is imminent then the automatic braking function is deployed - this takes place irrespective of whether or not the driver brakes. Braking then takes place with full brake force in order to reduce collision speed, or with limited brake force if it is sufficient to avoid a collision. The seatbelt tensioner can be activated in connection with the engagement of the automatic brake function. The driver can always interrupt a braking intervention by firmly depressing the accelerator pedal. NOTE When City Safety brakes, the brake lights come on. When City Safety is activated and brakes the vehicle, the driver display shows a text message to the effect that the function is/has been active. WARNING In some situations, the action of Auto-brake may begin with light braking and then progress to full brake action. When City Safety has prevented a collision with a stationary object, the car remains stationary in anticipation of positive action by the driver. If the car has been braked to avoid collision with a slower vehicle in front, its speed is reduced to match that of the vehicle in front. NOTE On cars with manual gearbox, the engine stops when the Auto-brake function has stopped the car, unless the driver has managed to depress the clutch pedal beforehand. City Safety must not be used by the driver to change his/her driving style - the driver must not rely on City Safety alone and allow it to do the braking. Related information • • • Setting the warning distance for City Safety City Safety is always activated but the driver can select the warning distance for the function. NOTE The City Safety function cannot be deactivated. It is activated automatically when the engine/electric operation is started and remains switched on until the engine/electric operation is switched off. The warning distance determines the sensitivity of the system and regulates the distance at which a visual, acoustic and brake pulse warning should be deployed. To select warning distance: 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe in the centre display's top view. 2. Under City Safety Warning, select Late, Normal or Early to set the desired warning distance. City Safety™ (p. 346) Head-up display* (p. 141) Seatbelt tensioner (p. 47) If the Early setting produces too many warnings, which could be perceived as irritating in certain situations, the Normal or Late warning distance can be selected. When warnings are perceived as being too frequent or disturbing, the warning distance can be reduced, which reduces the total number of }} * Option/accessory. 349 DRIVER SUPPORT || warnings and instead leads to City Safety giving a warning at a later stage. NOTE The warning with direction indicators for Rear Collision Warning is deactivated if the warning distance for collision warning in the City Safety function is set at the lowest level "Late". The Late warning distance should therefore only be used in exceptional cases, as in dynamic driving. WARNING • 350 No automatic system can guarantee 100% correct function in all situations. Therefore, never test City Safety by driving at people, animals or vehicles - this may cause severe damage and injury and risk lives. • City Safety warns the driver when there is a risk of a collision, but it cannot shorten the driver’s reaction time. • Even if the warning distance has been set to Early warnings could be perceived as being late in certain situations, e.g. when there are large differences in speed or if vehicles ahead suddenly brake heavily. • With the warning distance set at Early, the warnings will come more in advance. This may mean that the warnings come more frequently than at the warning distance Normal, but it is recommended since it can make City Safety more effective. The seat belt pre-tensioning and braking functions are, however, still active. Related information • • City Safety™ (p. 346) Rear Collision Warning (p. 360) Detection of obstacles with City Safety City Safety can help the driver to detect vehicles, cyclists, large animals and pedestrians. Vehicles City Safety detect most vehicles that are stationary or moving in the same direction as the driver's own car. This function can also detect oncoming vehicles and cross traffic in certain cases. In order that City Safety shall be able to detect a vehicle in the dark, the vehicle's front and rear lights must be working and clearly illuminated. Cyclists Optimal examples of what City Safety interprets as a cyclist — with clear body outline and bicycle outline. Optimal performance requires that the system function that detects a cyclist must receive the clearest possible information about the body and DRIVER SUPPORT bicycle outline, requiring the ability to identify the bicycle, head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower body plus a normal human pattern of movement. Pedestrians WARNING If large parts of the cyclist's body or bicycle are not visible to the function's camera then the system cannot detect a cyclist. City Safety is supplementary driver support, but it cannot detect all pedestrians in all situations and, for example, cannot see: For the function to be able to detect a cyclist, he/she must be an adult and riding a bicycle designed for adults. WARNING City Safety is supplementary driver support, but it cannot detect all cyclists in all situations and, for example, cannot see: • • partially obscured cyclists. cyclists if the background contrast of the cyclist is poor – warning and brake interventions may then be late or not occur at all. • cyclists wearing clothing that obscures the body outline. • bicycles loaded with large objects. The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven correctly and with a safety distance adapted to the speed. City Safety can also detect pedestrians in the dark if they are illuminated by the car's headlamps. • partially obscured pedestrians, people in clothing that hides their body contour or pedestrians shorter than 80 cm (32 in.). • pedestrians if the background contrast of the pedestrians is poor - warning and brake interventions may then be late or not occur at all. • pedestrians who are carrying larger objects. Optimal examples of what the system regards as pedestrians with clear body outlines. For optimal performance, the system function that detects pedestrians must receive the clearest possible information about the body outline, requiring the ability to identify the head, arms, shoulders, legs, upper and lower body plus a normal human pattern of movement. The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven correctly and with a safety distance adapted to the speed. In order that it shall be possible to detect a pedestrian there must be a contrast with the background and this will be affected by such things as clothes, the background and the weather. With poor contrast the pedestrian may either be detected late or not at all, which may mean that warnings and braking are late or omitted. }} 351 DRIVER SUPPORT || Large animals City Safety can also detect large animals in the dark if they are illuminated by the car's headlamps. WARNING City Safety in cross traffic City Safety can help the driver when turning and crossing the path of another oncoming vehicle at an intersection. City Safety is supplementary driver support, but it cannot detect all large animals in all situations and, for example, cannot see: Optimum examples of what City Safety interprets as large animals - standing still or walking slowly and with clear body outline. If a large animal appears in front of your car, Large Animal Detection, which is part of City Safety, can warn you of the animal in certain situations and provide braking assistance. Optimal performance requires that the system function that detects a large animal (e.g. elk and horse) must receive the clearest possible information about the body outline, requiring the ability to identify the animal directly from the side in combination with what is a normal pattern of movement for the animal. If parts of the animal's body are not visible to the function's camera then the system cannot detect the animal. 352 • • partially obscured large animals. • • large animals that run or move quickly. • small animals such as dogs and cats, for example. larger animals seen from the front or from behind. large animals if the background contrast of the animals is poor - warning and brake interventions may then be late or not occur at all. The driver is always responsible that the vehicle is driven correctly and with a safety distance adapted to the speed. Related information • • • City Safety™ (p. 346) Limitations of City Safety (p. 356) Limitations for City Safety in cross traffic (p. 353) Sector in which City Safety can detect oncoming crossing vehicles. For City Safety to detect an oncoming vehicle on a collision course, the oncoming vehicle must first enter the sector in which City Safety can analyse the situation. DRIVER SUPPORT The following further criteria must also be fulfilled: • your car must be travelling at no less than 4 km/h (3 mph) • your car must turn to the left in markets with right-hand traffic (or to the right in left-hand traffic) • the oncoming vehicle must have its headlamps switched on. WARNING • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. WARNING Driver supports only warn of obstacles which their radar unit has detected – hence a warning may not be given, or it may be given with a certain delay. • Never wait for a warning or intervention. Apply the brakes when the situation requires. Related information • • City Safety™ (p. 346) Limitations for City Safety in cross traffic (p. 353) Limitations for City Safety in cross traffic In some cases City Safety may have difficulty helping the driver deal with collision risks due to oncoming cross traffic. Examples are: • stability control ESC intervenes in the event of slippery driving conditions • • if the oncoming vehicle is detected too late • if the oncoming vehicle has headlamps switched off • if the oncoming vehicle drives in an unpredictable manner, for example, abruptly changes lanes at a late stage. if the oncoming vehicle is obscured by something }} 353 DRIVER SUPPORT || NOTE This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations. Related information • • • City Safety in cross traffic (p. 352) Limitations of City Safety (p. 356) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) City Safety when evasive manoeuvres are prevented has the opportunity to avoid a collision via a steering manoeuvre. City Safety has the facility to assist the driver by automatically braking the car earlier when it is not possible to avoid a collision by only steering away. However, if City Safety anticipates that an evasive manoeuvre is not possible due to traffic in an adjacent lane, the function can assist the driver by automatically starting to brake at an earlier stage. City Safety assists the driver by continuously attempting to anticipate whether there are "escape routes" to the side in case a slow or stationary vehicle ahead is discovered at a late stage. Your car (1) "sees" no options for evading the vehicle ahead (2) and can therefore auto-brake earlier. Your car Slow/stationary vehicle City Safety does not intervene with the autobrake function as long as the driver him/herself 354 WARNING • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. DRIVER SUPPORT NOTE This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations. Related information • • • City Safety™ (p. 346) Limitations of City Safety (p. 356) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) City Safety brakes for oncoming vehicles • your car's lane must have clear lane markings City Safety can assist the driver to use emergency braking for an oncoming vehicle in your car's lane. • your car must be positioned straight in its own lane • the oncoming vehicle must be within your car's lane markings • the oncoming vehicle must have its headlamps switched on • this function can only handle "front to front" collisions • this function can only detect vehicles with four wheels. If an oncoming vehicle enters your car's lane and a collision is unavoidable, City Safety can reduce the car's speed with a view to reducing the violence of the impact. NOTE This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations. WARNING Your car Oncoming vehicles For this function to work, the following criteria must be met: • your car must be travelling at more than 4 km/h (3 mph) • the road section must be straight Driver supports only warn of obstacles which their radar unit has detected – hence a warning may not be given, or it may be given with a certain delay. • Never wait for a warning or intervention. Apply the brakes when the situation requires. }} 355 DRIVER SUPPORT || • • • WARNING Limitations of City Safety The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. The City Safety65 function may have limitations in certain situations. The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. Related information • • • 65 66 67 356 City Safety™ (p. 346) Limitations of City Safety (p. 356) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) The function is not available in all markets. Electronic Stability Control An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Surroundings Low objects Low-hanging objects, e.g. a flag/pennant for projecting load, or accessories such as auxiliary lamps and bull bars that are higher than the bonnet limit the function. Skidding On slippery road surfaces the braking distance is extended, which may reduce the capacity of City Safety to avoid a collision. In such situations, the anti-lock brakes and the stability control ESC66 will give the best possible braking force with maintained stability. Oncoming light The visual warning signal in the windscreen may be difficult to notice in the event of strong sunlight, reflections, when sunglasses are being worn or if the driver is not looking straight ahead. Heat In the event of high passenger compartment temperature caused by e.g. strong sunlight, the visual warning signal in the windscreen may be temporarily disengaged. The camera and radar unit's field of view The camera's field of vision is limited, which is why pedestrians, large animals, cyclists and vehicles in some situations cannot be detected, or they are detected later than anticipated. Dirty vehicles may be detected later than others and if it is dark, motorcycles may be detected late or not at all. If a text message in the driver display indicates that the camera and radar unit is obstructed, City Safety may be unable to detect pedestrians, large animals, cyclists, vehicles or road lines ahead of the car. This means that the functionality of City Safety may be reduced. However, an error message is not shown in all situations where the windscreen sensors are obstructed. The driver must therefore take care to keep the area of windscreen in front of the camera and radar unit clear. IMPORTANT Maintenance of driver support components may only be performed at a workshop67. DRIVER SUPPORT Driver intervention Miscellaneous Reversing When your own car is reversing, City Safety is temporarily deactivated. • Low speed City Safety is not activated at very low speeds below 4 km/h (3 mph) - and the system therefore does not intervene in situations where your car is approaching a vehicle ahead very slowly, e.g. when parking. Warnings and brake interventions could be implemented late or not at all if a traffic situation or external influences mean that the camera and radar unit cannot detect pedestrians, cyclists, large animals or vehicles correctly. • For vehicles to be detected at night, their headlamps and rear lamp cluster must be switched on and shining clearly. • The camera and radar unit has a limited range for pedestrians and cyclists. The system can provide effective warnings and brake interventions as long as the relative speed is below 50 km/h (30 mph). For stationary or slow-moving vehicles, warnings and brake interventions are effective at vehicle speeds up to 70 km/h (43 mph). Speed reduction for large animals is less than 15 km/h (9 mph) and can be achieved at vehicle speeds above 70 km/h (43 mph). The warning and brake intervention for large animals is less effective at lower speeds. Active driver Driver commands are always prioritised, which is why City Safety does not intervene or postpone warning/intervention in situations where the driver is steering and accelerating in a decisive manner, even if a collision is unavoidable. • Warnings and brake interventions for pedestrians and cyclists are deactivated at vehicle speeds exceeding 80 km/h (50 mph). • Do not place, stick or mount anything on the outside or inside of the windscreen in front of or around the camera and radar unit — this can interfere with cameradependent functions. • Objects, snow, ice or dirt in the area of the camera sensor may reduce its functionality, fully deactivate it or give incorrect function response. WARNING Active and aware driving behaviour can therefore delay a collision warning and intervention in order to minimise unnecessary warnings. • Warnings for stationary or slow-moving vehicles and large animals could be disengaged due to darkness or poor visibility. NOTE This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations. Market limitation City Safety is not available in all countries. If City Safety does not appear in the centre display's Settings menu, the car is not equipped with this function. Search path in the top view of the centre display: • Settings My Car IntelliSafe }} 357 DRIVER SUPPORT || Related information • • • 358 City Safety™ (p. 346) Limitations for City Safety in cross traffic (p. 353) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) DRIVER SUPPORT Messages for City Safety A number of messages regarding City Safety can be shown in the driver display. The following table shows some examples. Message Specification City Safety When City Safety brakes or has done an automatic braking, several of the driver display symbols may be illuminated in connection with a text message being shown. Automatic intervention City Safety Reduced functionality Service required The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • City Safety™ (p. 346) 359 DRIVER SUPPORT Rear Collision Warning68 Warning69 The Rear Collision (RCW) function can help the driver to avoid being hit by a vehicle approaching from behind. This function is activated automatically each time the engine is started. Drivers in vehicles behind can be warned about an imminent collision by the function flashing intensively with the direction indicators. If, at a speed below 30 km/h (20 mph), the function detects that the car is in danger of being hit from behind, the seatbelt tensioners may tension the front seatbelts and activate the Whiplash Protection System safety system. Immediately before a collision from behind, this function may also activate the foot brake in order to reduce the forward acceleration of the car during the collision. However, the foot brake is only activated if the car is stationary. The foot brake releases immediately if the accelerator pedal is depressed. Related information • • • 68 69 70 360 Driving support systems (p. 290) Limitations of Rear Collision Warning (p. 360) Whiplash Protection System (p. 43) RCW: Rear collision warning. The function is not available in all markets. RCW: Rear collision warning. Limitations of Rear Collision Warning70 NOTE The warning with direction indicators for Rear Collision Warning is deactivated if the warning distance for collision warning in the City Safety function is set at the lowest level "Late". In certain cases the Rear Collision Warning (RCW) may have difficulty helping the driver in the event of a collision risk. This can, for example, be if: • the vehicle approaching from behind is detected too late • the vehicle approaching from behind changes lane at the last moment • a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is connected to the car's electrical system - the function is then deactivated automatically. NOTE In certain markets, RCW does not give a warning with the direction indicators due to local traffic regulations - in such cases, this part of the function is deactivated. The seat belt pre-tensioning and braking functions are, however, still active. Related information • Rear Collision Warning (p. 360) DRIVER SUPPORT BLIS* from a constant glow to flashing with a more intense light. BLIS71 The function is intended to help the driver detect vehicles diagonally behind and to the side of the car so as to provide assistance in heavy traffic on roads with several lanes in the same direction. NOTE The lamp illuminates on the side of the car where the system has detected the vehicle. If the car is overtaken on both sides at the same time then both lamps illuminate. BLIS is a driver aid intended to give a warning of: • • vehicles in the car's blind spot quickly approaching vehicles in the left and right lanes closest to the car. Principle of BLIS Zone in blind spot Zone for quickly approaching vehicle. The BLIS function is active at speeds above 10 km/h (6 mph). The system is designed to react when: • • Location of BLIS lamp72. Indicator lamp The function is activated/deactivated using the BLIS button in the centre display's function view. 71 72 your car is overtaken by other vehicles another vehicle is quickly approaching your car. When BLIS detects a vehicle in Zone 1 or a quickly approaching vehicle in Zone 2, the indicator lamp on the door mirror on the affected side illuminates with a constant glow. If the driver activates the direction indicator on the same side as the warning, the indicator lamp will change over Blind Spot Information Systems NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. }} * Option/accessory. 361 DRIVER SUPPORT WARNING Activating or deactivating BLIS Related information • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. The BLIS73 function can be activated or deactivated. • • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. || NOTE This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations. Related information • • • • 362 Driving support systems (p. 290) Activating or deactivating BLIS (p. 362) Limitations of BLIS (p. 363) Messages for BLIS (p. 364) BLIS* (p. 361) Location of BLIS lamp. Indicator lamp • • Activate or deactivate the function using this button in the centre display's function view. GREEN button indication – the function is activated. GREY button indication – the function is deactivated. If BLIS is activated when starting the engine, the function is confirmed by the door mirror indicator lamps blinking once. If BLIS was deactivated when the engine was switched off, it will continue to be deactivated when the engine is next started and no indicator lights will then be illuminated. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Limitations of BLIS WARNING The BLIS74 function may have limitations in certain situations. • • BLIS does not work on sharp bends. BLIS does not work when the car is reversing. NOTE This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations. Related information • • BLIS* (p. 361) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) Keep the surface indicated clean – on both the left and right-hand sides of the car75. Examples of limitations: • Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may reduce the functions and deactivate alerts. • The BLIS function is automatically deactivated if a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is connected to the car's electrical system. • For optimal performance of BLIS, no bicycle rack, luggage carrier or similar should be mounted on the car's towbar. 73 74 75 Blind Spot Information Systems Blind Spot Information Systems NOTE: The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on car model. * Option/accessory. 363 DRIVER SUPPORT Messages for BLIS A number of messages regarding BLIS76 can be shown in the driver display. The following table shows some examples. Message Specification Blind spot sensor The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Service required Blind spot system off BLIS and CTA A have been deactivated as a trailer has been connected to the car's electrical system. Trailer attached A Cross Trafic Alert* A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • • 76 364 BLIS* (p. 361) Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 365) Blind Spot Information System * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Cross Traffic Alert77* Cross Traffic Alert (CTA) is a driver support that supplements BLIS78 and is designed to help the driver detect traffic crossing behind the car when it is reversing. If CTA senses that something is approaching from the side, this is also indicated with: • an acoustic signal - the sound is heard in the left-hand or right-hand speaker according to the direction from which the object approaches. • an illuminated icon in the Park Assist System graphic on the screen. • an icon on the Park assist camera top view. WARNING Principle of CTA CTA supplements BLIS by detecting the approach of crossing traffic during reversing, such as when reversing out of a parking space. CTA is primarily designed to detect vehicles. In favourable conditions it may also be able to detect smaller objects, such as cyclists and pedestrians. CTA is only active if the car rolls backwards or if reverse gear has been selected. 77 78 Cross traffic alert when the car is reversing. Blind Spot Information Illuminated icon for CTA in the Park Assist System graphic on the screen. • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. Related information • • • • Driving support systems (p. 290) Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert (p. 366) Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert (p. 366) Messages for Cross Traffic Alert (p. 368) }} * Option/accessory. 365 DRIVER SUPPORT • • BLIS* (p. 361) Park Assist* (p. 392) Activate/deactivate Cross Traffic Alert79 The driver can choose to switch off the CTA80 function. Activate or deactivate the function using this button in the centre display's function view. • GREEN button indication – the function is activated. • GREY button indication – the function is deactivated. Limitations of Cross Traffic Alert81 The CTA82 function may have limitations in certain situations. CTA does not perform optimally in all situations but has some limitations. For example, the CTA sensors cannot "see" through other parked vehicles or obstructing obstacles. Here are some examples of situations where CTA’s "field of vision" may be already limited and approaching vehicles cannot therefore be detected until they are very close: The function is activated automatically each time the engine is started. Related information • Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 365) The car is parked deep inside a parking slot. 79 80 81 82 366 Cross traffic alert when the car is reversing. Cross Traffic Alert Cross traffic alert when the car is reversing. Cross Traffic Alert * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT NOTE This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations. Related information • • Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 365) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) In an angled parking slot CTA may be completely “blind” on one side. Blind CTA sector. Sector in which CTA can detect/“see”. However, as your car slowly reverses, the angle it makes with the obstructing vehicle/object changes and the blind sector rapidly decreases. Examples of further limitations • Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors may reduce the functions and deactivate alerts. • CTA is automatically deactivated if a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is connected to the car's electrical system. • For optimal performance of CTA, no bicycle rack, luggage carrier or similar should be mounted on the car's towbar. * Option/accessory. 367 DRIVER SUPPORT Messages for Cross Traffic Alert83 A number of messages regarding CTA84 can be shown in the driver display. The following table shows examples. Message Specification Blind spot sensor The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Service required Blind spot system off BLISA and CTA have been deactivated as a trailer has been connected to the car's electrical system. Trailer attached A Blind Spot Information System A text message can be cleared by briefly pressbutton, located in the centre of the ing the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • • 83 84 368 Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 365) BLIS* (p. 361) Cross traffic alert when the car is reversing. Cross Traffic Alert * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Road Sign Information* WARNING The Road Sign Information function (RSI85) can help the driver to observe speed-related road signs and certain prohibition signs. Example86 of detected speed information. If the car passes a speed limit sign, it will be shown on the driver's display and the head-up display*. Examples of readable signs86. RSI can provide information about such things as current speed, when a motorway or road is starting/ending, when overtaking is prohibited or when the direction of travel is one-way. NOTE In certain markets, the Road Sign Information function* is only available in combination with Sensus Navigation*. Road Sign Information Road signs are market-dependent - illustrations in these instructions only show a few examples. The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. Related information • • 85 86 • Driving support systems (p. 290) Activating/deactivating Road Sign Information* (p. 370) • Road Sign Information and sign display* (p. 371) • Road Sign Information and Sensus Navigation* (p. 373) }} * Option/accessory. 369 DRIVER SUPPORT • Road Sign Information with speed warning and settings* (p. 373) Activating/deactivating Road Sign Information* • Road Sign Information with Speed Camera Information* (p. 375) • Limitations of Road Sign Information* (p. 375) The Road Sign Information function (RSI87) is optional – the driver can choose to activate or deactivate this function. NOTE Activate or deactivate the function using this button in the centre display's function view. • GREEN button indication – the function is activated. • GREY button indication – the function is deactivated. • If the automatic speed limiter function is activated, road sign information is shown in the driver display even if the Road Sign Information function is not activated. • To remove road sign information from the driver display, you must deactivate both the automatic speed limiter and Road Sign Information. • When the automatic speed limiter function is activated but Road Sign Information is deactivated, no warnings are given from Road Sign Information. Road Sign Information must also be activated in order to receive warnings. Related information • • 87 370 Road Sign Information* (p. 369) Automatic speed limiter (p. 300) RSI: Road Sign Information. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Road Sign Information and sign display* The Road Sign Information function (RSI88) shows road signs in different ways depending on the sign and the situation. An additional89 sign, such as "no overtaking", may be shown together with the speed limit symbol. If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation*, direct speed limit signs are normally displayed – indirect speed limit signs are only displayed if map data has no information on the speed limit for the road section in question. Example of indirect speed limit sign89: If the driver enters a road marked with a no-entry sign at the roadside, the symbol for this sign89 flashes on and off on the driver display as a warning. If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation*, information from map data is used to determine whether the car is being driven in the wrong direction. Example89 of detected speed information. When the function detects a road sign with an imposed speed limit, the driver display shows the sign as a symbol combined with a coloured indication on the speedometer. If the car is fitted with Sensus Navigation*, speed-related information is also obtained from map data, which means that the driver display can show or change information on the speed limit without having passed a speed-related sign. 88 89 The driver can also get an acoustic warning when driving towards a road marked with a no-entry sign if the Road Sign Audio Warning function is activated. Speed limit or end of motorway When the function detects an "indirect speed limit sign" stating the end of the current speed limit – e.g. at the end of a motorway – a symbol appears with the corresponding road sign in the driver's display. Road Sign Information Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples. End of all restrictions. End of motorway. The driver display symbol extinguishes after 10-30 seconds and remains so until the next speed related sign is passed. Changed speed limit When passing a direct speed limit sign when a speed limit changes, a symbol with the corresponding road sign appears in the driver's display. }} * Option/accessory. 371 DRIVER SUPPORT Example of direct speed limit sign89. || Additional signs The driver display symbol extinguishes after about 5 minutes until the next speed-related sign is passed. If the car is fitted with Sensus Navigation*, speed limit signs are shown in the driver display when map data contains information on the speed limit for the road section in question, even if no direct sign has been passed. If there is no information in map data, the sign goes off after approx. 3 minutes after the last passing of a speed limit sign. Some speed limits only apply after a certain distance or at a certain time of day. The driver's attention is drawn to this fact by means of a symbol for an additional sign below the speed symbol. The additional symbol in the driver display will show either “DIST” or “TIME”. A symbol for additional sign in the form of an empty frame under the driver display's speed symbol89 means that the function has detected an additional sign with supplementary information for the current speed Examples of additional signs89. Sometimes different speed limits are signed for the same road - an additional sign then indicates the circumstances under which the different speeds apply. The road section may be particularly susceptible to accidents in rain and/or fog, for example. limit. Sign for "School" and "Children at play" If a warning sign89 for "School" or "Children at play" is included in the satellite navigator's map data90, the driver display shows a sign of this type. An additional sign relating to rain is displayed only if the windscreen wipers are in use. If a trailer is connected to the car's electrical system and you pass a speed sign with the additional sign "trailer", the indicated speed will appear on the driver display. Related information • 89 90 372 Road Sign Information* (p. 369) Road signs are market-dependent - the illustrations in these instructions only show examples. Only in cars with Sensus Navigation*. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Road Sign Information and Sensus Navigation* Road Sign Information with speed warning and settings* If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation*, speed information is read from the navigation unit in the following cases: The subfunction Speed Limit Warning for Road Sign Information (RSI91) is optional – the driver can choose to activate or deactivate this subfunction. • On detection of signs that indirectly indicate a speed limit, such as motorway, dual carriageway and city limit signs. • If a previously detected speed sign is assumed not to apply any longer, but no new sign has been detected. NOTE In certain markets, the Road Sign Information function* is only available in combination with Sensus Navigation*. Speed Limit Warning warns the driver when the applicable speed limit or a preselected "top speed" is exceeded – this warning is repeated once after approx. 1 minute within the same speed limit area unless the driver reduces the speed. A new warning for exceeding the speed limit, including a reminder, will be given only when the car reaches a new/different speed limit area. NOTE If a downloaded third-party app is used for navigation then there is no support for speedrelated information. Related information • 91 92 Road Sign Information* (p. 369) Road Sign Information Road signs are customised for each market – the one shown here is just an example. The speed warning is given by the driver display symbol92 showing the applicable maximum permitted speed temporarily flashing when this speed is exceeded. Settings Adjust the limit for Speed Warning The driver can select to receive a warning at a higher speed than the signed speed. Select limit for speed warning as follows: 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe Road Sign Information in the centre display's top view. 2. Select Speed Limit Warning. > The function is activated and a speed limit selector appears. 3. Adjust the limit for Speed Warning by pressing the up/down arrows on the screen. Note that the function does not give any consideration to selected limit adjustment when the driver display shows the speed camera symbol. A speed warning is always given if the speed limit is exceeded in connection with speed camera information. }} * Option/accessory. 373 DRIVER SUPPORT || Audible warning activated/deactivated It is also possible to receive an audible warning in connection with Speed Warning. Change setting for acoustic warning as follows: 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe Road Sign Information in the centre display's top view. 2. Select/deselect Road Sign Audio Warning to activate/switch off the acoustic warning. With the Road Sign Audio Warning function activated, the driver is also warned when driving towards one-way traffic/no-entry entrance. Speed camera warning activated/ deactivated If the car is fitted with Sensus Navigation* and map data contains information on speed cameras, the driver can opt to receive an audible warning when approaching a speed camera. Related information • • Road Sign Information* (p. 369) Activating/deactivating Speed warning in Road Sign Information (p. 374) Activating/deactivating Speed warning in Road Sign Information The subfunction Speed Limit Warning is activated as follows: 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe Road Sign Information in the centre display's top view. 2. Select Speed Limit Warning. > The function is activated and a speed limit selector appears. Related information • • Road Sign Information* (p. 369) Road Sign Information with speed warning and settings* (p. 373) Change setting for acoustic warning as follows: 374 1. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe Road Sign Information in the centre display's top view. 2. Select/deselect Speed Camera Audio Warning to activate/switch off the audible speed camera warning. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Road Sign Information with Speed Camera Information* NOTE • A car equipped with Road Sign Information (RSI93) and Sensus Navigation* can provide information on an upcoming speed camera in the driver display. • • Speed camera information in the driver display. If the car exceeds a detected speed limit with the Speed Limit Warning function activated, a speed warning is given when the car approaches a speed camera, provided that the navigation map for the area in question contains information on speed cameras. 93 94 Road Sign Information Road Sign Information To get an acoustic warning if you exceed the required speed, the Speed Limit Warning function must be activated and the Road Sign Audio Warning subfunction must be set to On. An acoustic warning is then given if the car's speed exceeds the speed indicated by the RSI function in the driver display. An option is available to receive an acoustic warning for speed cameras independently of the car's speed and exceeded speed limit, and even if the Road Sign Audio Warning function is deactivated. Limitations of Road Sign Information* The Road Sign Information (RSI94) function may have limitations in certain situations. Examples of what can reduce the function are as follows: • • • • • Faded signs Signs positioned on bends Rotated or damaged signs Signs positioned high above the roadway Fully/partially obscured or poorly positioned signs Information about speed cameras on the navigation map is not available for all markets/areas. Related information • Road Sign Information* (p. 369) }} * Option/accessory. 375 DRIVER SUPPORT || • • signs completely or partly covered with frost, snow and/or dirt digital road maps95 are out-of-date, inaccurate or have no speed information96. NOTE The RSI function may interpret some types of bicycle rack, connected to the electrical socket for trailers, as a connected trailer. In such cases, the driver display may show incorrect speed information. NOTE Driver Alert Control The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function is intended to help make the driver aware that he or she is starting to drive less consistently, e.g. if the driver becomes distracted or starts to fall asleep. the road with the driver’s steering wheel movements. The objective for DAC is to detect slowly deteriorating driving ability and it is primarily intended for major roads. The function is not intended for city traffic. The function is activated when speed exceeds 65 km/h (40 mph) and remains active as long as the speed is over 60 km/h (37 mph). The car is being driven erratically in the lane. This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations. If driving behaviour becomes noticeably inconsistent, the driver is alerted by this symbol in the driver display, combined with an acoustic signal and the text message Time to take a Related information • • Road Sign Information* (p. 369) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) break. DAC reads the position of the car in the lane. If the car is equipped with Sensus Navigation* and has the function Rest Stop Guidance activated, suggestions for an appropriate place for a break are also displayed. A camera detects the edge markings painted on the carriageway and compares the alignment of 95 96 376 In cars equipped with Sensus Navigation*. Map data with speed information does not exist for all areas. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT The warning is repeated after a time if driving behaviour has not improved. WARNING An alarm from Driver Alert Control should be taken very seriously, as a sleepy driver is often not aware of his/her own condition. WARNING Driver Alert Control should not be used to extend a period of driving. The driver should instead plan for breaks at regular intervals and make sure they are well rested. If the alarm sounds or you feel fatigued: • Studies have shown that it is just as dangerous to drive while tired as it is to drive under the influence of alcohol or other stimulants. WARNING • • • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. Stop the car safely as soon as possible and rest. Related information • • Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function can be activated/deactivated. On/Off To change settings in DAC: 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Select My Car Control. 3. Select/deselect Alertness Warning to activate/deactivate DAC. Driving support systems (p. 290) Activate/deactivate Driver Alert Control (p. 377) • Select rest stop guidance in the event of a warning from Driver Alert Control (p. 378) • Limitations of Driver Alert Control (p. 378) IntelliSafe Driver Alert Related information • • Driver Alert Control (p. 376) Limitations of Driver Alert Control (p. 378) Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. 377 DRIVER SUPPORT Select rest stop guidance in the event of a warning from Driver Alert Control It is possible to select whether the Rest Stop Guidance function should be activated/deactivated. In cars equipped with Sensus Navigation*, the driver can activate a guide that can automatically suggest an appropriate rest area when DAC issues a warning. Limitations of Driver Alert Control Lane assistance The Driver Alert Control (DAC) function may have limitations in certain situations. The function of the Lane Keeping Aid (LKA97) is to help the driver to reduce the risk of the car accidentally leaving its own lane on motorways and similar major routes. In some cases the system may issue a warning despite driving ability not deteriorating, for example: • • Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Select My Car Control. 3. Select/deselect Rest Stop Guidance to activate/deactivate the function. IntelliSafe In some cases, driving behaviour is not affected despite driver fatigue – e.g. when using the Pilot Assist function – resulting in the driver not getting a warning from DAC. Driver Alert It is therefore important to always stop and take a break at the slightest feeling of fatigue, whether the DAC function ha given a warning or not. Related information • on rutted road surfaces. WARNING To select Rest Stop Guidance: 1. in strong side winds Lane Keeping Aid steers the car back into its lane and/or alerts the driver with vibrations in the steering wheel. Lane Keeping Aid is active within the speed range 65–200 km/h (40–125 mph) on roads with clearly visible side lines. On narrow roads the function may be unavailable, in which case it goes into standby mode. The function becomes available again when the road is wide enough. NOTE Driver Alert Control (p. 376) This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations. Related information • • 97 378 Driver Alert Control (p. 376) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) A camera reads the side lines of the road/lane. Lane Keeping Aid * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT the car back into its lane by applying a slight torque to the steering wheel. Lane assistance does not intervene • Warning activated: If the car is about to cross a lane line, the driver is warned by means of vibrations in the steering wheel. NOTE When a direction indicator/flasher is switched on, there are no steering corrections or alerts from lane assistance. Lane assistance steers the car back into its lane. WARNING • • • Lane assistance warns with steering wheel vibrations. Depending on settings, lane assistance acts in accordance with the following: • Assist activated: When the car is approaching a lane line, the function will actively steer The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. Lane assistance does not engage on sharp inside curves. In some situations, lane assistance allows lane lines to be crossed without intervening with either steering assistance or a warning – e.g. when using the direction indicators or cutting bends. Related information • • Driving support systems (p. 290) Steering assistance with lane assistance (p. 380) • Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid (p. 380) • • Limitations of Lane assistance (p. 381) Symbols and messages for lane assistance (p. 382) 379 DRIVER SUPPORT Steering assistance with lane assistance Activate/deactivate Lane Keeping Aid Select assistance option for lane assistance For steering assistance with Lane Keeping Aid (LKA98) to work, the driver must have his/her hands on the steering wheel, which the system will continue to control. The Lane Keeping Aid (LKA) function (LKA99) is optional – the driver can choose to activate or deactivate this function. The driver can select how the Lane Keeping Aid (LKA100) should react if the car leaves its lane. If the driver does not keep his/her hands on the steering wheel, a warning signal is heard and a message encourages the driver to steer the car actively: Activate or deactivate the function using this button in the centre display's function view. GREEN button indication – the function is activated. If the driver follows the prompt to start steering, the function is set in standby mode and this message is shown: • GREY button indication – the function is deactivated. • Lane Keeping Aid Standby until steering • • Related information • Lane assistance (p. 378) 98 Lane 99 Lane 100Lane 380 Keeping Aid Keeping Aid Keeping Aid 2. In the event of Lane Keeping Aid Mode, select how the function should react: tance without a warning. • The function will then be unavailable until the driver starts to steer the car again. Select Settings My Car IntelliSafe in the centre display's top view. • Assist - the driver is given steering assis- • Lane Keeping Aid Apply steering applied 1. Related information Lane assistance (p. 378) Select assistance option for lane assistance (p. 380) • Both – the driver is given a warning both from the steering wheel vibrating and from steering assistance. • Warning – the driver is only warned by steering wheel vibration. Related information • Lane assistance (p. 378) DRIVER SUPPORT Limitations of Lane assistance Related information In certain demanding conditions lane assistance (LKA101) may have difficulty helping the driver correctly. In such cases it is recommended to switch off this function. • • • Lane assistance (p. 378) Speed-dependent steering force (p. 290) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) Examples of such conditions are: • • • • • • road works winter road conditions poor road surface a very “sporty” driving style poor weather with reduced visibility roads with unclear or non-existent side markings • sharp edges or lines other than the lane's side markings • as the steering servo for speed-dependent steering wheel resistance is working at reduced power – e.g. when cooling due to overheating. The function is unable to detect barriers, rails or similar obstacles at the side of the carriageway. NOTE This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations. 101Lane Keeping Aid 381 DRIVER SUPPORT Symbols and messages for lane assistance A number of symbols and messages regarding lane assistance (LKA102) can be shown on the driver display. The following table shows some examples. Symbol Message Specification Driver support system The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Reduced functionality Service required Windscreen sensor The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced. Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual Lane Keeping Aid Apply steering Lane Keeping Aid Standby until steering applied 102Lane 382 Keeping Aid The LKA steering assistance does not function if the driver does not have his/her hands on the steering wheel. Follow the instruction and steer the car. LKA is set in standby mode until the driver starts to steer the car again. DRIVER SUPPORT A text message can be cleared by briefly pressbutton, located in the centre of the ing the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • • Lane assistance (p. 378) Lane assistance symbols in the driver display (p. 384) 383 DRIVER SUPPORT Lane assistance symbols in the driver display Unavailable • Lane assistance (LKA103) is visualised by symbols in the driver display depending on the situation. Here are some examples of symbols and the situations in which they are shown: Unavailable — the lane lines in the symbol are GREY. Available The Lane assistance cannot detect the lane lines, the speed is too low or the road is too narrow. Indication of steering assistance/warning Available — the lane lines in the symbol are WHITE. Lane assistance is scanning one or both lane lines. Steering assistance/warning - the lane lines in the symbol are COLOURED. Lane assistance indicates that the system is giving a warning and/or attempting to steer the car back into the lane. 103Lane 384 Keeping Aid Related information Lane assistance (p. 378) DRIVER SUPPORT Steering assistance at risk of collision WARNING • The function Collision avoidance assistance can help the driver reduce the risk of the car leaving its lane unintentionally and/or colliding with another vehicle or obstacle by actively steering the car back into its lane and/or swerving. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. The function consists of these subfunctions: • • Steering assistance upon risk of run-off • Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end collision* Steering assistance upon risk of head-on collision After automatic engagement, the driver display indicates that this has occurred via a text message: • Collision avoidance assistance The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • Steering assistance level in the event of a run-off risk (p. 386) • Limitations for steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 390) • Symbols and messages for steering assistance upon risk of collision (p. 391) Automatic intervention NOTE It is always the driver who decides how much the car should steer – the car can never take command. Related information • • Driving support systems (p. 290) Activating/deactivating Steering assistance in the event of a collision risk (p. 386) * Option/accessory. 385 DRIVER SUPPORT Activating/deactivating Steering assistance in the event of a collision risk NOTE When the Collision avoidance assistance function is deactivated, all subfunctions are switched off: The steering assistance function is optional – the driver can choose to activate or deactivate it. • GREEN button indication – the function is activated. • GREY button indication – the function is deactivated. This function is activated automatically each time the engine is started104. The function has two activation levels on intervention: Steering assistance only Steering assistance at risk of road departure • • • Steering assistance at risk of oncoming collision Steering assistance only • Steering assistance at risk of rear-end collision* • Activate or deactivate the function using this button in the centre display's function view. Steering assistance level in the event of a run-off risk Steering assistance with brake intervention Even though it is possible to deactivate the function, it is advisable for the driver to always have it activated since it improves driving safety in most cases. Related information • Steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 385) Intervention with steering assistance. 104In 386 certain markets, the setting used when the engine is switched off is reactivated. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Steering assistance with brake intervention Steering assistance upon risk of run-off WARNING Steering assistance has a number of subfunctions. Steering assistance in the event of run-off risk can help the driver and reduce the risk of the car accidentally leaving the road by actively steering the car back onto the road. • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. The function is active within the speed range 65-140 km/h (40-87 mph) on roads with clearly visible lane markings/lines. Intervention with steering assistance and braking. Brake intervention helps in situations where steering assistance alone is not sufficient. The brake force is adapted automatically depending on the situation at the time of road run-off. Related information • Steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 385) A camera scans the edges of the road and the painted side markings. If the car is about to leave the side of the road, the car is steered back onto the road and if the steering intervention is not enough to avoid run-off, the brakes are also activated. However, the function does not intervene with either steering assistance or brake intervention if the direction indicators are used. And if the function detects that the driver is actively driving the car, activation of the function will be delayed. After automatic engagement, the driver display indicates that this has occurred via a text message: Related information • Steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 385) • Collision avoidance assistance Automatic intervention 387 DRIVER SUPPORT Steering assistance upon risk of head-on collision Steering assistance has a number of subfunctions. Steering assistance upon risk of head-on collision can help a distracted driver who does not notice that the car is heading into the opposite lane. If the car is about to leave its own lane while an oncoming vehicle is approaching at the same time, the function can help the driver to steer the car back into its own lane. WARNING However, the function does not intervene with steering assistance if the direction indicator is used. And if the function detects that the driver is actively driving the car, activation of the function will be delayed. After automatic engagement, the driver display indicates that this has occurred via a text message: • Collision avoidance assistance Automatic intervention The function can assist by guiding the car back to its own lane. Oncoming vehicles The function is active within the speed range 60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with clearly visible lane markings/lines. 388 The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. Related information • Steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 385) • Warning from driver support in the event of a collision risk (p. 328) Your car At the same time as steering intervention is activated, collision warning for driver support is also activated. However, the brake pulse included in the collision warning will not be activated. • DRIVER SUPPORT Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end collision* at the same time, the function can help the driver to steer the car back into its own lane. Steering assistance has a number of subfunctions. Steering assistance if there is a risk of rear-end collision can help a distracted driver who does not notice that the car is about to leave its own lane while an oncoming vehicle is approaching at the same time, either from behind or in the blind spot. The function can even assist if the driver intentionally changes lanes using direction indicators without noticing that another vehicle is approaching. WARNING The function is active within the speed range 60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) on roads with clearly visible lane markings/lines. The lamps in the door mirrors flash during steering intervention, regardless of whether the BLIS105 function is activated. After automatic engagement, the driver display indicates that this has occurred via a text message: • Collision avoidance assistance Automatic intervention The function can assist by steering the car back to its own lane. Other vehicle in the blind spot Your car • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. Related information • Steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 385) • BLIS* (p. 361) If the car is about to leave its own lane while another vehicle is in the blind spot, or another vehicle is approaching rapidly in an adjacent lane 105Blind Spot Information System * Option/accessory. 389 DRIVER SUPPORT Limitations for steering assistance at risk of collision In certain situations the function may have limited functionality and fail to intervene in the following cases, for example: • • for small vehicles, such as motorcycles NOTE This function uses the car's camera and radar units, which have certain general limitations. Related information • if the majority of the car has steered into the adjacent lane Steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 385) • • on roads/in lanes with unclear or non-existent lane markings Steering assistance upon risk of run-off (p. 387) • • outside the speed range 60-140 km/h (37-87 mph) Steering assistance upon risk of head-on collision (p. 388) • • as the steering servo for speed-dependent steering wheel resistance is working at reduced power – e.g. when cooling due to overheating. Steering assistance upon risk of rear-end collision* (p. 389) Other demanding situations can include: • • • • • • road works winter road conditions narrow roads poor road surface a very “sporty” driving style poor weather with reduced visibility. In these demanding situations, the function may have difficulty helping the driver correctly. In such cases it is recommended to switch off this function. 390 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Symbols and messages for steering assistance upon risk of collision A number of symbols and messages regarding the function can be shown on the driver display. The following table shows some examples. Symbol Message Specification Collision avoidance assistance When the function is activated, a message is shown to the driver indicating that the system has been activated. Automatic intervention Windscreen sensor The ability of the camera to scan the roadway in front of the car is reduced. Sensor blocked, see Owner's manual A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • Steering assistance at risk of collision (p. 385) 391 DRIVER SUPPORT Park Assist* The Park Assist Pilot function can assist the driver when manoeuvring in tight spaces by indicating the distance to obstacles through acoustic signals combined with a graphic in the centre display. The shorter the distance to the obstacle, the faster the signal sounds. Other sound from the audio system is muted automatically. The acoustic signal for obstacles ahead and to the sides is active when the car is moving but stops after the car has been stationary for approx. 2 seconds. The acoustic signal for obstacles behind is also active when the car is stationary. At a distance within approx. 30 cm (1 ft) from an obstacle behind or in front of the car, the tone is constant and the active sensor's field closest to the car symbol is filled. Screen view showing obstacle zones and sensor sectors. The centre display shows an overview of the relationship between the car and detected obstacles. The highlighted sector indicates the location of the obstacle. The closer the car symbol is to a highlighted sector box at the front/back, the shorter the distance between the car and detected obstacle. The side sectors change colour as the distance between the car and an object is reduced. 392 WARNING • The parking sensors have blind spots where obstacles cannot be detected. • Pay particular attention if there are people and animals near the car. • Bear in mind that the front of the car may swing out towards oncoming traffic during the parking manoeuvre. WARNING • At a distance within approx. 25 cm (0.8 ft) from an obstacle To the sides, the tone pulses intensively and the active sector field changes colour from ORANGE to RED. The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The volume of the parking assistance signal can be adjusted while the signal is sounding by means of the [>II] knob on the centre console. Adjustment can also be performed in the top view's Settings menu option. The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. NOTE • Except in the sector nearest to the car symbol, audible warnings are only given for objects directly in the path of the car. * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Related information • • Driving support systems (p. 290) Park Assist Pilot front, rear and along the sides* (p. 393) • Activating/deactivating Park Assist Pilot* (p. 394) • Symbols and messages for Park Assist Pilot (p. 396) • Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) Park Assist Pilot front, rear and along the sides* Park Assist Pilot has different behaviour depending on which part of the car is approaching an obstacle. Forwards NOTE Parking assistance is deactivated when the parking brake is used or P mode is selected in a car with an automatic gearbox. IMPORTANT When auxiliary lamps are fitted: Remember that these must not obscure the sensors - the auxiliary lamps may then be perceived as an obstacle. Backwards The warning signal has a constant tone at less than approx. 30 cm (1 ft) from an obstacle. The Parking Assistance System's front detectors are activated automatically when the engine is started. They are active at speeds below 10 km/h (6 mph). The measuring range is approx. 80 cm (2.5 ft) in front of the car. The warning signal has a constant tone at less than approx. 30 cm (1 ft) from an obstacle. The sensors for reverse are activated if the car rolls backward without a gear engaged or when the gear lever is moved to reverse position. }} * Option/accessory. 393 DRIVER SUPPORT || The measuring range is approx. 1.5 metres (5 ft) behind the car. The measuring range is approx. 25 cm (0.8 ft) from the sides. Activating/deactivating Park Assist Pilot* When reversing with a trailer connected to the car's electrical system, parking assistance backward is deactivated automatically. However, the detection range of the side sensors increases significantly when the steering angle of the front wheels is increased, and obstacles of up to approx. 90 cm (3 ft) located diagonally behind or in front of the vehicle are detected when the steering wheel is turned. The Park Assist Pilot function can be activated/ deactivated. NOTE When reversing with e.g. a trailer or bike carrier on the towbar - without Volvo genuine trailer wiring - parking assistance may need to be switched off manually in order that the sensors do not react to them. The front and side parking assistance detectors are activated automatically when the engine is started. The rear detectors are activated if the car rolls backwards or when reverse gear is engaged. Related information • • Activate or deactivate the function using this button in the centre display's function view. Park Assist* (p. 392) Sensor fields from Park Assist Pilot for parking camera (p. 402) Along the sides • GREEN button indication – the function is activated. • GREY button indication – the function is deactivated. In cars equipped with a park assist camera*, Park Assist Pilot can also be activated or deactivated from the relevant camera view. Related information • Park Assist* (p. 392) The warning signal pulses intensively at less than approx. 25 cm (0.8 ft) from an obstacle. Parking assistance side sensors are activated automatically when the engine is started. They are active at speeds below 10 km/h (6 mph). 394 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Limitations of Parking assistance The Parking Assistance System cannot detect everything in all situations and may therefore have limited functionality in some cases. A driver should be aware about the following examples of Park Assist Pilot's limitations: WARNING Pay additional attention while reversing when this symbol is shown if a trailer, bicycle rack or similar is mounted and electrically connected to the car. The symbol indicates that the parking assistance sensors rearward are switched off and will not warn of any obstacles. IMPORTANT Objects e.g. chains, thin glossy poles or low barriers may be in the "signal shadow" and are then temporarily not detected by the sensors - the pulsating tone may then unexpectedly stop instead of changing over to the expected constant tone. The sensors cannot detect high objects, such as projecting loading docks. • NOTE Since a towbar is configured with the car's electrical system, towbar protrusion is included when the function measures the distance to an object behind the car. Related information • Park Assist* (p. 392) In such situations, pay extra attention and manoeuvre/reposition the car particularly slowly or stop the current parking manoeuvre - there may be a high risk of damage to vehicles or other objects since information from the sensors is not always reliable in such situations. IMPORTANT In certain conditions the parking assistance system may produce incorrect warning signals that are caused by external sound sources with the same ultrasonic frequencies that the system works with. Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes, exhaust noises from motorcycles, etc. * Option/accessory. 395 DRIVER SUPPORT Symbols and messages for Park Assist Pilot Symbols and messages for Park Assist Pilot can be shown in the driver display and/or the centre display. The following table shows some examples. Symbol Message Specification The rearward parking assistance sensors are deactivated, so there are no acoustic warnings for obstacles/objects. Park Assist System One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible. Sensors blocked, cleaning needed Park Assist System Unavailable Service required The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • 396 Park Assist* (p. 392) * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Park assist camera* Towbar* - activates/deactivates the towbar park assist line*107 The park assist camera can assist the driver when manoeuvring in tight spaces by indicating obstacles with a camera image and graphics in the centre display. CTA* - activates/deactivates Cross Traffic Alert Objects/obstacles may be closer to the car than they appear to be on screen. The parking assistance camera is a support function which is activated automatically when reverse gear is selected or manually via the centre display. WARNING • The parking sensors have blind spots where obstacles cannot be detected. • Pay particular attention if there are people and animals near the car. • Bear in mind that the front of the car may swing out towards oncoming traffic during the parking manoeuvre. Example of camera view. Zoom106 - zoom in/out 360° view* - activates/deactivates all cameras PAS* - activates/deactivates the Parking Assistance System Lines - activates/deactivates park assist lines 106The park assist lines are switched 107Not available on all markets. off when zooming in. }} * Option/accessory. 397 DRIVER SUPPORT || WARNING • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. • Symbols and messages for Park assist camera (p. 404) • Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) • • Park Assist* (p. 392) Parking camera views* The function can display a composite 360° view and separate views for each of the four cameras: rear, front, left or right camera view. Cross Traffic Alert* (p. 365) Related information • • • 398 Driving support systems (p. 290) Parking camera views* (p. 398) Park assist lines for parking camera* (p. 400) • Sensor fields from Park Assist Pilot for parking camera (p. 402) • Starting the park assist camera (p. 403) * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT If the car is also equipped with Park Assist System* then distance to detected obstacles is illustrated with fields in different colours. 360° view* Forwards The cameras can be activated automatically or manually. Backwards The forwards parking camera is located in the grille. The "field of vision" of the parking cameras with approximate coverage area. The 360° view function activates all parking cameras, whereupon the four sides of the car are shown simultaneously in the centre display, which helps the driver to observe what is around the car when manoeuvring at slow speeds. From the 360° view, each camera view can be activated separately: • Press the screen for the desired “field of vision” of the camera, e.g. on the surface in front of/above the front camera. A camera symbol on the centre display's car symbol indicates which of the cameras is active. The backwards-facing camera is fitted above the registration plate. The backward-facing camera shows a wide area behind the car. For certain models, part of the bumper can be seen as well as the towbar in some cases. The front camera can be helpful on an exit road with limited visibility to the sides, e.g. when there are high hedges. It is active at speeds up to 25 km/h (16 mph) - following which, the front camera is switched off. If the car does not reach 50 km/h (30 mph) and the speed falls below 22 km/h (14 mph) within 1 minute after the forward-facing camera has been extinguished, the camera is reactivated. Objects shown in the centre display may appear slightly tilted — this is normal. }} * Option/accessory. 399 DRIVER SUPPORT || The sides Park assist lines for parking camera* reversing into tight spaces and when connecting a trailer. The Park assist cameras indicate the position of the car in relation to its surroundings by displaying lines on the screen. The lines on the screen are projected as if they were at ground level behind the car and respond directly to steering wheel movements, showing the driver the path the car will take - also when the car is turning. These park assist lines include the car's most protruding parts, e.g. towbar, door mirrors and corners. NOTE The side cameras are positioned in each door mirror. The side cameras can show what is along each side of the car. • When reversing with a trailer which is not connected electrically to the car, the park assist lines on the display show the route the car will take – not the trailer. • The screen shows no park assist lines when a trailer is connected electrically to the car's electrical system. • Park assist lines are not shown when zooming in. Related information • • Park assist camera* (p. 397) Starting the park assist camera (p. 403) Example of park assist lines. Park assist lines show the intended route for the car's external dimensions with the current steering wheel angle - this facilitates parallel parking, 400 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT IMPORTANT • Remember, that with the rear camera view selected, the monitor only displays the area behind the car. Be aware of the sides and front of the car when manoeuvring in reverse. • The same applies vice versa - note what happens to the rear parts of the car when the front camera view is selected. • Note that the park assist lines show the shortest route. Therefore, pay extra attention to the car's sides so that they do not go against/over something when the steering wheel is turned when driving forward or that the front sweeps against/ over something when the steering wheel is turned when reversing. Park assist lines in 360° view* Towbar assist line* 360° view with park assist lines. With the 360° view, park assist lines are shown behind, in front of and at the side of the car (depending on the direction of travel): • • When driving forwards: Front lines When reversing: Side lines and reversing lines. With front or rear camera selected, the park assist lines appear regardless of the car's direction of travel. With one side camera selected, the park assist lines only appear when reversing. Towbar with park assist line. Towbar - activates the towbar assist line. Zoom - zoom in/out. The camera can facilitate connecting up to a trailer by showing an assist line representing the towbar's intended "path" to the trailer. }} * Option/accessory. 401 DRIVER SUPPORT || 1. Press Towbar (1). > The park assist lines for the towbar's intended "path" appear - the car's park assist lines disappear simultaneously. Park assist lines for both car and towbar cannot be shown at the same time. 2. Press Zoom (2) when a more precise manoeuvring is required. > The camera view zooms in. Sensor fields from Park Assist Pilot for parking camera If the car is equipped with Parking assistance then the distance is shown in the 360° view with coloured fields for each sensor that registers an obstacle. Sensor fields backwards and forwards Related information • Park assist camera* (p. 397) The fields for the sensors for forwards and reverse change colour as the distance to the obstacle decreases – from AMBER through ORANGE to RED. Field colour reverse Distance in metres (feet) Yellow 0,6-1,5 (2,0-4,9) Orange 0,3–0,6 (1,0–2,0) Red 0-0,3 (0-1,0) Field colour forwards Distance in metres (feet) Yellow 0,6–0,8 (2,0–2,6) Orange 0,3–0,6 (1,0–2,0) Red 0-0,3 (0-1,0) For RED sensor fields, the pulsating acoustic signal changes over to a constant tone. The screen can show coloured sensor fields on the car symbol. 402 * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Sensor field to the sides Warning signals depend on the intended route of the car. When the steering wheel is turned, therefore, there may also be a warning for obstacles diagonally in front of or diagonally behind the car, not just straight ahead or directly behind. The colour of the side fields changes with reduced distance to the obstacle – from AMBER to RED. Colour of side fields Distance in metres (feet) Yellow 0,25–0,9 (0,8–3,0) Red 0–0,25 (0–0,8) Starting the park assist camera The park assist camera starts automatically when reverse gear is engaged or manually with one of the centre display's function buttons. Camera view when reversing In the case of RED sensor fields, the acoustic signal changes from pulsing to intensively pulsing. When reverse gear is engaged, the screen shows the 360° view if it or any of the side views was the last used camera view, otherwise the rear view is shown. Camera view for manual camera start Start the parking camera with this button in the centre display's function view. Related information • Parking sensor sectors where obstacles can be detected. Left-hand side front sensor field Obstacle sector in the car's intended route forwards – depending on steering wheel angle Sector with RED field colour and intensively pulsing tone Right-hand side rear sensor field Obstacle sector in the car's intended route in reverse – depending on steering wheel angle. Park assist camera* (p. 397) The screen then initially shows the last used camera view. However, after each engine start, the previously shown side view is replaced by the 360° view and the previously shown zoomed rear view is replaced by the rear view. Automatic deactivation of camera The front view extinguishes at 25 km/h (16 mph) to avoid distracting the driver – it reactivates automatically if the speed drops to 22 km/h (14 mph) within 1 minute, on the condition that the speed has not exceeded 50 km/h (31 mph). Other camera views are extinguished at 15 km/h (9 mph) and not reactivated. Related information • Park assist camera* (p. 397) * Option/accessory. 403 DRIVER SUPPORT Symbols and messages for Park assist camera Symbols and messages for Park assist camera can be shown in the driver display and/or the centre display. The following table shows examples. Symbol Message Specification The rearward parking assistance sensors are deactivated, so there are no acoustic warnings and field marks for obstacles/objects. The camera is disengaged. Park Assist System One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible. Sensors blocked, cleaning needed Park Assist System Unavailable Service required A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. 404 The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • Park assist camera* (p. 397) * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Park Assist Pilot* WARNING Park Assist Pilot (PAP108) can assist the driver to manoeuvre the car while parking. The function can also assist with steering when driving out from parallel parking. The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. The function first checks if a space is large enough and if so then assists the driver to steer the car into the space. The centre display indicates with symbols, graphics and text the various operations to be carried out and when to do so. WARNING • The parking sensors have blind spots where obstacles cannot be detected. • Pay particular attention if there are people and animals near the car. • Bear in mind that the front of the car may swing out towards oncoming traffic during the parking manoeuvre. • • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. NOTE The PAP function measures the space and steers the car - the driver's task is to: • • • select gear (reverse/forward) - a "ping" sound indicates when the driver should change gear • • control and maintain a safe speed brake and stop. Related information • • • • • • • 108Park keep a close watch around the car follow the instructions in the centre display Driving support systems (p. 290) Parking variants with Park Assist Pilot* (p. 406) Parking with Park Assist Pilot* (p. 407) Leaving parallel parking with Park Assist Pilot* (p. 409) Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* (p. 410) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) Messages for Park Assist Pilot* (p. 413) Assist Pilot * Option/accessory. 405 DRIVER SUPPORT Parking variants with Park Assist Pilot* Perpendicular parking Related information • • Park Assist Pilot (PAP109) can be used for the following different parking situations. Park Assist Pilot* (p. 405) Leaving parallel parking with Park Assist Pilot* (p. 409) Parallel parking Principle for perpendicular parking. The function parks the car using the following steps: The principal of parallel parking. The function parks the car using the following steps: 1. A parking space is identified and measured. 2. The car is reversed into the space. 3. The car is positioned in the space by means of driving forward/backward. With the Park Out function, a parallel-parked car can also get help from the function with leaving the parking space. 109Park 406 1. A parking space is identified and measured. 2. The car is reversed into the space and then positioned in the space by means of driving forward/backward. NOTE When leaving a parking space, the Park Out function must only be used for a parallelparked car - it does not work for a perpendicular-parked car. Assist Pilot * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Parking with Park Assist Pilot* Park Assist Pilot (PAP110) helps the driver park via three steps. The function can also help the driver to leave a parking space. This function measures space and steers the car – the driver's job is to: • keep an eye on what is happening around the car • • follow the instructions in the centre display • • select a gear (reverse/forward) – a "pling" sound indicates when the driver should change gear regulate and maintain a safe speed brake and stop. Symbols, graphics and/or text appear on the centre display's screen when the different steps are to be performed. The function can be activated if the following criteria are met once the engine has been started: • • No trailer is attached to the car NOTE The distance between the car and parking spaces should be 0.5–1.5 metres (1.6–5.0 ft) while the function is searching for a parking space. Parking The function parks the car using the following steps: 1. A parking space is identified and measured. 2. The car is reversed into the space. 3. The car is positioned into the space - the system may then request that the driver changes gear and brakes. Principle for parallel parking. Finding and measuring parking spaces The function can be activated in the centre display's function view. It can also be accessed from the camera views. Speed is lower than 30 km/h (20 mph). Principle for perpendicular parking. Drive no faster than 30 km/h (20 mph) for parallel parking or 20 km/h (12 mph) for perpendicular parking. 110Park Assist Pilot }} * Option/accessory. 407 DRIVER SUPPORT || 1. 2. 3. Tap on the Park In button in the function view or in the camera view. > PAP searches for a parking space and checks whether it is big enough. Reversing in to the parking space Be prepared to stop the car when the graphic and message on the centre display state that a suitable parking space has been found. > A pop-up window is shown. Parallel. The function searches the area for parking, displays instructions and guides the car in on its passenger side. But if required the car can also be parked on the driver's side of the street: Activate the direction indicator to the driver's side - then the system searches for a parking space on that side of the car instead. Perpendicular. 408 1. Check that the area behind the car is clear, then engage reverse gear. 2. Reverse slowly and carefully without touching the steering wheel - and no faster than 7 km/h (4 mph). 3. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed by the graphic and message on the centre display. Select Parallel parking or Perpendicular parking and select reverse gear. NOTE • Perform the following to reverse the car into the parking space: NOTE • Keep your hands away from the steering wheel when the function is activated. • Make sure that the steering wheel is not hindered in any way and can rotate freely. • To achieve optimum results - wait until the steering wheel is fully turned before starting to drive backward/forward. DRIVER SUPPORT Positioning the car in the parking space Proceed as follows: 1. Move the gear selector to the gear position as instructed by the system, wait until the steering wheel has been turned and drive forward slowly. 2. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed by the graphic and message on the centre display. 3. Select reverse gear and drive slowly backwards. 4. Be prepared to brake the car when instructed by the graphic and message on the centre display. Principles for parallel parking. The function is deactivated automatically and the graphics and message show that parking is complete. It may be necessary for the driver to correct the car’s position. Only the driver can determine whether the car is properly parked. IMPORTANT The warning distance is shorter when the sensors are used by Park Assist Pilot (PAP111) compared with when Park Assist System uses the sensors. Principles for perpendicular parking. Related information • 111Park Assist Pilot Park Assist Pilot* (p. 405) Leaving parallel parking with Park Assist Pilot* The Park Out function can help the driver to leave a parking space when the car is parallel parked. NOTE When leaving a parking space, the Park Out function must only be used for a parallelparked car - it does not work for a perpendicular-parked car. The Park Out function is activated in the centre display's function view or in the camera view. Proceed as follows: 1. Tap on the Park Out button in the function view or in the camera view. 2. Use the direction indicator to select the direction in which the car should leave the parking space. 3. Be prepared to stop the car when instructed by the graphic and message on the centre display - follow the instructions in the same way as for the parking procedure. }} * Option/accessory. 409 DRIVER SUPPORT || Note the steering wheel can "spring" back when the function is completed - the driver may then need to turn the steering wheel back to the maximum steering angle in order to leave the parking space. Limitations of Park Assist Pilot* The Park Assist Pilot (PAP112) function cannot detect everything in all situations and may therefore have limited functionality. • The parking sensors have blind spots where obstacles cannot be detected. • Pay particular attention if there are people and animals near the car. Related information • Bear in mind that the front of the car may swing out towards oncoming traffic during the parking manoeuvre. Park Assist Pilot* (p. 405) • The function is supplementary driver support intended to facilitate driving and make it safer – it cannot handle all situations in all traffic, weather and road conditions. • The driver is advised to read all sections in the Owner's Manual that relate to this function to learn about factors such as its limitations and what the driver should be aware of before using the system. • Driver support functions are not a substitute for the driver's attention and judgement. The driver is always responsible for ensuring the car is driven in a safe manner, at the appropriate speed, with an appropriate distance to other vehicles, and in accordance with current traffic rules and regulations. WARNING If the function considers that the driver can leave the parking space without any extra manoeuvring then the function will be stopped, even if the driver may consider that the car is still in the parking space. • WARNING IMPORTANT Objects situated higher than the sensor detection area are not included when calculating the parking manoeuvre, which could cause the function to swing into the parking space too early – such parking spaces should be avoided for this reason. 112Park 410 Assist Pilot * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT A driver should be aware about the following examples of Park Assist Pilot limitations: Parking is discontinued A parking sequence will be discontinued: • • if the driver moves the steering wheel • if the driver presses Cancel in the centre display • when the anti-lock brakes or the Electronic stability control are engaged - e.g. when a wheel loses grip on a slippery road • if the car is driven too quickly - above 7 km/h (4 mph) as the steering servo for speed-dependent steering wheel resistance is working at reduced power – e.g. when cooling due to overheating. Where applicable, a message in the centre display states the reason for a parking sequence being discontinued. 113”Approved IMPORTANT Under certain circumstances, the function is unable to find parking spaces - one reason for this may be the fact that there is interference with the sensors from external sound sources which emit the same ultrasound frequencies as those with which the system works. There are also a few details to bear in mind while parking, e.g.: • The driver is always responsible for determining whether the space selected by the function is suitable for parking. • Do not use the function if snow chains or a spare wheel are fitted. • Do not use the function if cargo items are protruding from the car. • Heavy rain or snow may cause the system to measure the parking space incorrectly. • During the search and check-measurement of the parking space, the function may miss objects positioned deep in the parking space. • Parking spaces on narrow streets are not always feasible, since the space required for manoeuvring may not be sufficient. Driver responsibility • The driver should bear in mind that the function is an aid – not an infallible, fully-automatic function. The driver must therefore be prepared to interrupt a parking step. Use approved tyres113 with the correct tyre pressure - this affects the ability of the function to park the car. • The function bases itself on the locations of vehicles already parked nearby – if they are inappropriately parked, your own car's tyres and wheel rims may be damaged by contact with the kerb. Examples of such sources include horns, wet tyres on asphalt, pneumatic brakes and exhaust noises from motorcycles etc. NOTE Dirt, ice and snow covering the sensors will reduce their function and may prevent measurement. tyres” refers to tyres of the same type and make as those fitted new on delivery from the factory. }} 411 DRIVER SUPPORT || • Perpendicular parking spaces may be missed or offered unnecessarily if one parked car is protruding more than other parked cars. • The function is designed for parking on straight streets – not sharp curves or bends. For this reason, make sure the car is parallel to the potential parking spaces when the function measures the space. IMPORTANT Changing to another approved wheel rim and/or tyre dimension may involve a changed tyre circumference, which means that the system's parameters may then need to be updated. Consult a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • • • 412 Park Assist Pilot* (p. 405) Speed-dependent steering force (p. 290) Limitations for camera and radar unit (p. 341) * Option/accessory. DRIVER SUPPORT Messages for Park Assist Pilot* Messages for Park Assist Pilot (PAP114) can be shown in the driver display and/or the centre display. The following table shows examples. Message Specification Park Assist System One or more of the function's sensors are blocked - check and correct as soon as possible. Sensors blocked, cleaning needed Park Assist System Unavailable Service required The system does not function as it should. A workshop should be contacted - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. A text message can be cleared by briefly pressing the button, located in the centre of the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. If a message remains: Contact a workshop – an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • Park Assist Pilot* (p. 405) 114Park Assist Pilot * Option/accessory. 413 HYBRID INFORMATION HYBRID INFORMATION General information about Twin Engine Twin Engine runs like a regular car, but certain functions differ from a car that only runs on petrol or diesel. The electric motor drives the car mostly at low speeds, the petrol engine at higher speeds, as well as during more active driving. The driver display shows some information that is unique to the Twin Engine - charging information, selected drive mode, distance to empty battery as well as the hybrid battery's charge level. It is possible to set the car in different drive modes while driving, e.g. electric operation only or, when power is required, both electric motor and petrol engine. The car calculates an optimal combination of drivability, driving experience, environmental impact and fuel economy according to the drive mode selected. In order that the car should have optimal function it is important that the hybrid battery with associated electrical drive systems, as well as the petrol engine and its drive systems, have the correct operating temperature. Battery capacity may be reduced considerably if the battery is too cold or too hot. Preconditioning prepares the car's drive systems and the passenger compartment before departure so that both wear and energy needs during the journey are reduced. The range for the hybrid battery increases. The hybrid battery which drives the electric motor is charged via a charging cable but can also be 416 charged by gentle braking and engine braking in gear position B. The hybrid battery can also be charged by the car's engine. High-voltage current Important to know Car without power Bear in mind that important functions such as the brakes and power steering are inoperable when the car is without power. WARNING Several components in the car work with high-voltage current that could be dangerous in the event of incorrect intervention. These components, and all orange-coloured cables, must only be handled by qualified personnel. WARNING In a de-energised car with the electric motor and fuel-driven engine switched off it is not possible to brake the car. Towing not permitted Towing the Twin Engine is not permitted since this damages the electric motor. Do not touch anything that is not clearly described in the owner's manual. Exterior engine noise • • • • • • WARNING Remember that the car does not emit any engine noise when it is only powered by the electric motor and may therefore be difficult to notice by children, pedestrians, cyclists and animals. This is especially true at low speeds, such as in car parks. Related information Charging the hybrid battery (p. 417) Hybrid gauge (p. 86) Drive modes (p. 460) Start and switch off preconditioning (p. 230) Hybrid battery (p. 624) Factors that affect range when running on electricity (p. 474) • Gear positions for automatic gearbox (p. 453) • Towing (p. 494) HYBRID INFORMATION Charging the hybrid battery WARNING In addition to the fuel tank, as in a conventional car, the car is equipped with a rechargeable battery - a so-called hybrid battery of the lithium-ion type. Replacing the hybrid battery must only be performed by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The hybrid battery is charged using a charging cable which is located in a storage compartment in the cargo area. Electric operation is not possible if the temperature of the battery is too low or too high. If drive mode PURE is then selected, the combustion engine starts. NOTE Charging with fixed control unit in accordance with mode 31 Volvo recommends a charging cable in accordance with IEC 62196 and IEC 61851 which supports temperature monitoring. The time it takes for the hybrid battery to be charged is dependent on the charging current that is used. NOTE The capacity of the hybrid battery decreases slightly with age and use, which may result in increased use of the petrol engine and thereby slightly increased fuel consumption. If the hybrid battery's temperature is below -10 ºC (14 ºF) or above 40 ºC (104 ºF) then it may mean that some of the car's functions are changed or unavailable because the capacity of the hybrid batteries is reduced outside this temperature range. Charging cable handle and charging input socket. Charging status is indicated in three ways: • Indicators on the charging cable's control unit. • Indicator lamp in the car's charging input socket. • Illustration and text in the driver display. In certain markets the control unit is installed within a charging station connected to the mains power circuit. In which case, the charging cable has no control unit of its own. Instead, it has a special connector that is used to connect the charging cable to the charging station. Follow the instructions at the charging station. The starter battery is charged when the hybrid battery is charging and terminated when the hybrid battery is fully charged. 1 European standard - EN 61851-1. }} 417 HYBRID INFORMATION || Charging with the petrol engine Related information • • • The car generates current to the battery and the battery is charged, e.g. when the brake pedal is pressed gently or during engine braking down a hill. The car can also generate power for the hybrid battery and the battery is charged. • • In gear position B, the car uses electric motor braking when the accelerator pedal is released, while the hybrid battery is recharged at the same time. • The hybrid battery can also be charged by the car's engine. 2 418 The hybrid battery is recharged during gentle braking with the brake pedal. The car's kinetic energy is then converted to electrical energy, which is used to charge the hybrid battery. The voltage in the socket may vary depending on market. Charging cable (p. 419) Charging current (p. 418) Opening and closing the hatch for the charging input socket (p. 422) • • • Start charging the hybrid battery (p. 423) • Charging status in the car's charging input socket (p. 425) • Charging status in the car's driver display (p. 430) • Symbols and messages relating to Twin Engine in the driver display (p. 434) Stop charging of hybrid battery (p. 432) Charging status in the charging cable's control unit (p. 427) • Gear positions for automatic gearbox (p. 453) • • Changing drive mode (p. 464) Long-term storage of vehicles with hybrid batteries (p. 436) Charging current Charging current is used for charging the hybrid battery as well as preconditioning of the car. Charging takes place with a charging cable connected to the car's charging input socket and a 230 V socket2 (alternating current). When the charging cable is activated, the driver display shows a message and a lamp in the car's charging input socket illuminates. The charging current is mainly used for battery charging, but is also used for preconditioning the car. When the car's hybrid battery is charged, the starter battery is also charged. IMPORTANT Never unplug the charging cable from the 230 V socket (alternating current) while charging is in progress - there is then a risk of damaging the 230 V socket. Always stop charging first before unplugging the charging cable from the car's charging input socket and then from the 230 V socket. HYBRID INFORMATION • • NOTE Charging cable If the weather is very hot or very cold, some of the charging current is used to heat/cool the hybrid battery and the passenger compartment, which results in a longer charging time. The charging cable with its control unit is used to charge the car's hybrid battery. WARNING The charging time is extended if preconditioning has been selected. The time required depends mainly on the outside temperature. Fuse Normally several 230 V consumers are included in a fuse circuit, so additional consumers (e.g. lighting, vacuum cleaner, electric drill, etc.) can be on the same fuse. Related information • • • • • Charging cable (p. 419) Charging status in the car's driver display (p. 430) Charging status in the car's charging input socket (p. 425) The charging cable is located in the storage compartment under the cargo area's floor hatch. • The charging cable has a built-in circuit breaker. Charging must only take place with grounded and approved sockets. • Children should be supervised when in the vicinity of the charging cable when it is plugged in. • High voltage in the charging cable. Contact with high voltage can cause death or serious personal injury. • Do not use the charging cable if it is damaged in any way. A damaged or inoperative charging cable must only be repaired by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. • Always position the charging cable so that it will not be driven over, stepped on, tripped over or damaged in some other way, or cause personal injury. • Disconnect the charger from the wall outlet before cleaning it. • Never connect the charging cable to an extension cord or a multiple plug socket. WARNING Only use the charging cable provided with your car or a replacement cable recommended by Volvo. Start and switch off preconditioning (p. 230) Specifications, charging cable Stop charging of hybrid battery (p. 432) Ambient temperature -32 ºC to 50 ºC (-25 ºF to 122 ºF) Also, refer to the manufacturer's instructions for using the charging cable and its components. }} 419 HYBRID INFORMATION || Ground fault breaker in the charging cable IMPORTANT Multiple plugs, extension cables, overvoltage protection or similar devices must not be used together with the charging cable since this may involve a risk of fire, electric shocks, etc. The control unit for the charging cable charging cable has a built-in ground fault breaker that protects the car and the user from electric shocks caused by system faults. An adapter between the 230 V socket (alternating current) and the charging cable may only be used if the adapter is approved in accordance with IEC 61851 and IEC 62196. WARNING IMPORTANT WARNING Never unplug the charging cable from the 230 V socket (alternating current) while charging is in progress - there is then a risk of damaging the 230 V socket. Always stop charging first before unplugging the charging cable from the car's charging input socket and then from the 230 V socket. The charging cable and its associated parts must not be swamped or immersed in water. IMPORTANT Avoid exposing the control unit and its plug to direct sunlight. In such cases, the overheating protection in the plug is at risk of reducing or interrupting the charging of the hybrid battery. IMPORTANT Clean the charging cable with a clean cloth, moistened with water or a mild detergent. Do not use chemicals or solvents. 420 Related information • Ground fault breaker in the charging cable (p. 420) • Temperature monitoring of the charging cable (p. 421) • Charging the hybrid battery (p. 417) Charging the hybrid battery must only take place with grounded and approved 230 V sockets (alternating current). If the capacity for the socket or fuse circuit is unknown, ask a licensed electrician to check the capacity. Charging above the capacity of a fuse circuit may lead to fire or damage the fuse circuit. WARNING • The charging cable's overvoltage protection helps to protect the car's charging system, but cannot guarantee that overload will never occur. • Never use visibly worn or damaged electrical sockets. This could cause fire or serious injury. • Never connect the charging cable to a cable extension. • Maintenance or replacement of the hybrid battery must only be performed by a trained and qualified Volvo service technician. HYBRID INFORMATION Temperature monitoring of the charging cable IMPORTANT The ground fault breaker does not protect the 230 V socket (alternating current)/electrical installation. For the car's hybrid battery to be charged safely every time, the control unit for the charging cable and the plug have built-in monitoring devices for the temperature. Temperature monitoring takes place in the control unit and the plug. NOTE IMPORTANT • • Control unit LED3 lamps. • LED lamp 1 LED lamp 2 If the control module's built-in ground fault breaker is tripped, LED lamp 2 flashes red while LED lamp 1 is extinguished - check the 230 V socket (alternating current). 3 LED (Light Emitting Diode) Volvo recommends a charging cable in accordance with IEC 62196 and IEC 61851 which supports temperature monitoring. Check the capacity of the socket. Other electronic equipment connected to the same fuse circuit must be disconnected if the total load is exceeded. Do not connect the charging cable if the socket is damaged. Monitoring in the control unit Charging is switched off if the temperature of the control unit is too high. This is to protect the electronics. This may take place at a high outside temperature, for example, and/or when strong sunlight shines directly on the control unit. Related information • • Charging cable (p. 419) Charging status in the charging cable's control unit (p. 427) }} 421 HYBRID INFORMATION || Monitoring at the plug If the temperature at the power source to which the charging cable is connected is too high, the charging current is reduced. If the temperature exceeds a critical level, charging is stopped completely. Opening and closing the hatch for the charging input socket The flap for the hybrid battery's charging input socket is opened manually. Close the cover for the charging input socket in reverse order. IMPORTANT If the temperature monitoring has automatically lowered the charging current repeatedly and charging has been interrupted then the cause of the overheating must be investigated and rectified. Related information • • • Related information • Charging cable (p. 419) Press in the rear section of the cover and release. Open the cover. Pull away the cover for the charging input socket and secure it in the holder inside the cover. Make sure that the cover's rubber straps are bent downwards in order to prevent the cover coming off from the holder. 422 IMPORTANT Position the charging input socket's cover so that it does not damage the paintwork (e.g. in blustery wind). Start charging the hybrid battery (p. 423) Stop charging of hybrid battery (p. 432) Charging the hybrid battery (p. 417) HYBRID INFORMATION Start charging the hybrid battery WARNING The car's hybrid battery is charged with a charging cable between the car and a 230 V socket4 (alternating current). The hybrid battery must only be charged at maximum permitted charging current or lower in accordance with applicable local and national recommendations for hybrid charging from 230 V sockets (alternating current)/plugs. • The charging cable has a built-in circuit breaker. Charging must only take place with grounded and approved sockets. • Children should be supervised when in the vicinity of the charging cable when it is plugged in. Charging the hybrid battery must only take place from an approved grounded 230 V socket5 or from a charging station with a loose charging cable (Mode 3) supplied by Volvo. • High voltage in the charging cable. Contact with high voltage can cause death or serious personal injury. • Do not use the charging cable if it is damaged in any way. A damaged or inoperative charging cable must only be repaired by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. • Always position the charging cable so that it will not be driven over, stepped on, tripped over or damaged in some other way, or cause personal injury. • Disconnect the charger from the wall outlet before cleaning it. • Never connect the charging cable to an extension cord or a multiple plug socket. • Only use the charging cable supplied with the car or a replacement cable recommended by Volvo. IMPORTANT • Never connect the charging cable when there is a risk of thunderstorm or lightning strike. NOTE Volvo recommends a charging cable in accordance with IEC 62196 and IEC 61851 which supports temperature monitoring. • The control unit's ground fault breaker protects the car, but there may still be a risk of overloading the 230 V mains power circuit. • Avoid visible worn or damaged mains sockets since they may lead to fire damage and/or personal injury if used. • • Never use an extension cable. WARNING Never use an adapter. Also, refer to the manufacturer's instructions for using the charging cable and its components. 4 5 The voltage in the socket may vary depending on market. Or equivalent sockets with a different voltage, depending on market. }} 423 HYBRID INFORMATION || IMPORTANT Check that the 230 V socket (alternating current) has adequate power capacity for charging electric vehicles – in the event of uncertainty, the socket must be checked by a qualified professional. Take the charging cable out from the storage compartment under the cargo area floor. Note that the car must be switched off prior to charging. Connect the charging cable to a 230 V socket. Never use an extension cable. 424 Open the charging hatch and undo the charging input socket cover. Remove the charging handle's protective cover and then press the handle the whole way into the socket for the car. Clamp the charging handle's cover in place as illustrated. IMPORTANT To avoid damage to the paint, e.g. in the event of high winds, position the charging handle's protective cover so that it does not touch the car. HYBRID INFORMATION 2. The charging cable's charging handle is fastened/locked in, and charging starts within 5 seconds. When charging has started, the LED lamp in the charging input socket flashes with a green glow. The driver display shows the remaining estimated charging time or whether charging is not working as intended. Battery charging can be interrupted for a while if the car is unlocked: • and the door is opened - charging restarts within a few minutes. • without the door being opened - the car is relocked automatically. Charging restarts after 1 minute. IMPORTANT Never unplug the charging cable from the 230 V socket (alternating current) while charging is in progress - there is then a risk of damaging the 230 V socket. Always stop charging first before unplugging the charging cable from the car's charging input socket and then from the 230 V socket. • • Charging the hybrid battery (p. 417) Charging status in the car's charging input socket Opening and closing the hatch for the charging input socket (p. 422) The charging input socket shows the charging status using an LED lamp. • Charging status in the car's charging input socket (p. 425) • Charging status in the car's driver display (p. 430) • Charging status in the charging cable's control unit (p. 427) • Stop charging of hybrid battery (p. 432) Related information LED lamp location in the car's charging input socket. The LED lamp shows the existing status while charging is in progress. If the LED lamp does not illuminate, check that the cable is firmly plugged into the wall socket and the socket in the car. The white, red or yellow lamps are activated when the passenger compartment lighting is switched on - they remain switched on for a while after the passenger compartment lighting has been switched off. Condensation from the air conditioning may drip under the car during charging. This is normal and takes place due to cooling of the hybrid battery. }} 425 HYBRID INFORMATION || LED lamp's glow Specification White LED light. Yellow Waiting modeA - waiting for charging to start. Flashing green Charging in progressB. Green Charging completeC. Red A fault has arisen. A B C For example, after a door has been opened or if the charging cable's handle is not locked in. The slower the flashing, the closer to fully charged. Extinguishes after a while. Related information 426 • • Charging the hybrid battery (p. 417) • Charging status in the charging cable's control unit (p. 427) • Stop charging of hybrid battery (p. 432) Charging status in the car's driver display (p. 430) HYBRID INFORMATION Charging status in the charging cable's control unit LED lamp 1 LED lamp 2 Different indicators on the charging cable's control unit show the status of ongoing charging as well as status after completed charging. Control unit LED6 lamps. 6 LED (Light Emitting Diode) }} 427 HYBRID INFORMATION || LED 1 LED 2 Status Specification Recommended action Flashes blue, amber and red Flashes blue, amber and red Initiation Self-test. Wait until the self-test is completed. Illuminates in blue Extinguished Standby The charging cable is not connected to the car. Connect the charging cable to the car's charging input socket. Flashes blue Extinguished Standby Charging is possible but is not activated by the electronics in the car. Wait until charging starts. Flashes blue Flashes blue Charging in progress. • The car's electronics have started charging. • Charging in progress. Extinguished Flashes amber Charging in progress. Temperature monitoring has detected an increased temperature. Charging continues with reduced power level. Restart charging. If the problem persists - consult a qualified professional. Extinguished Illuminates in amber Charging is not possible. Temperature monitoring has triggered for the 230 V socket. Restart charging. If the problem persists - consult a qualified professional. Extinguished Flashes red Charging is not possible. The ground fault breaker on the charging cable has triggered. 1. Unplug the charging cable from the 230 V socket. 2. The ground fault breaker is reset after 10 seconds and the unit restarts. 3. Plug the charging cable into the 230 V socket. 4. If the problem persists - consult a qualified professional. Flashes red 428 Wait until the battery is fully charged. Illuminates in red Charging is not possible. Charging cable connected to ungrounded 230 V socket. Plug the charging cable into a grounded 230 V socket. If the problem persists - consult a qualified professional. HYBRID INFORMATION LED 1 LED 2 Status Specification Recommended action Flashes red Flashes red Charging is not possible. Internal fault. The charging cable is damaged and must be repaired. Contact a qualified professional. Related information • • Charging the hybrid battery (p. 417) • Charging status in the car's driver display (p. 430) • Stop charging of hybrid battery (p. 432) Charging status in the car's charging input socket (p. 425) 429 HYBRID INFORMATION Charging status in the car's driver display shown for as long as the driver display is operating. The driver display shows the status for charging with both image and text. The information is Image A 430 Message Specification Fully charged at: [Time] is shown together with an animation with blue pulsating light through the charging cable. Charging continues and an approximate time for when the battery is estimated to be fully charged is shown. The text Charging complete is shown. An illustration of the car is shown with an LED indicator at the charging input socket that illuminates in green. The battery is fully charged. The text Charging error is shown. The LED indicator at the charging input socket illuminates in red. A fault has occurred, check the connection of the charging cable to the car's charging input socket and to the 230 V socketA (alternating current). The voltage in the socket may vary depending on market. HYBRID INFORMATION NOTE If the driver display is not used for a while then it is dimmed. Reactivate the display by means of one of the following: • • • depress the brake pedal open one of the doors set the car in ignition position I by turning the START knob clockwise and releasing. Related information • • Charging the hybrid battery (p. 417) • Charging status in the car's charging input socket (p. 425) • Charging status in the charging cable's control unit (p. 427) • Stop charging of hybrid battery (p. 432) Symbols and messages relating to Twin Engine in the driver display (p. 434) 431 HYBRID INFORMATION Stop charging of hybrid battery Finish charging by unlocking the car, unplugging the charging cable from the car's charging input socket and then from the 230 V socket7 (alternating current). IMPORTANT Before the charging cable is disconnected from the car's charging input socket, the car must be unlocked using the unlock button on the remote control key. This must be carried out even if the doors on the car are already unlocked. If the car is not unlocked using the unlock button, this may lead to damage to the charging cable or to the system. Unlock the car with the remote control key charging is finished and the charging cable's locked handle releases/is unlocked. 7 432 Return the charging cable to the storage compartment under the cargo area floor. The charging cable is locked automatically NOTE Always unlock the car so that charging is stopped before the connection to the 230 V socket (alternating current) is unplugged. Note that the charging cable must be unplugged from the car's charging input socket before being unplugged from the 230 V socket, partly to avoid damage to the system and partly to avoid stopping the charging unintentionally. Unplug the cable from the 230 V socket. Unplug the cable from the car's charging input socket, refit the charging input socket's cover and close the hatch. If the charging cable is not unplugged from the charging input socket, it is locked in again automatically shortly after unlocking in order to maximise charging and range, as well as to facilitate preconditioning prior to the journey. The charging cable can be unplugged again if the car is unlocked using the remote control key. For cars with Passive Entry*, you can lock and unlock using the handle again. Related information • Opening and closing the hatch for the charging input socket (p. 422) • Charging cable (p. 419) The voltage in the socket may vary depending on market. * Option/accessory. HYBRID INFORMATION • • Charging the hybrid battery (p. 417) Start charging the hybrid battery (p. 423) 433 HYBRID INFORMATION Symbols and messages relating to Twin Engine in the driver display A number of symbols and messages regarding Twin Engine can be shown in the driver display. Symbol They may also be shown in combination with general indicator and warning symbols and are then extinguished when the problems have been rectified. Message Specification 12 V Battery Hybrid battery fault. Contact a workshopA to check the battery as soon as possible. Charging fault, service urgent. Drive to workshop 12 V Battery Charging fault Stop safely Hybrid battery fault. Stop the car safely and contact a workshopA to have the battery checked as soon as possible. 12 V Battery Hybrid battery fault. Contact a workshopA to check the function as soon as possible. Fuse failure Service required Hybrid battery Overheated, stop safely Reduced performance Max car speed limited Hybrid system Harsh behaviour at low speed, car ok to use 434 The temperature of the hybrid battery seems to be rising abnormally. Stop the car and switch off the engine. Wait at least 5 minutes before continuing to drive. Call a workshopA or check from the outside that everything seems normal before continuing to drive. The hybrid battery is not sufficiently charged for driving at high speeds. Charge the battery as soon as possible. The hybrid system does not function as intended. Contact a workshopA to check the function as soon as possible. HYBRID INFORMATION Symbol Message Specification Hybrid system failure The hybrid system is disengaged. Contact a workshopA to check the function as soon as possible. Service required Charge cable Remove before start Charge cable Removed? Turn and hold start knob 7s A Shown when the driver tries to start the car and the charging cable is connected to the car. Disconnect the charging cable and close the charging hatch. Shown when the driver starts the car with the charging cable connected to the car after an earlier attempt. Disconnect the charging cable or investigate whether the cable actually is disconnected and that the charging hatch is closed. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • • • • • • • Start charging the hybrid battery (p. 423) Stop charging of hybrid battery (p. 432) Charging the hybrid battery (p. 417) Warning symbols in the driver display (p. 95) Indicator symbols in the driver display (p. 93) Hybrid gauge (p. 86) Hybrid battery gauge (p. 87) 435 HYBRID INFORMATION Long-term storage of vehicles with hybrid batteries NOTE Choose the coolest location possible for the vehicle in order to minimise aging of the battery during long-term storage. During summer the vehicle should preferably remain indoors or outdoors in the shade, depending on where the temperature is lowest. To minimise hybrid battery degradation during prolonged storage (longer than 1 month) of the vehicle a charge level of approximately 25% is recommended as indicated on the driver display. Proceed as follows: Related information • • • 436 1. If the state of charge is high – run the car until approx. 25% remains. If the state of charge is low – charge the battery until a level of approx. 25% is reached. 2. If storage has lasted longer than 6 months or the hybrid battery charge level is significantly lower than 25% – charge the battery to approx. 25% again to compensate for the natural self-discharge that occurred during the prolonged storage. Continuously check the charge level in the driver display. Start charging the hybrid battery (p. 423) Hybrid battery gauge (p. 87) Charging the hybrid battery (p. 417) STARTING AND DRIVING STARTING AND DRIVING Starting the car The car is started using the start knob in the tunnel console when the remote control key is in the passenger compartment. The remote control key is not physically used when starting the car since it is equipped with support for keyless starting (Passive start). To start the car: 1. 2. Start knob in the tunnel console. WARNING Before starting: 1 438 • • Fasten the seatbelt. • Make sure that the brake pedal can be fully depressed. Adjust the seat, steering wheel and mirrors. 3. The remote control key must be inside the car. For cars with Passive Start, the key needs to be located in the front part of the passenger compartment. With the option for keyless locking/unlocking* of the car, the key can be anywhere in the car. Hold the brake pedal depressed1 fully. For cars with automatic gear changing, make sure that gear position P or N is selected. For cars with a manual gearbox, make sure that the gear lever is in neutral position or that the clutch pedal is depressed. Turn the start knob clockwise and then release it. The control automatically returns to its starting position. When the engine is started, the starter motor works until the engine is started or until its overheating protection triggers. driver display's indicator lamps extinguishing and its preset theme illuminating. However, there are situations where the petrol engine is started instead, e.g. in the event of the temperature being too low or if the hybrid battery needs charging. The car should not be started with the charging cable connected but in the cases when it cannot be unplugged, or the car incorrectly detects the charging cable, it is possible to force start the car: 1. Depress the brake pedal and turn the start knob clockwise. 2. The text Charge cable Remove before start appears in the driver display. 3. Turn the start knob clockwise again. 4. The text Removed? Turn and hold start knob 7s appears, at which point, turn the knob clockwise and hold it for 7 seconds to start the car. When starting in normal conditions, the car's electric drive motor is prioritised - the petrol engine remains switched off. This means that after the start knob has been turned clockwise, the electric motor has ”started” and the car is ready to drive. A started car is indicated by the If the car is moving, the engine can be started by turning the start knob clockwise. * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING until the message disappears and then try to start the car again. NOTE The idling speed can be noticeably higher than normal for certain engine types during cold starting. This is done in order that the emissions system can reach normal operating temperature as quickly as possible, which minimises exhaust emissions and protects the environment. IMPORTANT If the engine fails to start after 3 attempts wait for 3 minutes before making a further attempt. Starting capacity increases if the battery is allowed to recover. NOTE Backup reader's location in the tunnel console. If the Car key not found message is shown in the driver display when starting, place the remote control key by the backup reader. Then try to start the car again. The car cannot be started if the hybrid battery is discharged. WARNING Never remove the remote control key from the car while driving. Related information • • • • • Switching off the car (p. 440) Ignition positions (p. 440) Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 200) Using jump starting with another battery (p. 484) Selecting ignition mode (p. 441) NOTE When the remote control key is positioned by the backup reader, make sure that there are no car keys, metal objects or electronic apparatus by the backup reader, (e.g. mobile phones, tablets, laptops or chargers). Several car keys close to one another by the backup reader may cause interference with each other. WARNING Always take the remote control key out from the car when leaving the car and make sure the car's electrical system is in ignition position 0 - especially if there are children in the car. If the message Car start System check, wait is shown in the driver display when starting, wait 439 STARTING AND DRIVING Switching off the car • The car is switched off using the start knob in the tunnel console. Using jump starting with another battery (p. 484) • Selecting ignition mode (p. 441) Ignition positions The car's electrical system can be set in different levels/positions and in this way make the different functions available. In order to facilitate the use of a limited number of functions with the engine switched off, the car's electrical system can be set in three different levels – 0, I and II. These levels are described with the denomination "ignition position" throughout the owner's manual. The following table shows the functions available in each ignition position/level: Start knob in the tunnel console. To switch off the car: – Turn the start knob clockwise and release it the car is switched off. The control automatically returns to its starting position. If the gear selector for cars with an automatic gearbox is not in position P or if the car rolls: – Turn the knob clockwise and hold it until the car is switched off. Related information • • • 440 Starting the car (p. 438) Ignition positions (p. 440) Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 200) STARTING AND DRIVING Level 0 Functions • Odometer, clock and temperature gauge are illuminatedA. • • • Power* seats can be adjusted. • • • • II The centre display is started and can be usedA. The infotainment system can be usedA. Panorama roof, power windows, 12V power socket in the passenger compartment, Bluetooth, navigation, phone, ventilation fan and windscreen wipers can be used. Power is taken from the battery in this ignition position. • • The headlamps come on. Warning/indicator lamps illuminate for 5 seconds. Several other systems are activated. However, heating in seat cushions and the rear window can only be activated after the car has been started. Selecting ignition mode The car's electrical system can be set in different levels/positions and in this way make the different functions available. Selecting ignition position This ignition position consumes a lot of current from the battery and should therefore be avoided! A Also activated when the door is opened. Related information • • • Power seats can be adjusted. 12 V power sockets* in the cargo area can be used. Functions • The power windows can be used. In this mode, the functions are controlled by time and are switched off automatically after a short while. I Level • Starting the car (p. 438) Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 200) Start knob in the tunnel console. Using jump starting with another battery (p. 484) • Selecting ignition mode (p. 441) Ignition position 0 – Unlock the car and store the remote control key inside the car. NOTE To reach level I or II without starting the engine - do not depress the brake pedal, or the clutch pedal for cars with manual gear changing, when these ignition positions are to be selected. }} * Option/accessory. 441 STARTING AND DRIVING || • • • Ignition position I – Turn the start knob clockwise and release it. The control automatically returns to its starting position. Ignition position II – Turn the start knob clockwise and hold it in position for approx. 5 seconds. Then release the knob, which automatically returns to its starting position. Back to ignition position 0 – To return to ignition position 0 from position I and II – Turn the start knob clockwise and release. The control automatically returns to its starting position. Related information • • • • • Starting the car (p. 438) Switching off the car (p. 440) Ignition positions (p. 440) Alcohol lock* Bypass of the alcohol lock* The function of the alcohol lock is to prevent the car from being driven by individuals under the influence of alcohol. Before the engine can be started the driver must take a breath test that verifies that he/she is not under the influence of alcohol. Alcohol lock calibration takes place in accordance with each market's limit value in force for driving legally. In the event of an emergency situation or if the alcohol lock is out of order, it is possible to bypass the alcohol lock in order to drive the car. The car has an interface for the electrical connection of the different makes and models of alcohol lock recommended by Volvo. The interface facilitates alcohol lock connection, and gives the option of an integrated function including messages related to the alcohol lock in the car's main display. For information about a specific alcohol lock, please refer to the owner's manual from the respective alcohol lock manufacturer. Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 200) Activating the bypass function (Bypass) NOTE All bypass activation is logged and saved in the memory in the alcohol lock's control unit. It is not possible to undo a bypass. The message, Blow into alcolock Bypass instead?, is shown in the screen: • If "Cancel/Yes" is shown - select bypass by pressing the right arrow button on the steering wheel's right-hand keypad and then on the O button. • If "Yes" is shown - select bypass by pressing the O button. WARNING Using jump starting with another battery (p. 484) The alcohol lock is an aid and does not exempt the driver from responsibility. It is always the responsibility of the driver to be sober and to drive the car safely. Related information • • • • 442 For deactivation via the alcohol lock, see the separate instructions for that specific lock. Bypass of the alcohol lock* (p. 442) Before starting the engine with the alcohol lock (p. 443) The alcohol lock is now bypassed and the car can be started. The number of bypasses possible before service is required is selected during alcohol lock installation. Starting the car (p. 438) Ignition positions (p. 440) * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING Alcohol lock* (p. 442) Before starting the engine with the alcohol lock Before starting the engine with the alcohol lock (p. 443) The alcohol lock is activated automatically and is then ready for use when the car is opened. Starting the car (p. 438) To bear in mind Ignition positions (p. 440) In order to obtain correct function and as accurate a measurement result as possible: Related information • • • • • Avoid eating or drinking approx. 5 minutes before the breath test. • Avoid excess windscreen washing - the alcohol in the washer fluid may result in an incorrect measurement result. NOTE After a completed period of driving, the engine can be restarted within 30 minutes without a new breath test. Related information • • • • Bypass of the alcohol lock* (p. 442) Alcohol lock* (p. 442) Starting the car (p. 438) Ignition positions (p. 440) Brake functions The car's brakes are used to reduce the speed or prevent the car from rolling. Besides the foot brake and parking brake, the car is equipped with several automatic brake assist functions. These can assist the driver by not needing to keep his/her foot on the brake pedal when stationary at a traffic light, when starting on an uphill gradient or when driving on a downhill gradient. Depending on the car's equipment, the following auto braking functions are available: • • • • • Automatic brake when stationary (Auto Hold) Hill start assist (Hill Start Assist) Auto braking after a collision City Safety Hill descent control (Hill Descent Control) Related information • • • • • • • Foot brake (p. 444) Parking brake (p. 447) Automatic braking when stationary (p. 450) Auto braking after a collision (p. 452) Help when starting on a hill (p. 451) City Safety™ (p. 346) Hill descent control (p. 471) * Option/accessory. 443 STARTING AND DRIVING Foot brake The foot brake is part of the brake system. The car is equipped with two brake circuits. If a brake circuit is damaged, the brake pedal will engage deeper. Higher pressure on the pedal will therefore be needed to produce the normal braking effect. WARNING The brake servo only works when the electric motor or internal combustion engine is running. If the foot brake is used when the car is switched off, greater pedal pressure is required to brake the car. be felt in the brake pedal when this is engaged and this is normal. A short test of the ABS system is made automatically after the car has been started when the driver releases the brake pedal. A further automatic test of the system may be made at low speed. The test may be felt as pulses in the brake pedal. Light braking charges the hybrid battery The electric motor's engine brake is used during light braking. The car's kinetic energy is then converted to electrical energy instead, which is used to charge the hybrid battery. Battery charging with electric motor braking is indicated in the driver display. In very hilly terrain or when driving with a heavy load the brakes can be relieved by using engine braking in gearshift mode B. Use drive mode Off Road for increased engine braking while driving on steep downhill gradients at low speeds. Anti-lock braking system The car has anti-lock brakes (ABS2), which prevents the wheels from locking while braking and allows maintained steering control. Vibration may 2 444 Anti-lock Braking System The driver display indicates charging during electric motor braking. This function is active in the speed interval 150-5 km/h (93-3 mph). During heavier braking, as well as outside the speed interval, braking is supplemented by the hydraulic brake system. The driver's display shows this by the indicator being down in the red zone. Symbols in the driver display Symbol Specification Check the brake fluid level. If the level is low, fill with brake fluid and check for the cause of the brake fluid loss. Fault in pedal sensor. STARTING AND DRIVING Symbol WARNING Specification If both the warning lamps for brake fault and ABS fault illuminate at the same time, a fault has occurred in the brake system. Constant glow for 2 seconds when the engine is started: Automatic function check. Constant glow for more than 2 seconds: Fault in the ABS system. The car's normal brake system is still working, but without the ABS function. If the message Brake pedal Characteristics changed Service required is shown, the system for "Brake-by-wire" is disengaged. A higher pedal pressure is required to produce braking effect. If the level in the brake fluid reservoir is normal at this stage, drive carefully to the nearest workshop and have the brake system checked - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. • If the brake fluid is below the MIN level in the brake fluid reservoir, do not drive further before topping up the brake fluid. The reason for the loss of brake fluid must be investigated. The brake assist system (BAS3) helps to increase brake force during braking, and can thereby shorten the braking distance. The system detects the way in which the driver brakes and increases brake force where necessary. The brake force can be boosted up to the level when the ABS system is engaged. The function is suspended when the pressure on the brake pedal decreases. Related information • Foot brake (p. 444) Related information • • • • • • • 3 • Brake assistance Brake assistance (p. 445) Automatic braking when stationary (p. 450) Help when starting on a hill (p. 451) Braking on wet roads (p. 446) Braking on gritted roads (p. 446) Brake system maintenance (p. 446) Brake lights (p. 157) Brake Assist System 445 STARTING AND DRIVING Braking on wet roads Braking on gritted roads Brake system maintenance When driving for a prolonged period of time in heavy rain without braking, the braking effect may be delayed slightly when next using the brakes. When driving on salted roads, a layer of salt may form on the brake discs and brake linings. Check brake system components regularly for wear. This may extend braking distance. You should therefore maintain a greater safety distance to vehicles in front. In addition, make sure you do the following: To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service intervals as specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet. New and replaced brake linings and brake discs do not provide optimal braking effect until they have been "worn in" for a few hundred kilometres (miles). Compensate for the reduced braking effect by depressing the brake pedal harder. Volvo recommends only fitting brake linings that are approved for your Volvo. This may also be the case after a car wash. It is then necessary to depress the brake pedal more forcefully. You should therefore maintain a greater distance to the vehicles in front. Brake the car firmly after driving on wet roads or using a car wash. This warms up the brake discs, enabling them to dry faster and protecting them against corrosion. Bear in mind the current traffic situation when braking. Related information • • Foot brake (p. 444) • Brake now and again to remove any layer of salt. Make sure that other road users are not put at risk by the braking. • Gently depress the brake pedal after finishing driving and before starting your next trip. Related information • • IMPORTANT Foot brake (p. 444) The wear on the brake system's components must be checked regularly. Braking on wet roads (p. 446) Braking on gritted roads (p. 446) Contact a workshop for information about the procedure or engage a workshop to carry out the inspection - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • 446 Foot brake (p. 444) STARTING AND DRIVING Parking brake Related information The parking brake prevents the car from rolling away from stationary by means of mechanically locking/blocking two wheels. • Activating and deactivating the parking brake (p. 447) • • Parking on a hill (p. 449) • Automatic braking when stationary (p. 450) The control for the parking brake is located in the tunnel console between the seats. A faint electric motor noise can be heard when the electrically-operated parking brake is being applied. The noise can also be heard during the automatic function checking of the parking brake. If the car is stationary when the parking brake is activated, it only acts on the rear wheels. If it is activated when the car is moving then the normal foot brake is used, i.e. the brake acts on all four wheels. Brake function changes over to the rear wheels when the car is almost stationary. In the event of a fault in the parking brake (p. 449) Activating and deactivating the parking brake Use the parking brake to prevent the car from rolling from stationary. Activating the parking brake 1. Pull the control upward. > The symbol in the driver display illuminates when the parking brake is activated. 2. Check that the car is stationary. Symbol in the driver display Symbol Specification The symbol is illuminated when the parking brake is activated. If the symbol flashes, it indicates a fault has occurred. Read the message in the driver display. }} 447 STARTING AND DRIVING || Automatic activation The parking brake is activated automatically • when the car is switched off and the setting for automatic activation of the parking brake is activated in the centre display. • when gear position P is selected on a steep hill. • if the Auto hold (Automatic brake when stationary) function is activated and • the car has been stationary for a long time (5-10 minutes) • • the driver leaves the car. NOTE An acoustic signal sounds while emergency braking is active at high speeds. NOTE For automatic deactivation, either the driver has to have put on their seatbelt or the driver door has to be closed. Related information the car is switched off Emergency brake In an emergency, the parking brake can be activated when the car is in motion by pulling and holding up the control. Braking stops when the control is released, or if the accelerator pedal is depressed. 448 Deactivating the parking brake Deactivate manually 1. Depress the brake pedal firmly. 2. Press the control down. > The parking brake releases and the symbol in the driver display extinguishes. Deactivate automatically 1. Start the car. 2. Depress the brake pedal firmly. Select gear position D or R and depress the accelerator pedal. > The parking brake releases and the symbol in the driver display extinguishes. • Automatic parking brake activation setting (p. 449) • In the event of a fault in the parking brake (p. 449) • • Parking brake (p. 447) Parking on a hill (p. 449) STARTING AND DRIVING Automatic parking brake activation setting Choose whether the parking brake is to be activated automatically when the car is switched off. Parking on a hill Always use the parking brake when parking on a hill. WARNING To change setting: 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Press My Car Parking Brake and Suspension to select or deselect the function Auto Activate Parking Brake. Related information • Activating and deactivating the parking brake (p. 447) • Parking brake (p. 447) Always use the parking brake when parking on an inclined surface. Engaging a gear or the automatic transmission's P position is not sufficient to hold the car stationary in all situations. If the car is parked facing uphill: • Turn the wheels away from the kerb. If the car is parked facing downhill: • Turn the wheels towards the kerb. Heavy load uphill A heavy load, such as a trailer, can cause the car to roll backward when the parking brake is released automatically on a steep incline. Avoid this by pulling the control upwards while driving the car away. Release the control when the engine achieves traction. In the event of a fault in the parking brake Contact an authorised Volvo workshop if it is not possible to deactivate or activate the parking brake after several attempts. An acoustic warning signal sounds when driving with the parking brake activated. If the car must be parked before a possible fault is rectified, then the wheels must be turned as for parking on a hill and the gear selector must be in position P. Low battery voltage If the battery voltage is too low then the parking brake can be neither deactivated nor activated. Connect a donor battery if the battery voltage is too low. Replacing the brake linings The rear brake linings must be replaced at a workshop due to the design of the electricallyoperated parking brake - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • Activating and deactivating the parking brake (p. 447) }} 449 STARTING AND DRIVING || Symbols in the driver display Symbol Specification If the symbol flashes, it indicates a fault has occurred. See the message in the driver display. Fault in brake system. See the message in the driver display. Information message in driver display. Automatic braking when stationary Symbols in the driver display Automatic brake when stationary (Auto hold) means that the driver can release the brake pedal while maintaining braking effect when the car has stopped at traffic lights or a junction. When the car has stopped, the brakes are activated automatically. The function can use either foot brake or parking brake to hold the car stationary and it works on all gradients. When driving away, the brakes disengage automatically if the driver is wearing the seatbelt. Symbol The symbol is illuminated when the function uses the foot brake to keep the car stationary. The symbol is illuminated when the function uses the parking brake to keep the car stationary. Related information • NOTE When braking to a standstill on an uphill or downhill slope, the brake pedal should be depressed a little harder before being released to ensure the car does not roll. Related information • • • • 450 Activating and deactivating the parking brake (p. 447) Parking on a hill (p. 449) Starter battery (p. 620) The parking brake is activated if Volvo service programme (p. 604) • • • • the car is switched off the driver's door is opened the driver's seatbelt is unbuckled the car has been stationary for a longer time (5-10 minutes). Specification • • • Activating and deactivating the automatic brake at a standstill (p. 451) Foot brake (p. 444) Parking brake (p. 447) Help when starting on a hill (p. 451) STARTING AND DRIVING Activating and deactivating the automatic brake at a standstill • The automatic brake function at a standstill is activated using the button in the tunnel console. • The function remains deactivated until it is reactivated. When the function is deactivated, hill start assist (HSA) remains active to prevent the car from rolling backwards when starting on an uphill gradient. Related information • Automatic braking when stationary (p. 450) Help when starting on a hill Hill start assist (HSA4) prevents the car from rolling backwards when starting on an uphill gradient. When reversing uphill, it prevents the car from rolling forwards. The function means that the pedal pressure in the brake system remains for several seconds while the driver's foot is moved from brake pedal to accelerator pedal. The temporary braking effect releases after several seconds or when the driver starts to drive away. Hill start assist is available even when the function for automatic brake when stationary (Auto hold) is deactivated. – Press the button in the tunnel console to activate or deactivate the function. > The indicator in the button illuminates when the function is activated. Activated function remains even when the car is started next time. Related information • • Automatic braking when stationary (p. 450) Foot brake (p. 444) Applicable when switching off If the function is active and holds the car with the foot brake (A-symbol illuminated) then the brake pedal must be depressed at the same time as the button is depressed in order to deactivate. 4 Hill Start Assist 451 STARTING AND DRIVING Auto braking after a collision In the event of a collision in which the activation level is reached for the pyrotechnic seatbelt tensioners or airbags, or if a collision with a large animal is detected, the car's brakes are automatically applied. This function is to prevent or reduce the effects of any subsequent collision. After a serious collision there is a risk that it is no longer possible to control and steer the car. In order to avoid or mitigate a possible further collision with a vehicle or an object in the vehicle's path, the auto braking system is activated automatically and brakes the car in a safe manner. Brake lights and hazard warning lights are activated during braking. When the car has stopped, the hazard warning lights continue to flash and the parking brake is applied. If braking is not appropriate, e.g. if there is a risk of being hit by following traffic, the system can be overridden by the driver depressing the accelerator pedal. The function assumes that the brake system is intact after the collision. Brake assist is included in the Rear Collision Warning and Blind Spot Information safety systems. • Brake functions (p. 443) Gearbox The gearbox is part of the car's powertrain (power transmission) between engine and drive wheels. The function of the gearbox is to change the gear ratio depending on speed and power requirements. The car has an eight-speed automatic gearbox, and an electric motor for rear-wheel drive. The number of gear changes means that the engine's torque and power range can be used effectively. Two of the gears are overdrive gears that save fuel when driving at constant engine speed. Using the steering wheel paddles* it is possible to shift up or down manually. The driver display shows which gear position is currently in use. IMPORTANT To prevent damage to any drive system components, the working temperature of the gearbox is checked. If there is a risk of overheating, a warning symbol illuminates in the driver display and a text message is shown follow the recommendation given. Symbols in the driver display If a fault should occur in the gearbox, the driver display shows a symbol and a message. Related information • • 452 Rear Collision Warning (p. 360) BLIS* (p. 361) * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING Symbol Specification Information or error message for gearbox. Follow the recommendation given. Gear positions for automatic gearbox With an automatic gearbox, the system chooses the gear so that driving is optimal. The gearbox also has a manual gearshift mode. Hot or overheated gearbox. Follow the recommendation given. Reduced performance/Acceleration performance reduced In the event of a temporary powertrain fault, the car can go into a Limp home mode with reduced engine power to prevent damage to the powertrain. Related information • Gear positions for automatic gearbox (p. 453) • Gear shift indicator (p. 457) Change gear position by pressing the spring-loaded gear selector forwards or backwards. The driver display shows the gear position selected: P, R, N, D or B. During manual gear changing, the gear being used is also shown. Changing gear The gear selector is the shift-by-wire-type where shifting is performed electronically instead of mechanically. This means simpler shifting and more distinct gear positions. }} 453 STARTING AND DRIVING || Gear positions WARNING Park position - P Always use the parking brake when parking on an inclined surface. Engaging a gear or the automatic transmission's P position is not sufficient to hold the car stationary in all situations. NOTE The gear selector must be in P position to allow the car to be locked and alarmed. Help functions The park position is activated via the P button next to the gear selector. Select the P position when the car is parked or when starting the engine. The car must be stationary when the park position is selected. The system will change to P position automatically • • if the car is switched off in position D or R. if the driver unfastens the seatbelt and opens the driver's door when the car is running with the gear selector in a position other than P. To select another gear position when the park position is selected, the brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition position must be II. To park a car without wearing the seatbelt and with the door open - exit the P position by selecting R or D again. To park - first apply the parking bake and then select park position. If the car is switched off in neutral position, there is no automatic change-over to P position. This is to allow you to wash the car in the type of car wash that requires the car to be rolled through the facility. Reverse position - R Select position R to reverse. The car must be stationary when reverse position is selected. 454 Neutral position - N No gear is engaged and the engine can be started. Apply the parking brake if the car is stationary with the gear selector in N position. To be able to change from the neutral position to another gear position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition position must be II. Drive position - D D is the normal driving position. Shifting up and down takes place automatically based on the level of acceleration and speed. The car must be stationary when changing gear from R position to D position. STARTING AND DRIVING Brake position - B To be able to change manually to a higher gear requires that the car is equipped with steering wheel paddles*. • Press the gear selector forwards to return to the D position. The gearbox automatically shifts down if the speed decreases to a level lower than appropriate for the selected gear, in order to avoid jerking and stalling. Changing gear with steering wheel paddles* The steering wheel paddles are a complement to the gear selector and make it possible to change gear manually without releasing hands from the steering wheel. Related information • • From B position, it is possible to gear down manually to lower gears. The B position can be selected at any time during travel. The car brakes using its electric motor when the accelerator pedal is released, while also charging the hybrid battery. This gives more opportunities for recharging the hybrid battery, since charging also takes place without the driver using the brake pedal. Select brake position by moving the gear selector backwards from the D position. The driver display shows which gear is being used. • Press the gear selector backwards once to change down to the next lower gear. • Press the gear selector backwards once more to change down further. • • Gear selector inhibitor (p. 456) Changing gear with steering wheel paddles* (p. 455) Kick-down function (p. 457) Gear shift indicator (p. 457) "-": Selects the next lower gear. "+": Selects the next higher gear. Activating the steering wheel paddles To be able to change gear with the steering wheel paddles they must first be activated: – Pull one of the paddles toward the steering wheel. > A figure in the driver display indicates current gear. }} * Option/accessory. 455 STARTING AND DRIVING || Driver display when changing gear with steering wheel paddles. Switch To change gear one step: – Pull one of the paddles backwards - towards the steering wheel - and release. A gear change occurs at each pull of the paddle provided that the engine speed does not leave the permitted range. After each gear change the figure in the driver display changes to show the current gear. Deactivating the function Gear selector inhibitor Manual deactivation in gear position D and B – Deactivate the steering wheel paddles by pulling the right-hand paddle (+) toward the steering wheel and holding in place until the figure in the driver display for the current gear extinguishes. > The gearbox returns to gear position D and B depending on the position selected before the paddles were activated. The gear selector inhibitor prevents accidental changing between different gear positions in an automatic gearbox. Automatic deactivation In gear position D the steering wheel paddles are deactivated after a short time if they are not used. This is indicated by means of the figure for the current gear extinguishing. In gear position B there is no automatic deactivation. Related information • Gear positions for automatic gearbox (p. 453) • Gear shift indicator (p. 457) Automatic gear selector inhibitor The automatic gear selector inhibitor has special safety systems. From park position - P To select a gear position other than the P position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition position must be II. From neutral position - N If the gear selector is in the N position and the car has been stationary for at least 3 seconds (irrespective of whether the engine is running) then the gear selector is locked. To be able to move the gear selector from the N position to another gear position, the brake pedal must be depressed and the ignition position must be II. Message in the driver display If the gear selector is inhibited, a message is shown in the driver display, e.g. Gear lever Press brake pedal to activate gear lever. The gear selector is not inhibited mechanically. Related information • 456 Gear positions for automatic gearbox (p. 453) STARTING AND DRIVING Kick-down function Gear shift indicator Kick-down can be used when maximum acceleration is needed, such as for overtaking. The gear shift indicator in the driver display shows the current gear during manual gearshifting and when it is appropriate to engage the next gear for optimum fuel economy. When the accelerator pedal is pressed all the way to the floor (beyond the position normally regarded as full acceleration) a lower gear is immediately engaged. This is known as kickdown. For eco-driving during manual gear changing, it is important to drive in the right gear and to change gear in good time. gear. If the car is not equipped with steering wheel paddles, pressing the gear selector forwards changes to the position D. Related information • Gear positions for automatic gearbox (p. 453) If the accelerator is released from the kick-down position, the gearbox automatically changes up. Safety function To prevent over-revving of the engine, the gearbox control program has a protective downshift inhibitor. The gearbox does not permit downshifting/kickdown which would result in an engine speed high enough to damage the engine. Nothing happens if the driver still tries to shift down in this way at high engine speed – the original gear remains engaged. On kick-down the car can shift down one or more steps at a time, depending in engine speed. The car shifts up when the engine has reached is maximum engine speed in order to prevent engine damage. Related information • 5 Gear positions for automatic gearbox (p. 453) Gear shift indicator in the driver display5. The gear shift indicator is shown in gear position B. The gear shift indicator shows the current gear in the driver display and uses an up arrow to indicate when shifting to a higher gear is recommended. To change up a gear manually, the car has to be fitted with steering wheel paddles*, the righthand paddle (+) is then used to change up a The figure is schematic – parts may vary depending on car model. * Option/accessory. 457 STARTING AND DRIVING All-wheel drive Drive systems All-wheel drive (AWD6) means that the car is driving all four wheels at the same time, which improves traction. Volvo's Twin Engine combines an internal combustion engine that drives the front wheels with an electric motor that drives the rear wheels. The electric motor that drives the rear wheels enables electric all-wheel drive functionality. Allwheel drive characteristics vary depending on the selected drive mode. Two drive systems Related information The electric motor is supplied its energy from a hybrid battery fitted in the tunnel console. The hybrid battery can be charged in a wall socket, or in a special charging station. The internal combustion engine can also charge the hybrid battery with a special high-voltage generator. • • • Drive modes (p. 460) Low speed control (p. 469) Gearbox (p. 452) Depending on the driver-selected drive mode and available electric energy, the two drive systems can be used either individually or in parallel. Both the internal combustion engine and electric motor can generate motive force directly to the wheels. An advanced control system combines the properties of both drive systems in order to provide optimum driving economy. Hybrid battery - The function of the hybrid battery is to store energy. It receives energy when charging from the mains power circuit, during regenerative braking or from the highvoltage generator. It provides energy for electric operation as well as for temporarily operating the electric air conditioning during the preconditioning of the passenger compartment. Internal combustion engine - The internal combustion engine starts when the energy level in the hybrid battery is insufficient for the engine power that the driver requests. High voltage generator7 - Charges the hybrid battery. Starter motor for the internal combustion engine. Can support the internal 6 7 458 All Wheel Drive CISG (Crank Integrated Starter Generator) - Combined high-voltage generator and starter motor. STARTING AND DRIVING combustion engine with extra electrical energy. Starting and stopping the combustion engine in Twin Engine Electric motor - Powers the car in electric operation. If necessary, provides extra torque and power during acceleration. Provides electrical all-wheel drive functionality. Recycles brake energy to electrical energy. An advanced control system determines the extent to which the car is driven on internal combustion engine, electric motor or both in parallel. During electric operation, the car may sometimes need to start the internal combustion engine automatically due to external circumstances, e.g. in low outside temperatures, which is completely normal. In addition, the internal combustion engine always starts when the hybrid battery reaches its lowest state of charge. Related information • General information about Twin Engine (p. 416) • Starting and stopping the combustion engine in Twin Engine (p. 459) • • • Drive modes (p. 460) Gearbox (p. 452) Factors that affect range when running on electricity (p. 474) Emission control To ensure optimal operation of the emission control, the internal combustion engine must be run for several minutes once it has been started. The duration of the internal combustion engine's running time varies depending on the temperature of the catalytic converter. Related information • • • Drive systems (p. 458) Economical driving (p. 472) Drive modes (p. 460) Climate settings at low temperatures In low outside temperatures, the internal combustion engine sometimes starts automatically in order to achieve the desired passenger compartment temperature and air quality. The amount of time that the internal combustion engine runs can be affected by • • • lowering the temperature reducing the fan strength activating drive mode Pure. Electric operation in low or high temperatures In low or high outside temperatures, the car's range and output for electric operation may be reduced and affect how often the internal combustion engine is started automatically. 459 STARTING AND DRIVING Drive modes Selection of drive mode affects the car's driving characteristics in order to enhance the driving experience and facilitate driving in special situations. Using the drive modes it is possible to quickly have access to the car's numerous functions and settings for different driving needs. The following systems are adapted to obtain the best possible driving characteristics in each respective drive mode: • • • • • • Steering Engine/gearbox/all-wheel drive Brakes Air suspension* and shock absorption 460 WARNING Remember that the car does not emit any engine noise when it is only powered by the electric motor and may therefore be difficult to notice by children, pedestrians, cyclists and animals. This applies in particular at low speeds, such as in car parks. WARNING Do not leave the car in an unventilated area with activated drive mode and the fuel-driven engine switched off - automatic engine start occurs at low energy level in the hybrid battery, and the exhaust gases could then cause serious injury to people and animals. Driver display Climate settings Select the drive mode that best suits the current driving conditions. Remember that not all drive modes are available in all situations. 8 Selectable drive modes Hybrid • This is the car's normal mode where the electric motor and internal combustion engine work together. the electric motor depends on the hybrid battery's energy level and, for example, the need for heating or cooling in the passenger compartment. If high power output is available, it is possible to drive with electrical power alone. When the accelerator pedal is depressed, only the electric motor is activated until a certain position is reached. The internal combustion engine starts when this position is exceeded and the energy level in the battery is insufficient for the engine power that the driver requests with the accelerator pedal. At low energy level (hybrid battery almost empty) the battery's energy level must be maintained, leading to the internal combustion engine starting more often. Charge the hybrid battery from a 230 VAC socket with the charging cable, or activate Charge in the function view in order to restore the capacity to run on electricity alone. When the car starts, it is in the Hybrid mode. The control system uses both the electric motor and internal combustion engine - individually or in parallel - and calculates optimal use with regard to performance, fuel consumption and comfort. At higher speeds the ground clearance is adjusted automatically to a lower level8 in order to reduce wind resistance. The capacity to run solely with Applies with air suspension. * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING The drive mode is designed for low energy consumption with an optimised mix of the electric motor and the internal combustion engine, without compromising the climate comfort and driving experience. When higher acceleration is required, maximum additional power from the electric drive line is used. nal combustion engine also starts in the Pure mode if the energy level in the battery falls too low. The internal combustion engine also starts • • if the speed exceeds 125 km/h (78 mph) The car also senses if the driving conditions require all-wheel drive and automatically engages it if necessary. All-wheel drive and electric additional power are always available regardless of the battery's state of charge. • in the event of system/component limitations, e.g. low outside temperature. Information in the driver display When driving in hybrid mode the driver display shows a hybrid gauge. The pointer in the hybrid gauge indicates how much energy the driver requests with the accelerator pedal. The marking between the lightning bolt and the drop shows how much energy is available. The driver display for propulsion with both the electric motor and internal combustion engine. The driver display also shows when energy is returned to the battery (regenerated) during light braking. if the driver requests more motive force than electric drive can provide The drive mode is optimised for maximum range with electric propulsion and especially developed for urban traffic. Pure means lowest combustion even when the hybrid battery is empty. The climate in the passenger compartment is regulated to Eco climate, and in slippery driving conditions, more wheel spin can be permitted before allwheel drive is activated automatically. Pure • Drive the car with electric motor, with energy consumption as low as possible and with lowest possible carbon dioxide emissions. The drive mode maximises driving on the hybrid battery. This means, for example, that the ground clearance is lower8 to reduce wind resistance and the output of certain climate settings is reduced to provide the longest possible mileage range on electric power alone. The Pure mode is available when the hybrid battery has a sufficiently high energy level. The inter- 8 Applies with air suspension. }} 461 STARTING AND DRIVING || ECO climate control In the Pure drive mode, eco climate control is activated automatically in the passenger compartment in order to reduce energy consumption. NOTE When the Pure drive mode is activated, several parameters in the climate control system's settings are changed, and several electricity consumer functions are reduced. Certain settings can be reset manually, but full functionality is only regained by leaving Pure drive mode or adapting Individual drive mode with full climate functionality. In the event of difficulties due to misting, press the button for max. defroster which has normal functionality. Off Road • Maximise the car's traction when driving in difficult terrain and on poor roads. The drive mode provides high ground clearance8, steering is light, all-wheel drive and the function for low speed control with hill descent control (Hill Descent Control) are activated. The drive mode is only available at low speeds, up to 40 km/h (25 mph). If this speed is exceeded, Off Road mode is cancelled and the Constant AWD drive mode is activated instead. 8 462 Applies with air suspension. To be able to drive all four wheels, the internal combustion engine and electric motor run continually, which results in increased fuel consumption. In the Off Road mode the driver display has a compass between the speedometer and tachometer. The speedometer shows the range for speed limitation. The drive mode is optimised for maximum controllability at low speeds in poor road conditions or difficult terrain. It raises the chassis8, reduces the driveline's throttle response and locks the car in all-wheel drive. The Hill Descent Control function facilitates controlled driving on steep descents. NOTE The driving mode is not designed to be used on public roads. NOTE If the car is switched off in Off Road mode, and therefore has high ground clearance, the car is lowered next time it is started. IMPORTANT The Off Road drive mode must not be used while driving with a trailer without trailer connector. Otherwise, there is a risk of damage to the air bellows. Constant AWD • Improve the car's roadholding and traction with enhanced all-wheel drive. The drive mode locks the car in all-wheel drive. An optimal distribution between the front and rear axle torque gives the best traction, stability and roadholding, for example on slippery roads, when driving with a heavy trailer, or when towing. Constant AWD drive mode is always available regardless of the battery's state of charge. Both the internal combustion engine and electric motor are engaged in order to drive all four wheels, which results in increased fuel consumption. In the car's other drive modes, the car automatically adapts the need for all-wheel drive to the road surface, and can engage the electric motor or start the internal combustion engine when necessary. STARTING AND DRIVING Power • The car has sportier characteristics and faster response to accelerating. The drive mode maximises the combined power from the internal combustion engine and electric motor by means of the car being driven by both front and rear wheels. The gear changes become faster and more distinct, and the gearbox prioritises a gear with greater traction. Steering response is faster, shock absorption is harder and a lower ground clearance8 means that the body follows the roadway in order to reduce roll during cornering. Select a drive mode to start from, and then adjust the settings according to the desired driving characteristics. These settings are saved in an individual driver profile. An individual drive mode is only available if it is first activated in the centre display. Applies with air suspension. The figure is schematic - parts may vary depending on car model. 3. In Presets, select a drive mode to start from: Pure, Hybrid or Power. Possible adjustments apply to settings for: Driver Display Steering Force Powertrain Characteristics Brake Characteristics Suspension Control ECO Climate Using the electric motor or internal combustion engine An advanced control system determines the extent to which the car is driven on internal combustion engine, electric motor or both in parallel. The drive mode is optimised for maximum performance and response during acceleration. It changes the internal combustion engine's accelerator pedal response, gear shift pattern and boost pressure system. Chassis settings, steering and brake response are also optimised. Power drive mode is always available regardless of the battery's state of charge. 8 9 Press My Car Individual Drive Mode and select Individual Drive Mode. • • • • • • Both the internal combustion engine and electric motor are engaged in order to drive all four wheels, which results in increased fuel consumption. Individual • Adapting a drive mode according to individual preferences. 2. The primary function is to use the engine or motor and the available energy in the hybrid battery as efficiently as possible, with regard to the characteristics of the different drive modes as well as the driver's request for power via the accelerator pedal. Settings view9 for individual drive mode. 1. Press Settings in the top view. There are also cases where temporary limitations in the system, or functions governed by legal requirements aimed at maintaining a low level of }} 463 STARTING AND DRIVING || Changing drive mode Related information Select the drive mode that best suits the current driving conditions. • • Economical driving (p. 472) Change the drive mode using the control in the centre console. • total emissions for the car, may use the internal combustion engine to a greater extent. Related information 464 • • • Changing drive mode (p. 464) Energy distribution in hybrid drive using map data* (p. 465) Remember that not all drive modes are available in all situations. • • Hybrid gauge (p. 86) To change drive mode: Drive modes (p. 460) Activating and deactivating low-speed driving using a function button (p. 470) Activating and deactivating hill descent control with the function button (p. 472) General information about Twin Engine (p. 416) 1. Press the drive mode control DRIVE MODE. > A pop-up menu is opened in the centre display. 2. Roll the wheel upward or downward until the desired drive mode is highlighted. 3. Press the drive mode control or tap directly on the touch screen to confirm the selection. > The selected drive mode is indicated in the driver display. * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING Energy distribution in hybrid drive using map data* The Hybrid drive mode is the car's normal mode where the electric motor and internal combustion engine work individually or together in hybrid drive. If a destination has been selected in the navigation system*, the Predictive Efficiency10 function distributes the electric energy consumption in an intelligent way along the whole driving distance using the map data. Fuel consumption can then be reduced compared with normal hybrid drive when the car is first driven on electricity, to then change over to being driven by the internal combustion engine when the hybrid battery has been discharged. Function If the distance to the selected destination is greater than the estimated range when running on electricity, this function distributes the electric energy to optimise consumption for the entire distance to be travelled. This makes it possible to avoid situations where normal hybrid drive would otherwise use a large proportion of the electric energy, for example, to run electric drive at high speed on a motorway and then use the internal combustion engine at low speed in urban driving. 10 The greatest fuel saving is achieved when • the distance to be travelled begins with driving on a motorway • the distance to be travelled is between 50 and 100 km (30 and 60 miles) • the hybrid battery is fully charged at the beginning. Add similar commuting routes, i.e. the route between two charging points, as Favourites in the navigation system to facilitate arrival. Related information • • Drive modes (p. 460) Economical driving (p. 472) Conditions for the function For the function to work requires that a number of conditions are met: • A destination is set in the navigation system and the driving distance to the destination is longer than the range possible only on electric drive. • Hybrid drive mode is selected. • The Hold and Charge functions are deactivated. • The hybrid battery is charged. Tips for use If the car is used for commuting to work and it is not possible to charge the car at the place of work, specify the place of work as an intermediate destination and your home as the final destination. The discharging of the hybrid battery will then take place over your runs both to and from work. Certain markets only. * Option/accessory. 465 STARTING AND DRIVING Level control* and shock absorption Level control regulates the car's suspension and shock absorption characteristics automatically to ensure the best comfort and functionality while driving. It is also possible to adjust the level manually in order to facilitate loading or entry and exit. Air suspension and shock absorption The system is adapted according to the selected drive mode and according to the speed of the car. Using the air suspension, the car's ground clearance is adjusted to a lower level at higher speeds, which reduces wind resistance and increases stability. Shock absorption is normally set for the best possible comfort and is regulated continuously depending on the road surface, the car's acceleration, braking and cornering. 466 The driver display indicates when level control is in progress. When a side door or the tailgate is open, the following applies: • If a side door is open, the level can only be regulated upwards. • If the tailgate is open, the level can only be regulated downwards. During parking During parking, make sure you allow adequate space above and below the car since the car's ground clearance may vary e.g. depending on the outside temperature, how the car is loaded, the use of loading mode or the drive mode that is selected after starting. The level may also be adjusted some time after the car has been parked. This is to compensate for any changes in height that may occur due to temperature changes in the air springs when the car cools down. During transport During transport of the car on a ferry, train or truck, the car must be lashed around the tyres and not around other parts of the chassis. Changes in the air suspension may occur during transport, which could affect the lashing negatively. * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING Symbols and messages in driver display Symbol Message Specification Suspension The active suspension has been switched off manually by the user. Deactivated by user Temporarily reduced performance The active suspension's performance has been temporarily reduced due to extensive system use. If this message appears frequently (e.g. several times in one week) contact a workshopA. Suspension A fault has occurred. Visit a workshopA as soon as possible. Suspension Service required Suspension failure Stop safely A critical fault has occurred. Stop safely, have the car transported (raised with all wheels on the flat-bed) to a workshopA. }} 467 STARTING AND DRIVING || Symbol Message Specification Suspension A fault has occurred. If the message appears whilst driving, contact a workshopA. Slow down Car too high Suspension Level control to target height in progress. Auto adjusting car level A An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • • 468 Settings for level control* (p. 469) Drive modes (p. 460) * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING Settings for level control* 2. Press My Car Switch off the level control when the car is to be jacked up in order to prevent problems with automatic regulation. 3. Select Easy Entry and Exit Suspension Control. > When the car is parked and switched off, the car is lowered (level control stops if a door is opened and there may be a certain delay before level control resumes after the door has been closed). When the car is started and begins to move, the car will rise to the height setting for the drive mode selected. Regulate the level to facilitate loading, or on entry and exit. Adjusting loading mode Mirrors and Convenience. Disable Leveling Control In certain cases, the function must be deactivated, e.g. before the car is raised with a jack*. The difference in level created when lifting with a jack would otherwise mean the automatic control starting to adjust the height, creating an undesired effect. Deactivating the function via the centre display: Use the buttons in the cargo area to regulate the height of the car's rear section and facilitate loading and unloading or when connecting or disconnecting a trailer. Settings in the centre display Entry assistance The car can be lowered to facilitate entry and exit. Activating entry assistance via the centre display: 1. 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press My Car Suspension. 3. Select Disable Leveling Control. Parking Brake and Low speed control The low speed control function (LSC11) facilitates and improves traction for driving off-road and on slippery surfaces, such as with a caravan on grass or a boat trailer on a launch ramp. The function is included in drive mode Off Road. The function is adapted for off-road driving and driving with a trailer at low speed, up to approx. 40 km/h (25 mph). With low-speed control, low gears and all-wheel drive are prioritised, which help to avoid wheelspin and provides better traction on all wheels. The accelerator pedal is less responsive in order to facilitate traction and speed control at low speed. The function is activated together with hill descent control, (HDC12) which means that speed down steep hills can be controlled with the accelerator pedal, reducing the need to use the brake pedal. The system facilitates a low and even speed while driving on steep downhill gradients. Related information • • Level control* and shock absorption (p. 466) Recommendations for loading (p. 591) Press Settings in the top view. }} * Option/accessory. 469 STARTING AND DRIVING || NOTE When LSC with HDC is activated by the Off Road driving mode, the feel of the accelerator pedal and engine response are changed. NOTE The driving mode is not designed to be used on public roads. Activating and deactivating lowspeed driving using a function button There is a function button for low-speed driving with Hill Descent Control in the centre display's function view unless the car was equipped with drive mode control in the tunnel console. Select low-speed driving in the centre display function view – NOTE Press the Hill Descent Control button to activate or deactivate the function. The function is deactivated when driving at higher speeds and must be reactivated at a lower speed, if required. Related information • Activating and deactivating low-speed driving using a function button (p. 470) • • • Changing drive mode (p. 464) Hill descent control (p. 471) All-wheel drive (p. 458) > An indicator in the button illuminates when the function is activated. This function is disabled automatically when the engine is switched off. NOTE The function is deactivated when driving at higher speeds and must be reactivated at a lower speed, if required. 11 12 470 Low Speed Control Hill Descent Control Related information • • Low speed control (p. 469) Changing drive mode (p. 464) STARTING AND DRIVING Hill descent control Hill descent control (HDC13) is a low speed function with enhanced engine braking. The function makes it possible to increase or reduce the car's speed on steep downhill gradients using only the accelerator pedal, without using the foot brake. The function is included in drive mode Off Road. Hill descent control is adapted for off-road driving at low speeds and facilitates driving on steep downhill gradients with difficult surfaces. The driver does not need to use the brake pedal, but can instead focus on steering. the gradient of the hill and without the need for the foot brake to be used. The brake lights are switched on when the function is operating. The driver can brake and reduce crawling speed, or stop the car at any time by using the foot brake. The function is activated together with low speed control (LSC14) which facilitates driving and improves traction for driving off-road and on slippery surfaces. The systems are designed for use at low speed, up to approx. 40 km/h (25 mph). The driver always bears ultimate responsibility for ensuring that the vehicle is driven safely. Function Hill descent control allows the car to roll at inching speed both forward and backward, assisted by the brake system. The speed can be increased by using the accelerator pedal. When the accelerator pedal is then released the car slows back down to crawling speed, regardless of 13 14 NOTE The function is deactivated when driving at higher speeds and must be reactivated at a lower speed, if required. Related information Points to remember when driving with HDC • Activating and deactivating hill descent control with the function button (p. 472) If the function is disabled while driving on a steep downhill gradient, the braking effect will gradually decrease. • • • Changing drive mode (p. 464) • WARNING HDC does not work in all situations but is designed merely as a supplementary aid. NOTE The driving mode is not designed to be used on public roads. • HDC can be used in gear position D, R, and with 1st or 2nd gear with manual gear changing. • It is not possible to change to 3rd gear or higher with manual gear changing. Low speed control (p. 469) All-wheel drive (p. 458) NOTE When LSC with HDC is activated by the Off Road driving mode, the feel of the accelerator pedal and engine response are changed. Hill Descent Control Low Speed Control 471 STARTING AND DRIVING Activating and deactivating hill descent control with the function button There is a function button for hill descent control with Hill Descent Control in the centre display's function view unless the car was equipped with drive mode control in the tunnel console. Selecting hill descent control in the centre display function view Hill descent control only works at low speeds. – Press the Hill Descent Control button to activate or deactivate the function. > An indicator in the button illuminates when the function is activated. This function is disabled automatically when the engine is switched off. NOTE The function is deactivated when driving at higher speeds and must be reactivated at a lower speed, if required. 472 Related information • • Hill descent control (p. 471) Changing drive mode (p. 464) Economical driving Drive economically and in a more eco-friendly way by driving gently and anticipating situations. Adapt your driving style and speed to the prevailing situation. To achieve the longest driving distance possible and lowest energy consumption possible with Twin Engine, note the following: Charge • Charge the car regularly from the mains power circuit. Make it a habit to always start a journey with fully-charged hybrid battery. • Find out where the charging stations are located. • If possible, select a parking space with a charging station. NOTE Charge the car from the mains power circuit as often as possible! STARTING AND DRIVING Precondition • Precondition the car before driving if possible using the charging cable connected to the mains power circuit. • • Avoid parking the car in a way that the interior cools down or overheats while parking. Park the car in an acclimated garage, for example. During a short drive after preconditioning of the passenger compartment, switch off the ventilation fan or air conditioning in a hot climate, if possible. • In the event of braking being necessary brake gently with the brake pedal, this recharges the hybrid battery. A regenerative braking function is built into the brake pedal and can be reinforced with electric motor braking in gear position B. • If possible, avoid using the Charge function to charge the hybrid battery. Charging with the internal combustion engine increases fuel consumption and involves increased carbon dioxide emissions. • Factors that affect range when running on electricity (p. 474) • • Hybrid gauge (p. 86) In a cold climate, reduce electrical heating of windows, mirrors, seats and steering wheel, if possible. • Drive with the correct air pressure in the tyres and check this regularly - select ECO tyre pressure for best results. • Choice of tyres can affect energy consumption - seek advice on suitable tyres from a dealer. • Remove unnecessary items from the car the greater the load the higher the consumption. Balance the power requirement using the accelerator pedal. Use the indicator for available electric motor power in the driver display in order to avoid starting the internal combustion engine unnecessarily. The electric motor is more efficient that the internal combustion engine, in particular at low speed. Do not hold the car stationary on a hill with the accelerator pedal. Use the foot brake instead. • • • • Avoid driving with open windows. Activate the Hold function in the function view at higher speeds during journeys that are longer than the range of the electricity. Drive • For lowest energy consumption, activate the Pure drive mode. Drive at a steady speed and keep a good distance to other vehicles and objects in order to avoid braking. This driving style results in the lowest energy consumption. • • High speed results in increased energy consumption - the wind resistance increases with speed. • • A roof load and ski box increase air resistance, leading to higher consumption remove the load carriers when not in use. • If preconditioning is not possible when it is cold outside, use seat heating and steering wheel heating first of all. Avoid warming up the whole of the interior which takes energy from the hybrid battery. • • Related information Drive-E - cleaner driving pleasure (p. 28) Energy distribution in hybrid drive using map data* (p. 465) Checking tyre pressure (p. 562) * Option/accessory. 473 STARTING AND DRIVING Factors that affect range when running on electricity The car's range for electric operation depends on several factors. The ability to achieve a long range varies according to the circumstances and conditions under which the car is being driven. a car with deactivated passenger compartment climate control, as well as in a car with normal passenger compartment climate control. A warmer outside temperature has a positive effect on range to a certain extent. The certified value for the car's mileage on electric power should not be interpreted as an expected range. The certification value is a comparative value obtained by means of special EU drive cycles. The actual range is dependent on a number of factors. Outside temperature Factors that affect the range The driver can influence some factors, but has no influence over others. The longest range is achieved under extremely favourable conditions when all factors have a positive impact. Factors the driver cannot influence There are several external factors that affect the range in varying degrees: • • • • • traffic situation short driving distances topography outside temperature and headwind road condition and surface. The table shows the approximate relationship between outside temperature and range, both in 474 Deactivated passenger compartment climate control Normal passenger compartment climate control 30 °C (86 °F) 95 % 80 % 20 °C (68 °F) 100 % 90 % 10 °C (50 °F) 90 % 80 % 0 °C (32 °F) 80 % 60 % -10 °C (14 °F) 70 % regular charging preconditioning drive mode Pure climate settings speed and acceleration The table shows the approximate relationship between constant speed and range, where a lower constant speed has a positive effect on range. Constant speed 100 km/h (62 mph) 50 % 80 km/h (50 mph) 70 % 60 km/h (37 mph) 90 % 50 km/h (31 mph) 100 % NOTE 40 % Factors the driver can influence The driver should be aware that the following factors affect the range so he/she can operate the car in an energy-efficient manner: • • • • • • Hold function • tyres and tyre pressure. • The values shown in the tables relate to a new car. • These values are not absolute, but are dependent upon driving behaviour, environment and other circumstances. Related information • • • Economical driving (p. 472) Hold and Charge function (p. 475) Drive modes (p. 460) STARTING AND DRIVING Hold and Charge function In some situations, it can be useful to be able to control the hybrid battery's state of charge while driving is in progress. This is possible with the functions Hold and Charge. Charge Engine charges hybrid battery. Hold and Charge are available in all drive modes. The functions are cancelled if Pure drive mode is activated. The function charges the hybrid battery with assistance from the internal combustion engine for using increased electric operation at a later time. Function buttons for Hold and Charge Symbols in the driver display The functions are activated in the centre display's function view. The symbol is shown in the hybrid battery gauge when Charge is activated. Hold Battery level sustained for later use. Related information • • The function maintains the charge in the hybrid battery for electric drive and saves available electricity for later use, e.g. for driving in an urban environment or through a residential area. The car works as for normal hybrid operation with discharged battery where, in addition to re-using brake-generated energy, for example, the car starts the internal combustion engine more often in order to maintain the charge in the battery. Economical driving (p. 472) Hybrid gauge (p. 86) The symbol is shown in the hybrid battery gauge when Hold is activated. 475 STARTING AND DRIVING Preparations for a long trip Before a driving holiday or some other type of long journey, it is important to check the car's functions and equipment particularly carefully. Check that • the engine is working normally and that fuel consumption is normal • • • there are no leaks (fuel, oil or other fluid) • • • • • • • 476 Settings for car modem* (p. 542) Winter driving Recommendations for loading (p. 591) For winter driving it is important to perform certain checks of the car in order to ensure that it can be driven safely. Driving with a trailer (p. 489) Pilot Assist (p. 319) Speed limiter (p. 296) Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 577) Check the following in particular before the cold season: • The engine coolant must contain 50% glycol. This mixture protects the engine against frost down to approx. -35°C (-31°F). To avoid health risks, different types of glycol must not be mixed. • The fuel tank must be kept filled to prevent condensation. • Engine oil viscosity is important. Oils with lower viscosity (thinner oils) facilitate starting in cold weather and also reduce fuel consumption while the engine is cold. brake force during braking is optimal all lamps are working - adjust headlamp level if the car is heavily laden the tyres have sufficient tread depth and pressure. Change to winter tyres when driving to areas where there is a risk of snowy or icy road surfaces starter battery charging is good the wiper blades are in good condition IMPORTANT a warning triangle and high-visibility vest are located in the car - legally required in certain countries Related information • • • • • • • • Checking tyre pressure (p. 562) Low viscosity oil must not be used for hard driving or in hot weather. • The condition of the starter battery and charge level must be inspected. Cold weather places great demands on the starter battery and its capacity is reduced by the cold. • Use washer fluid with antifreeze to avoid ice forming in the washer fluid reservoir. Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 672) Filling washer fluid (p. 655) Winter driving (p. 476) Economical driving (p. 472) * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING Slippery driving conditions Driving in water To achieve optimum roadholding Volvo recommends using winter tyres on all wheels if there is a risk of snow or ice. Wading means the car being driven through water, e.g. on a flooded road. Driving in water must be performed with great caution. NOTE The use of winter tyres is a legal requirement in certain countries. Studded tyres are not permitted in all countries. Observe the following to prevent damage to the car when driving through water: • Practise driving on slippery surfaces under controlled conditions to learn how the car reacts. Related information • • • • • • • • • • • Winter tyres (p. 575) Snow chains (p. 576) Braking on gritted roads (p. 446) Braking on wet roads (p. 446) Filling washer fluid (p. 655) • • Starter battery (p. 620) Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 653) • Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 652) Topping up coolant (p. 617) Adverse driving conditions for engine oil (p. 668) IMPORTANT Parts of the car (e.g. engine, gearbox, driveline or electrical components) may be damaged when driving through water with a level higher than the floor of the car. Damaged caused to a component caused by submersion, hydrolock or lack of oil is not covered by the warranty. • The water level must not be higher than the floor of the car. If possible, check the depth at the deepest point before starting to drive through the water. Extra caution should be exercised when passing through flowing water. Always change to Off Road drive mode before driving through water in order to ensure that the internal combustion engine is running. Do not drive faster than walking pace. Do not stop the car in the water. Drive forward carefully or reverse the car back out of the water. Remember that waves created by oncoming traffic may rise above the level for the floor of the car. Avoid driving through salt water (corrosion risk). In the event of stalling in water, do not try to restart. Instead, tow the car out of the water and transported on a low loader to a workshop. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. When the water has been passed, depress the brake pedal lightly and check that full brake function is achieved. Water and mud for example can make the brake linings wet resulting in delayed brake function. If necessary, clean the contact for the trailer coupling after driving in water and mud. Related information • • Recovery (p. 496) Low speed control (p. 469) 477 STARTING AND DRIVING Opening and closing the fuel filler flap 2. The fuel filler flap is unlocked by pressing a button on the instrument panel. Related information • In the driver display, the arrow next to the tank symbol indicates which side of the car the fuel filler flap is located. 1. Press the button on the instrument panel. > Pressure equalisation of the fuel tank involves a certain delay in opening the flap. The message Fuel tank Fuel lid is opening is shown in the driver display, and then Fuel tank Ready for refuelling. NOTE After the fuel filler flap has been opened, refuelling must take place within about 15 minutes. After this, the valve that was opened by pressing the button to open the fuel filler cap is closed, and it is no longer possible to refuel because the pump nozzle cuts out. If the valve is closed before refuelling is complete - press the button again and wait until the driver display shows the message Fuel tank Ready for refuelling. 478 After refuelling is finished - close the flap with a gentle press. Filling fuel (p. 479) STARTING AND DRIVING Filling fuel Fuelling instruction: The fuel tank is fitted with a coverless fuel filler system. 1. Refuelling the car at a petrol station 2. Switch off the car and open the fuel filler flap. NOTE After the fuel filler flap has been opened, refuelling must take place within about 15 minutes. After this, the valve that was opened by pressing the button to open the fuel filler cap is closed, and it is no longer possible to refuel because the pump nozzle cuts out. If the valve is closed before refuelling is complete - press the button again and wait until the driver display shows the message Fuel tank Ready for refuelling. It is important to feed the pump nozzle past the filler pipe's two openable hatches before starting to fuel the car. 15 Choose fuel that is approved for use in the car in accordance with the identifier15 on the inside of the fuel filler flap. See information on approved fuels and identifier in the section on "Petrol". 3. Insert the pump nozzle in the fuel filler opening. The filler pipe has two opening caps. The pump nozzle must be pushed past both caps before refuelling is started. The identifier in accordance with the CEN standard EN16942 is located on the inside of the fuel filler flap, and will be on corresponding fuel pumps and their nozzles at filling stations throughout Europe by 12 October 2018 at the latest. }} 479 STARTING AND DRIVING || 4. Handling of fuel Do not overfill the tank but fill until the pump nozzle cuts out the first time. > The tank is full. Do not use fuel with a lower quality than that recommended by Volvo, as this will negatively affect engine power and fuel consumption. NOTE WARNING Overfilled fuel in the tank can overflow in hot weather. Always avoid inhaling fuel vapour and getting fuel splashes in the eyes. Topping up fuel from a fuel can When filling with a fuel can, use the funnel located in the foam block under the floor hatch in the cargo area. 1. Open the fuel filler flap. 2. Insert the funnel in the fuel filler opening. The filler pipe has two opening caps. The funnel's pipe must be pushed past both caps before filling can be started. Applicable to cars with fuel-driven auxiliary heater* Never use the fuel-driven heater when the car is in a filling station area. 480 Decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap. Related information • Opening and closing the fuel filler flap (p. 478) • Petrol (p. 481) In the event of fuel in the eyes, remove any contact lenses and rinse the eyes in plenty of water for at least 15 minutes and seek medical attention. Never swallow fuel. Fuels such as petrol, bioethanol and mixtures of them and diesel are highly toxic and could cause permanent injury or be fatal if swallowed. Seek medical attention immediately if fuel has been swallowed. WARNING Fuel which spills onto the ground can be ignited. Switch off the fuel-driven heater before starting to refuel. Never carry an activated mobile phone when refuelling. The ring signal could cause spark build-up and ignite petrol fumes, leading to fire and injury. * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING IMPORTANT Mixtures of various fuel types or use of fuels which are not recommended will invalidate Volvo's guarantees and any supplementary service agreements; this is applicable to all engines. Related information • Petrol E5 is a petrol with maximum 2.7% oxygen and maximum 5 volume % ethanol. Petrol is a type of engine fuel that is intended for cars with a petrol engine. Only use petrol from well-known producers. Never use fuel of dubious quality. The petrol must fulfil the EN 228 standard. E10 is a petrol with maximum 3.7% oxygen and maximum 10 volume % ethanol. Identifier for petrol Petrol (p. 481) IMPORTANT Decal on the inside of the fuel filler flap. The identifier in accordance with the CEN standard EN16942 is located on the inside of the fuel filler flap, and will be on corresponding fuel pumps and their nozzles at filling stations throughout Europe by 12 October 2018 at the latest. These are the identifiers that apply for current standard fuels in Europe. Petrol with the following identifiers may be used in cars with petrol engine: • Fuel that contains up to 10 percent by volume ethanol is permitted. • EN 228 E10 petrol (max 10 percent by volume ethanol) is approved for use. • Ethanol higher than E10 (max. 10 percent by volume ethanol) is not permitted, e.g. E85 is not permitted. Octane rating • • • RON 95 can be used for normal driving. RON 98 is recommended for optimum performance and minimum fuel consumption. An octane rating lower than RON 95 must not be used. }} 481 STARTING AND DRIVING || When driving in temperatures above +38 °C (100 °F), fuel with the highest octane rating is recommended for optimum performance and fuel economy. IMPORTANT • Use only unleaded petrol to avoid damaging the catalytic converter. • Fuel containing metallic additives must not be used. • Do not use any additives which have not been recommended by Volvo. Related information • • • • Handling of fuel (p. 480) Filling fuel (p. 479) Petrol particle filter (p. 482) Fuel consumption and CO2 emissions (p. 672) Petrol particle filter Petrol cars are fitted with particle filters for more efficient emission control. Particles in the exhaust gases are collected in the petrol particle filter during normal driving. In normal driving conditions, passive regeneration takes place, which leads to the particles being oxidised and burned away. The filter is emptied in this way. If the car is driven at low speed or with repeated cold starts in low outside temperature, active regeneration may be necessary. Regeneration of the particulate filter is automatic and normally takes 10-20 minutes. There may be a smell of burning during regeneration. Use the parking heater in cold weather - the engine then reaches normal operating temperature more quickly. When driving short distances at low speeds in a petrol car The capacity of the emissions system is affected by how the car is driven. It is important to drive varying distances at different speeds to achieve optimal performance. Driving short distances at low speeds (or in cold climates) frequently, where the engine does not reach normal operating temperature, can lead to problems that can eventually cause a malfunction and trigger a warning message. If the vehicle is mostly driven in city traffic, it is important to regu- 482 larly drive at higher speeds to allow the emissions system to regenerate. • The car should be driven on A-roads at speeds in excess of 60 km/h (38 mph) for at least 20 minutes between each refuelling. Related information • Petrol (p. 481) STARTING AND DRIVING Overheating in the engine and drive system Under certain conditions, e.g. hard driving in hilly terrain and hot climate, there is a risk that the engine and drive system may overheat – in particular with a heavy load. • In the event of overheating, the engine's power may be limited temporarily. • Remove any auxiliary lamps from in front of the grille when driving in hot climates. • If the temperature in the engine's cooling system becomes too high then a warning symbol is illuminated and the driver display shows the message Engine temperature High temperature Stop safely. Stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for several minutes and cool down. • • If the message Engine temperature High temperature Turn off engine or Engine coolant Level low, turn off engine is shown, stop the car and switch off the engine. In the event of overheating in the gearbox, an alternative gear shift program will be selected. In addition, a built-in protection function is activated that, amongst other things, illuminates a warning symbol and the driver display shows the message Transmission warm Reduce speed to lower temperature or Transmission hot Stop safely, wait for cooling. Follow the recommendation given, reduce speed or stop the car in a safe way and allow the engine to run at idling speed for several minutes to enable the gearbox to cool down. • If the car overheats, the air conditioning may be switched off temporarily. • Do not turn the engine off immediately you stop after a hard drive. Related information • • • • Topping up coolant (p. 617) Driving with a trailer (p. 489) Preparations for a long trip (p. 476) Gear shift indicator (p. 457) NOTE It is normal for the engine's cooling fan to operate for a time after the engine has been switched off. Symbols in the driver display Symbol Specification High engine temperature. Follow the recommendation given. Low level, coolant. Follow the recommendation given. Gearbox hot/overheated/cooled. Follow the recommendation given. 483 STARTING AND DRIVING Overloading the starter battery The electrical functions in the car load the starter battery to varying degrees. Avoid using the ignition position II when the car is switched off. Instead, use ignition position I - which uses less power. Using jump starting with another battery If the starter battery is discharged then the car can be started with current from another battery. Also, be aware of different accessories that load the electrical system. Do not use functions which use a lot of power when the car is switched off. Examples of such functions are: • • • • ventilation fan headlamps windscreen wiper audio system (high volume). If the starter battery voltage is low, a message is shown in the driver display. The energy-saving function then shuts down certain functions or reduces certain functions such as the ventilation fan and/or audio system. – In which case, charge the starter battery by starting the car and then running it for at least 15 minutes - starter battery charging is more effective during driving than running the engine at idling speed while stationary. Charging point for jump-starting own car. IMPORTANT The car’s charging point is only intended for jump-starting the car itself. The charging point is not intended for jump-starting another car. Using the charging point to jump start another car may cause a fuse to blow, which means the charging point will stop working. Related information • • 484 Starter battery (p. 620) Ignition positions (p. 440) When a fuse has blown the message 12 V Battery Fuse failure Service required is shown in the driver display. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted. When jump-starting the car, the following steps are recommended to avoid short circuits or other damage: STARTING AND DRIVING 1. Set the car's electrical system in ignition position 0. 2. Check that the donor battery has a voltage of 12 V. 3. 4. If the donor battery is installed in another car - switch off the donor car's engine and make sure that the two cars do not touch each other. Connect one of the red jump lead's clamps to the donor battery's positive terminal (1). IMPORTANT Connect the start cable carefully to avoid short circuits with other components in the engine compartment. 5. Open the positive jump-starting point's cover (2). 6. Connect the red jump lead's other clamp onto the car's positive jump-starting point (2). 7. Connect one of the black jump lead's clamps to the donor battery's negative terminal (3). 8. Connect the black jump lead's other clamp onto the car's negative jump-starting point (4). 9. Check that the jump lead clamps are affixed securely so that there are no sparks during the starting attempt. 12. Remove the jump leads in reverse order first the black and then the red. Make sure that none of the black jump lead's clamps comes into contact with the car's positive jump-starting point/donor battery's positive terminal or the clamp connected to the red jump lead. 10. Start the engine of the "donor car" and allow it to run a few minutes at a speed slightly higher than idle approx. 1500 rpm. 11. Start your own car's engine. If the start attempt fails then extend the charging time to 10 minutes, and then make a new start attempt. WARNING • The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can be formed if a jump lead is connected incorrectly, and this can be enough for the battery to explode. • Do not connect the jump leads to any fuel system component or any moving part. Be careful of hot engine parts. • The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns. • If sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes - seek medical attention immediately. • Never smoke near the battery. NOTE When starting the engine in normal conditions the car's electric drive motor is prioritised - the petrol engine remains switched off. This means that after the start knob has been turned clockwise, the electric motor has "started" and the car is ready to move. A started motor is indicated by the driver display's indicator lamps extinguishing and its preset theme illuminating. IMPORTANT Do not touch the connections between cable and car during the starting attempt. There is a risk of sparks forming. NOTE The car cannot be started if the hybrid battery is discharged. }} 485 STARTING AND DRIVING || NOTE If the starter battery has been discharged so much that the car has no normal electrical functions and the engine is then jump-started with an external battery or a battery charger, the Start/stop function may continue to be activated. If the Start/stop function then autostops the engine shortly afterwards, there is a great risk that engine auto-start will fail due to insufficient battery capacity, because the battery has not had the time to recharge. If the car has been jump-started, or if there is insufficient time to charge the battery with a battery charger, the Start/stop function is temporarily deactivated until the battery has been recharged by the car. In an outside temperature of approx. +15 °C (approx. 60 °F), the battery needs to be charged for at least 1 hour by the car. In a lower outside temperature, the charging time may increase to 3–4 hours. The recommendation is to charge the battery using an external battery charger. Related information • • • • 486 Starting the car (p. 438) Ignition positions (p. 440) Adjusting the steering wheel (p. 200) Selecting ignition mode (p. 441) Towbar* Related information The car can be equipped with a towbar that makes it possible to tow e.g. a trailer behind the car. • • • • There may be different towbar variants available for the car. Contact a Volvo dealer for more information. Extendable and retractable towbar* (p. 487) Driving with a trailer (p. 489) Towbar-mounted bicycle rack* (p. 493) Specifications for towbar* (p. 487) IMPORTANT When the engine is switched off, the constant battery voltage to the trailer connector can be switched off automatically so as not to drain the starter battery. IMPORTANT The towball needs regular cleaning and lubrication with grease in order to prevent wear. NOTE When a hitch with a vibration damper is used, the towball must not be lubricated. This also applies when fitting a bicycle rack that is clamped in around the towball. NOTE If the car is equipped with a towbar, there is no rear mounting for a towing eye. * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING Specifications for towbar* Dimensions, mounting points in mm (inches) Dimensions and mounting points for towbar. A 1476 (58,1) B 86 (3,4) C 875 (34,4) D 437,5 (17,2) E See the image above F 273 (10,7) G Ball centre Extendable and retractable towbar* The retractable tow hook is easy to retract or extend as required. In the retracted position, the towbar is completely concealed. WARNING Follow the instructions for retracting and extending the towbar carefully. WARNING Do not press the extend/retract button if a trailer is attached to the towbar. Related information • • Towbar* (p. 486) Towing capacity and towball load (p. 664) Extending the towbar WARNING Avoid standing close to the bumper in the centre behind the car when extending the towing hitch. }} * Option/accessory. 487 STARTING AND DRIVING || 1. 2. Open the tailgate. A button for extending/ retracting the towbar is located on the righthand side at the rear of the cargo area. An indicator lamp in the button must illuminate with a constant orange glow for the extension function to be active. Press and release the button – extension might not start if the button is pressed for too long. > The towbar extends out and down in an unlocked position - the indicator lamp flashes orange. The tow hook is ready to continue moving to the locked position. 3. Move the towbar to its end position, where it is secured and locked in place - the indicator lamp illuminates with a constant orange glow. > The towbar is ready for use. NOTE The towbar must finish the extension procedure before it can then be moved to locked position. This procedure may take several seconds. If the towbar is not fixed in locked position, wait a few seconds and try again. WARNING Take care to secure the trailer's safety cable in the intended bracket. 488 STARTING AND DRIVING NOTE Driving with a trailer 2. When driving with a trailer, there are a number of points that are important to think about regarding the towbar, the trailer and how the load is positioned in the trailer. Power save mode activates after a while and the indicator lamp goes out. The system is reactivated by closing and opening the tailgate. This applies when retracting or extending the towbar. Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories, e.g. towbar, reduces the car's payload by a corresponding weight. If the car detects a connected trailer electrically, the indicator lamp stops illuminating with a constant glow. Lock the towbar by moving it back to its retracted position, where it is locked. > The indicator lamp will now illuminate with a constant glow if the towbar is correctly retracted. Retracting the towbar IMPORTANT Make sure that there is no plug or adapter in the electrical socket when retracting the towbar. 1. Open the tailgate. Press and release the button on the right-hand side at the rear of the cargo area - retraction might not start if the button is pressed for too long. > The towbar automatically lowers in an unlocked position - the indicator lamp in the button flashes orange. Related information • • Driving with a trailer (p. 489) Towbar* (p. 486) The car is supplied with the necessary equipment for towing a trailer. • The car's towbar must be of an approved type. • Distribute the load on the trailer so that the weight on the towbar complies with the specified maximum towball load. Towball load is calculated as part of the car's payload. • Increase the tyre pressure to the recommended pressure for a full load. • The engine is loaded more heavily than usual when driving with a trailer. • Do not tow a heavy trailer when the car is brand new. Wait until it has been driven at least 1000 km (620 miles). • The brakes are loaded much more than usual on long and steep downhill slopes. Downshift to a lower gear when shifting manually and adjust your speed. }} * Option/accessory. 489 STARTING AND DRIVING || • Follow the regulations in force for the permitted speeds and weights. • Maintain a low speed when driving with a trailer up long, steep ascents. • The maximum indicated trailer weight only applies to heights up to 1000 metres above sea level (3280 ft). At higher elevations, the engine output and the vehicle's climbing ability are reduced due to the reduced air density, and the maximum trailer load must therefore be reduced. The weight of the car and trailer must be decreased by 10% for each additional 1000 m (3280 ft) or part thereof. • Avoid driving with a trailer on inclines of more than 12%. NOTE To facilitate towing a trailer on a car with air suspension*, select the Suspension Control Dynamic setting in Individual drive mode. NOTE Extreme weather conditions, driving with a trailer or driving at high altitudes, in combination with poorer fuel quality than recommended, are factors that considerably increase the car's fuel consumption. 490 Trailer connector Level control* An adapter is required if the car's towbar has a 13 pin connector and the trailer has a 7 pin connector. Use an adapter approved by Volvo. Make sure the cable does not drag on the ground. The car's system for level control endeavours to maintain a constant height regardless of load (up to the maximum permissible weight). When the car is stationary the rear of the car lowers slightly, which is normal. IMPORTANT When the engine is switched off, the constant battery voltage to the trailer connector can be switched off automatically so as not to drain the starter battery. When driving in hilly terrain and hot climates Trailer weights Under certain circumstances, there may be a risk of overheating when towing a trailer. If the engine and drive system overheats, a warning symbol comes on in the driver display and a message is displayed. WARNING The automatic gearbox selects the optimum gear depending on load and engine speed. Follow the stated recommendations for trailer weights. Otherwise, the car and trailer may be difficult to control in the event of sudden movement and braking. NOTE The stated maximum permitted trailer weights are those permitted by Volvo. National vehicle regulations can further limit trailer weights and speeds. Towbars can be certified for higher towing weights than the car can actually tow. Steep inclines Do not lock the automatic gearbox in a higher gear than the engine "can cope with" - it is not always a good idea to drive at a high gear with low engine speed. Parking on a hill 1. Depress the brake pedal fully. 2. Activate the parking brake. 3. Select gear position P. 4. Release the brake pedal. Block the wheels with chocks when parking a car with hitched trailer on a hill. * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING Starting on a hill 1. Depress the brake pedal fully. 2. Select gear position D. 3. Releasing the parking brake. 4. Release the brake pedal and start driving off. Related information • • • • • Trailer stability assist* (p. 491) Checking trailer lamps (p. 492) Towing capacity and towball load (p. 664) Overheating in the engine and drive system (p. 483) Adverse driving conditions for engine oil (p. 668) Trailer stability assist* Trailer stability assist function (TSA16) The function of trailer stability assist is to stabilise cars towing trailers in situations where they begin snaking. The function is included in the stability system ESC17. Reasons for snaking The snaking phenomenon can occur with any car/trailer combination. Snaking normally occurs at high speeds. However, there is a risk of it occurring at lower speeds if the trailer is overloaded or the load is improperly distributed, e.g. too far back. In order for snaking to occur, there must be a triggering factor, e.g.: • Car with trailer subjected to a sudden and powerful side wind. • Car with trailer drives on an uneven road surface or in a pothole. • Sweeping steering wheel movements. If snaking has started, it could be difficult or even impossible to suppress. This makes the car/ trailer combination difficult to control and there is a risk that you could, for example, end up in the wrong lane or leave the carriageway. 16 17 Trailer Stability Assist Electronic Stability Control The trailer stability assist function continually monitors the car's movements, particularly lateral movements. If snaking is detected, the front wheels are individually braked. This serves to stabilise the car/trailer combination. This is often enough to help the driver regain control of the car. If snaking is not eliminated the first time that trailer stability assist intervenes, the car/trailer combination is braked with all wheels and engine power is reduced. Once snaking has been gradually suppressed and the car/trailer combination is stable once again, the system stops regulating and the driver once again has full control of the car. NOTE The stability function is deactivated if the driver selects Sport mode by deactivating ESC via the menu system in the centre display. Trailer stability assist may fail to intervene if the driver uses severe steering wheel movements to try to rectify the snaking because in such a situation the system cannot determine whether it is the trailer or the driver causing the snaking. }} * Option/accessory. 491 STARTING AND DRIVING When Trailer Stability Assist (TSA) is operating, the ESC symbol flashes in the driver display. || Related information • • Driving with a trailer (p. 489) Electronic stability control (p. 291) Checking trailer lamps When connecting a trailer - check that all the trailer lamps work before departure. Direction indicators and brake lights on the trailer If one or more of the trailer's direction indicators or brake light bulbs is broken, the driver display shows a symbol and a message. Other lights on the trailer must be checked manually by the driver before setting off. Symbol Message • Trailer turn indicator Right therefore that the trailer is equipped with a rear fog lamp to travel safely. Checking trailer lamps* Automatic checking After a trailer is connected electrically, it is possible to check that the trailer lamps are working via an automatic lamp activation. The function helps the driver check that the trailer lamps are working before starting off. The car must be switched off to perform the check. 1. When a trailer is connected to the towbar, the Automatic Trailer Lamp Check message is shown in the driver display. 2. Confirm the message by pressing the righthand steering wheel keypad's O button. > The lamp check starts. 3. Exit the car to check lamp functionality. > All trailer lamps start to flash - then the lamps are switched on one at a time. 4. Visually check that all lamps available on the trailer are operational. 5. After a moment, all lamps on the trailer flash again. > The check is complete. turn indicator malfunction • Trailer turn indicator Left turn indicator malfunction • Trailer brake light Malfunction If any lamp for the trailer's direction indicators is broken, the driver display symbol for direction indicators will also flash more quickly than normal. Rear fog lamp on trailer When connecting the trailer, the rear fog lamp may not light up on the car. In such cases, the rear fog lamp function switches to the trailer. Upon activation of the rear fog lamp, check 492 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING Switching off automatic checking The automatic checking function can be switched off in the centre display. 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press My Car 3. Deselect Automatic Trailer Lamp Check. Lights and Lighting. Manual checking If the automatic checking is switched off then it is possible to start the check manually. 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press My Car 3. Select Manual Trailer Lamp Check. > The lamp check starts. Exit the car to check lamp functionality. Lights and Lighting. Related information • Driving with a trailer (p. 489) Towbar-mounted bicycle rack* When using a bicycle rack, the bicycle racks that Volvo has developed are recommended. The car's driving characteristics are affected when a bicycle rack is fitted on the towbar. For example, due to: This is in order to avoid damage to the car and in order to achieve the maximum possible safety during a journey. Volvo's bicycle racks are available for purchase at authorised Volvo dealers. • • • • Carefully follow the instructions enclosed with the bicycle rack. • Bicycle rack including load must weigh a maximum of 75 kg (165 pounds). • The bicycle rack may be designed for a maximum of three bicycles. WARNING Incorrect use of the bicycle rack may cause damage to the towbar and car. The bicycle rack can loosen from the towbar if it • • is incorrectly fitted on the towball • is used for carrying something other than bicycles. is overloaded, see the bicycle rack's instructions for maximum load weight increased weight reduced acceleration capacity reduced ground clearance changed braking capacity. Recommendations for loading bicycles on the bicycle rack The larger the distance between the load's centre of gravity and the towball, the greater the load on the towbar. Load according to the following recommendations: • Fit the heaviest bicycle furthest in, closest to the car. • Keep the load symmetrical and as close to the centre of the car as possible, e.g. by loading the bicycles facing alternately if several bicycles are loaded. • Remove loose objects from the bicycle for transportation, e.g. bicycle basket, battery, child seat. Partly to reduce the load on the towbar and bicycle rack, and partly to reduce the wind resistance, which affects fuel consumption. • Do not use protective covers on the bicycles. This may affect manoeuvrability, impair visibil}} * Option/accessory. 493 STARTING AND DRIVING ity and increase fuel consumption. It may also lead to an increased load on the towbar. || Related information • Towbar* (p. 486) Towing Related information During towing, the car is towed by another vehicle by means of a towline. • • • • Towing a Twin Engine is not permitted as this will damage the electric motor. Instead, the car must be transported raised with all the wheels on a recovery vehicle's platform, neither of the wheel pairs may have road contact. • Fitting and removing the towing eye (p. 495) Hazard warning flashers (p. 158) Recovery (p. 496) Using jump starting with another battery (p. 484) Selecting ignition mode (p. 441) When towing another car Towing a car requires a lot of energy - use the Constant AWD drive mode. This then charges the hybrid battery, in combination with improving the car's driving characteristics and roadholding. Find out the statutory maximum speed limit for towing before the towing begins. Jump starting Tow-starting the motor is not permitted as this will damage the electric motor. Use a donor battery if the starter battery is discharged and the engine does not start. IMPORTANT The electric drive motor and the catalytic converter may be damaged during attempts to tow-start the car. 494 * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING Fitting and removing the towing eye 3. Use the towing eye if the car shall tow another vehicle. The towing eye is screwed into a threaded socket behind a cover on the right-hand side of the rear bumper. Screw in the towing eye until it reaches its end stop. NOTE If the car is equipped with a towbar, there is no rear mounting for a towing eye. Fitting the towing eye Remove the cover – press on the marking with a finger while you fold out the opposite side/corner. > The cover pivots around its centre line and can then be removed. Screw the eye in firmly. For example, thread through the wheel bolt wrench* and use it as a lever. IMPORTANT It is important that the towing eye is firmly screwed into place - right in until it stops. Take out the towing eye from the foam block under the floor in the cargo area. Removing the towing eye – Unscrew and remove the towing eye after use and return it to its place in the foam block. Finish by refitting the cover onto the bumper. Related information • • • Towing (p. 494) Recovery (p. 496) Tool kit (p. 569) * Option/accessory. 495 STARTING AND DRIVING Recovery WARNING For recovery, the car is taken away with the help of another vehicle. No one/nothing is allowed to remain behind the recovery vehicle while the car pulled up onto the flatbed platform. Call a recovery service for recovery assistance. The towing eye can be used to pull the car up onto a recovery vehicle with a flatbed platform. Related information • Fitting and removing the towing eye (p. 495) HomeLink®*18 HomeLink®19 is a programmable remote control, integrated in the car's electrical system, which can remotely control up to three different devices (e.g. garage door opener, alarm system, outdoor and indoor lighting) and thereby replace the remote controls for them. General IMPORTANT Note that cars with Twin Engine must always be transported raised up with all the wheels on the recovery vehicle's platform. Applies to cars with level control*: If the car is equipped with air suspension, this must be disabled before the car is raised. Deactivating the function via the centre display. 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press My Car Suspension. 3. Select Disable Leveling Control. Parking Brake and The car's position and ground clearance determine whether it is possible to pull it up onto a flatbed platform. If the slope of the recovery vehicle's ramp is too steep, or if the ground clearance under the car is inadequate, then the car may be damaged if you try to pull it up. The car should then be lifted using the recovery vehicle's lifting device. 496 The figure is schematic - the version may vary. Button 1 Button 2 Button 3 Indicator lamp HomeLink® is supplied built-in to the interior rearview mirror. The HomeLink® panel consists of * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING three programmable buttons and one indicator lamp in the mirror glass. For more information about HomeLink®, visit www.HomeLink.com or call 00 8000 466 354 65 (or the toll number +49 6838 907 277)20. Save the original remote controls for future programming (e.g. when changing to another car or for use in another vehicle). It is also recommended that the programming for the buttons is deleted when the car is sold. Related information • • • Using HomeLink®* (p. 499) Programming HomeLink®*21 1. Follow these instructions to program HomeLink®, reset all programming or reprogram individual buttons. NOTE In certain vehicles the ignition must be switched on or in "accessory position" before HomeLink® can be programmed or used. If possible, fit new batteries in the remote control that shall be replaced by HomeLink® for faster programming and improved transmission of the radio signal. The HomeLink® buttons should be reset before programming. Aim the remote control towards the HomeLink® button to be programmed and hold it approx. 2-8 cm (approx. 1-3 inches) from the button. Do not obstruct the indicator lamp on HomeLink®. Note: The ability of some remote controls to program HomeLink® is improved at a distance of approx. 15-20 cm (approx. 6-12 inches). Bear this in mind if problems occur with the programming. 2. Press and hold depressed both the button on the remote control and the button to be reprogrammed on HomeLink®. Programming HomeLink®* (p. 497) Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 500) WARNING While programming HomeLink®, the garage door or gate being programmed may activate. For this reason, make sure that nobody is in the vicinity of the door or gate while programming is in progress. The car should be outside the garage while a garage door opener is being programmed. 18 19 20 21 Applies to certain markets. HomeLink and the HomeLink house symbol are registered trademarks of Gentex Corporation. Note that the toll-free number may not be available depending on operator. Applies to certain markets. }} * Option/accessory. 497 STARTING AND DRIVING || 3. 00 8000 466 354 65 (or the toll number +49 6838 907 277)23. Do not release the buttons until the indicator lamp has switched from flashing slowly (approx. once per second) to either flashing quickly (approx. 10 times per second) or illuminating with a constant glow. > If the indicator lamp illuminates with a constant glow: Indication that the programming has finished. Press the programmed button twice to activate. If the indicator lamp flashes quickly: The device to be programmed to HomeLink® may have a security function that requires extra steps. Test by pressing the programmed button twice to see whether the programming is working. Otherwise, continue with the following steps. Reprogramming individual buttons To reprogram an individual HomeLink® button, proceed as follows: 4. 5. 6. 498 Button designation and colour varies between manufacturers. Note that the toll-free number may not be available depending on operator. Press the desired button and hold it depressed for approx. 20 seconds. 2. Once the indicator lamp on HomeLink® starts to flash slowly, programming can continue as normal. Locate programming button22 on the receiver for the garage door or similar. It is normally located close to the antenna's bracket on the receiver. Depress and release the receiver's programming button once. The programming must be completed within 30 seconds of the button being depressed. Press and release the button on HomeLink® that you want to program. Repeat the sequence of pressing/holding/releasing a second time and, depending on the receiver model, even a third time. > Programming is now be complete and the garage door, gate or similar should now be activated when the programmed button is depressed. In the event of programming problems, contact HomeLink® at www.HomeLink.com, or call 22 23 1. Note: If the button to be reprogrammed is not programmed with a new unit, it will resume the previously saved programming. Resetting the HomeLink® buttons It is only possible to reset all of the HomeLink® buttons at the same time, not each button individually. Individual buttons can only be reprogrammed. – Press and hold depressed the outer buttons (1 and 3) on HomeLink® for approx. 10 seconds. > When the indicator lamp changes over from a constant glow to starting to flash, the buttons are reset and ready to be reprogrammed. STARTING AND DRIVING Related information • • • Using HomeLink®* (p. 499) HomeLink®* (p. 496) Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 500) Using HomeLink®*24 WARNING When HomeLink® is fully programmed it can be used in place of the separate original remote controls. Depress the programmed button. The garage door, gate, alarm system or similar is activated (may take a few seconds). If the button is depressed for more than 20 seconds then the reprogramming is started. The indicator lamp illuminates or flashes when the button has been depressed. Naturally the original remote controls can still be used in parallel with HomeLink® if required. • If HomeLink® is used to control a garage door or gate, ensure that nobody is near the door or gate while it is in motion. • Do not use HomeLink® for any garage door that does not have safety stop and safety reverse. Related information • • • HomeLink®* (p. 496) Programming HomeLink®* (p. 497) Type approval for HomeLink®* (p. 500) NOTE When the ignition has been switched off, HomeLink® works for at least 7 minutes. NOTE HomeLink® cannot be used if the car is locked and the alarm is armed* from the outside. 24 Applies to certain markets. * Option/accessory. 499 STARTING AND DRIVING Type approval for HomeLink®*25 Type approval for EU Gentex Corporation hereby declares that HomeLink® Model UAHL5 complies with the Radio equipment directive 2014/53/EU. Compass* The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mirror has an integrated display that shows the compass direction26 in which the front of the car is pointing. Wavelength within which the radio equipment functions: • • • • • The compass is activated automatically when the car is started. 868.00MHz-868.60MHz <25mW E.R.P. 868.70MHz-868.20MHz <25mW E.R.P. To deactivate/activate the compass manually: 869.40MHz-869.65MHz <25mW E.R.P. – 869.70MHz-870.00MHz <25mW E.R.P. Certificate holder address: Gentex Corporation, 600 North Centennial Street, Zeeland MI 49464, USA Related information • HomeLink®* (p. 496) The upper right-hand corner of the rearview mirror has an integrated display that shows the compass direction27 in which the front of the car is pointing. Activating and deactivating the compass 433.05MHz-434.79MHz <10mW E.R.P. For more information, see support.volvocars.com. Activating and deactivating the compass* Depress the button on the underside of the rearview mirror using e.g. a paper clip. Related information Rearview mirror with compass. • • Compass* (p. 500) Calibrating the compass* (p. 501) Eight different compass directions are shown by their English abbreviations: N (north), NE (north east), E (east), SE (south east), S (south), SW (south west), W (west) and NW (north west). Related information 25 26 27 500 • Activating and deactivating the compass* (p. 500) • Calibrating the compass* (p. 501) Applies to certain markets. A rearview mirror with a compass is available as an option on certain markets and models only. A rearview mirror with a compass is available as an option on certain markets and models only. * Option/accessory. STARTING AND DRIVING Calibrating the compass* 7. Cars with heated windscreen*: If the character C is shown in the display when the heated windscreen is activated, perform the calibration in accordance with point 6 above with the heated windscreen activated. Proceed as follows to perform calibration: 8. Repeat the above procedure as necessary. 1. Stop the car in a large open area free from steel structures and high-voltage power lines. Related information 2. Start the car and switch off all electrical equipment (air conditioning, wipers, etc.) and ensure that all doors are closed. The earth is divided into 15 magnetic zones. The compass28 should be calibrated if the car is moved between several magnetic zones. NOTE • • Magnetic zones. 4. Press the button repeatedly until the required magnetic zone (1–15) is shown. See the map of magnetic zones for the compass. 5. Wait until the display returns to showing the character C, or hold the button on the underside of the rearview mirror depressed for approx. 6 seconds until the character C is shown. 6. Drive slowly in a circle at a speed of no more than 10 km/h (6 mph) until a compass direction is shown in the display, indicating that calibration is complete. Then drive a further 2 circles to fine-tune calibration. Calibration may fail or not start at all if electrical equipment is not switched off. 3. 28 Hold the button on the underside of the rearview mirror depressed for approx. 3 seconds (use a paper clip, for example). The number for the current magnetic zone is shown. Compass* (p. 500) Activating and deactivating the compass* (p. 500) A rearview mirror with a compass is available as an option on certain markets and models only. * Option/accessory. 501 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Sound, media and Internet Related information The audio and media system consists of media player and radio. You can also connect a phone via Bluetooth to use handsfree functions or play music wirelessly in the car. When the car is connected to the Internet you can also use apps for media playback. • • • • • • • • • • Media player (p. 515) Radio (p. 509) Phone (p. 530) Internet-connected car* (p. 539) Apps (p. 506) Voice recognition (p. 144) Ignition positions (p. 440) Driver distraction (p. 39) Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 605) License agreement for audio and media (p. 547) Audio settings The audio system is preset for optimum sound reproduction, but it can also be adapted. The volume is normally adjusted with the volume control below the centre display or with the righthand steering wheel keypad. This applies, for example, during playback of music, radio, ongoing phone calls and active traffic messages. Optimum sound reproduction The audio system is pre-calibrated for optimum sound reproduction by means of digital signal processing. This calibration takes into account loudspeakers, amplifiers, passenger compartment acoustics, listener position, etc., for each combination of car model and audio system. There is also a dynamic calibration that takes into account the setting of the volume control and vehicle speed. Overview of audio and media Personal preferences Control the functions with your voice, steering wheel keypad or the centre display. The number of speakers and amplifiers depends on which audio system the car is equipped with. Various settings are available in the top view under Settings Sound depending on the car's audio system. System updating The audio and media system is continuously improved. When the car is connected to the Internet, it is possible to download system updates for optimal functionality, see support.volvocars.com. 504 * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Premium Sound* (Bowers & Wilkins) Related information • Tone – settings for bass, treble, equalizer, • • • • • • etc. • Balance - balance between right/left loudspeakers and balance between front/rear loudspeakers. • System Volumes – adjusts volume in the various systems of the car, e.g. Voice Control, Park Assist and Phone Ringtone. High Performance Pro* (Harman Kardon) • Equaliser – equalizer setting. • Balance - balance between right/left loudspeakers and balance between front/rear loudspeakers. Sound experience* (p. 505) Media player (p. 515) Settings for voice recognition (p. 148) Settings for phone (p. 538) Sound, media and Internet (p. 504) Internet-connected car* (p. 539) Sound experience* Sound experience is an app that provides access to further audio settings. Sound Experience is opened from the app view in the centre display. The following settings can be defined, depending on the audio system fitted to the car: Premium Sound* (Bowers & Wilkins) • Studio - the sound can be optimised for Driver, All and Rear. • Individual stage - surround sound mode with settings for intensity and enclosure. • Concert hall - reproduces the acoustics from Gothenburg's Concert Hall. • System Volumes – adjusts volume in the various systems of the car, e.g. Voice Control, Park Assist and Phone Ringtone. High Performance • Tone – settings for bass, treble, equalizer, etc. • Balance - balance between right/left loudspeakers and balance between front/rear loudspeakers. • System Volumes – adjusts volume in the various systems of the car, e.g. Voice Control, Park Assist and Phone Ringtone. Recreating the acoustics from Gothenburg Concert Hall. }} * Option/accessory. 505 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || High Performance Pro* (Harman Kardon) • Seat Optimisation - the sound can be optimised for Driver, All and Rear. • Surround - surround sound mode with level settings. • Tone – settings for bass, treble, equalizer, etc. Apps The app view contains applications (apps) that give access to certain of the car's services. Swipe from right to left1 across the centre display's screen in order to access the app view from the home view. Apps that have been downloaded (third-party apps) and apps for embedded functions, such as FM radio, are found here. Related information • • Audio settings (p. 504) Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 114) App view (generic image, basic apps vary by market and model) Some basic apps are always available. More apps such as web radio and music services can be downloaded when the car is connected to the Internet. Certain apps are only available for use if the car is connected to the Internet. 1 506 Applies to left-hand drive cars. For right-hand drive cars - swipe in the opposite direction. * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Start an app by pressing the app in the centre display's app view. All the apps used should be updated to the latest version. Related information • • • • • • • • Downloading apps (p. 507) Updating apps (p. 508) Deleting apps (p. 508) Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 524) Android Auto* (p. 528) Downloading apps NOTE User terms and conditions and data sharing (p. 545) Tap on the row for an app in order to expand in the list and get more information about the app. 4. Select Install in order to start the download and installation of the desired app. > The status of the download and installation is shown while it is in progress. Data download may affect other services that transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect on other services is experienced as disruptive then the download can be interrupted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate to switch off or interrupt other services. Internet-connected car* (p. 539) Storage space on hard disk (p. 546) 3. New apps can be downloaded when the car is connected to the Internet. NOTE When downloading using a phone, pay extra attention to the data traffic costs. 1. 2. Open the Download Centre app in the app view. Select New apps in order to open a list of apps that are available but not installed in the car. A message is shown if a download cannot be started for the moment. The app will remain in the list and it is possible to try to start a download again. Cancelling the download – Tap on Abort to cancel a download in progress. Note that only the download can be cancelled, when the installation phase has started, this cannot be cancelled. Related information Apps (p. 506) • • • • • Deleting apps (p. 508) • Storage space on hard disk (p. 546) Updating apps (p. 508) Internet-connected car* (p. 539) Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 605) * Option/accessory. 507 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Updating apps The apps can be updated when the car is connected to the Internet. NOTE Data download may affect other services that transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect on other services is experienced as disruptive then the download can be interrupted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate to switch off or interrupt other services. NOTE When downloading using a phone, pay extra attention to the data traffic costs. If an app is being used during an ongoing update, it will be restarted in order for the installation to be completed. Update all 1. Open the Download Centre app in the app view. 2. Select Install all. > Updating is started. Update some 1. Open the Download Centre app in the app view. 2. Select Application updates in order to open a list of all available updates. 3. Locate the desired app and select Install. > Updating is started. Deleting apps Apps can be uninstalled when the car is connected to the Internet. An app that is being used must be closed in order for the uninstallation to be completed. 1. Open the Download Centre app in the app view. Deleting apps (p. 508) 2. Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 605) Select Application updates in order to open a list of all installed apps. 3. Locate the desired app and select Uninstall in order to start the uninstallation of the app. > When the app has been uninstalled, it disappears from the list. Related information • • • • • Apps (p. 506) Downloading apps (p. 507) Internet-connected car* (p. 539) Related information • • • • • 508 Apps (p. 506) Downloading apps (p. 507) Updating apps (p. 508) Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 605) Internet-connected car* (p. 539) * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Radio It is possible to listen to the FM bands and to digital radio (DAB)*. When the car is online, it is also possible to listen to Internet radio. • • • • RDS radio (p. 513) Start radio Internet-connected car* (p. 539) The radio is started from the centre display app view. Voice control of radio and media (p. 147) 1. Open the required frequency band (e.g. FM) from the app view. Changing radio band and radio station (p. 510) 2. Select a radio station. Setting radio favourites (p. 511) Related information Media player (p. 515) The radio can be operated using voice recognition, the steering wheel keypad or the centre display. Related information • • • • • Start radio (p. 509) Settings for radio (p. 512) Digital radio* (p. 514) • • Radio (p. 509) Searching for radio stations (p. 511) }} * Option/accessory. 509 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET • Changing radio band and radio station (p. 510) Changing radio band and radio station 2. Select playback from Stations, Favourites, Genres or Ensembles2. • • • Setting radio favourites (p. 511) There are instructions here for changing the radio band, the list in the radio band and the radio station in the selected list. 3. Tap on the desired station from the list. Settings for radio (p. 512) Voice control of radio and media (p. 147) Changing radio band Swipe to show the app view in the centre display and select the preferred radio band (e.g. FM), or open the driver display's app menu using the right-hand keypad on the steering wheel and make your selection from there. Changing lists within the frequency band Favourites - only plays back selected favourite channels. Genres — only plays back channels broadcasting the selected genre/programme type, e.g. pop or classical. Changing stations within the selected list – Press on or under the centre display or the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. > The highlight moves up or down one place in the selected playlist. You can also change radio station in the selected list via the centre display. Related information 1. 2 510 Press Library. • • • • • • Radio (p. 509) Searching for radio stations (p. 511) Voice control of radio and media (p. 147) Setting radio favourites (p. 511) Settings for radio (p. 512) Application menu in driver display (p. 102) Only applies to digital radio (DAB*). * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Searching for radio stations Manual tuning The radio automatically compiles a station list of the radio stations within the area that are transmitting the strongest signals. Setting radio favourites It is possible to add a radio channel to the Radio favourites app and the favourites list for the radio band (e.g. FM). Instructions on how to add and remove favourites can be found below. Radio Favourites Radio Favourites shows saved favourites from all frequency bands. On changing over to manual tuning, the radio no longer changes frequency automatically when reception is poor. The parameters you can search on depend on the frequency band selected: – FM — station, genre and frequency. Press Manual tuning, pull the control or or . With a long press, the press search jumps to the next available station in the frequency band. It is also possible to use the right keypad on the steering wheel. • • DAB* — ensembles and stations. 1. Press Library. Related information 2. Press . > Search view with keyboard is opened. 3. Enter the search terms. > Searching takes place with each input of a character and the search results are shown by category. • • • • • Radio (p. 509) Start radio (p. 509) Changing radio band and radio station (p. 510) Voice control of radio and media (p. 147) Settings for radio (p. 512) 1. Open the app Radio favourites from the app view. 2. Tap on the desired station in the list to start listening. Adding and removing radio favourites – Tap on to add or remove a channel to or from frequency band favourites and Radio Favourites. When a favourite is saved from a station list, the radio will automatically search for the best frequency. But if a favourite is saved from a manual station search, the radio does not automatically change to a stronger frequency. When you remove a favourite, it will also be removed from frequency band favourites. }} * Option/accessory. 511 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || Related information • • • • • • • Radio (p. 509) Settings for radio Start radio (p. 509) There are various radio functions to activate and deactivate. Searching for radio stations (p. 511) Cancelling traffic messages Changing radio band and radio station (p. 510) The broadcast of traffic messages etc. can be temporarily interrupted by tapping on in the right-hand steering wheel keypad or by tapping on Cancel in the centre display. Voice control of radio and media (p. 147) Settings for radio (p. 512) Application menu in driver display (p. 102) Activating and deactivating radio functions Drag down the top view and select Settings Media and the desired radio band to view available functions. FM Radio • Show Broadcast Information: shows information on programme content, artists, etc. • Freeze Program Name: select to stop the programme service name from scrolling continuously. Instead it freezes after 20 seconds. • Select Announcements: - Local Interruptions: interrupts the current media playback and broadcasts information about traffic disruptions in the neighbourhood. Playback of previous media source is resumed when the message is finished. The Local Interruptions function is a geographically restricted version of the Traffic Announcements function. The Traffic 512 Announcements function must be activated at the same time. - News : interrupts the current media playback and broadcasts news. Playback of previous media source is resumed when the news broadcast is finished. - Alarm: interrupts the current media playback and sends alerts about major accidents and disasters. Playback of previous media source is resumed when the message is finished. - Traffic Announcements: interrupts the current media playback and broadcasts information about traffic disruptions. Playback of previous media source is resumed when the message is finished. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET source is resumed when the message is finished. DAB* (digital radio) • Sort Services: option for how channels will be sorted. Either alphabetically or by service number. - Traffic Flash: receives information about traffic disruptions. • DAB To DAB Handover: starts the function - News Flash: receives news. for linking within DAB. If reception of a radio channel is lost, another channel is found automatically in another channel group (ensemble). - Transport Flash: receives information about public transport, e.g. ferry and train timetables. - Warning/Services: receives information about incidents of lower significance than the Alarm function, e.g. power failures. • DAB To FM Handover: starts the function for linking between DAB and FM. If reception of a radio channel is lost, an alternative FM frequency is searched for automatically. • Show Broadcast Information: select to show radio text or selected types of radio text, e.g. artist. • Show Program Related Images: select whether or not to show images for programmes on the screen. • Select Announcements: select the types of messages to be received while DAB is playing. Selected messages will interrupt the current media playback to play back the message. Playback of previous media source is resumed when the message is finished. - Alarm: interrupts the current media playback and sends alerts about major accidents and disasters. Playback of previous media RDS radio RDS (Radio Data System) means that the radio automatically changes to the strongest transmitter. RDS provides the ability to receive e.g. traffic information and to search for certain programme types. RDS links FM transmitters into a network. An FM transmitter in such a network sends information that gives an RDS radio the following functions: • Switch automatically to a stronger transmitter if reception in the area is poor. • Search for programme category, e.g. programme types or traffic information. • Receive text information on current radio programme. Related information • • • Radio (p. 509) Digital radio* (p. 514) Symbols in the centre display's status bar (p. 123) NOTE Some radio stations do not use RDS or only selected parts of its functionality. When broadcasting news or traffic messages, the radio can switch stations, interrupting the audio source currently in use. For example, if the CD player* is in use, it is paused. The radio returns to the previous audio source and volume when the set programme type is no longer broadcast. To go back earlier, press on the right-hand steering wheel keypad or tap Cancel in the centre display. }} * Option/accessory. 513 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || Related information • • Radio (p. 509) Settings for radio (p. 512) Digital radio* (DAB3) Digital radio is a digital broadcasting system for radio. The radio supports DAB, DAB + and DMB4. The radio can be operated using voice recognition, the steering wheel keypad or the centre display. The digital radio app is launched from app view in the centre display. DAB subchannel Secondary components are usually named subchannels. These are temporary and can contain e.g. translations of the main programme into other languages. Subchannels are indicated with an arrow symbol in the channel list. Related information • • • • • • Link between FM and digital radio* (p. 515) Changing radio band and radio station (p. 510) Searching for radio stations (p. 511) Setting radio favourites (p. 511) Voice control of radio and media (p. 147) Settings for radio (p. 512) Digital radio is played back in the same way as other radio bands, such as FM. Besides the option to select playback from Stations, Favourites and Genres, there is also the option to select playback from subchannels and Ensembles. An ensemble is a set of radio channels (a channel group) broadcasting on the same frequency. In the cases where the radio channel transmits its logotype, it is downloaded and shown beside the station name (download time varies). 3 4 514 Digital Audio Broadcasting Digital Multimedia Broadcasting * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Link between FM and digital radio* Media player Related information The function enables the digital radio (DAB) to switch from a channel with poor or no reception to the same channel in another channel group (ensemble) with better reception, within DAB and/or between DAB and FM. The media player can play back audio from the CD player* and from external audio sources connected via the USB port or Bluetooth. It can also play back video format via the USB port. • • • • • • • • • • DAB to DAB and DAB to FM linking 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press Media 3. Tick/untick DAB To DAB Handover and/or DAB To FM Handover in order to activate/ deactivate the respective functions. When the car is connected to the internet, it is also possible to listen to web radio, audio books and music services via apps. DAB. Media playback (p. 516) Controlling and changing media (p. 517) Searching media (p. 518) Apps (p. 506) Radio (p. 509) CD player* (p. 519) Video (p. 520) Media via Bluetooth® (p. 521) Media via USB port (p. 522) Internet-connected car* (p. 539) Related information • • • Digital radio* (p. 514) Radio (p. 509) Settings for radio (p. 512) The media player is operated from the centre display, but several functions can be operated using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad or voice control. The radio is operated in the media player and is described in a separate section. * Option/accessory. 515 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Media playback The media player is controlled from the centre display. Several functions can also be operated using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad or voice control. The media player also operates the radio, which is described in a separate section. Starting the media source CD* 1. Insert a CD. Bluetooth connected device 1. Activate Bluetooth in the media source. 2. Open the app CD from the app view. 2. Connect media source. 3. Select what to play back. > Playback begins. 3. Start playback from the connected media source. USB memory 1. Insert the USB memory. 4. Open the app Bluetooth from the app view. > Playback begins. 2. Open the app USB from the app view. 3. Select what to play back. > Playback begins. Media with Internet connection Play back media from Internet-connected apps: Mp3 player and iPod® NOTE To start playback from iPod, use the iPod app (not USB). When an iPod is used as audio source, the car's audio and media system has a menu structure that is similar to the iPod player's own menu structure. App view. (Generic image, basic apps vary by market and model.) 516 1. Connect media source. 2. Start playback from the connected media source. 3. Open the app (iPod, USB) from the app view. > Playback begins. 1. Connect the car to the Internet. 2. Open the current app from the app view. > Playback begins. Read the separate section on how apps are downloaded. Video 1. Connect media source. 2. Open the app USB from the app view. 3. Tap on the title of the desired item to play back. > Playback begins. Apple CarPlay CarPlay is described in a separate section. Android Auto Android Auto is described in a separate section. * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Related information • Handling the application menu in the driver display (p. 103) • • • • Radio (p. 509) • • • • • • • Downloading apps (p. 507) Controlling and changing media (p. 517) Connecting a device via USB port (p. 522) Connecting a device via Bluetooth® (p. 521) Controlling and changing media The playback of media can be controlled with voice control, steering wheel keypad or the centre display. Change track/song - tap on the desired track in the centre display, press on or under the centre display or on the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. The media player can be operated by voice recognition, from the steering wheel keypad or the centre display. Fast forward/move in time - tap on the time axis in the centre display and drag sideways, or press and hold or under the centre display or on the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. Changing media - select from previous sources in the app, in the app view, press on the desired app or select with the steering wheel's right-hand keypad via the app menu . Internet-connected car* (p. 539) Video (p. 520) Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 524) Library - tap on the button to play back from the library. Android Auto* (p. 528) Voice control of radio and media (p. 147) Compatible media formats (p. 523) Shuffle - tap on the button to shuffle the playback order. Volume - turn the control knob under the centre display or press on the steering wheel's right-hand keypad in order to increase or decrease the volume. Play/pause - tap on the image belonging to the song being played back, the physical button on the steering under the centre display or wheel's right-hand keypad. }} * Option/accessory. 517 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Similar - tap on the button in order to use Gracenote to search for similar music on the USB device and to create a playlist from it. The playlist can contain a maximum of 50 songs. || Searching media It is possible to search by artist, composer, song titles, album, video, audio book, playlist and, when the car is connected to the Internet, podcasts (digital media via Internet). • • Media playback (p. 516) Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display (p. 128) Change device - tap on the button in order to switch between USB devices when several are connected. Related information • • • • • • Media player (p. 515) Searching media (p. 518) Audio settings (p. 504) Apps (p. 506) Gracenote® (p. 519) Voice control of radio and media (p. 147) 1. . Press > Search view with keyboard is opened. 2. Enter the search terms. 3. Press Search. > Connected devices are searched and the search results are listed by category. Swipe sideways across the screen to show each category separately. Related information • • 518 Media player (p. 515) Internet-connected car* (p. 539) * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Gracenote® Gracenote identifies artist, album, song titles and associated images, which are shown during playback. Gracenote MusicID® is a standard for music recognition. Information on the music can be presented by means of the identification and analysis of the metadata in the music files. Sometimes metadata from different sources can be inconsistent or inadequate. Updating Gracenote CD player* The content of the Gracenote database is updated continuously. Download the latest update for optimal functionality. For information and download, see support.volvocars.com. The media player can play back CD discs with compatible audio files. Related information • • • Media playback (p. 516) License agreement for audio and media (p. 547) Voice control of radio and media (p. 147) Gracenote has support for phonetic processing of artist name, album titles and genres, and in this way, voice control can be used to play back music. 1. Press Settings in the top view. Disc insert and eject slot. 2. Press Media Disc eject button. 3. Select settings for Gracenote data: Gracenote®. • Gracenote® Online Search - searches in Gracenote's online database for playing media. • Gracenote® Multiple Results - selects Related information • • • Media playback (p. 516) Voice control of radio and media (p. 147) Compatible media formats (p. 523) how to display Gracenote data if there are more than one search results. 1 - the file's original data are used. 2 - Gracenote data are used. 3 - Gracenote or original data can be selected. • None - no results are shown. * Option/accessory. 519 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Video Playing a video Playing back DivX® Videos on USB-connected devices can be played back using the media player. Videos are played using the USB app in the app view. No picture is shown when the car starts to move, but only the audio is played back. The picture is shown again when the car is stationary. 1. Connecting a media source (USB device). This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play back purchased DivX Video-onDemand (VOD) films. 2. Open the app USB from the app view. 1. Press Settings in the top view. 3. Tap on the title of the desired item to play back. > Playback begins. 2. Tap Video DivX® VOD and retrieve the registration code. 3. Go to vod.divx.com for more information and to complete the registration. Information on compatible formats for media can be found in a separate section. Related information • • • • 520 Playing a video (p. 520) Playing back DivX® (p. 520) Settings for video (p. 521) Compatible media formats (p. 523) Related information • • • • Video (p. 520) Playing back DivX® (p. 520) Settings for video (p. 521) Compatible media formats (p. 523) Related information • • • • Video (p. 520) Playing a video (p. 520) Settings for video (p. 521) Compatible media formats (p. 523) SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Settings for video Media via Bluetooth® Connecting a device via Bluetooth® It is possible to change certain video playback settings, e.g. language. The car's media player is equipped with Bluetooth and can wirelessly play audio files from external Bluetooth devices, such as mobile phones and tablets. Connect a Bluetooth® device to the car for wireless playback of media and to provide the car with an Internet connection where possible. With the video player in full screen mode, or by opening the top view and pressing Settings Video, the following can be adjusted: Audio Language, Off and Subtitle Language. Related information • Video (p. 520) For the media player to be able to play back audio files wirelessly from an external device, the device must first be connected to the car via Bluetooth. Related information • Connecting a device via Bluetooth® (p. 521) • Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 531) • • Media playback (p. 516) Compatible media formats (p. 523) Many phones on the market now have wireless Bluetooth® technology, but not all of them are fully compatible with the car. For information on compatibility, see support.volvocars.com. The procedure for connecting a media device is the same as for connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth®. Related information • • • Media via Bluetooth® (p. 521) Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 531) Media playback (p. 516) 521 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Media via USB port Connecting a device via USB port An external audio source, e.g. an iPod® or MP3 player, can be connected to the audio system via the car's USB port. An external audio source, e.g. an iPod® or MP3 player, can be connected to the audio system via one of the car's USB ports. Devices with rechargeable batteries are recharged when connected via USB and the ignition is in position I, II or the engine is running. The phone must be connected to the USB port with white frame (when there are two USB ports) when using Apple CarPlay* and Android Auto*. • • Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 524) Android Auto* (p. 528) The content of the external source can be loaded more quickly if it only consists of compatible formats. Video files can also be played back via the USB port. Certain MP3 players have their own file system that the car does not support. Related information • • • • • • • Connecting a device via USB port (p. 522) Media playback (p. 516) Video (p. 520) Ignition positions (p. 440) Technical specifications for USB devices (p. 523) Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 524) Android Auto* (p. 528) USB inputs (type A) in the tunnel console. Allow the cable to lie forwards so that it is not trapped when the lid is closed. Related information • • • • • 522 Media playback (p. 516) Media via USB port (p. 522) Media player (p. 515) Technical specifications for USB devices (p. 523) Technical specifications for USB devices (p. 523) * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Technical specifications for USB devices The following specifications must be met to allow the contents of the USB devices to be read. No folder structure will be shown in the centre display during playback. Compatible media formats Format File extension The following file formats must be used for media playback. AVI .avi Audio files AVI (DivX) .avi, .divx ASF .asf, .wmv MKV .mkv Format File extension Codec MP3 .mp3 MPEG1 Layer III, MPEG2 Layer III, MP3 Pro (mp3 compatible), MP3 HD (mp3 compatible) Max number Files 15 000 Folders 1 000 Folder levels 8 Playlists 100 Items in a playlist 1 000 Subfolders No limit Technical specification for USB A connector • • • • Type A socket Version 2.0 Voltage supply 5 V Current supply max. 2.1 A Related information • Media via USB port (p. 522) AAC .m4a, .m4b, .aac AAC LC (MPEG-4 part III Audio), HE-AAC (aacPlus v1/v2) WMA .wma WMA8/9, WMA9/10 Pro WAV .wav LPCM FLAC .flac FLAC Subtitles Format File extension SubViewer .sub SubRip .srt SSA .ssa Video files Format File extension MP4 .mp4, .m4v MPEG-PS .mpg, .mp2, .mpeg, .m1v }} 523 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || 524 DivX® DivX certified devices have been tested for highquality DivX (.divx, .avi) video playback. When you see the DivX logo, you have the freedom to play DivX films. Profile DivX Home Theater Video codec DivX, MPEG-4 Resolution 720x576 Bit rate 4.8Mbps Frame rate 30 fps File extension .divx, .avi Max file size 4 GB Audio codec MP3, AC3 Subtitles XSUB Special functions Multiple subtitles, multiple audio, resume play Reference Meets all requirements of the DivX Home Theater profile. Visit divx.com for more information and software tools to convert your files into DivX Home Theater video. Related information • • • Media player (p. 515) Video (p. 520) Playing back DivX® (p. 520) Apple® CarPlay®* CarPlay gives you the option to listen to music, make phone calls, get directions, send/receive messages and use Siri, all while you stay focused on your driving. CarPlay works with selected iOS devices. If the car does not already support CarPlay there is the option to install it retroactively. Contact a Volvo dealer to install CarPlay. Information about which apps are supported and which iOS devices are compatible is available on Apple's website: www.apple.com/ios/carplay/. Using apps that are not compatible with CarPlay may sometimes mean that the connection between the device and the car is broken. Please note that Volvo is not responsible for the content in CarPlay. When using map navigation via CarPlay, there is no guidance in the driver display or head-up display, but only in the centre display. When navigation is started through Apple CarPlay, ongoing native turn-by-turn route guidance will be ended. The CarPlay apps can be controlled via the centre display, the iOS device or using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad (applies to certain functions). The apps can also be voice-controlled using Siri. A long press on the steering wheel * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET button starts voice control using Siri and a short press activates the car's own voice control. If Siri breaks off too early, hold the steering wheel 5 depressed. button By using Apple CarPlay you acknowledge the following: Apple CarPlay is a service provided by Apple Inc. under its terms and conditions. Volvo Cars is thus not responsible for Apple CarPlay or its features/applications. When using Apple CarPlay, certain information from your car (including its position) is transferred to your iPhone. In relation to Volvo Cars, you are fully responsible for your and any others person’s use of Apple CarPlay. Related information • • • • 5 Using Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 525) Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 526) Using Apple® CarPlay®* 4. To use CarPlay, Siri voice control must be activated on your iOS device. The device also needs an Internet connection via Wi-Fi or the mobile network. Read the terms and conditions and then tap on Accept to connect. > The subview with CarPlay is opened and compatible apps are shown. 5. Tap on the desired app. > The app starts. Connect an iOS device and start CarPlay NOTE CarPlay can only be used if Bluetooth is deactivated. A phone or media player connected to the car via Bluetooth will therefore not be available when CarPlay is active. An alternative Internet source must be used to connect to the Internet for the car's apps. Use Wi-Fi or the car's built-in modem*. 1. Connect an iOS device to the USB port. In the cases where there are two USB ports, the one with the white frame around the port must be used. 2. Read the information in the pop-up window and then tap on OK. 3. Tap on Apple CarPlay in the app view. Voice recognition (p. 144) Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 133) Apple and CarPlay are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc. }} * Option/accessory. 525 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || Starting CarPlay CarPlay is started according to the following after an iOS device has been connected. 1. 2. Connect an iOS device to the USB port. In the cases where there are two USB ports, the one with the white frame around the port must be used. > If the setting for automatic start is selected - the name of the device is shown. Tap on the device name – the tile with CarPlay is opened and compatible apps are shown. 3. If the subview with CarPlay is not opened, tap on Apple CarPlay in the app view. > The subview with CarPlay is opened and compatible apps are shown. 4. Tap on the desired app. > The app starts. CarPlay runs in the background if another app is started in the same subview. To show CarPlay in the subview again - tap on the CarPlay icon in the app view. Continue to Communication CarPlay. 3. Untick the box for the iOS device that shall no longer start CarPlay automatically when the USB cable is connected. Apple 4. Disconnect and connect the iOS device to the USB port. 5. Open the app iPod from the app view. Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* Settings for iOS device connected with CarPlay7. Automatic start 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Continue to Communication CarPlay and select setting: iPod to CarPlay 1. Tap on Apple CarPlay in the app view. 2. Read the information in the pop-up window and then tap on OK. 3. Disconnect and connect the iOS device to the USB port. > The subview with Apple CarPlay is opened and compatible apps are shown6. Related information • • • • Connecting a device via USB port (p. 522) Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 524) Settings for Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 526) Connect the car to the Internet via a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 541) Switch the connection between CarPlay and iPod • CarPlay to iPod 1. Press Settings in the top view. Connect the car to the Internet via car modem (SIM card) (p. 541) • Voice recognition (p. 144) 6 526 2. Apple • Tick the box - CarPlay starts automatically when the USB cable is connected. • Untick the box - CarPlay does not start automatically when the USB cable is connected. If the car is shared by a lot of people, such as in a car pool, it is worth noting that a maximum of 20 iOS devices can be stored simultaneously in the list. When the list is full and a new device is connected the oldest one is deleted. To delete the list, the settings must be reset in the centre display (factory reset). System volumes 1. Press Settings in the top view. Apple, CarPlay, iPhone and iPod are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc. * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET 2. Tap on Sound System Volumes and make the settings for the following: • Voice Control • Navi Voice Guidance • Phone Ringtone Related information • • • Apple® CarPlay®* Tips for using Apple® CarPlay®* Here are some useful tips for using • Update your iOS device with the latest version of the iOS operating system and ensure that the apps have been updated. • In the event of a problem with CarPlay, disconnect the iOS device from the USB port and reconnect. Otherwise, try to close the app on the device that is not working and then restart the app, or try closing all apps and restart your device. (p. 524) Using Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 525) Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 133) • If the apps do not appear when CarPlay starts (black screen), try minimising and expanding the tile for CarPlay. • Using apps that are not compatible with CarPlay may sometimes mean that the connection between the iOS device and the car is broken. Information about supported apps and compatible telephone devices can be found on the Apple website. You can also search for CarPlay in the App Store to find information about apps that are compatible with CarPlay on your market. • 7 8 CarPlay®. tre display, but the text is shown in the iOS device. • If the device is connected to the car via Bluetooth, the connection will be interrupted when CarPlay is used. Resume the Internet connection in the car by sharing the Internet via the Wi-Fi hotspot from the device. • CarPlay only works with iPhone8. NOTE Availability and functionality may vary depending on market. Related information • • Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 524) Connect the car to the Internet via a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 541) Using Siri it is possible to write/dictate and read out messages. Messages are read out and dictated in the language selected in the settings for Siri. When you write/dictate messages, no text will be shown in the cen- Apple and CarPlay are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc. Apple, CarPlay and iPhone are registered trademarks owned by Apple Inc. * Option/accessory. 527 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Android Auto* NOTE Android Auto gives you the option to listen to music, make phone calls, get directions and use car-adapted apps from an Android device. Android Auto works with selected Android devices. When a device is connected to Android Auto it is possible to stream via Bluetooth to another media player. Bluetooth is active while Android Auto is being used. When using map navigation via Android Auto there is no guidance in the driver display or headup display, but only in the centre display. Android Auto can be controlled via the centre display using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad or voice control. A long press on the steering starts Google Assistant and a wheel button short press inactivates. Information about which apps are supported and which Android devices are compatible is available on the website: www.android.com/auto/. For third-party apps, see Google Play. Please note that Volvo is not responsible for the content in Android Auto. Android Auto is started from the app view. After Android Auto has been started once, the app will be started automatically the next time the device is connected. Automatic start can be deactivated under settings. 528 By using Android Auto, you acknowledge the following: Android Auto is a service provided by Google Inc. under its terms and conditions. Volvo Cars is not responsible for Android Auto or its features or applications. When you use Android Auto, your car transfers certain information (including its location) to your connected Android phone. You are fully responsible for your and any other person’s use of Android Auto. Related information • • Using Android Auto* To use the Android Auto app, the app must be installed on your Android device and the device must be connected to the car's USB input. NOTE For installation of Android Auto to be possible, the car must be equipped with two USB ports (USB hub)*. If the car only has one USB port then it is not possible to use Android Auto. The first time an Android is connected 1. Connect your Android device to the USB input with a white frame. 2. Read the information in the pop-up window and then tap on OK. 3. Tap on Android Auto in the app view. 4. Read the terms and conditions and then tap on Accept to connect. > The subview with Android Auto is opened and compatible apps are shown. 5. Tap on the desired app. > The app starts. Using Android Auto* (p. 528) Settings for Android Auto* (p. 529) * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Previously connected Android 1. Connect your device to the USB input with a white frame. > If the setting for automatic start is selected - the name of the device is shown. 2. Tap on the device name – the tile with Android Auto is opened and compatible apps are shown. 3. If the setting for automatic start is not selected - open the Android Auto app from the app view. > The subview with Android Auto is opened and compatible apps are shown. 4. Tap on the desired app. > The app starts. Android Auto runs in the background if another app is started in the same subview. To show Android Auto in the subview again - tap on the Android Auto icon in the app view. Related information • • • • Android Auto* (p. 528) Settings for Android Auto* (p. 529) Connecting a device via USB port (p. 522) Voice recognition (p. 144) Settings for Android Auto* Related information Settings for an Android device that has been connected the first time with Android Auto. • • • Automatic start 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press Communication and select setting: Android Auto* (p. 528) Using Android Auto* (p. 528) Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 133) Android Auto • Tick the box - Android Auto starts automatically when the USB cable is connected. • Untick the box - Android Auto does not start automatically when the USB cable is connected. A maximum of 20 Android devices can be stored in the list. When the list is full and a new device is connected the oldest one is deleted. A factory reset has to be executed in order to clear the list. System volumes 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Tap on Sound System Volumes and make the settings for the following: • Voice Control • Navi Voice Guidance • Phone Ringtone * Option/accessory. 529 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Tips for using Android Auto* • Here are some useful tips for using Android Auto. • • • 530 Ensure that your apps are updated. When starting the car, wait until the centre display has started, connect the device and then open Android Auto from the app view. In the event of problems with Android Auto, disconnect your Android device from the USB port and then reconnect via USB. Otherwise, try closing the app on the device and then restarting the app. • When a device is connected to Android Auto it is still possible to playback media via Bluetooth to another media player. The Bluetooth function is on when Android Auto is used. • If the icon for Android Auto is greyed out, this means no device is connected. When you connect your device the icon will be illuminated. If the icon is not visible at all then the car does not have support for connecting a device for this purpose. • If the device is connected to the car via Bluetooth, the connection will be interrupted when Android Auto is used. Resume the Internet connection in the car by sharing the Internet via the Wi-Fi hotspot from the device. If the car is shared by a lot of people, such as in a car pool, it is worth noting that a maximum of 20 Android devices can be stored simultaneously. When the list is full and a new device is connected the oldest one is deleted. A factory reset has to be performed in order to clear the list. Related information • • Android Auto* (p. 528) Connect the car to the Internet via a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 541) Phone A phone with Bluetooth can be connected wirelessly to the car's built-in hands-free system. The audio and media system acts as hands-free, with the facility to remotely control a selection of the phone's functions. The phone can still be operated with its own keys even if it is connected to the car. When a phone has been connected online and connected with the car, it can be used make calls, send/receive messages, play back media wirelessly and be used as an Internet connection. The phone is operated from the centre display, but also via voice recognition and the app menu, which are accessed from the right-hand steering wheel keypad. * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Overview Microphone. • Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth automatically (p. 533) Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time • Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth manually (p. 534) • Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 534) Connect a phone with Bluetooth activated to then be able to make calls from the car, send/ receive messages, play back media wirelessly and connect the car to the Internet. • Switch between Bluetooth-connected phones (p. 534) • Removing devices connected to Bluetooth (p. 535) • • • Settings for phone (p. 538) Phone. Phone operation from centre display. Keypad for operating phone functions that are shown in the driver display and voice recognition. Driver display. Related information • • • • Managing phone calls (p. 535) Managing the phone book (p. 537) Managing text messages (p. 536) Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 531) • • Voice recognition (p. 144) Handling the application menu in the driver display (p. 103) Audio settings (p. 504) Connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-enabled phone (p. 540) It is possible to have two Bluetooth devices connected at once, in which case one of them can only play back wirelessly. The most recently connected phone will automatically be connected to make calls, send/receive messages, play back media and provide an Internet connection. It is possible to change what the phone is to be used for under Bluetooth Devices via the settings menu in the centre display's top view. Your mobile phone needs to be equipped with Bluetooth and support tethering. After the device has been connected/registered a first time via Bluetooth, it no longer needs to be visible/discoverable, but only have Bluetooth activated. A maximum of 20 connected Bluetooth devices can be stored in the car. There are two options for connecting. Either search the phone from the car or search the car from the phone. Option 1 - search phone from car 1. Make the phone searchable/visible via Bluetooth. }} 531 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || 2. Open the phone tile in the centre display. • If there is no phone connected to the car, tap on Add phone. Option 2 - search car from phone 1. • If there is a phone connected to the car, . In the pop-up wintap on Change dow, tap on Add phone. > Available Bluetooth devices are listed. The list is updated as new devices are detected. • 3. Tap on the name of the phone to be connected. 4. Check that the specified number code in the car matches that in the phone. In which case, choose to accept in both places. 5. On the phone, choose to accept or reject any options for phone contacts and messages. NOTE • • 532 • If there is no phone connected to the car, tap on Add phone Make car discoverable. If there is a phone connected to the car, tap on Change . In the pop-up window, tap on Add phone Make car discoverable. • The message function must be activated in certain phones. • Not all mobile phones are fully compatible and may therefore not show contacts and messages in the car. NOTE If the phone's operating system is updated then the connection may be broken. In which case, delete the phone from the car and then connect again. 2. Activate Bluetooth on the phone. 3. Search on the phone for Bluetooth devices. > Available Bluetooth devices are listed. 4. Select the name of the car on the phone. 5. A pop-up window for the connection is shown in the car. Confirm the connection. 6. Check that the specified number code in the car matches the one shown in the external device. In which case, choose to accept in both places. Related information On the phone, choose to accept or reject any options for phone contacts and messages. • • The message function must be activated in certain phones. Not all mobile phones are fully compatible and may therefore not show contacts and messages in the car. NOTE Open the phone tile in the centre display. 7. Compatible phones Many phones on the market now have wireless Bluetooth technology, but not all of them are fully compatible with the car. For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com. Phone (p. 530) Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth automatically (p. 533) • Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth manually (p. 534) • Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 534) • Switch between Bluetooth-connected phones (p. 534) SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET • • • • Removing devices connected to Bluetooth (p. 535) Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth automatically Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 539) It is possible to connect a phone to the car automatically via Bluetooth. The phone has to have been connected to the car for the first time. Internet-connected car* (p. 539) Connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-enabled phone (p. 540) • Ignition positions (p. 440) It is only the two last connected phones that can be connected automatically. 1. Activate Bluetooth in the phone before setting the car in ignition position I. 2. Set the car in ignition position I or higher. > The phone will connect. Related information • • Phone (p. 530) Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 531) • Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth manually (p. 534) • Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 534) • Switch between Bluetooth-connected phones (p. 534) • Removing devices connected to Bluetooth (p. 535) • • • Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 539) Internet-connected car* (p. 539) Connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-enabled phone (p. 540) * Option/accessory. 533 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth manually Disconnecting a Bluetoothconnected phone Switch between Bluetoothconnected phones It is possible to connect a phone to the car manually via Bluetooth. The phone has to have been connected to the car for the first time. It is possible to disconnect a phone connected to Bluetooth, and it will then no longer be connected to the car. It is possible to switch between a number of Bluetooth-connected phones. 1. Activate Bluetooth on the phone. • 2. Open the subview for phone. > Connected phones are listed. When the phone is out of range of the car it is automatically disconnected. If disconnection occurs during an active call, then the call will be continued on the phone. 3. Tap on the name of the phone to be connected. > The phone will connect. • It is also possible to disconnect the phone by manually deactivating Bluetooth. Related information • • Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 531) • • • Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth automatically (p. 533) • • Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 534) • • Switch between Bluetooth-connected phones (p. 534) • Removing devices connected to Bluetooth (p. 535) • • • • 534 Phone (p. 530) Related information 1. Open the tile for the phone. 2. or drag down the top Tap on Change view and tap on Settings Communication Bluetooth Devices Add device. > Available Bluetooth devices are listed. 3. Tap on the phone to be connected. Phone (p. 530) Related information Settings for phone (p. 538) • • Switch between Bluetooth-connected phones (p. 534) Removing devices connected to Bluetooth (p. 535) • • Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 539) • Phone (p. 530) Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 531) Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 539) Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 534) Removing devices connected to Bluetooth (p. 535) Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 539) Internet-connected car* (p. 539) Connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-enabled phone (p. 540) * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Removing devices connected to Bluetooth It is possible to remove phones from the list of registered Bluetooth devices, for example. 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press Communication Bluetooth Devices. > Registered Bluetooth devices are listed. 3. Tap on the device to be removed. 4. Tap on Remove device and confirm your selection. > The device is no longer registered to the car. Related information • • Managing phone calls Call handling in the car for a Bluetooth-connected phone. Generic illustration. Phone (p. 530) Making phone calls 1. Open the subview for phone. 2. Select call from call history, enter number using the keypad or via the contact list. It is possible to search or browse in the contact list. Tap on in the contact list in order to add a contact under Favourites. 3. Press 4. Tap on Disconnecting a Bluetooth-connected phone (p. 534) • Switch between Bluetooth-connected phones (p. 534) • Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 539) 1. Press Add call. 2. Choose to make a call from the call log, favourites or the contact list. 3. Tap on an entry/row in the call log, or tap on alongside the contact in the contact list. 4. Tap on Swap call to switch between the parties. to end the active call. 5. Tap on Conference calls During an active multi-party call: Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 531) • Making multi-party calls During a call: to make a call. to end the call. You can also make calls from the call log via the app menu, which is accessed from the right-hand steering wheel keypad . 1. Tap on Join calls to merge the active multiparty call. 2. Tap on to end the call. Incoming phone calls Incoming phone calls are shown in the driver display and the centre display. Manage the call on the right-hand steering wheel keypad or in the centre display. 1. Tap on Answer/Reject. 2. Tap on to end the call. Incoming phone call during an active call 1. Tap on Answer/Reject. 2. Tap on to end the call. }} 535 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || Private call – During the current call, press Privacy and select setting: • Switch to mobile phone - the handsfree function is disconnected and the call continues on your mobile phone. • Driver focused - the microphone in the roof on the passenger side is switched off and the call continues with the car's handsfree function. Related information • • Phone (p. 530) Managing text messages9 Message handling in the car for a Bluetoothconnected phone. In some phones, the message function must be activated. Not all phones are compatible. In such cases, they cannot display contacts and messages in the car. For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com. Managing text messages in the centre display Text messages are only shown in the centre display if the setting is selected. Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 531) • Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 146) • Handling the application menu in the driver display (p. 103) • Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display (p. 128) • • • Managing the phone book (p. 537) Press Messages in the app view to manage text messages in the centre display. Reading text messages in the centre display Press the icon to get the message read aloud. Managing text messages (p. 536) Audio settings (p. 504) Sending text messages in the centre display10 1. You can reply to a message or create a new message. 536 see support.volvocars.com. Reply to message — tap on the contact whose message you wish to reply to, then tap on Answer. • Create new message - tap on Create new. Select a contact or enter a number. 2. Compose the message. 3. Press Send. Managing text messages in the driver display Text messages are only shown in the driver display if the setting is selected. Reading a new text message in the driver display – To have the message read aloud – select Read out with the steering wheel keypad. Dictating a reply in the driver display After the text message has been read out, it is possible to reply briefly with dictation if the car is connected to the Internet. – 9 Valid in certain markets only. Contact a Volvo dealer for more information. 10 Only certain phones can broadcast messages from the car. For compatibility, • Press Answer with the steering wheel keypad. A dictation dialogue starts. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Message notification Settings for text messages Managing the phone book It is possible to activate and deactivate notifications in the text message settings. Settings for text messages on connected phone. Related information • • • • • Phone (p. 530) 1. Press Settings in the top view. When a phone is connected to the car with Bluetooth, contacts can be managed directly in the centre display. 2. Press Communication and select settings: Up to 3000 contacts can be shown from the phone selected in the centre display. Settings for text messages (p. 537) • Notification in centre display - shows Settings for phone (p. 538) message notifications in the centre display's status bar. Internet-connected car* (p. 539) Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 146) • Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display (p. 128) • Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 531) • User terms and conditions and data sharing (p. 545) Text Messages • Notification in driver display - displays notifications in the driver's display and incoming messages can be managed using the steering wheel's right-hand keypad. • Text message tone - select tone for incoming text messages. Related information • • • • Phone (p. 530) Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 531) Managing text messages (p. 536) Settings for phone (p. 538) Browse between the letters and to find a matching contact. Depending on existing contacts in the phone book, only matching letters are shown. Search contacts - tap on to search for a phone number of name in the contact list. Favourites - tap on to add/remove a contact to/from the favourites list. }} * Option/accessory. 537 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || Sorting The contact list is sorted in alphabetical order where special characters and numbers are sorted . It is possible to sort by first name or under surname, and this setting is adjusted in the telephone setup. Related information • • • Settings for phone When the telephone is connected to the car, the following settings can be made: 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press Communication select settings: Phone (p. 530) • Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 531) • • Head-up display* (p. 141) Audio settings (p. 504) Phone and possible to use a ring signal from the phone or the car. Some phones are not fully compatible and their ring signals may therefore not be available for use in the car.11 Controlling a telephone with voice recognition (p. 146) Enter the characters, letters and words manually in the centre display (p. 128) Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 531) • Ringtones – selection of ring signal. It is Settings for phone (p. 538) • • • Sort Order - select sort order of contact list. Call notifications in head up display* 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Press My Car Displays Display Options. 3. Select Show Phone. Head-Up Related information • • • 11 538 Phone (p. 530) Settings for text messages (p. 537) Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 539) For compatibility, see support.volvocars.com. * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Settings for Bluetooth devices Internet-connected car* Settings for Bluetooth-connected devices. When the car is connected to the Internet, it is possible – for example – to use web radio and music services via apps, download software and contact your retailer from the car. 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press Communication Bluetooth Devices and select settings: • Add device - starts the pairing of a new device. • Previously paired devices – lists registered/paired devices. • Remove device - removes the connected device. • Allowed services for this device - sets device usage options: calling, sending/ receiving messages, streaming media and as Internet connection. • Internet connection - connects the car to the Internet via the device's Bluetooth connection. Related information • • • • 12 Phone (p. 530) Settings for phone (p. 538) Internet-connected car* (p. 539) The car is connected via Bluetooth, Wi-Fi or with the car's built-in modem* (SIM card). When the car is connected to the Internet, it is possible to share the car's Internet connection (Wi-Fi hotspot) so that other devices such as tablets can access the Internet12. The Internet status is indicated by a symbol in the centre display's status bar. NOTE Data is transferred when using the internet (data traffic), which can have a cost. Activation of data roaming can result in further charges. Contact your network operator about the cost for data traffic. NOTE When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possible to connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi or the car modem*. NOTE When using Android Auto, it is possible to connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi, Bluetooth or the car modem*. Read Terms and Conditions for Services and Customer Privacy Policy at support.volvocars.com before connecting the car to the Internet. Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 531) This does not apply in the case of connection with Wi-Fi. }} * Option/accessory. 539 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || Related information • Symbols in the centre display's status bar (p. 123) • Connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-enabled phone (p. 540) • Connect the car to the Internet via a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 541) • Connect the car to the Internet via car modem (SIM card) (p. 541) • • • • • • • 540 Apps (p. 506) Connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-enabled phone Create an Internet connection via Bluetooth by sharing your phone's Internet access and access several online services in the car. 1. 2. No or poor Internet connection (p. 544) Sharing Internet access from the car via a Wi-Fi hotspot (p. 543) Remove Wi-Fi network (p. 544) Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 545) Volvo ID (p. 26) User terms and conditions and data sharing (p. 545) NOTE The telephone and network provider must support tethering (Internet connection sharing), and the subscription must include data. To be able to connect the car to the Internet via a Bluetooth-connected phone, the phone has to have already been connected to the car via Bluetooth for a first time. Make sure that your phone supports tethering and that this function is activated. On an iPhone, this function is known as "tethering". On Android phones, this function may have different names but is frequently known as "hotspot". For iPhones, the menu page "tethering" must also be open until the Internet connection has been established. 3. If the phone has been connected via Bluetooth previously, press Settings in the centre display top view. 4. Press Communication Devices. 5. Tick the box for Bluetooth Internet connection under the heading Internet connection. 6. If another connection source has been used, confirm the option to change connection. > Your car is now connected to the Internet via the Bluetooth-connected phone. Bluetooth NOTE When using Apple CarPlay, it is only possible to connect the car to the Internet using Wi-Fi or the car modem*. Related information • • Internet-connected car* (p. 539) Connect the car to the Internet via car modem (SIM card) (p. 541) • Connecting a phone to the car via Bluetooth for the first time (p. 531) • Connect the car to the Internet via a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 541) • • • Apple® CarPlay®* (p. 524) No or poor Internet connection (p. 544) Settings for Bluetooth devices (p. 539) * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Connect the car to the Internet via a phone (Wi-Fi) therefore needs to be reactivated the next time it is used. Connect the car to the Internet via car modem (SIM card) Create an Internet connection via Wi-Fi by tethering your phone and access online services in the car. When a phone is connected to the car, it is saved for future use. To show a list of saved networks or manually delete saved networks, go to Settings Communication Wi-Fi Saved networks. It is possible to establish an Internet connection via the car modem and a personal SIM card (PSIM)*. 1. Make sure that your phone supports tethering and that this function is activated. On an iPhone, this function is known as "tethering". On Android phones, this function may have different names but is frequently known as "hotspot". For iPhones, the menu page "tethering" must also be open until the Internet connection has been established. 2. Press Settings in the top view. 3. Continue to Communication 4. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the box for Wi-Fi. 5. If another connection source has been used, confirm the option to change connection. 6. Tap on the network name of the network to be connected. 7. Enter the network password. > The car connects to the network. NOTE The telephone and network provider must support tethering (Internet connection sharing), and the subscription must include data. Cars equipped with Volvo On Call will use the Internet connection with car modem for the services. 1. Wi-Fi. Note that certain phones switch off tethering after the contact with the car has been disconnected, e.g. when leaving the car and until the next time it is used. The tethering in the phone Technical and safety requirements for Wi-Fi connection, are described in a separate section. Fit a personal SIM card into the holder. Related information • • • • Internet-connected car* (p. 539) Note that a mini SIM is required to fit the car's card reader. Remove Wi-Fi network (p. 544) No or poor Internet connection (p. 544) 2. Press Settings in the top view. Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 545) 3. Press Communication Internet. Car Modem }} * Option/accessory. 541 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || 4. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the box for Car modem Internet. 5. If another connection source has been used, confirm the option to change connection. 6. Enter the SIM card's PIN code. > The car connects to the network. Related information • • • Internet-connected car* (p. 539) No or poor Internet connection (p. 544) Settings for car modem* (p. 542) Settings for car modem* The car is equipped with a modem that can be used to connect the car to the Internet. It is also possible to share the Internet connection via Wi-Fi. 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Press Communication Car Modem Internet and select settings: • Send request code — used e.g. to top up or check the balance on a prepaid card. Functionality depends on the provider. Related information • Connect the car to the Internet via car modem (SIM card) (p. 541) • No or poor Internet connection (p. 544) • Car modem Internet - select whether to use the car modem as Internet connection. • Data usage - tap on Reset resets the counters for received and sent data volume. • Network Select network operator - automatic or manual selection of network operator. Data roaming - if the box is ticked, the car modem will attempt to connect to the Internet when the car is abroad and outside its home network. Note that this may result in heavy costs. Check your roaming agreement for data traffic abroad with your network provider in your home country. • SIM card PIN Change PIN - a maximum of 4 digits can be entered. Disable PIN - select whether the PIN code shall be required for access to the SIM card. 542 * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Sharing Internet access from the car via a Wi-Fi hotspot The network operator (SIM card) must support tethering (sharing of the Internet connection). When the car is online, its Internet connection can be shared to allow other devices to use the Internet connection13. 1. Press Settings in the top view. Activation of Wi-Fi-hotspot can result in further charges from your network operator. 2. Press Communication Hotspot. Contact your network operator about the cost for data traffic. 3. Tap on Network name and name the shared connection. 4. 5. 6. 7. 13 NOTE Car Wi-Fi Tap on Password and select a password to be entered on connecting devices. Tap on Frequency band and select the frequency on which the hotspot is to transmit data. Note that selection of frequency band is not available in all markets. Activate/deactivate by ticking/unticking the box for Car Wi-Fi Hotspot. If Wi-Fi has been used as a connection source, confirm the option to change connection. > It is now possible for external devices to connect to the car's tethering (Wi-Fi hotspot). Connection status is indicated by the symbol in the centre display's status bar. Press Connected devices to see a list of the currently connected devices. Related information • • • Symbols in the centre display's status bar (p. 123) Internet-connected car* (p. 539) No or poor Internet connection (p. 544) Does not apply when the car is online via Wi-Fi. * Option/accessory. 543 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET No or poor Internet connection Related information Factors that affect the Internet connection. • • The amount of data transferred is dependent on the services or apps in use in the car. For example, streaming audio can require large amounts of data which requires a good connection and good signal strength. Phone to car The speed of the Internet connection may vary depending on the location of the phone in the car. Move the phone closer to the centre display in order to increase the signal strength. Ensure that there is no source of interference in between. Phone to network operator The speed of the mobile network varies depending on the coverage in the present location. Poor network coverage may occur, for example in tunnels, in mountainous country, in deep valleys or indoors. The speed also depends on the agreement you have with your network. NOTE In the event of problems with data traffic, contact your network operator. Internet-connected car* (p. 539) Wi-Fi technologies and security (p. 545) Remove Wi-Fi network Removing a network that is not to be used. 1. Press Settings in the top view. 2. Continue to Communication Saved networks. 3. Tap on Forget alongside the network to be removed. 4. Confirm the selection. > The car will no longer connect to the network in future. Wi-Fi Remove all networks All networks can be removed simultaneously by restoring factory settings. Please note that all user data and system settings are reset to original factory settings. Related information • • • • Internet-connected car* (p. 539) No or poor Internet connection (p. 544) Resetting settings in the centre display (p. 133) Connect the car to the Internet via a phone (Wi-Fi) (p. 541) Restarting the phone If there are problems with the Internet connection then it may help to restart the phone. 544 * Option/accessory. SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Wi-Fi technologies and security Possible network types to connect to. It is only possible to connect to the following types of network: • • • Frequency — 2.4 or 5 GHz14. Standards — 802.11 a/b/g/n. Security type - WPA2-AES-CCMP. The car’s Wi-Fi system is designed to handle Wi-Fi devices inside the car. If several devices operate on the frequency at the same time then it may result in reduced performance. Related information • Internet-connected car* (p. 539) User terms and conditions and data sharing Activating and deactivating data sharing The first time certain services and apps are started, a pop-up window with the headings Terms and conditions and Data sharing may be shown. Data sharing for services and apps required can be set in the centre display's settings menu. The purpose is to inform about Volvo's user terms and conditions and policy for data sharing. By accepting data sharing, the user accepts that certain information is sent from the car. This is required so that certain services and apps can have full functionality. The data sharing function for online services and apps is deactivated by default. Data sharing needs to be activated so that certain online services and apps in the car can be used. Data sharing can be set from the centre display's settings menu. 1. Press Settings in the top view in the centre display. 2. Press System 3. Select activation or deactivation of data sharing for individual services and all apps. Privacy and data. If data sharing has not been activated for an online service or downloaded apps, this can be done when they are started in the centre display. If this is the first time a service is started, or e.g. after a factory reset or certain software updates, Volvo's terms and conditions for online services need to be approved. Note that data sharing will then also be activated for other services or apps for which sharing has already been approved. NOTE NOTE Privacy and data sharing settings are unique for every driver profile. After a visit to a Volvo workshop, you may need to reactivate data sharing so that the online services and apps shall work again. Related information • Activating and deactivating data sharing (p. 545) Related information • 14 User terms and conditions and data sharing (p. 545) Selection of frequency is not available on all markets. * Option/accessory. 545 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Storage space on hard disk It is possible to view how much free space there is on the car's hard disk. Storage information for the car's hard disk, including total capacity, available capacity and how much space is used for installed apps can be shown. The information is available under Settings System System Information Storage. Related information • 546 Apps (p. 506) SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET License agreement for audio and media Dirac Unison® A license is an agreement for the right to operate a certain activity or the right to use someone else's entitlement according to the terms and conditions in the agreement. The following texts are Volvo's agreements with manufacturers/ developers. This DivX Certified® device can play back DivX® Home Theater video files up to 576p (including .avi, .divx). Download free software on www.divx.com to create, play back and stream digital video. Bowers & Wilkins Bowers & Wilkins and B&W are trademarks of the B&W Group Ltd. Nautilus is a trademark of B&W Group Ltd. Kevlar is a registered trademark of DuPont. DivX®, DivX Certified® and associated logotypes are trademarks belonging to DivX, LLC and are used under licence. ABOUT DIVX VIDEO-ON-DEMAND: This DivX Certified® device must be registered in order to play back purchased DivX Video-on-Demand (VOD) films. Get the registration code by locating the DivX VOD section in the device's settings menu. Go to vod.divx.com for more information on how to complete the registration. Dirac Unison co-optimises the loudspeakers in frequency, time and space for the best possible bass integration and clarity. It enables a faithful reproduction of the acoustic characteristics of specific performance venues. Using advanced algorithms, Dirac Unison controls all loudspeakers digitally based on acoustic high-precision measurements. Like a conductor of an orchestra, it guarantees that the loudspeakers perform in perfect unison. Patent numbers Protected by one or more of the following US patents. 7,295,673; 7,460,668; 7,515,710; 8,656,183; 8,731,369; RE45,052. DivX® Gracenote® }} 547 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || Parts of the content are copyright © of Gracenote or its suppliers. Gracenote,Gracenote logo and logotype, "Powered by Gracenote" and Gracenote MusicID are either registered trademarks or trademarks of Gracenote, Inc. in the USA and/or other countries. Gracenote® End User License Agreement This program or device contains software from Gracenote, Inc. of Emeryville, California, USA ("Gracenote"). The software from Gracenote ("Gracenote software") activates this program to perform disc and/or file identification and obtain music-related information, including name, artist, track and title ("Gracenote data") from online servers or embedded databases (together called "Gracenote servers") and in order to perform other actions. You may only use Gracenote data in accordance with the intended end-user functions for this program or this device. You agree to only use Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Gracenote servers for your own personal non-commercial use. You agree not to assign, copy, transfer or transmit this Gracenote software or any Gracenote data to any third party. YOU AGREE NOT TO USE OR EXPLOIT GRACENOTE DATA, GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR GRACENOTE SERVERS, EXCEPT AS EXPRESSLY PERMITTED IN THIS AGREEMENT. You agree that your non-exclusive right to use Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Grace- 548 note servers will be terminated if you violate these restrictions. If your license is terminated you agree to cease all use of Gracenote data, Gracenote software and Gracenote servers. Gracenote holds exclusive rights to all Gracenote data, all Gracenote software and all Gracenote servers, including all ownership rights. Gracenote will under no circumstances have any obligation to pay you for any information you provide. You agree that Gracenote, Inc. may enforce the company's rights under this agreement against you directly in its own name. The Gracenote service uses a unique identifier to track enquiries for statistical purposes. The purpose of a randomly assigned numeric identifier is to enable the Gracenote service to count enquiries without knowing anything about who you are. Additional information is available on the web page for Gracenote's privacy policy for the Gracenote service. The Gracenote software and everything included in Gracenote data are licensed to you "as is". Gracenote provides no undertakings or warranties, express or implied, as to the accuracy of the Gracenote data contained in the Gracenote servers. Gracenote reserves the right to delete data from the Gracenote servers or to change data categories for any reason that Gracenote deems sufficient. No warranty is provided that the Gracenote software or Gracenote servers are fault-free or that the Gracenote software or Gracenote servers will operate without interruption. Grace- note has no obligation to provide you with new, improved or additional data types or categories that Gracenote may provide in the future, and the company reserves the right to discontinue its services at any time. GRACENOTE DISCLAIMS ALL WARRANTIES, EITHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE, TITLE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY RIGHTS. GRACENOTE DOES NOT GUARANTEE THE RESULTS OBTAINED THROUGH YOUR USE OF THE GRACENOTE SOFTWARE OR A GRACENOTE SERVER. GRACENOTE WILL IN NO EVENT BE LIABLE FOR ANY CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGE OR FOR ANY LOST PROFITS OR REVENUES. © Gracenote, Inc. 2009 Sensus software This software uses parts of sources from clib2 and Prex Embedded Real-time OS - Source (Copyright (c) 1982, 1986, 1991, 1993, 1994), and Quercus Robusta (Copyright (c) 1990, 1993), The Regents of the University of California. All or some portions are derived from material licensed to the University of California by American Telephone and Telegraph Co. or Unix System Laboratories, Inc. and are reproduced herein with the permission of UNIX System Laboratories, Inc. Redistribution and use in SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. Neither the name of the <ORGANIZATION> nor the names of its contributors may be used to endorse or promote products derived from this software without specific prior written permission. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE COPYRIGHT HOLDERS AND CONTRIBUTORS "AS IS" AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT OWNER OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. This software is based in part on the work of the Independent JPEG Group. This software uses parts of sources from "libtess". The Original Code is: OpenGL Sample Implementation, Version 1.2.1, released January 26, 2000, developed by Silicon Graphics, Inc. The Original Code is Copyright (c) 1991-2000 Silicon Graphics, Inc. Copyright in any portions created by third parties is as indicated elsewhere herein. All Rights Reserved. Copyright (C) [1991-2000] Silicon Graphics, Inc. All Rights Reserved. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of this software and associated documentation files (the "Software"), to deal in the Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, sublicense, and/or sell copies of the Software, and to permit persons to whom the Software is furnished to do so, subject to the following conditions: The above copyright notice including the dates of first publication and either this permission notice or a reference to http:// oss.sgi.com/projects/FreeB/ shall be included in all copies or substantial portions of the Software. THE SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT. IN NO EVENT SHALL SILICON GRAPHICS, INC. BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, DAMAGES OR OTHER LIABILITY, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, TORT OR OTHERWISE, ARISING FROM, OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE SOFTWARE OR THE USE OR OTHER DEALINGS IN THE SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of Silicon Graphics, Inc. shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other dealings in this Software without prior written authorization from Silicon Graphics, Inc. This software is based in parts on the work of the FreeType Team. This software uses parts of SSLeay Library: Copyright (C) 1995-1998 Eric Young ([email protected]). All rights reserved Linux software This product contains software licensed under GNU General Public License (GPL) or GNU Lesser General Public License (LGPL), etc. You have the right of acquisition, modification, and distribution of the source code of the GPL/ LGPL software. You may download Source Code from the following website at no charge: http:// www.embedded-carmultimedia.jp/linux/oss/ download/TVM_8351_013 }} 549 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || The website provides the Source Code "As Is" and without warranty of any kind. By downloading Source Code, you expressly assume all risk and liability associated with downloading and using the Source Code and complying with the user agreements that accompany each Source Code. Please note that we cannot respond to any inquiries regarding the source code. camellia:1.2.0 Copyright (c) 2006, 2007 NTT (Nippon Telegraph and Telephone Corporation). All rights reserved. Redistribution and use in source and binary forms, with or without modification, are permitted provided that the following conditions are met: 1. 2. Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer as the first lines of this file unmodified. Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright notice, this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the documentation and/or other materials provided with the distribution. THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY NTT ``AS IS'' AND ANY EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES, INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FOR A 550 PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED. IN NO EVENT SHALL NTT BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT, INDIRECT, INCIDENTAL, SPECIAL, EXEMPLARY, OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES (INCLUDING, BUT NOT LIMITED TO, PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES; LOSS OF USE, DATA, OR PROFITS; OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION) HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY, WHETHER IN CONTRACT, STRICT LIABILITY, OR TORT (INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE) ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE, EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE. Unicode: 5.1.0 COPYRIGHT AND PERMISSION NOTICE Copyright c 1991-2013 Unicode, Inc. All rights reserved. Distributed under the Terms of Use in http://www.unicode.org/copyright.html. Permission is hereby granted, free of charge, to any person obtaining a copy of the Unicode data files and any associated documentation (the "Data Files") or Unicode software and any associated documentation (the "Software") to deal in the Data Files or Software without restriction, including without limitation the rights to use, copy, modify, merge, publish, distribute, and/or sell copies of the Data Files or Software, and to permit persons to whom the Data Files or Software are furnished to do so, provided that (a) the above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear with all copies of the Data Files or Software, (b) both the above copyright notice(s) and this permission notice appear in associated documentation, and (c) there is clear notice in each modified Data File or in the Software as well as in the documentation associated with the Data File(s) or Software that the data or software has been modified. THE DATA FILES AND SOFTWARE ARE PROVIDED "AS IS", WITHOUT WARRANTY OF ANY KIND, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING BUT NOT LIMITED TO THE WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY, FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE AND NONINFRINGEMENT OF THIRD PARTY RIGHTS. IN NO EVENT SHALL THE COPYRIGHT HOLDER OR HOLDERS INCLUDED IN THIS NOTICE BE LIABLE FOR ANY CLAIM, OR ANY SPECIAL INDIRECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES, OR ANY DAMAGES WHATSOEVER RESULTING FROM LOSS OF USE, DATA OR PROFITS, WHETHER IN AN ACTION OF CONTRACT, NEGLIGENCE OR OTHER TORTIOUS ACTION, ARISING OUT OF OR IN CONNECTION WITH THE USE OR PERFORMANCE OF THE DATA FILES OR SOFTWARE. Except as contained in this notice, the name of a copyright holder shall not be used in advertising or otherwise to promote the sale, use or other SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET dealings in these Data Files or Software without prior written authorization of the copyright holder. Declaration of Conformity }} 551 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || Country/ Area Brazil: Este equipamento opera em caráter secundário isto e, náo tem direito a protecão contra interferéncia prejudicial, mesmo tipo, e não pode causar interferéncia a sistemas operando em caráter primário. Para consultas, visite: www.anatel.gov.br EU: Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Sanda Works 2-3-33, Miwa, Sanda-city. Hyogo, 669-1513, Japan Mitsubishi Electric Corporation hereby declares that this type of radio equipment [Audio Navigation Unit] conforms with directive 2014/53/EU. For more information, see support.volvocars.com. The United Arab Emirates: 552 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Country/ Area Kazakhstan: Model name: NR 0V Manufacturer: Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Exporting country: Japan }} 553 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || Country/ Area China: 1. ■ 使用频率 2.4 - 2.4835 GHz ■ 等效全向辐射 ■ 最大 率(EIRP) 率谱密度 天线增益 天线增益 ≤100 mW 或≤20 dBm ① ≤20 dBm / MHz(EIRP) ① ■ 载频容限 20 ppm ■ 帯外发射 率(在 2.4-2.4835GHz 頻段以外) ≤-80 dBm / Hz (EIRP) ■ 杂散发射(辐射) • • • • • 率(对应载波±2.5 倍信道带宽以外) ≤-36 dBm / 100 kHz (30 - 1000 MHz) ≤-33 dBm / 100 kHz (2.4 - 2.4835 GHz) ≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (3.4 - 3.53 GHz) ≤-40 dBm / 1 MHz (5.725 - 5.85 GHz) ≤-30 dBm / 1 MHz (其它 1 - 12.75 GHz) 2.不得擅自更改发射频率 大发射 率(包括额外 3.使用时不得对各种合法的无线电通信业 使用 4.使用微 率无线电设备,必须忍 5.不得在飞机和机场附近使用 554 10dBi 时 10dBi 时 装射频 产生有害干扰 各种无线电业 率放大器),不得擅自外接天线或改用其它发射天线 一旦发现有干扰现象时,应立即停止使用,并采 的干扰或工业 科学及医疗应用设备的辐射干扰 措施消除干扰后方可继续 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET Country/ Area Korea: B 급 기기 (가정용 방송통신기자재) 이 기기는 가정용(B 급) 전자파적합기기로서 주로 가정에서 사용하는 것을 적으로 하며, 든 지역에서 사용할 수 있습니다. 해당 무선설비는 전파혼신 가능성이 있으므로 인명안전과 관련된 서비스는 할 수 없습니다. Malaysia This device has been certified under the Communications & Multimedia Act of 1998, Communications and Multimedia (Technical Standards) Regulations 2000. To retrieve your device’s serial number, please visit (support.volvocars.com) and search for “SIRIM Label Verification”. Device category: Navigation equipment for vehicle (Bluetooth) Model: NR-0V Type Approval No.: RBAY/18A/1015S(15-4067) }} 555 SOUND, MEDIA AND INTERNET || Country/ Area Mexico: Taiwan: 低功率電波輻射性電機管理辦法 第十二條 經型式認證合格之低功率射頻電機,非經許可,公司 變更頻率 商號或使用者均不得擅自 加大功率或變更原設計之特性及功能 第十四條 低功率射頻電機之使用不得影響飛航安全及干擾合法通信;經發現有干擾現象時,應 立停用,改善至無干擾時方得繼續使用 電通信 前項合法通信,指依電信法規定作業之無線 低功率射頻電機須忍受合法通信或工業 科學及醫療用電波輻射性電機設備 之干擾 Related information • • • • • 556 Sound, media and Internet (p. 504) Internet-connected car* (p. 539) Media player (p. 515) Gracenote® (p. 519) Sensus - online connectivity and entertainment (p. 32) * Option/accessory. WHEELS AND TYRES WHEELS AND TYRES Tyres New tyres Amongst other things, the function of the tyres is to carry load, provide grip on the road surface, dampen vibration and protect the wheel from wear. Tyre economy • • The tyres greatly affect the car's driving characteristics. The type of tyre, dimensions, tyre pressure and speed rating are important for how the car performs. The car is fitted with tyres according to the tyre information sticker found on the driver's side door pillar (between the front door and the rear door). WARNING A damaged tyre may lead to loss of control over the car. Recommended tyres On delivery, the car is equipped with Volvo original tyres that have the VOL1 marking on the side of the tyres. These tyres are carefully adapted to the car. In the event of changing tyres, it is therefore important that the new tyres also have this marking in order for the car's driving characteristics, comfort and fuel consumption to be maintained. 1 558 There may be deviations for certain tyre dimensions. are stored for future use. Examples of external signs which indicate that the tyre is unsuitable for use are cracks or discolouration. Tyres are perishable. After a few years they begin to harden at the same time as the friction capacity/characteristics gradually deteriorate. For this reason, aim to get as fresh tyres as possible when you replace them. This is especially important with regard to winter tyres. The last four digits in the sequence mean the week and year of manufacture. This is the tyre's DOT marking (Department of Transportation), and this is stated with four digits, for example 0717. The tyre is then manufactured in week 07, year 2017. Tyre age All tyres older than 6 years old should be checked by an expert even if they seem undamaged. Tyres age and decompose, even if they are hardly ever or never used. The function can therefore be affected. This applies to all tyres that Maintain the correct tyre pressure. Avoid fast starts, heavy braking and squealing tyres. • • • Tyre wear increases with speed. • The tyres must have the same direction of rotation during their entire service life. • When you change tyres, the tyres with the best tread must be fitted on the rear wheels to reduce the risk of oversteer during heavy braking. • If you drive over kerbstones or deep holes you can damage the tyres and/or wheel rims permanently. Correct wheel alignment is very important. Unbalanced wheels worsen tyre economy and travelling comfort. Tyre rotation The car has no mandatory tyre rotation. Driving style, tyre pressure, climate and road condition affect how quickly the tyres age and wear. Correct tyre pressure results in more even wear. To avoid differences in tread depth and to prevent wear patterns forming on the tyres, the front WHEELS AND TYRES and rear wheels should be switched with each other. A suitable distance for the first change is approx. 5000 km (approx. 3100 miles) and then at 10000 km (approx. 6200 miles) intervals. Volvo recommends the an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted for checking if you are uncertain about tread depth. If significant differences in wear (> 1 mm difference in tread depth) between tyres have already occurred, then the least worn tyres must always be fitted on the rear. Understeer is normally easier to correct than oversteer, and leads to the car continuing forwards in a straight line rather than having the rear end skidding to one side, resulting in possible complete loss of control over the car. This is why it is important for the rear wheels never to lose grip before the front wheels. Storing wheels and tyres When you store complete wheels (tyres fitted on wheel rims) they should be hung up or positioned lying on their sides on the floor. Tyres not fitted on rims must be stored lying on their sides or standing upright, but not hung up. IMPORTANT Tyres should be stored in a cool, dry and dark place, and should never be stored close to solvents, petrol, oils, etc. • • WARNING Dimension designation for tyre Wheel rim size and tyre size for your Volvo are specified to meet stringent requirements for stability and driving characteristics. Unapproved combinations of wheel rim size and tyre size may have a negative effect on the car's stability and driving characteristics. Designations for tyre dimension, load index and speed rating. Any damage caused by the fitting of unapproved combinations of wheel rim size and tyre size is not covered by the new car warranty. Volvo accepts no liability for death, personal injury or any costs caused by such installations. Related information • • • • • • • • Checking tyre pressure (p. 562) Tyres' rotation direction (p. 561) Tread wear indicators on the tyres (p. 561) Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 564) Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 577) Dimension designation for tyre (p. 559) Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 674) Recommendations for loading (p. 591) The car has an approval for the complete vehicle with certain combinations of wheel rims and tyres. Designation of dimensions All tyres have a dimension designation, such as 235/60 R18 103 H. 235 Tyre width (mm) 60 Ratio between tyre wall height and tyre width (%) R Radial ply 18 Rim diameter in inches 103 Codes for the maximum permitted tyre load, tyre load index (LI) H Speed rating for maximum permitted speed, speed rating (SS). (In this case 210 km/h (130 mph).) Load index Each tyre has a certain capacity to carry a load, a load index (LI). The car's weight determines the load capacity required of the tyres. }} * Option/accessory. 559 WHEELS AND TYRES || Speed rating Each tyre can withstand a certain maximum speed. Tyre speed rating, SS (Speed Symbol), must at least correspond with the car's top speed. The table below shows the maximum permitted speed for each speed rating (SS). The only exception to these regulations is winter tyres2, where a lower speed rating may be used. If such a tyre is selected, the car must not be driven more quickly than the tyre is rated for. For example, cars with Q rating tyres must be driven at speeds not exceeding 160 km/h (100 mph). The road conditions and applicable road traffic rules determine how quickly the car can be driven, not the speed rating of the tyres. NOTE The maximum permitted speed is specified in the table. Q 2 560 160 km/h (100 mph) (used only on winter tyres) T 190 km/h (118 mph) H 210 km/h (130 mph) V 240 km/h (149 mph) Both those with metal studs and those without. W 270 km/h (168 mph) Y 300 km/h (186 mph) WARNING The lowest permitted tyre load index (LI) and speed rating (SS) for the tyres for each respective engine variant are shown in the specifications, which can be found in the printed owner's manual. If a tyre with too low a load index or speed rating is used, it may overheat and be damaged. • • Wheel and rim dimensions are designated in accordance with the examples in the table below. The car has an approval for the complete vehicle with certain combinations of wheel rims and tyres. All wheel rims have a dimension designation, for example: 8Jx18x42.5. 8 Rim width in inches Tyres (p. 558) J Rim flange profile Dimension designation for wheel rim (p. 560) 18 Rim diameter in inches 42,5 Off-set in mm (distance from wheel centre to wheel contact surface against the hub) Related information • • Dimension designation for wheel rim Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 674) Minimum permitted tyre load index and speed rating for tyres (p. 675) Related information • • • Tyres (p. 558) Dimension designation for tyre (p. 559) Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 674) WHEELS AND TYRES Tyres' rotation direction NOTE Tyres with a tread pattern which are designed to only turn in one direction have the direction of rotation marked with an arrow. Make sure that both pairs of wheels have the same type and dimension, and also the same make. Tread wear indicators on the tyres Tread wear indicators show the status of the tyre's tread depth. Related information • The arrow shows the tyre's direction of rotation. • The tyre must always rotate in the same direction throughout its lifespan. • Tyres should only be switched between front and rear positions, never between left and right-hand sides, or vice versa. • If the tyres are fitted incorrectly, the car's braking characteristics and capacity to force rain and slush out of the way are adversely affected. • Tyres (p. 558) A tread wear indicator is a narrow elevation across the longitudinal grooves of the tyre's tread pattern. On the side of the tyre are the letters TWI (Tread Wear Indicator). When the tyre's tread depth is down to 1.6 mm (1/16 inch), the tread will be level in height with the tread wear indicators. Change to new tyres as soon as possible. Remember that tyres with little tread depth provide very poor grip in rain and snow. Related information • Tyres (p. 558) Tyres with the greatest tread depth should always be fitted to the rear of the car (to decrease the risk of skidding). 561 WHEELS AND TYRES Checking tyre pressure Correct tyre pressure helps to improve driving stability, saves fuel and extends the service life of the tyres. Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natural phenomenon. Tyre pressure also varies depending on ambient temperature. Driving on tyres with tyre pressure that is too low could result in the tyres overheating and being damaged. Tyre pressure affects travelling comfort, road noise and driving characteristics. Check the tyre pressures monthly. Use the tyre pressure recommended for cold tyres in order to achieve optimal tyre performance and optimal wear. Tyre pressure that is too low or too high may cause uneven wear on the tyres. WARNING • • Tyre pressure that is too low is the most common cause of tyre failure and may result in serious cracks in the tyre, the tread loosening or the tyre exploding, with unexpected loss of control of the car and increased risk of personal injury. Tyres with pressure that is too low reduce the load capacity of the car. Cold tyres The tyre pressure must be checked when the tyres are cold. Tyres are considered cold when 562 they have the same temperature as the surrounding air. This temperature is normally reached when the car has been parked for at least three hours. After having driven approximately 1.6 km (1 mile) these tyres are considered as warm. If you have to drive further than this to inflate the tyres, first check and record the tyre pressure and inflate to a suitable tyre pressure when you arrive at the pump. When the outside temperature changes, the tyre pressure also changes. A decrease in temperature of 10 degrees causes the tyre pressure to decrease 1 psi (7 kPa). Check the tyre pressure regularly and adjust to the correct pressure, which is specified on the car's tyre information decal or certification label. If you check the tyre pressure when the tyres are warm then you must never release any air. The tyres are warm due to driving and it is normal for the pressure to increase above the recommended pressure for cold tyres. A warm tyre with tyre pressure equal to or below the recommendation for cold tyres may have a pressure that is far too low. Related information • • • • Adjusting tyre pressure Tyre pressure decreases over time, this is a natural phenomenon. The tyre pressure must therefore sometimes be adjusted in order to maintain the recommended tyre pressure. Use the tyre pressure recommended for cold tyres in order to achieve optimal tyre performance and optimal wear. NOTE To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pressure should be checked on cold tyres. "Cold tyres" means the tyres are the same temperature as the ambient temperature (approx. 3 hours after the car has been driven). After a few kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the pressure increases. 1. Remove the cap from the valve on one tyre and then press the tyre pressure gauge firmly down onto the valve. 2. Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure, see the decal on the door pillar on the driver's side showing the recommended pressure for factory fitted tyres. Adjusting tyre pressure (p. 562) Recommended tyre pressure (p. 563) Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 564) Tyres (p. 558) * Option/accessory. WHEELS AND TYRES 3. Refit the dust cap. NOTE • After a tyre has been inflated, always refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc. • Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew. 4. Check the tyres visually for any implanted nails or other objects that could puncture the tyre and cause leakage. 5. Check the sidewalls for any cavities, cuts, bumps or other irregularities. 6. Repeat this for all tyres, including the spare tyre*. NOTE If you have over-inflated, release air by pressing in the metal pin in the centre of the valve. Then check the pressure again using the tyre pressure gauge. Some spare tyres require a higher tyre pressure than other tyres. Check in the tyre pressure table or on the tyre pressure label. Related information • • • • Recommended tyre pressure (p. 563) Checking tyre pressure (p. 562) Inflating tyres with the compressor from the puncture repair kit (p. 581) Recommended tyre pressure The tyre pressure label on the driver's side door pillar (between frame and rear door) shows which pressures the tyres should have at different loads and speed conditions. Approved tyre pressures (p. 676) The decal displays the designation for the factory-fitted tyres on the car, as well as load limits and tyre pressure. Improved fuel economy with ECO pressure For a light load (max. 3 people) and a speed of up to 160 km/h (100 mph), the ECO pressures can be chosen for optimum fuel economy. However, the lower comfort pressures are recommended instead if optimum noise and travelling comfort are desired. Related information • • Checking tyre pressure (p. 562) Approved tyre pressures (p. 676) * Option/accessory. 563 WHEELS AND TYRES Tyre pressure monitoring system* system3, The tyre pressure monitoring gives a warning with an indicator symbol in the driver display when the pressure in one or more of the car's tyres is too low. Symbol Explanation The symbol illuminates to indicate low tyre pressure. If there is a fault in the system the tyre pressure warning symbol flashes for approximately one minute and then remains illuminated. System description The tyre pressure monitoring system measures differences in rotation speed between the different wheels via the ABS system in order to be able to determine whether they have the correct tyre pressure. If the tyre pressure is too low, the tyre's diameter is changed and, as a result, so is its rotation speed. By comparing the tyres with each other the system can determine whether one or more tyres have pressure that is too low. General information on the tyre monitoring system In the information below, the tyre monitoring system is referred to generically as TPMS. 3 564 Each tyre, including the spare tyre*, should be checked once a month. When checking, the tyre should be cold and have the air pressure recommended by the car manufacturer specified on the tyre pressure label or in the tyre pressure table. If the car has tyres of a different size than that recommended by the manufacturer, find out what the correct air pressure level is for these. As an extra safety feature, the car is equipped with a tyre pressure monitoring system (TPMS), which shows when the air pressure in one or more tyres is too low. When the indicator symbol for low air pressure is lit, stop and check the tyres as soon as possible and inflate to the correct air pressure. Driving with tyres that have tyre pressure that is too low may cause the tyre to overheat, which can cause a puncture. Low tyre pressure also reduces fuel efficiency as well as tyre service life, and can affect car handling and stopping ability. Note that TPMS does not replace regular tyre maintenance. It is the driver's responsibility to maintain correct tyre pressure, even if the limit for low tyre pressure has not been reached so that the indicator symbol illuminates. The car is also equipped with a TPMS system fault indicator, which indicates when the system is not functioning correctly. The TPMS system fault indicator is combined with the indicator symbol for low tyre pressure. When the system detects a fault, the symbol in the driver display will flash for about one minute and then remain illuminated. This procedure will be repeated when the car is started until the fault has been rectified. When the symbol is illuminated, the system's ability to detect or warn of low tyre pressure may be affected. A TPMS system fault can occur for several reasons, such as after changing to a spare tyre, or changing tyres or wheels that prevent TPMS from functioning correctly. Always check the indicator symbol for TPMS after changing one or more tyres in order to ensure the new tyre or wheel is working correctly with TPMS. Messages on the instrument panel When the tyre pressure is too low, the indicator symbol for low tyre pressure is illuminated in the driver display and a message is shown. Check the tyre pressure in the Car Status app in the centre display. • Tyre pressure lowCheck tyres, calibrate after fill • Tyre pressure system Temporarily unavailable • Tyre pressure system Service required Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS) * Option/accessory. WHEELS AND TYRES To bear in mind Always save a new tyre pressure in the system after changing a wheel or adjusting tyre pressure. • • Action in the event of warning for low tyre pressure (p. 568) Saving a new tyre pressure in the monitoring system* • Saving a new tyre pressure in the monitoring system* (p. 565) In order for the system for tyre pressure monitoring4 to work correctly, a reference value for the tyre pressure must be saved. This must take place every time the tyres are changed or the tyre pressure is changed so that the system can warn about low pressure correctly. • If you change to tyres of a different size to the ones fitted at the factory, the system must be reset by storing a new tyre pressure for these tyres to avoid false warnings. • If a spare wheel* is used, it is possible that the tyre pressure monitoring system does not work correctly due to the differences between the wheels. • The system does not replace the need for regular tyre inspection and maintenance. For example, when driving with a heavy load or at high speed above 160 km/h (100 mph), the tyre pressure should be adjusted in accordance with Volvo's recommended tyre pressure values. The system is then reset by saving a new tyre pressure. • It is not possible to switch off the tyre pressure monitoring system. Perform the following procedure to store a new tyre pressure as a reference value in the system: WARNING • Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre failure, which could result in the driver losing control of the car. • The system cannot indicate sudden tyre damage in advance. 1. Switch off the car. 2. Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure, see the decal on the door pillar on the driver's side showing the recommended pressure for factory fitted tyres. 3. Start the car. Related information • • 4 Recommended tyre pressure (p. 563) See tyre pressure status in the centre display* (p. 567) Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS) }} * Option/accessory. 565 WHEELS AND TYRES || 4. Open the Car Status app in the app view. 8. Drive the car until the new tyre pressure has been saved. • Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 564) The new tyre pressure is stored when the car is driven at a speed above 35 km/h (22 mph). 5. If the car's ignition is switched off before the new tyre pressure has been saved then the procedure needs to be performed again. Allow the storing to finish within the same driving cycle to ensure that the new tyre pressure has been saved correctly. > If storing fails, a message is shown: Storing pressure unsuccessful. Try again.. Press TPMS. WARNING NOTE The exhaust gases contain carbon monoxide, which is invisible and odourless, but highly toxic. The procedure to save a new tyre pressure must therefore always be performed outdoors or in a workshop with exhaust extraction. The car must be stationary for the Store Pressure button to be selectable. 6. Press Store Pressure. 7. Tap on OK to confirm that the tyre pressure in all four tyres has been checked and adjusted. Related information • • • • 566 Recommended tyre pressure (p. 563) Adjusting tyre pressure (p. 562) See tyre pressure status in the centre display* (p. 567) Action in the event of warning for low tyre pressure (p. 568) * Option/accessory. WHEELS AND TYRES See tyre pressure status in the centre display* Status indication With the system for tyre pressure monitoring5, tyre pressure status can be viewed in the centre display. Checking status Several minutes driving above 35 km/h (22 mph) are required for the system to become active. 1. Open the Car Status app in the app view. The figure is schematic. Layout may vary depending on car model or updated software. 2. 5 Tap on TPMS to show the status of the tyres. Below are some examples of the messages that can be shown for tyre pressure status and what they mean. Centre display: Check front left tyre, store pressure after fill The tyre's pressure is too low. Stop and check/ rectify the tyre pressure by inflating as soon as possibleA. Centre display: Check all tyres, store pressure after fill The pressure is too low in two or more tyres. Stop and check/rectify the tyre pressures by inflating as soon as possibleA. Driver display: Tyre pressure system Temporarily unavailable The indicator symbol flashes and changes to constant glow after approx. 1 minute. The system is currently unavailable, activated shortly. Driver display: Tyre pressure system Service required The indicator symbol flashes and changes to constant glow after approx. 1 minute. The system is not working correctly, contact a workshopB. A B Always save a new tyre pressure in the system after the tyre pressure has been adjusted. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information • Saving a new tyre pressure in the monitoring system* (p. 565) • Action in the event of warning for low tyre pressure (p. 568) • • Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 564) Car status (p. 606) Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS) * Option/accessory. 567 WHEELS AND TYRES Action in the event of warning for low tyre pressure NOTE To avoid incorrect tyre pressure, the pressure should be checked on cold tyres. "Cold tyres" means the tyres are the same temperature as the ambient temperature (approx. 3 hours after the car has been driven). After a few kilometres of driving, the tyres warm up and the pressure increases. When the system for tyre pressure6 warns that tyre pressure is too low, action is required. Check and rectify the tyre pressure when the indicator symbol for the system is illuminated and the Tyre pressure low message is shown. 1. Switch off the car. 2. Check the tyre pressure in all four tyres with a tyre pressure gauge. • 3. Inflate the tyres to the correct pressure, see the decal on the door pillar on the driver's side showing the recommended pressure for factory fitted tyres. After a tyre has been inflated, always refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc. • Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew. 4. • Saving a new tyre pressure in the monitoring system* (p. 565) • See tyre pressure status in the centre display* (p. 567) • • Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 564) Inflating tyres with the compressor from the puncture repair kit (p. 581) NOTE Always save a new tyre pressure in the system via the centre display after the tyre pressure has been adjusted. WARNING Note that the indicator symbol does not extinguish until the low tyre pressure has been rectified and storing a new tyre pressure has been started. • Incorrect tyre pressure may lead to tyre failure, which could result in the driver losing control of the car. • The system cannot indicate sudden tyre damage in advance. Related information • • 6 568 Recommended tyre pressure (p. 563) Adjusting tyre pressure (p. 562) Indirect Tyre Pressure Monitoring System (ITPMS) * Option/accessory. WHEELS AND TYRES When changing wheels Tool kit Jack* The car's wheels can be changed, e.g. to winter wheels or a spare wheel. Follow the relevant instructions for removing and fitting wheels. Tools that can be useful during towing, wheel changes or similar are found in the car's cargo area. The jack can be used to raise the car, for example, to change to the spare wheel. When changing to another tyre dimension Check that the tyre dimension is approved for use on the car. Contact an authorised Volvo workshop for updating the software at each change of tyre dimension. A software download may be necessary both when changing to larger and smaller dimensions, and also when switching between summer and winter wheels. Related information • • • • • • • Removing a wheel (p. 571) Fitting the wheels (p. 573) Approved wheel and tyre sizes (p. 674) Tool kit (p. 569) Winter tyres (p. 575) Spare wheel* (p. 574) Wheel bolts (p. 570) The foam block under the cargo area floor contains the car's towing eye, puncture repair kit, tool for removing the plastic caps from the wheel bolts and a socket for the lockable wheel bolts. If the car is fitted with a spare wheel*, there is a jack and a wheel bolt wrench. Related information • • When changing wheels (p. 569) Jack* (p. 569) }} * Option/accessory. 569 WHEELS AND TYRES || IMPORTANT • When the jack* is not in use it must be stored in its storage space under the cargo area floor. • The jack included with the car is only designed for occasional, short-term use, such as when changing a wheel after a puncture. Only the jack belonging to the specific model is to be used to jack up the car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or for a longer time than is required just to change a wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the instructions for use that come with the equipment. The jack needs to be cranked together to the correct position in order to have space. Applies to cars with Leveling Control*: If the car is equipped with the air suspension option then this function must be deactivated before the car is raised with the jack. Related information • 570 Tool kit (p. 569) Wheel bolts Related information Wheel bolts are used to attach the wheels to the hubs. • • Removing a wheel (p. 571) Fitting the wheels (p. 573) Only use rims that are tested and approved by Volvo and which are Volvo genuine accessories. Check the tightening torque of the wheel bolts with a torque wrench. Do not use lubricant on the threads of the wheel bolts. WARNING The wheel bolts may need to be re-tightened several days after the change. Temperature differences and vibration may mean that they are not attached equally as tightly. IMPORTANT The wheel bolts must be tightened to 140 Nm. (103 foot-pound). Overtightening or loose tightening may damage the nuts and the bolts. Locking wheel bolts* In the foam block under the cargo area floor there is space for the sleeve for the lockable wheel bolts. * Option/accessory. WHEELS AND TYRES Removing a wheel Wheel changes must always be performed correctly. Instructions on how a wheel is undone and what is important to remember are provided below. WARNING • Apply the parking brake and set the gear selector in Park position (P). • Chock the wheels standing on the ground using solid wood blocks or large stones. IMPORTANT • • When the jack* is not in use it must be stored in its storage space under the cargo area floor. Check that the jack is not damaged, that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt. • • The jack included with the car is only designed for occasional, short-term use, such as when changing a wheel after a puncture. Only the jack belonging to the specific model is to be used to jack up the car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or for a longer time than is required just to change a wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the instructions for use that come with the equipment. Check that the jack is resting on a firm, level surface that is not slippery and is not slanted. • The jack must be correctly attached in the jack's bracket. • Never position anything between the ground and the jack, nor between the jack and the car's jacking point. • Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack. • If a wheel must be changed in a trafficked environment, passengers must stand in a safe place. • Use a jack designed for the car when changing tyres. Use supports to secure the car for all other work. • Never crawl under the car or reach under with a part of your body when it is raised on a jack. 1. Set up the warning triangle and activate the hazard warning lights if a tyre is being changed in a trafficked location. 2. Apply the parking brake and engage gear position P, or engage first gear if the car has a manual gearbox. Applies to cars with Leveling Control*: If the car is equipped with air suspension, this must be disabled before the car is raised with a jack*. 3. Take out the jack*, wheel wrench* and tools for the wheel bolts' plastic caps that are fitted in the foam block. Tool for removing the plastic caps on the wheel bolts. 4. Chock in front of and behind the wheels that remain on the ground. Use, for example, heavy wooden blocks or large stones. }} * Option/accessory. 571 WHEELS AND TYRES || 5. Screw together the towing eye with the wheel wrench until the stop position as per the instructions. 8. When raising the car, it is important that the jack or lifting arms are fitted in the intended points on the car's underbody. The triangle markings in the plastic cover indicate the locations of the jacking/lifting points. There are two jacking points on each side of the car. There is a recess for the jack at each point. 11. Turn the jack so that the crank is as far away from the side of the car as possible, at which point the jack's arms are perpendicular to the direction of the car. 12. Raise the car high enough to allow the wheel to be removed to move freely. Remove the wheel bolts and lift off the wheel. Related information • • • • • • IMPORTANT The towing eye must be screwed into the wheel bolt wrench* as far as possible. 572 6. Remove the plastic caps from the wheel bolts with the intended tool. 7. With the car still on the ground, use the wheel bolt wrench/towing eye to undo the wheel bolts ½-1 turn by pressing downwards (anticlockwise). 9. Settings for level control* (p. 469) When changing wheels (p. 569) Raise the car (p. 610) Jack* (p. 569) Tool kit (p. 569) Fitting the wheels (p. 573) Position the jack on level, firm and non-slippery ground under the jacking point that will be used. 10. Crank up until it is correctly aligned and so that it makes contact with the car's jacking point. Check that the head of the jack (or the lift arms at a workshop) is correctly positioned in the jacking point so that the bump in the centre of the head fits into the jacking point hole and the base is positioned vertically below the jacking point. * Option/accessory. WHEELS AND TYRES Fitting the wheels Instructions for fitting a wheel when changing wheels. NOTE The jack included with the car is only designed for occasional, short-term use, such as when changing a wheel after a puncture. Only the jack belonging to the specific model is to be used to jack up the car. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or for a longer time than is required just to change a wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the instructions for use that come with the equipment. WARNING 1. Clean the surfaces between wheel and hub. • Apply the parking brake and set the gear selector in Park position (P). 2. Put on the wheel. Tighten the wheel bolts thoroughly. • Chock the wheels standing on the ground using solid wood blocks or large stones. • Check that the jack is not damaged, that the threads are thoroughly lubricated and that it is free from dirt. • Check that the jack is resting on a firm, level surface that is not slippery and is not slanted. • The jack must be correctly attached in the jack's bracket. • Never position anything between the ground and the jack, nor between the jack and the car's jacking point. • Passengers must leave the car when it is raised on the jack. • If a wheel must be changed in a trafficked environment, passengers must stand in a safe place. • Use a jack designed for the car when changing tyres. Use supports to secure the car for all other work. • Never crawl under the car or reach under with a part of your body when it is raised on a jack. Do not use lubricant on the threads of the wheel bolts. 3. Lower the car so that the wheels cannot rotate. 4. Tighten the wheel bolts crosswise. It is important that the wheel bolts are tightened properly. Tighten to 140 Nm (103 foot-pound). Check the tightening torque with a torque wrench. 5. Refit the plastic caps on the wheel bolts. 6. Check the tyre pressure and calibrate the tyre pressure monitoring system*. }} * Option/accessory. 573 WHEELS AND TYRES || WARNING The wheel bolts may need to be re-tightened several days after the change. Temperature differences and vibration may mean that they are not attached equally as tightly. NOTE • After a tyre has been inflated, always refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc. • Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew. Related information • • • • • • • 574 When changing wheels (p. 569) Raise the car (p. 610) Jack* (p. 569) Tool kit (p. 569) Spare wheel* The spare wheel, the Temporary Spare type, can be used to temporarily replace a punctured normal wheel. WARNING • Never drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph) with a spare wheel fitted on the car. • The car must never be driven fitted with more than one "Temporary Spare" wheel. • The car may have different driving characteristics while driving with the spare wheel. The spare wheel must be replaced with a normal wheel as soon as possible. • Recommended tyre pressure must be maintained regardless of the position of the temporary spare wheel on the car. The spare wheel is smaller than the normal wheel, which affects the car's ground clearance. Look out for high kerbs and do not machine-wash the car. • If the spare tyre is damaged then a new one can be purchased from a Volvo dealer. Follow the manufacturer's recommended tyre pressure for the spare wheel. • On all-wheel drive cars, the drive on the rear axle can be disengaged. • If the spare wheel is fitted to the front axle then it is not possible to use snow chains at the same time. • The spare wheel must not be repaired. The spare tyre is only designed for temporary use. Replace it with a normal wheel as soon as possible. The car's driving characteristics can be changed when the spare wheel is used and the ground clearance is reduced. Do not wash the car in an automatic car wash if the Temporary Spare is being used. Removing a wheel (p. 571) Saving a new tyre pressure in the monitoring system* (p. 565) Checking tyre pressure (p. 562) * Option/accessory. WHEELS AND TYRES IMPORTANT The car must not be driven with tyres of different sizes or with a spare tyre other than the one supplied with the car. Using differentsized wheels can cause serious damage to the car's transmission. Handling the spare wheel Winter tyres Follow these instructions for handling the spare wheel. Winter tyres are adapted for winter road conditions. Volvo recommends winter tyres with particular dimensions. Tyre dimensions are dependent on engine variant. When driving on winter tyres, the correct type of tyres must be fitted to all four wheels. Related information • • When changing wheels (p. 569) NOTE Recommended tyre pressure (p. 563) Contact a Volvo dealer for advice about which wheel rim and type of tyre are most suitable. Tips for changing to winter tyres The spare wheel is stored in a bag and must be secured with two straps on the floor of the cargo area while driving7. The straps must be tensioned crosswise over the wheel and attached in the car's four load retaining eyelets. Tools for changing wheels are located under the cargo area floor. When summer and winter wheels are changed, mark which side of the car they were mounted on, for example L for left and R for right. Studded tyres Studded winter tyres should be run in gently for 500-1000 km (300-600 miles), so the studs settle properly into the tyres. This gives the tyre, and especially the studs, a longer service life. Related information • Spare wheel* (p. 574) NOTE The legal provisions for the use of studded tyres vary from country to country. 7 The backrests in the third seat row* must be lowered. }} * Option/accessory. 575 WHEELS AND TYRES || Tread depth Snow chains Road conditions with ice, slush and low temperatures place considerably higher demands on tyres than summer conditions. Volvo therefore recommends not to drive on winter tyres that have a tread depth of less than 4 mm (0.15 inches). Use of snow chains and/or winter tyres can help to improve the traction in winter conditions. Snow chains can be used on the car with the following restrictions: Volvo recommends that snow chains are not used on wheel dimensions greater than 19 inches • Always follow the mounting instructions from the manufacturer carefully. Fit the chains as tensioned as possible and tension them at regular intervals. • Snow chains must only be used on the front wheels (also applies to all-wheel drive cars). • In some cases, snow chains must NOT be used, such as if accessory, aftermarket or "special" tyres and wheels are fitted that have a different size to the original tyres and wheels. Sufficient distance must be maintained between the chains and brakes, suspension and body components. • Check local regulations with regard to using snow chains before fitting them. • Never exceed the chain manufacturer's specified maximum speed. You must never exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) under any circumstances. • Avoid bumps, holes or sharp turns when driving with snow chains. • Avoid driving on bare ground as this wears out both the snow chains and tyres. Related information • • • When changing wheels (p. 569) Winter driving (p. 476) Tread wear indicators on the tyres (p. 561) WARNING Use Volvo genuine snow chains or equivalent chains designed for the car model, and tyre and rim dimensions. Only single-sided snow chains are permitted. IMPORTANT In the event of uncertainty about the show chain, Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted. The wrong snow chains may cause serious damage to the car and lead to an accident. 576 WHEELS AND TYRES • • Driving with snow chains may have a negative effect on the car's driving characteristics. Avoid fast or sharp turns, as well as braking with locked wheels. Some types of chain that are firmly tensioned affect brake components and must therefore NOT be used. You can obtain more information on snow chains from a Volvo dealer. Related information • Winter driving (p. 476) Emergency puncture repair kit The emergency puncture repair kit8, is used to seal a puncture as well as to check and adjust the air pressure in the tyre. Cars equipped with spare tyre* do not have the puncture repair kit. The puncture repair kit consists of a compressor and a bottle with sealing fluid. The sealing works as a temporary repair. NOTE The sealing fluid is effective at sealing tyres with tread punctures but has limited ability to seal tyres with sidewall punctures. Do not use the emergency puncture repair kit on tyres displaying larger slits, cracks or similar damage. NOTE The compressor is intended for temporary emergency puncture repair and is approved by Volvo. Sealing fluid expiry date The bottle of sealing fluid must be replaced if the bottle's expiry date has passed (see the decal on the bottle). Treat the old bottle as environmentally hazardous waste. Related information • • Using a puncture repair kit (p. 578) • Tyres (p. 558) Inflating tyres with the compressor from the puncture repair kit (p. 581) Location The puncture repair kit is located in the foam block under the floor in the cargo area. 8 Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK) * Option/accessory. 577 WHEELS AND TYRES Using a puncture repair kit Connecting WARNING Seal a puncture with the emergency puncture repair kit, Temporary Mobility Kit (TMK). Please keep the following points in mind when using the tyre sealing system: Overview • The sealing fluid bottle contains 1) rubber latex, natural and 2) ethanediol. These substances are harmful if swallowed. • The contents of this bottle may cause allergic skin reactions or otherwise be potentially harmful to the respiratory tract, the skin, the central nervous system, and the eyes. Precautions: NOTE Electrical cable Air hose Do not break the bottle's seal before use. The seal is broken automatically when the bottle is screwed in. • • • Store out of the reach of children. • Wash thoroughly after handling. Pressure reducing valve First aid: Protective cap • Skin: Wash affected areas of skin with soap and water. Get medical attention if symptoms occur. • Eyes: Flush with plenty of water for least 15 minutes, occasionally lifting the upper and lower eyelids. Get medical attention if symptoms occur. Label, maximum permitted speed Bottle holder (orange cap) Pressure gauge Sealing fluid bottle Switch 578 Harmful if ingested. Avoid prolonged or repeated contact with the skin. If sealing fluid has come into contact with your clothes, remove them. WHEELS AND TYRES 2. Detach the decal for maximum permitted speed that is affixed on one side of the compressor. Affix it visibly on the windscreen as a reminder to observe the speed limit. You should not drive faster than 80 km/h (50 mph) after the emergency tyre repair kit has been used. • Inhalation: Move the exposed person to fresh air. If irritation persists, get medical attention. • Ingestion: Do NOT induce vomiting unless directed to do so by medical personnel. Get medical attention. • Disposal: Dispose of this material and its container at a hazardous or special waste collection point. 3. WARNING 4. Unscrew the orange-coloured cap from the compressor, and unscrew the cork from the sealing fluid bottle. 5. Screw in the bottle to the bottom of the bottle holder. • Do not remove the bottle when the puncture repair kit is being used. • Do not remove the air hose when the puncture repair kit is being used. 1. Set up the warning triangle and activate the hazard warning lights if a tyre is being sealed in a trafficked location. If the puncture was caused by a nail or similar, allow this to remain in the tyre. It helps to seal the hole. Check that the switch is in position 0 (Off), and locate the electrical cable and the air hose. The bottle and the bottle holder are equipped with a reverse catch to prevent sealant leakage. When the bottle is screwed in it cannot be unscrewed from the bottle holder again. The bottle must be removed at a workshop9. WARNING 6. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap and screw in the air hose's valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve. Check that the pressure reducing valve on the air hose is fully screwed in. 7. Connect the electrical cable to the closest 12 V socket and start the car. NOTE Make sure that none of the other 12 V sockets is in use when the compressor is operating. WARNING Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running. WARNING Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in danger to life. Never leave the engine running in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient ventilation. Do not unscrew the bottle, it is equipped with a reverse catch to prevent leakage. 9 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. }} 579 WHEELS AND TYRES || 8. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to position I (On). WARNING Never stand next to the tyre when the compressor is running. If cracks or unevenness arise then the compressor must be switched off immediately. The journey should not be continued. Call roadside assistance for recovery to a tyre centre. Volvo recommends an authorised tyre centre. NOTE When the compressor starts, the pressure can increase up to 6 bar (88 psi) but the pressure drops after approximately 30 seconds. 9. 10. Switch off the compressor to check the pressure on the pressure gauge. Minimum pressure is 1.8 bar (22 psi) and maximum is 3.5 bar (51 psi). Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high. WARNING If the pressure is below 1.8 bar (22 psi) then the hole in the tyre is too big. The journey should not be continued. Call roadside assistance for recovery to a tyre centre. Volvo recommends an authorised tyre centre. The compressor must not be operated for longer than 10 minutes - risk of overheating. 12. Unscrew the air hose from the tyre valve and refit the dust cap on the tyre. NOTE • After a tyre has been inflated, always refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc. • Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew. 13. Fit the protective cap on the air hose in order to avoid leakage of the remaining sealing fluid. Place the equipment in the cargo area. 580 WARNING Sealant will spurt out of the puncture during the first few rotations of the tyre. Make sure that nobody is standing near the car and gets the sealing fluid splashed onto them when the car is driven away. The distance should be at least 2 metres (7 feet). 15. Follow-up inspection 11. Switch off the compressor and detach the electrical cable. Inflate the tyre for 7 minutes. IMPORTANT 14. As soon as possible, drive at least 3 km (2 miles) at a maximum speed of 80 km/h (50 mph) so that the sealing fluid can seal the tyre, and then perform a follow-up check. Connect the air hose on the tyre valve and screw in the valve connection to the bottom of the tyre valve's thread. The compressor must be switched off. WHEELS AND TYRES 16. Read the tyre pressure on the pressure gauge. • If it is below 1.3 bar (19 psi) then the tyre is insufficiently sealed. The journey should not be continued. Call roadside assistance for recovery. • If the tyre pressure is higher than 1.3 bar (19 psi), the tyre must be inflated to the pressure specified in accordance with the tyre pressure label on the driver's side door pillar (1 bar = 100 kPa = 14.5 psi). Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high. WARNING NOTE The compressor is an electrical device. Follow local regulations related to waste management. Related information • • • Inflating tyres with the compressor from the puncture repair kit The car's original tyres can be inflated using the compressor in the emergency puncture repair kit. 1. The compressor must be switched off. Make sure that the switch is in position 0 (Off), and take out the electrical cable and the air hose. 2. Unscrew the tyre's dust cap and screw in the air hose's valve connection to the bottom of the thread on the tyre's air valve. Recommended tyre pressure (p. 563) Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 577) Inflating tyres with the compressor from the puncture repair kit (p. 581) Check that the pressure reducing valve on the air hose is fully screwed in. 3. Check the tyre pressure regularly. Volvo recommends that the car is driven to the nearest authorised Volvo workshop for the replacement/repair of the damaged tyre. Advise the workshop that the tyre contains sealing fluid. The sealing fluid bottle and hose must be replaced after use. Volvo recommends that these replacements be performed by an authorised Volvo workshop. WARNING Maximum mileage with tyres containing sealing fluid is 200 km (120 miles). Connect the electrical cable to the closest 12 V socket and start the car. WARNING Inhaling car exhaust fumes could result in danger to life. Never leave the engine running in sealed areas or areas that lack sufficient ventilation. WARNING Do not leave children in the car without supervision when the engine is running. 4. Start the compressor by flicking the switch to position I (On). }} 581 WHEELS AND TYRES || IMPORTANT Risk of overheating. The compressor must not run for more than 10 minutes. 5. Inflate the tyre to the pressure specified on the tyre pressure label on the driver side door pillar. Release air using the pressure reducing valve if the tyre pressure is too high. 6. Switch off the compressor. Detach the air hose and the electrical cable. 7. Refit the dust cap on the tyre. NOTE • After a tyre has been inflated, always refit the dust cap in order to avoid damage to the valve from gravel, dirt, etc. • Only use plastic dust caps. Metal dust caps can rust and become difficult to unscrew. NOTE The compressor is an electrical device. Follow local regulations related to waste management. 582 Related information • • • Recommended tyre pressure (p. 563) Using a puncture repair kit (p. 578) Emergency puncture repair kit (p. 577) LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Passenger compartment interior Rear seat Overview of the passenger compartment's interior and storage locations. Second seat row Third seat row* Front seat Storage compartment and cup holder in the side panel and storage space between the seats. Storage compartment in the door panel and by the steering wheel, glovebox and sun visors. Storage compartment in the door panel, cup holder* in the centre seat backrest, storage pocket* on the front seat backrest and also electrical sockets in the tunnel console. WARNING Keep loose objects such as mobile phones, cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc. in the glove compartment or other compartments. Otherwise they may injure people in the car in the event of sudden braking or a collision. IMPORTANT Keep in mind that high gloss surfaces, for example, are easily scratched by metal objects. Do not place keys, phones and other items on sensitive surfaces. Storage spaces with cup holder, mesh pocket* electrical socket and USB port in the tunnel console. 584 * Option/accessory. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Related information • • • • • Electrical sockets (p. 586) Using the glovebox (p. 589) Tunnel console WARNING The tunnel console is located between the front seats. Keep loose objects such as mobile phones, cameras, remote controls for accessories, etc. in the glove compartment or other compartments. Otherwise they may injure people in the car in the event of sudden braking or a collision. Sun visors (p. 590) Tunnel console (p. 585) Connecting a device via USB port (p. 522) IMPORTANT Keep in mind that high gloss surfaces, for example, are easily scratched by metal objects. Do not place keys, phones and other items on sensitive surfaces. NOTE Storage compartment with hatch*. The hatch is opened/closed with a push on the handle. One of the detectors for the alarm* is located under the tunnel console's cup holder. Avoid leaving coins, keys and other metal objects in the cup holder, since this may trigger the alarm. Storage compartment with cup holder and 12 V socket. Storage compartment and USB port under the armrest. Climate controls for the rear seat climate functions* or storage compartment. Related information • • • Passenger compartment interior (p. 584) Electrical sockets (p. 586) Climate controls (p. 213) * Option/accessory. 585 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Electrical sockets High voltage socket* There are two 12 V electrical sockets and one 230 V electrical socket* in the tunnel console, and there is one 12 V electrical socket* in the cargo area. If a problem occurs with an electrical socket, contact a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. 12 V electrical socket 12 V electrical socket in tunnel console, second seat row. Electrical socket in the tunnel console, second seat row. The high-voltage socket* can be used for various accessories designed for this, such as chargers or laptops. Status indication, high-voltage socket An LED1 lamp on the socket indicates the status of the socket: 12 V electrical socket in tunnel console, front seat. The 12 V sockets can be used for various accessories designed for this, such as music players, cooler boxes and mobile phones. 1 586 12 V electrical socket in cargo area*. LED (Light Emitting Diode) * Option/accessory. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Status indication Reason Action Steady green light The socket is delivering current to a connected device. None. Blinking orange light The temperature of the socket's voltage converter is too high (because for example the accessory draws too high a current or the passenger compartment is too warm). Remove the plug and let the voltage converter cool down before reinserting the plug. The connected accessory draws too much current (intermittently or continuously) or is defective. None. The accessory cannot be connected to the socket. The socket does not sense that a plug has been inserted. Check that the plug is properly inserted into the socket. The socket is not active. Switch the car's electrical system to the lowest ignition position I. The socket has been active but is now deactivated. Start the engine and/or charge the starter battery. Extinguished lamp Related information • • Passenger compartment interior (p. 584) Using electrical sockets (p. 588) 587 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Using electrical sockets 12 V sockets can be used for various accessories designed for this, such as music players, cooler boxes and mobile phones. High-voltage sockets* can be used for various accessories designed for this, such as chargers and portable computers. For the sockets to supply current, the car's electrical system must be set in the lowest ignition position I. The sockets are then active as long as the starter battery level does not become too low. If the engine is switched off and the car is locked, the sockets are deactivated. If the engine is switched off and the car is not locked, or is locked with double lock temporarily deactivated, then the sockets continue to be active for a further seven minutes. 2 588 NOTE Remember that use of the electrical socket with the engine switched off entails a risk of discharging the starter battery, which can limit functionality. Accessories that are connected to the electrical sockets may be activated even when the car's electrical system is disconnected or if preconditioning is used. For this reason, disconnect the connectors when they are not in use in order to avoid the starter battery being discharged. WARNING • Do not use accessories with large or heavy connectors - they can damage the socket or come loose when driving. • Using 12 V sockets 1. Remove the blanking plug (tunnel console) or fold down the cover (cargo area) in front of the socket and plug in the accessory's connector. 2. Unplug the accessory's connector and refit the blanking plug (tunnel console) or fold up the cover (cargo area) when the socket is not in use or if the socket is left unattended. IMPORTANT Maximum socket output is 120 W (10 A) per socket. Using high-voltage sockets 1. Do not use accessories that can cause interference to the car's radio receiver or electrical system for example. Pull down the socket cover and insert the accessory's plug. > The LED2 lamp on the socket indicates the status. 2. • Position the accessory so that it is not at risk of injuring the driver or passengers in the event of heavy braking or collision. Check that the lamp is illuminated with a steady green light - only then is current available at the socket. 3. • Keep an eye on connected accessories as they can generate heat that can burn passengers or the interior. Disconnect the accessory by pulling out the plug - do not pull on the cable. Pull up the cover when the socket is not being used or the socket is left unattended. LED (Light Emitting Diode) * Option/accessory. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT WARNING Using the glovebox • Only use accessories that are undamaged and fault-free. The accessories must have a CE marking, UL marking or an equivalent safety marking. The glovebox is located on the passenger side. The printed owner's manual and maps can be kept in the glovebox, for example. There is also space for a pen and card holder. • Accessories must be rated for 230 V and 50 Hz with connectors designed for the socket. • Never allow sockets, connectors or accessories to come into contact with water or other liquids. Do not touch or use the socket if it appears to be damaged or has come into contact with water or other liquid. • Do not connect junction sockets, adapters or extension cables to the socket as these can override the socket's safety features. • The socket is equipped with a protective cover, ensure that nothing protrudes in or damages the socket preventing the cover from doing its job. Do not leave children in the car unsupervised when the socket is active. IMPORTANT Maximum socket output is 150 W. WARNING Never modify or repair the high-voltage socket yourself. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop should be contacted. Failure to follow the advice given above can lead to severe or fatal electric shocks. The glovebox is opened by pressing on the opening button in the centre console. Locking and unlocking the glovebox The glovebox can be locked, so-called private locking, e.g. when the car is taken in for service, left at a hotel or similar. Private locking also locks the tailgate. Related information • • Electrical sockets (p. 586) Passenger compartment interior (p. 584) }} 589 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT || Using the glovebox as a cooled area The glovebox can be used for cooling of e.g. drinks or food. The cooling works when the climate control system is active (i.e. when the car is set in ignition position II or when the engine is running). Sun visors Cargo area There are sun visors in the roof in front of the driver seat and the front seat passenger seat which can be folded down and angled out to the side when necessary. The car has a flexible cargo area that makes it possible to transport and secure large objects. By folding down the backrests in the second and third* rows of seats, the cargo area becomes quite spacious. To facilitate loading and unloading, the rear section of the car can be lowered with the level control function*. Use load retaining eyelets or bag holders to secure the load, and the extendable cargo cover* to conceal the load if desired. If the car is equipped with a spare wheel then this is attached on the cargo area floor. The car's towing eye and puncture repair kit are stored under the cargo area floor. Related information The figure is schematic - the design may vary. Activating cooling Deactivating cooling – Activate or deactivate the cooling by moving the control to the end position toward the passenger compartment/glovebox. The figure is schematic - the design may vary. The mirror lighting* is switched on automatically when the guard is lifted up. The mirror frame incorporates a holder for e.g. cards or tickets. • • • • Recommendations for loading (p. 591) Bag hooks (p. 593) Load retaining eyelets (p. 593) Fitting and removing cargo cover* (p. 594) Related information • Passenger compartment interior (p. 584) Related information • • 590 Passenger compartment interior (p. 584) Private locking (p. 281) * Option/accessory. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Recommendations for loading There are a number of things that are important to bear in mind when loading the car. Payload depends on the car's kerb weight. The total of the weight of the passengers and all accessories reduces the car's payload by a corresponding weight. WARNING The car’s driving properties change depending on the weight and positioning of the load. Loading in the cargo area Good things to remember when loading: • Position the load firmly against the rear seat's backrest. • Heavy objects should be placed as low as possible. Avoid placing heavy loads on lowered backrests. • Cover sharp edges with something soft to avoid damaging the upholstery. • Secure all loads to the load retaining eyelets with straps or web lashings. WARNING A loose object weighing 20 kg (44 pounds) can, in a frontal collision at a speed of 50 km/h (30 mph) carry the impact of an item weighing 1000 kg (2200 pounds). WARNING Leave 10 cm (4 inches) space between the load and the side windows if the car is loaded to above the top edge of the door windows. Otherwise, the intended protection of the inflatable curtain, which is concealed in the headlining, may be compromised. car's cargo area or to assist when a trailer shall be coupled/uncoupled to/from the towbar*. Level control is performed via a control at the rear on the right-hand side in the cargo area's side panel. WARNING Always secure the load. During heavy braking the load may otherwise shift, causing injury to the car's occupants. Cover sharp edges and sharp corners with something soft. Switch off the engine and apply the parking brake when loading/unloading long items. Otherwise you may accidentally knock the gear lever or gear selector with the load into a drive position - and the car could then move off. Increasing the space in the cargo area To expand the cargo area and simplify loading, the rear seat's backrest can be lowered. Note that objects must not prevent the function of the WHIPS system for the front seats if any of the rear seat's backrests is folded down. Level control of the car's rear section* Controls for raising/lowering the car's rear section. The control consists of two buttons - one button that lowers and one button that raises the rear section of the car. For raising or lowering, each button must be held depressed until the rear section has reached the desired level. It is not possible to raise the car's rear section higher than its normal level. During driving, the rear section height will return to the normal level. The car's rear section can be lowered/raised in order to create a better working height for the }} * Option/accessory. 591 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT || NOTE It is not possible to adjust the height of the rear section when one or more of the doors or the bonnet is open. This does not apply to the tailgate. WARNING Pay attention to ensure that there is no person, animal or object under the car when lowering. This would involve danger to life and damage to the car or object. Related information • • Load retaining eyelets (p. 593) Lowering backrests in the second seat row (p. 192) • Roof load and loading on load carriers (p. 592) • • Level control* and shock absorption (p. 466) Roof load and loading on load carriers For loading on the car's roof, the load carriers that Volvo have developed are recommended. Related information • • Recommendations for loading (p. 591) Weights (p. 663) This is in order to avoid damage to the car and in order to achieve the maximum possible safety during a journey. Volvo's load carriers are available for purchase at authorised Volvo retailers. Carefully follow the installation instructions supplied with the carriers. • Distribute the load evenly over the load carriers. Put the heaviest objects at the bottom. • Check periodically that the load carriers and load are properly secured. Lash the load securely with retaining straps. • If the load is longer than the car at the front, e.g. a canoe or kayak, fit the towing eye to its front socket and attach the bungee to this. • The size of the area exposed to the wind, and therefore fuel consumption, increase with the size of the load. • Drive gently. Avoid quick acceleration, heavy braking and hard cornering. Weights (p. 663) WARNING The car's centre of gravity and driving characteristics are altered by roof loads. Follow the car's specifications with regard to weights and maximum permitted load. 592 * Option/accessory. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Bag hooks Bag hooks keep carrier bags in place and prevent them from overturning and spreading their contents across the cargo area. • • Fitting and removing cargo cover* (p. 594) Load retaining eyelets Fitting and removing safety grilles* (p. 597) Use the load retaining eyelets to attach straps in order to anchor items in the cargo area. Along the sides WARNING Hard, sharp and/or heavy objects which protrude may cause injury under violent braking. There are two extensible bag hooks in the side panels - one on each side of the cargo area. Always secure large and heavy objects with a seatbelt or cargo retaining straps. IMPORTANT The bag hooks may be loaded with a maximum of 5 kg (11 lbs). Related information • • • Related information • • Recommendations for loading (p. 591) Weights (p. 663) Recommendations for loading (p. 591) Using the glovebox (p. 589) Fitting and removing the safety net* (p. 598) * Option/accessory. 593 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Fitting and removing cargo cover* Removing cargo cover Operating cargo cover* In the extended position, the cargo cover prevents visual access to the cargo area. In retracted position: There are two extended positions for the cargo cover - a full-cover position and a loading position, where it is partially extended to make it easier to reach further into the cargo area. 1. Fitting cargo cover3 Depress the button on one of the retracted cargo cover's end pieces and lift out that end. In a 7-seat car - release the third seat row's seatbelt locking tabs from the hooks above the side panels. 2. Angle the cover up/out carefully. > The other end piece loosens automatically and the cover can be lifted out of the cargo area. Related information • • Operating cargo cover* (p. 594) Recommendations for loading (p. 591) Insert one of the cargo cover's end pieces in the recess in the side panel in the cargo area. Then insert the other end piece in the recess in the side panel on the opposite side. Press down the end pieces on both sides one by one. > When a "click" is heard and the red marking on each end piece has disappeared, the cargo cover is attached - check that it is affixed securely. 3 In 594 the car model XC90 Excellence, the cargo cover is fixed and removal/fitting of the cover is not possible. * Option/accessory. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Full-cover position For 5-seat car For 7-seat car 1. Grip the handle and pull out the cargo cover so that it slides over the side panels in the cargo area. Pull to the end position. Hang up the locking tabs of the seatbelts for the third seat row on the designated hooks in the side panels. When the cargo cover is extended so that it covers the cargo area - guide the cover's attachment pins into the grooves in the side panels and release, while at the same time angling the handle with a light downward pressure. > The cargo cover is locked in the full-cover position. Grip the handle and pull out the cargo cover so that it slides over the side panels in the cargo area. Pull to the end position. When the cargo cover is extended so that it covers the cargo area - guide the cover's attachment pins into the grooves in the side panels and release, while at the same time angling the handle with a light downward pressure. > The cargo cover is locked in the full-cover position. IMPORTANT Do not load objects on top of the cargo cover. WARNING In a 7-seat car, never have the cargo cover fitted when there are passengers in the rear seats. This may lead to serious injury in the event of a collision. }} 595 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT || Loading mode In the event that your hands are occupied: Retracting 1. From the full-cover position: Lift up the handle and pull it backward to disengage the cargo cover's attachment pins and then release. From loading position: From retracted position - grip the handle and pull out the cover so it slides over the side panels in the cargo area - pull to the end position and guide the cargo cover's attachment pins into the grooves in the side panels. (If the cover is already in the full-cover position - see the next point) From full-cover position - grip the handle and guide the cargo cover's attachment pins into the grooves in the side panels and release. > Retract the cover until it stops in the loading position. 596 In the extended full-cover position - lightly push the handle part of the cargo cover upward, e.g. with an elbow. > The cover retracts until it stops in the loading position. To return to full-cover position from loading position: 1. Grip the handle and pull the cargo cover out to the end position. 2. Release slightly and angle the handle by means of a light downward pressure. > The cover is locked in the full-cover position. Grip the handle and pull out the cargo cover in the grooves - pull to the full-cover position. Lift up the handle and pull it backward to disengage the attachment pins and then release. 2. Retract the cover with its attachment pins outside of the side panels until it stops in the retracted position. Related information • Fitting and removing cargo cover* (p. 594) * Option/accessory. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Fitting and removing safety grilles* The safety grille prevents loads or pets in the cargo area from being thrown forward in the passenger compartment under heavy braking. The safety grille is crash-tested in accordance with the ECE R17 legal requirement and fulfils Volvo's strength requirements. The safety grille's parts consist of the grille and two loose attaching braces. The attaching braces each come with a screw cap and there are two plastic sleeves for the safety grille. 2. WARNING The safety grille must only be used in the rear position described here. The roof mountings behind the front seats are not intended for the safety grille. Guide one of the safety grille's hooks into the larger opening in the roof mounting (1). WARNING For safety reasons, the third seat row4 must be lowered when the safety grille is fitted in the car. IMPORTANT It is not possible to have the protective grille fitted at the same time as the cargo cover. For safety reasons, the safety grille must always be attached and anchored correctly. WARNING Under no circumstances may anybody remain in the cargo area while the car is moving. This is to avoid injury in the event of heavy braking or an accident. 4 Applies to 7-seat cars. Installation 1. Lower the rear seat and then lift the safety grille in through one of the rear side doors or via the tailgate - the arched/convex side of the grille should face the cargo area while the hooks on each side point up. The attaching braces and plastic sleeves are not used in this stage. Grasp the grille near the hook and pull/slide it towards the smaller opening (2). > The hook is now secured in the roof mounting's end position. 3. Repeat the steps in point 2 above to secure the other hook in the mounting on the other side. WARNING Make sure the hooks of the safety grille are securely fitted in the roof mountings so there is no risk of the grille coming loose. }} * Option/accessory. 597 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT || 4. Note that the attaching braces can be removed before the plastic sleeves are removed from the holes in the grille. Related information • • Recommendations for loading (p. 591) Fitting and removing the safety net* The safety net prevents loads from being thrown forward in the passenger compartment in the event of sudden braking. The safety net is fitted into four mounting points. Load retaining eyelets (p. 593) Hook the attaching brace's hook through the load securing eyelet at the cargo floor from underneath, and guide the threaded part through the cargo grille's lower attachment hole from underneath (1). Slide a plastic sleeve on the threaded part of the attaching brace - the sleeve flange should face up - and guide it down through the hole. Then screw on the screw cap until its lower edge is approx. 5 mm from the grille (2). 5. 6. Repeat the steps in point 4 on the other side. Centre the safety grille and then tighten the two attaching braces alternately until the grille is properly secured. Removal Remove the safety grille by performing the above steps in reverse order. 598 For reasons of safety, the safety net must always be fastened and anchored as described below. The net is made of a strong nylon fabric and can be secured two different locations in the car: • • Rear fitting - behind second seat row. Front fitting - behind the front seats. WARNING Loads in the luggage compartment must be anchored well, and also using a correctly fitted safety net. * Option/accessory. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Fitting the safety net 4. WARNING It is necessary to ensure that the upper securing points of the safety net are fitted correctly and that the puller-straps are hooked in properly. Damaged safety nets must not be used. NOTE With forward mounting, the safety net is most easily mounted via one of the rear doors. 1. Unfold the safety net and make sure that the split upper rod in the net is locked in its extended position. 2. Hook one retaining hook of the net into the front or rear roof mounting with the anchoring strap locks turned towards you. 3. Hook the net's second attachment hook to the roof bracket on the opposite side. The telescopically sprung attachment hooks make it easier to fit. Take care to press forward the net's retaining hooks for each respective roof mounting's front end position. Front fitting. Rear fitting. For rear fitting: With the net fitted in the rear roof mountings, hook the safety net's puller-straps into the front load retaining eyelets in the cargo area. For front fitting: With the net fitted in the front roof mountings, hook the anchoring straps into the outer eyes on the rear of the seat slide rails - it is easier if the backrests are straightened and the seats are moved forward slightly. Pay attention to make sure that you do not press the seat and backrest hard against the net when they are moved back again - only adjust until the seat or backrest makes contact with the net. IMPORTANT If a seat or backrest is pushed backwards hard into the safety net, the net and roof mounts may be damaged. }} 599 LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT || 5. Tension the safety net with the anchoring straps. Removing the safety net The safety net can be easily removed and folded up. 1. Reduce safety net tension by pressing the button in the anchoring strap lock and feeding out a little of the anchoring strap on each side. 2. Press in the catches and detach both of the anchoring strap's hooks. 3. Undo the upper attachments and release the net from the roof mountings. 4. Press the red button on the rod to enable folding and then roll up the net. Store the net in its case. Related information • • 600 Recommendations for loading (p. 591) First aid kit* Warning triangle The first aid kit contains first aid equipment. Use the warning triangle to warn other road users if the car is stationary in traffic. Store the first aid kit behind the elastic strap, if the car is equipped with one of these. Also activate the hazard warning flashers. Storage spaces The warning triangle is located in the compartment on the inside of the tailgate. Folding up the warning triangle Related information • Cargo area (p. 590) Load retaining eyelets (p. 593) * Option/accessory. LOADING, STORAGE AND PASSENGER COMPARTMENT Open the hatch by first turning the knob a quarter turn and then pulling the hatch from its brackets in the top and bottom edges. Press the latch that secures the warning triangle slightly to the right and remove the case. Remove the warning triangle from the case, unfold it and put the ends together. Fold out the warning triangle's support legs. Follow the regulations for the use of a warning triangle. Position the warning triangle in a suitable place with regard to traffic. Make sure that the warning triangle and case are properly secured in their storage space and that the hatch is fully closed after use. Related information • • Cargo area (p. 590) Hazard warning flashers (p. 158) 601 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Volvo service programme Charging cable with control unit To keep the car as safe and reliable as possible, follow the Volvo service programme as specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Volvo recommends engaging an authorised Volvo workshop to perform the service and maintenance work. Volvo workshops have the personnel, special tools and service literature to guarantee the highest quality of service. IMPORTANT Do not modify the control unit in any way. Related information • • • IMPORTANT For the Volvo warranty to apply, check and follow the instructions in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Service and repair Service the car regularly. Follow Volvo's recommended service intervals. If inspection and repair are required then only an authorised Volvo workshop may carry out the work. WARNING Do not carry out any repairs of your own on this vehicle. Electrical cables and/or components that have detached must only be rectified by an authorised workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Car status (p. 606) Book service and repair (p. 607) Connection of equipment to the car's diagnostic socket (p. 38) • Servicing the climate control system (p. 612) • • Brake system maintenance (p. 446) Engine compartment overview (p. 614) Data transfer between car and workshop via Wi-Fi Volvo's workshops have a specific Wi-Fi network for secure data transfer between your car and the workshop. Your workshop visit will be simpler and more efficient when the transfer of diagnostic information and software can take place via the workshop's network. During a workshop visit, your service technician may want to connect your car to the workshop's network via Wi-Fi to perform fault-tracing and software download. For this type of communication, the car only connects to a workshop's network. It is not possible to connect the car to another Wi-Fi network, such as at home, in the same way as to a workshop's network. Connection with the remote control key Connection is normally handled by the service technician who then uses the remote control key buttons. That's why it's important to take a key with buttons with you for the workshop visit. Press three times on the lock button on the remote control key to connect the car to the workshop's network via Wi-Fi. When the car is connected to a Wi-Fi network, the symbol appears in the centre display. WARNING The car must not be driven when connected to the workshop's networks and systems. 604 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Related information • Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 605) • Book service and repair (p. 607) Download Center Several of the car's systems can be updated from the centre display with an online car1. The Download Centre app is started from app view in the centre display and enables: • • • • • • • • 1 2 Functions for online car and infotainment can be updated via the Download Centre. Updates can be made one at a time or all at once. Searching for update If an update is available, the message New software updates available is shown in the centre display's status bar. searching for and updating system software updating map data for Sensus Navigation* downloading, updating and uninstalling apps. Related information • Managing system updates via the Download Centre Managing system updates via the Download Centre (p. 605) Downloading apps (p. 507) Updating apps (p. 508) Deleting apps (p. 508) Internet-connected car* (p. 539) Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 114) Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost. Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost. For system updates to be possible, the car must be connected to the Internet2. – Go to Download Centre in the centre display's app view. > If no search has been performed since the last time the infotainment system was started, a search is performed. No search is performed if a software installation is in progress. A number on System updates shows how many updates are available. One tap shows a list of the updates that can be installed in the car. }} * Option/accessory. 605 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || NOTE Data download may affect other services that transmit data, e.g. Internet radio. If the effect on other services is experienced as disruptive then the download can be interrupted. Alternatively, it may be appropriate to switch off or interrupt other services. NOTE An update can be interrupted when the ignition is switched off and the car is left. However, the update does not have to be completed before the car is left, this is because the update is resumed the next time the car is used. Update all system software – Select Install all at the bottom of the list. Note that only the download can be cancelled, when the installation phase has started, this cannot be cancelled. Deactivating the background search for software update Automatic search for software updates is activated when the car is delivered from the factory, but this function can be deactivated. 1. Tap on Settings in the centre display's top view. 2. Press System 3. Deselect Auto Software Update. Car status The car's general status can be shown in the centre display along with the opportunity to book service3. The Car Status app is started from app view in the centre display and has four tabs: Download Centre. Related information • • • Download Center (p. 605) Internet-connected car* (p. 539) Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 114) If no list is desired, then the Install all option can be selected at System updates. Update individual system software programs – Select Install for the software required. Cancelling software download – 3 606 Tap on X in the activity indicator that has replaced Install at the start of the download. Applies to certain markets. * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE • Messages - status messages • Status – checking engine oil level and AdBlue level4 • TPMS - checking the tyre pressure • Appointments - appointment information and car information3. Related information • • • • • • Handling a message saved from the driver display (p. 106) Checking and filling with engine oil (p. 616) Tyre pressure monitoring system* (p. 564) Book service and repair (p. 607) Sending car information to a workshop (p. 608) Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 114) Book service and repair5 This service provides a convenient way to book a service and workshop visit directly in the car. When it is time for service, and in some cases when the car is in need of repair, a message will appear in the driver display and at the top of the centre display. The service date is determined by how much time has passed, hours that the engine has been running, or distance driven since the last service. Before the service can be used • • • Open the Car Status app from the app view in the centre display. 2. Press Appointments. 3. Press Request appointment. 4. Make sure that the correct Volvo ID is filled in. 5. Make sure that the desired Workshop is filled in. 6. Fill in the field Tap to write information to the workshop if there is anything you would like done during the workshop visit or any other important information to your workshop. Create a Volvo ID and register it to the car. Select the Volvo retailer you would like to contact by going to www.volvocars.com and logging in. To send and receive booking information, the car must be connected to the Internet6. Book a service Fill in a booking request when so required or when a message indicating that the car needs a service or repair is shown. 4 3 5 6 1. AdBlue Applies to cars with diesel engines. Applies to certain markets. Applies to certain markets. Data is transferred (data traffic) when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost. }} * Option/accessory. 607 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || 7. Press Send appointment request. > You will receive an appointment suggestion via e-mail within a couple of days7. You will also receive the same communication via e-mail and when you go to www.volvocars.com and log in. In certain markets, once you have sent the appointment request, the message that the car needs service is extinguished in the driver display. 8. Tap on Cancel request to cancel your request. The booking enquiry sent from the car includes car information that facilitates workshop planning. The retailer comes back with a digital booking proposal. You also have information on your retailer available in the car and can contact your workshop at any time. Accept the appointment suggestion When the car has received an appointment suggestion, a message will be shown at the top of the centre display. 1. Tap the message. 2. If the suggested booking is acceptable, tap on Accept. Otherwise, tap on Send new proposal or Decline. 7 8 608 For certain markets, the system reminds you of a scheduled appointment time as it approaches and the navigation system8 can also guide you to the workshop when the time comes. Related information • • Car status (p. 606) Sending car information to a workshop (p. 608) • Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 114) • • Volvo ID (p. 26) Sending car information to a workshop9 It is possible to send information for the car at any time, e.g. if you book a workshop appointment and want to help your workshop by providing them with better data so that your visit can be planned. Sending car information is not the same as booking a service appointment. Internet-connected car* (p. 539) 1. Open the Car Status app from the app view in the centre display. 2. Press Appointments. 3. Press Send car data. > A message that vehicle data are being sent is shown at the top of the centre display. You can cancel data transmission by tapping the X in the activity indicator. The information is sent via the car's Internet connection10. This car information can be accessed by any retailer if they have the car's identification number (VIN11). This time frame may vary depending on market. Applies to Sensus Navigation*. * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Car information content The data sent is the last information saved (the last time the car was running) and includes information in the following areas: • • • • • • service requirement • • the car's software version time since last service function status fluid levels meter reading the car's vehicle identification number (VIN11) the car's diagnostics data. Related information • • • • Book service and repair (p. 607) Car status (p. 606) Navigating in the centre display's views (p. 114) Internet-connected car* (p. 539) 9 Applies to certain markets. 10 Data is transferred (data traffic) 11 Vehicle Identification Number. when using the Internet, and this may involve a cost. * Option/accessory. 609 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Raise the car When raising the car, it is important that the jack is fitted in the intended points on the car's underbody. Applies to cars with Leveling Control*: If the car is equipped with air suspension, this must be disabled before the car is raised. WARNING If the car is raised using a workshop jack, this must be placed beneath one of the four jacking points. Take care to position the workshop jack so that the car cannot slip off. Make sure that the jack plate is fitted with a rubber guard so that the car remains stable and is not damaged. Always use axle stands or similar. 610 NOTE Volvo recommends only using the jack that belongs to the car model in question. If a jack is selected other than the one recommended by Volvo, follow the instructions supplied with the equipment. The normal car jack is only designed for occasional, short-term use, such as when changing a wheel after a puncture. If the car is to be jacked up more often, or for a longer time than is required just to change a wheel, use of a garage jack is recommended. In this instance, follow the instructions for use that come with the equipment. * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE The triangles in the plastic cover indicate the locations of the lifting points (marked in red). Related information • • • Removing a wheel (p. 571) Jack* (p. 569) Settings for level control* (p. 469) * Option/accessory. 611 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Servicing the climate control system Related information The air conditioning system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop. • Troubleshooting and repair The air conditioning system contains fluorescent tracing agents. Ultraviolet light must be used during leak detection. Volvo recommends that an authorised Volvo workshop is contacted. Cars with R134a refrigerant WARNING The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R134a. This system must only be serviced and repaired by an authorised workshop. Volvo service programme (p. 604) Head up display when replacing the windscreen* Cars with head-up display are equipped with a special type of windscreen that meets the requirements for displaying the projected image. Volvo recommends that you contact an authorised Volvo workshop when replacing the windscreen. The correct version of the windscreen must be fitted in order that the head-up display's graphics shall be displayed correctly. Related information • • Head-up display* (p. 141) Cleaning the head up display* (p. 640) Cars with R1234yf refrigerant WARNING The air conditioning system contains pressurised refrigerant R1234yf. In accordance with SAE J2845 (Technician Training for Safe Service and Containment of Refrigerants Used in Mobile A/C System), service and repair of the refrigerant system must only be performed by trained and certified technicians in order to ensure the safety of the system. 612 * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Opening and closing the bonnet Close the bonnet The bonnet can be opened using the handle in the passenger compartment and a handle under the bonnet. 1. Push the bonnet down until it starts to fall from its own weight. 2. When the bonnet stops against the lock catch, push the bonnet to close it completely. Open the bonnet WARNING Risk of crushing! Ensure that the closing path under the bonnet is not obstructed, otherwise there is a risk of personal injury. Turn the handle under the bonnet anticlockwise to release the bonnet from the lock catches and lift the bonnet. Warning - bonnet not closed Pull the handle near the foot pedals to release the bonnet from its fully closed position. WARNING Check that the bonnet locks properly when closed. The bonnet must engage at both sides audibly. When the bonnet is released, a warning symbol and graphics in the driver display will light up and an acoustic reminder will sound. If the car starts rolling, an acoustic warning signal will repeat. NOTE If the warning symbol is lit or the warning signal is heard despite the bonnet being closed properly, contact an authorised Volvo workshop. Bonnet not completely closed. }} 613 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Engine compartment overview || The overview shows some service-related components. Some of the components included in the car's electric drive system are located under the bonnet. Exercise caution in this area and only touch anything that is related to normal maintenance. WARNING Bonnet completely closed. Orange-coloured cables must only be handled by qualified personnel. WARNING WARNING Never drive with an open bonnet! If there are any signs that the bonnet is not properly closed whilst driving, stop immediately and close it. Related information • • 12 614 Engine compartment overview (p. 614) Door and seatbelt reminder (p. 48) Fill the washer fluid at regular intervals, e.g. when refuelling. Several components in the car work with high-voltage current that could be dangerous in the event of incorrect intervention. • Do not touch anything that is not clearly described in the owner's manual. • Exercise caution when checking/refilling fluids in the engine compartment. The appearance of the engine compartment may differ depending on model and engine variant. Coolant expansion tank Reservoir for brake fluid (located on the driver's side) Washer fluid filler pipe12 Central electrical unit Air filter Engine oil filler pipe MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE WARNING Remember that the radiator fan (located at the front of the engine compartment, behind the radiator) may start or continue to operate automatically for up to approx. 6 minutes after the engine has been switched off. Engine oil An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals and warranty can be applied. WARNING Do not touch the spark plugs or ignition coil when the car's electrical system is in ignition position II or when the engine is hot. Related information • • • • • • Opening and closing the bonnet (p. 613) Filling washer fluid (p. 655) Topping up coolant (p. 617) IMPORTANT In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact. Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot. The ignition system works at a very high and hazardous voltage. The car's electrical system must always be in ignition position 0 when work is being performed in the engine compartment. If the engine oil cannot be checked on a regular basis and the level falls too low, there is a risk that this will cause serious damage to the engine. Volvo recommends: An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change, otherwise there is a risk of the service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact of the car being affected. If engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used, engine related components may become damaged. Volvo Car Corporation disclaims any liability for any such damage. Volvo recommends that oil changes are carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop. Fuses in engine compartment (p. 628) Checking and filling with engine oil (p. 616) Ignition positions (p. 440) Volvo uses different systems to warn about the oil level if it is too low/high, or in the event of low oil pressure. Certain engine variants have an oil pressure sensor, and then the driver display's }} 615 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || warning symbol for low oil pressure is used. Other variants have an oil level sensor, when the driver is informed via the driver display's warning symbol and display texts. Certain variants have both systems. Contact a Volvo dealer for more information. Checking and filling with engine oil The oil level is detected with the electronic oil level sensor. Change the engine oil and oil filter in accordance with the intervals specified in the Service and Warranty Booklet. Using oil of a higher than specified grade is permitted. If the car is driven in adverse conditions, Volvo recommends using an oil of a higher grade than the one specified. • • • Engine oil — specifications (p. 667) Adverse driving conditions for engine oil (p. 668) If this symbol is shown together with a message about low oil level, such as Engine oil level low Refill 1 litre for example, then only fill the volume specified, e.g. 1 litre (1 quart). WARNING Do not spill oil onto the hot exhaust manifold due to the risk of fire. See oil level in the centre display Related information Checking and filling with engine oil (p. 616) IMPORTANT Filler pipe13. In some cases, oil may need to be topped up between service intervals. The oil level is visualised using the electronic oil level gauge in the centre display when the car has been started. The oil level should be checked regularly. No action with regard to engine oil level needs to be taken until a message is shown in the driver display. WARNING If this symbol is shown together with the message Engine oil level Service required, visit a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. The oil level may be too high. 13 616 Engines with electronic oil level sensor do not have a dipstick. 1. Open the Car Status app from the app view in the centre display. 2. Press Status to show the oil level. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Related information • • • • • Graphics for oil level in the centre display. NOTE The system cannot directly detect changes when the oil is filled or drained. The car must have been driven approx. 30 km (approx. 20 miles) and have been stationary for 5 minutes with the engine switched off and on level ground before the oil level indication is correct. Engine oil (p. 615) Adverse driving conditions for engine oil (p. 668) Engine oil — specifications (p. 667) Ignition positions (p. 440) Car status (p. 606) Topping up coolant The coolant cools the internal combustion engine to the correct operating temperature. The heat that is transferred from the engine to the coolant can be used to heat the passenger compartment. When topping up the coolant, follow the instructions on the packaging. Never top up with water only. The risk of freezing increases with both too little and too much coolant concentrate. If there is coolant under the car, if there is coolant smoke, or if more than 2 litres (approx. 2 quarts) have been filled, always call for recovery to avoid the risk of engine damage due to a defective cooling system when attempting to start the car. WARNING The coolant may be very hot. Never open the cap when the coolant is hot. If a top-up is required, unscrew the expansion tank cap slowly to allow any overpressure to disappear. NOTE If the right conditions for measuring the oil level (time after engine shutdown, the car's inclination, outside temperature, etc.) are not met, then the message No value available will be shown in the centre display. This does not mean that there is something wrong in the car's systems. }} 617 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || IMPORTANT Lift off the rubber strip by pressing it inward in the engine compartment. Coolant expansion tank. Detach the flap in the plastic cover by folding out the release catch and turning the flap upward. Screw off the cap and top up with coolant if necessary. The coolant level must lie between the MIN and MAX marks on the expansion tank. • Harmful if ingested. May cause organ (kidney) damage. • Use ready-mixed coolant as recommended by Volvo. If concentrated liquid is used, make sure that the ratio is 50 % coolant to 50 % water of an approved quality. • • Do not mix different coolants. • The engine must only be run with a wellfilled cooling system. Otherwise, temperatures that are too high may occur resulting in the risk of damage (cracks) in the cylinder head. • A high content of chlorine, chlorides and other salts may cause corrosion in the cooling system. Only new coolant should be used when replacing major cooling system components to ensure the system has sufficient corrosion protection. Related information • • 618 Engine compartment overview (p. 614) Coolant — specifications (p. 669) MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Bulb replacement Lamp types vary depending on model and equipment level. If a bulb14 breaks, it can be replaced according to the method described in the Owner's Manual. Contact a workshop15 if faults occur in lamps other than bulbs. If a fault occurs in LED16 lamps, the entire lamp unit usually must be replaced. NOTE For information about bulbs not covered in this Owner's Manual, contact a Volvo dealer or a certified Volvo service technician. NOTE Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp housing when the lamp has been switched on for a time. 14 15 16 Some cars have no bulbs. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. LED (Light Emitting Diode) 619 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Starter battery The electrical system is single-pole and uses the chassis and engine casing as a conductor. The starter battery is used to start up the electrical system and drive electrical equipment in the car. The hybrid battery is used when the internal combustion engine is started. WARNING • The battery can generate oxyhydrogen gas, which is highly explosive. A spark can be formed if a jump lead is connected incorrectly, and this can be enough for the battery to explode. • Do not connect the jump leads to any fuel system component or any moving part. Be careful of hot engine parts. • The battery contains sulphuric acid, which can cause serious burns. • If sulphuric acid comes into contact with eyes, skin or clothing, flush with large quantities of water. If acid splashes into the eyes - seek medical attention immediately. The starter battery should be replaced by a workshop17. The starter battery is a 12 V AGM battery (Absorbed Glass Mat), designed for regenerative charging, and to support the functionality of the car's different systems. The service life and function of the starter battery is influenced by factors such as the number of starts, discharging, driving style, driving conditions, climatic conditions etc. • Never disconnect the starter battery when the engine is running. • Check that the cables to the starter battery are correctly connected and properly tightened. 17 620 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. • Never smoke near the battery. Charging points When connecting an external starter battery or battery charger, use the car's charging points in the engine compartment. The battery terminals on the car's starter battery in the luggage/cargo area must not be used. Positive charging point Negative charging point IMPORTANT It is not possible to charge another car’s battery by means of current through the charging points. Using the charging points to charge another car's battery may cause a fuse to blow, which means that the charging points will stop working. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE IMPORTANT When charging the starter battery, only use a modern battery charger with controlled charging voltage. Fast charging function must not be used since it may damage the battery. NOTE If both the starter battery and the hybrid battery are discharged then both batteries must be charged. In such a case, charging only the hybrid battery first is not possible. In order for the hybrid battery to be charged the starter battery must have a certain state of charge. IMPORTANT If the following instruction is not observed then the energy saving function for infotainment may be temporarily disengaged, and/or the message in the driver display about the starter battery's state of charge may be temporarily inapplicable, following the connection of an external starter battery or battery charger: • The negative battery terminal on the car's starter battery must never be used for connecting an external starter battery or battery charger - only the car's negative charging point may be used as the grounding point. NOTE The life of the battery is shortened if it becomes discharged repeatedly. The life of the battery is affected by several factors, including driving conditions and climate. Battery starting capacity decreases gradually with time and therefore needs to be recharged if the car is not used for a longer time or when it is only driven short distances. Extreme cold further limits starting capacity. To maintain the battery in good condition, at least 15 minutes of driving/week is recommended or that the battery is connected to a battery charger with automatic trickle charging. A battery that is kept fully charged has a maximum service life. }} 621 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || Location WARNING If the starter battery is disconnected, the automatic opening and closing function must be reset to work properly. A reset must take place for pinch protection to work. IMPORTANT On certain models, the battery is attached with a retaining strap. Make sure the retaining strap is properly tightened. The starter battery is located in the cargo area. Specifications for starter battery A B Battery type H8 AGM Voltage (V) 12 Cold start capacityA - CCAB (A) 850 Size, L×B×H 353×175×190 mm (13.9×6.9×7.5 inches) Capacity (Ah) 95 According to EN standard. Cold Cranking Amperes. Volvo recommends entrusting battery replacement to an authorised Volvo workshop. 622 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE IMPORTANT If the battery is replaced, make sure you replace it with a battery with the same size, cold starting capacity and type as the original battery (see the decal on the battery). Related information • • • • • Symbols on the batteries (p. 625) Hybrid battery (p. 624) Using jump starting with another battery (p. 484) Reset sequence for pinch protection (p. 165) Battery recycle (p. 625) 623 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Hybrid battery Related information The car is equipped with a hybrid battery for electric motor operation - a maintenance-free rechargeable Lithium-ion type battery. • • • • NOTE The car cannot be started if the hybrid battery is discharged. NOTE If both the starter battery and the hybrid battery are discharged then both batteries must be charged. In such a case, charging only the hybrid battery first is not possible. In order for the hybrid battery to be charged the starter battery must have a certain state of charge. IMPORTANT The hybrid battery's coolant must only be topped up by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Specifications for hybrid battery WARNING The hybrid battery must only be replaced by a workshop - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Coolant The hybrid battery's cooling system has a separate expansion tank. 624 Type: Lithium-ion Total amount of energy: 10.4 kWh. NOTE The capacity of the hybrid battery diminishes with age and use, which may result in increased use of the internal combustion engine and, as a consequence, reduced fuel economy and reduced range during electric operation. Symbols on the batteries (p. 625) Starter battery (p. 620) Charging the hybrid battery (p. 417) Battery recycle (p. 625) MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Symbols on the batteries Battery recycle There are information and warning symbols on the batteries. A used starter battery should be recycled in an environmentally sound manner – it contains lead. Avoid sparks and naked flames. Use protective goggles. Consult a workshop in the event of uncertainty about how this type of waste should be discarded - an authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Related information Risk of explosion. • • • Starter battery (p. 620) Hybrid battery (p. 624) Symbols on the batteries (p. 625) Further information in the owner's manual for the car. Must be taken for recycling. Store the battery out of the reach of children. Related information • • • Starter battery (p. 620) Hybrid battery (p. 624) Battery recycle (p. 625) The battery contains corrosive acid. 625 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Fuses and central electrical units Location of central electrical units All electrical functions and components are protected by a number of fuses in order to protect the car's electrical system from damage by short circuiting or overloading. All electrical functions and components are protected by a number of fuses in order to protect the car's electrical system from damage by short circuiting or overloading. WARNING Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an amperage higher than that specified when replacing a fuse. This could cause significant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire. WARNING Orange-coloured cables must only be handled by qualified personnel. 626 Look in the fuse diagram to locate the fuse. 2. Pull out the fuse and check from the side to see whether the curved wire has blown. 3. If this is the case, replace it with a new fuse of the same colour and amperage. WARNING Never use a foreign object or a fuse with an amperage higher than that specified when replacing a fuse. This could cause significant damage to the electrical system and possibly lead to fire. Central electrical unit locations in a left-hand drive car. In a right-hand drive car the central electrical units under the glovebox change sides. WARNING If an electrical component or function does not work, it may be because the component's fuse was temporarily overloaded and failed. If the same fuse fails repeatedly then there is a fault in the circuit. Volvo recommends contacting an authorised Volvo workshop for checking. 1. The figure is schematic - appearance may vary depending on car model. Engine compartment Several components in the car work with high-voltage current that could be dangerous in the event of incorrect intervention. Do not touch anything that is not clearly described in the owner's manual for the car. Replacing a fuse WARNING Under the glovebox Contact an authorised Volvo workshop about the fuses not mentioned in the owner's manual. If this is not performed correctly, it can cause serious damage to the electrical systems. Cargo area Related information • • • • Replacing a fuse (p. 626) Fuses in cargo area (p. 635) Fuses in engine compartment (p. 628) Fuses under glovebox (p. 632) Related information • • Fuses and central electrical units (p. 626) Fuses in cargo area (p. 635) MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE • • Fuses in engine compartment (p. 628) Fuses under glovebox (p. 632) 627 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Fuses in engine compartment Fuses in the engine compartment protect engine and brake functions, amongst other things. 628 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses. The fuse box also provides space for several spare fuses. Positions On the inside of the cover is a label that shows the location of the fuses. • Fuses 1-13, 18-30, 35-37 and 46-70 are of the "Micro" type. • Fuses 14-17, 31-34, 38-45 and 71-78 are of the "MCase" type and should be replaced by a workshop18. Function 18 Ampere – – – – – – Control module for actuator for engagement/change of automatic gearbox gear positions 5 Control module for the highvoltage heater of the internal combustion engine's coolant 5 An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Function Ampere Control module for air conditioning; Shut-off valve for heat exchanger; Shut-off valve for coolant that passes through the climate control system 5 Control module for hybrid battery; High voltage converter for combined high-voltage generator/starter motor with voltage converter 500 V-12 V 5 – – Converter for control of the supply to the rear axle's electric motor 10 Control module for hybrid battery; High voltage converter for combined high-voltage generator/starter motor with voltage converter 500 V-12 V 10 Charging unit 5 Shut-off valve for the hybrid battery's coolant; Coolant pump 1 for hybrid battery 10 Function Ampere Coolant pump for electric drive system 10 Cooling fan for hybrid components 25 – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – – 12 V socket in tunnel console, front 15 }} 629 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || Function 12 V socket in tunnel console, by legroom for second seat rowA Ampere 15 12 V socket in tunnel console, between the rear seatsB; USB ports in tunnel console, between the rear seatsB 12 V socket in cargo area* 15 USB ports for iPad holderB – 7,5 Control module for brake system (valves, parking brake) 40 Right-hand headlamp, certain variants of LEDC 15 Windscreen wipers 30 Alcohol lock* 5 Rear window washer 25 – – Heated windscreen* righthand side 40 – – 20 Airbags 5 Parking heater* 40 – – – – – Heated windscreen* righthand side Heated windscreen* left-hand side 40 Headlamp washers* 25 Windscreen washers 25 Horn – 20 Ampere Right-hand headlamp – Shunt Function 5 – Heated windscreen* left-hand side Ampere Siren* Control unit for brake system (ABS pump) – 630 – Function – Shunt Supplied when the ignition is switched on: Engine control module; Transmission components; Electric steering servo; Central electronic module 5 Exterior car noise (certain markets) 5 Left-hand headlamp 7,5 Left-hand headlamp, certain variants of LEDC 15 Accelerator pedal sensor 5 Transmission control module; Control module for gear selector 15 Engine Control Module (ECM) 5 – – – – – – – – * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Function Ampere Engine control module; Actuator; Throttle unit; Valve for turbocharger 20 Solenoids; Valve; Thermostat for engine cooling system 10 Vacuum regulators; Valve Function Ampere Control module for vacuum pump 40 Actuator for transmission 25 – – 7,5 – – Control module, spoiler roller cover; Control module, radiator roller cover 5 – – – – Lambda-sond, front; Lambdasond, rear 15 Solenoid for engine oil pump; Solenoid clutch A/C; Lambda sond, centre 15 – Not Excellence Excellence LED (Light Emitting Diode) Related information • • Fuses and central electrical units (p. 626) Replacing a fuse (p. 626) – Engine Control Module (ECM) 20 Ignition coils; Spark plugs 15 – – – – Control module for transmission fluid pump A B C 30 631 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Fuses under glovebox Fuses under the glovebox protect, amongst other things, electrical sockets, displays and door modules. 632 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses. Function Ampere – – The fuse box in the engine compartment also provides space for several spare fuses. Steering wheel module 5 Positions Module for start knob and for parking brake control 5 Steering wheel module for heated steering wheel* 15 • Fuses 1, 3-21, 23-36, 39-53 and 55-59 are of the "Micro" type. • Fuses 2, 22, 37-38 and 54 are of the "MCase" type and should be replaced by a workshop19. Function 19 Ampere – – – – – – – – – – – – – – Control module for climate control system 10 Movement detector* 5 Steering lock Media player 5 Driver display 5 Keypad in centre console 5 Sun sensor 5 – – An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. Function Ampere Controls lighting; Interior lighting; Dimming of interior rearview mirror*; Rain and light sensor*; Keypad in tunnel console, by legroom for second seat row*A; Power front seats*; Control panels in rear doors; Fan module for climate control left/right 7,5 Power rear seatsB; Display for rear seat comfort functionsB; Modules for seat comfort (massage) rearB Control module for driver support functions 5 Panorama roof with sun blind* 20 7,5 Head-up display* 5 Diagnostic socket OBDII 10 5 Centre display 5 Passenger compartment lighting Fan module for climate control system, front 40 – – 5 USB HUB 5 Display in roof console (Seatbelt reminder/Indicator for airbag on the front passenger seat) }} * Option/accessory. 633 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || Function Ampere – – – – Fuses in cargo area 10 Control module for online car; Control module for Volvo On Call 5 – 20 – 634 Audio control device (amplifier) 40 Fan module for climate control system, rear* 40 Module for multi-band antenna 5 Modules for seat comfort (massage) front* 5 Alcohol lock* 5 Rear window wiper 15 Control module for fuel pump 15 Function Ampere Relay coils in central electrical unit in engine compartment; relay coil for transmission fluid pump 5 – – Seat heating, driver's side front 15 Seat heating, passenger side front 15 Coolant pump 7,5 – – Power driver's seat* 20 Control module for suspension (active chassis)* 20 – Sensus control module A B C Ampere Display for rear seat comfort functionsC; Data link connector OBD-II in tunnel console between the rear seatsC; Extra movement detectorsC 5C TV* (certain markets) 5 Primary fuse for fuses 52, 53, 57 and 58 15 Not Excellence Excellence Excellence Related information • • Fuses and central electrical units (p. 626) Replacing a fuse (p. 626) – 10 – – – – Electrically operated front passenger seat* Function 20 * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Fuses in cargo area Fuses in the cargo area protect, amongst other things, power seats*, airbags and seatbelt tensioners. }} * Option/accessory. 635 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || The central electrical unit is located under the storage compartment on the right-hand side. On the inside of the cover there are tweezers that facilitate the procedure for the removal and fitting of fuses. 636 The fuse box in the engine compartment also provides space for several spare fuses. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Positions • Fuses 13-17 and 21-36 are of the "Micro" type. • Fuses 1-12, 18-20 and 37 are of the "MCase" type and should be replaced by a workshop20. Function Ampere Ampere Power operated tailgate* 25 Electrically operated front passenger seat* 20 Door module right-hand side front Function Ampere Door module left-hand side front 20 Seatbelt pretensioner module, left-hand side 40 Parking camera* 5 Rear window defroster 30 Towbar control module* 40 – – Central electronic module 40 40 – – Compressor for air suspension* 40 Seatbelt pretensioner module, right-hand side Internal relay coils 5 – – Electrically-driven heater righthand side rear 30 Door module left-hand side rear 20 Supply when the ignition is switched on 10 Electrical socket in tunnel console, between rear seatsA 30A 5 Control module for airbags and seatbelt tensioners 5 Electrically-driven heater lefthand side rear 30 Module for detecting foot movement* (for opening the power operated tailgate) 5 Electrically operated front passenger seat* 20 Alcohol lock*, USB hub/ accessory port Module for lowering the backrest in the third seat row* 20 Seat heating left-hand side rear* Towbar control module* 25 – Accessory module 40 Door module right-hand side rear Control module for reduction of nitrous oxides (diesel) 20 Function An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended. 30 RefrigeratorA; Heated/cooled cup holder, rearA 10A 5 Accessory module 15 – }} * Option/accessory. 637 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || Function Blind Spot Information (BLIS)*: control module, exterior reversing sound 5 – – Seatbelt pretensioner modules 5 Actuator for exhaust gases (petrol, certain engine variants) 5 – – – – Seat heating right-hand side rear* – A Ampere 15 – Excellence Related information • • 638 Fuses and central electrical units (p. 626) Replacing a fuse (p. 626) * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Cleaning the interior Related information Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents. • • IMPORTANT • Certain items of coloured clothing (e.g. dark jeans and suede garments) may stain the upholstery. If this occurs, it is important to clean and treat these parts of the upholstery as soon as possible. • Never use strong solvents such as washer fluid, pure petrol or white spirit or concentrated alcohol to clean the interior, since this may damage the upholstery as well as other interior materials. • Never spray the cleaning agent directly onto components that have electrical buttons and controls. Wipe them instead using a moistened cloth containing the cleaning agent. • Sharp objects and Velcro may damage the fabric upholstery. • Only use cleaning agents on the type of material for which they were intended. • • • • • Cleaning the centre display (p. 639) Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining (p. 641) Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 641) Cleaning the centre display Dirt, stains and grease from fingers can affect the centre display's performance and readability. Clean the screen frequently with a microfibre cloth. Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 641) Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 642) Cleaning the leather steering wheel (p. 643) Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts (p. 643) To clean the centre display: 1. Turn off the centre display with a long press on the home button. 2. Wipe the screen with the microfibre cloth supplied or use another microfibre cloth of equivalent quality. The screen should be wiped with a clean and dry microfibre cloth with small circular movements. If necessary, lightly moisten the microfibre cloth with clean water. 3. Activate the display with a short press on the home button. }} 639 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || IMPORTANT The microfibre cloth used to clean the centre display must be free from sand and dirt. IMPORTANT When cleaning the centre display, only use gentle pressure on the screen. Heavy pressure can damage the screen. IMPORTANT Do not spray any liquid or caustic chemicals directly on the centre display. Do not use window cleaning agent, other cleaning agents, aerosol spray, solvents, alcohol, ammonia or cleaning agent containing abrasive. • Cleaning the leather steering wheel (p. 643) • Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts (p. 643) Cleaning the head up display* Gently wipe the display's cover glass with a clean and dry microfibre cloth. If necessary, lightly moisten the microfibre cloth. Never use strong stain removers. A special cleaning agent available from Volvo dealers can be used for more difficult cleaning. Related information • Activating and deactivating the head-up display* (p. 143) • Head-up display* (p. 141) Never use abrasive cloths, paper towels or tissue paper, since they may scratch the centre display. Related information • • • • • 640 Cleaning the interior (p. 639) Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining (p. 641) Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 641) Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 641) Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 642) * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents. Fabric upholstery and ceiling upholstery When you need to clean the textile upholstery or headliner, never scrape or rub a stain as this may destroy the fabric. Nor should you ever use stain removing agents, as this risks discoloration of the fabric. Related information • • • • • • • Cleaning the interior (p. 639) Cleaning the centre display (p. 639) Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 641) Cleaning the seatbelts Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents. Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly and treat stains at once for best results. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents. Seatbelts Inlay mats and floor mat Use water and a synthetic detergent. A special textile cleaning agent is available from Volvo retailers. Ensure that the seatbelt is dry before allowing it to retract. Remove inlaid carpets for separate cleaning of the floor carpet and the inlaid carpets. Use a vacuum cleaner to remove dust and dirt. Related information • • • Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 642) • • • Cleaning the leather steering wheel (p. 643) • Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 641) Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts (p. 643) Cleaning the interior (p. 639) Cleaning the centre display (p. 639) Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining (p. 641) Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 641) Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 642) Cleaning the leather steering wheel (p. 643) Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts (p. 643) NOTE The inlay mats must not be swung around without care or hit against objects to remove dirt since this can crack the inlay mats. Each inlay mat is secured with pins. Remove the inlay mat by taking hold of the inlay mat at each pin and lifting the mat straight up. Fit the inlay mat in place by pressing it in at each pin. WARNING Only use one inlaid mat at each seat, and check before setting off that the mat by the driver's seat is firmly affixed and secured in the pins so that it does not get caught adjacent to and under the pedals. A special textile cleaner is recommended for stains on the floor mat after vacuuming. Floor }} 641 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE || Cleaning leather upholstery 3. Thoroughly dampen the stain using the sponge, allow the sponge to absorb the stain without scrubbing. 4. Cleaning the centre display (p. 639) Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly, and treat stains straight away for best results. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents. Wipe the stain with a soft cloth and allow the leather to dry thoroughly. Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining (p. 641) Leather upholstery* mats should be cleaned with agents recommended by Volvo retailers. Related information • • • • • • • Cleaning the interior (p. 639) Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 641) Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 642) Cleaning the leather steering wheel (p. 643) Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts (p. 643) Volvo's leather upholstery is treated to preserve its original appearance. Leather upholstery is a natural product that changes and acquires a beautiful patina over time. Regular cleaning and treatment are required in order that the properties and colours of the leather shall be preserved. Volvo offers a comprehensive product, Volvo Leather Care KitWipes, for cleaning and treatment of leather upholstery. The protective outer layer of the leather is preserved when this is used according to the instructions. To achieve results that are as good as possible, Volvo recommends cleaning and application of the protective cream one to four times per year (or more frequently if required). Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes is available from Volvo dealers. Cleaning the leather upholstery 1. Apply the leather cleaner to a damp sponge and squeeze until a foam is created. 2. 642 Protecting the leather upholstery 1. Apply a small amount of leather protective agent to a cloth and then apply it to the leather in light circular motions. 2. Allow to dry for about 20 minutes. Protecting the leather upholstery makes it more resistant to the stresses from the sun's UV radiation. Related information • • • • • • • Cleaning the interior (p. 639) Cleaning the centre display (p. 639) Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining (p. 641) Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 641) Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 641) Cleaning the leather steering wheel (p. 643) Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts (p. 643) Use the sponge on the stain in a circular motion. * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Cleaning the leather steering wheel Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly, and treat stains straight away for best results. Vacuuming is important prior to using cleaning agents. Leather steering wheel Leather needs to breathe. Never cover the leather steering wheel with protective plastic. We recommend Volvo Leather Care Kit/Wipes for cleaning the leather steering wheel. First remove dirt, dust, etc. with a damp sponge or cloth. Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts • Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining (p. 641) Only use cleaning agents and car care products recommended by Volvo. Clean regularly, and treat stains straight away for best results. • • • • Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 641) Interior plastic, metal and wood parts A fibrillated fibre or microfibre cloth, lightly moistened with water, available from Volvo dealers, is recommended for cleaning interior parts and surfaces. IMPORTANT IMPORTANT Do not use solvent that contains alcohol when cleaning the glass for the driver display. Related information • • • • Cleaning the leather steering wheel (p. 643) Do not scrape or rub stains. Never use strong stain removers, either. Sharp objects, e.g. rings, can damage the leather on the steering wheel. • • • Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 641) Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 642) IMPORTANT Cleaning the interior (p. 639) Keep in mind that high gloss surfaces are easily scratched. Clean these surfaces with a clean, dry microfibre cloth using small, circular motions. If needed, dampen the microfibre cloth with a little clean water. Cleaning the centre display (p. 639) Cleaning fabric upholstery and headlining (p. 641) Cleaning the seatbelts (p. 641) Cleaning floor mats and inlay mats (p. 641) Cleaning leather upholstery (p. 642) Related information Cleaning interior plastic, metal and wood parts (p. 643) • • Cleaning the interior (p. 639) Cleaning the centre display (p. 639) 643 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Cleaning the exterior Polishing and waxing The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly. It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the car fresh. Carry out cleaning in a cleaning area with an oil separator, and use car shampoo. Polish and wax the car if the paintwork is dull or to give the paintwork extra protection. The car does not need to be polished until it is at least one year old. However, the car can be waxed during this time. Do not polish or wax the car in direct sunlight, the surface being polished should be a maximum of 45 °C (113 °F). Related information • • • • • • • • • Cleaning the exterior (p. 644) • Polishing and waxing (p. 644) Handwashing (p. 645) Automatic car wash (p. 646) High-pressure washing (p. 647) Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 647) Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 648) Cleaning wheel rims (p. 649) Rustproofing (p. 649) • Wash and dry the car thoroughly before you begin polishing or waxing. Clean off asphalt and tar stains using tar remover or white spirit. More stubborn stains can be removed using fine rubbing paste designed for car paintwork. Polish first with a polish and then wax with liquid or solid wax. Follow the instructions on the packaging carefully. Many preparations contain both polish and wax. IMPORTANT Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and rubber. When using degreasant on plastic and rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is necessary. Use a soft washing sponge. Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface layer. Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used. 644 IMPORTANT Only paint treatment recommended by Volvo should be used. Other treatment such as preserving, sealing, protection, lustre sealing or similar could damage the paintwork. Paintwork damage caused by such treatments is not covered by Volvo warranty. Related information • • • • • • • • Cleaning the exterior (p. 644) Handwashing (p. 645) Automatic car wash (p. 646) High-pressure washing (p. 647) Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 647) Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 648) Cleaning wheel rims (p. 649) Rustproofing (p. 649) MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Handwashing The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly. It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the car fresh. Carry out cleaning in a cleaning area with an oil separator, and use car shampoo. • • Clean the wiper blades with a lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo. • Dry the car using a clean, soft chamois or a water scraper. If you avoid allowing drops of water to dry in strong sunlight, you reduce the risk of water drying stains which may need to be polished out. • After the car has been washed, tar from asphalt may remain. Use tar remover to get rid of the last spots after the car has been washed. Handwashing The following steps are good to remember when washing the car: • Avoid washing the car in direct sunlight. This can cause the detergent or wax to dry and have an abrasive effect. • Remove bird droppings from the paintwork as soon as possible. They contain substances that damage and discolour paintwork very quickly. For example, use soft paper or sponge soaked in plenty of water. An authorised Volvo workshop is recommended for the removal of any discolouration. • Wash the underbody, including wheel housings and bumpers. • Rinse the entire car until the dissolved dirt has been removed so as to reduce the risk of scratches from washing. Do not spray directly onto the locks. • If necessary, use cold degreasing agent on very dirty surfaces. Note that in this case, the surfaces must not be hot from the sun. Wash using a sponge, car shampoo and plenty of lukewarm water. NOTE Outside lighting such as headlamps and rear lamps may temporarily have condensation on the inside of the lens. This is normal, all exterior lighting is designed to withstand this. Condensation is normally vented out of the lamp housing when the lamp has been switched on for a time. IMPORTANT WARNING Always have the engine cleaned by a workshop. There is a risk of fire if the engine is hot. • Make sure that the panoramic roof* and sun visor are closed before washing the car. • Never use polishing agent with abrasive properties on the panoramic roof. • Never use wax on the rubber mouldings around the panoramic roof. IMPORTANT IMPORTANT Dirty headlamps have impaired functionality. Clean them regularly, e.g. when refuelling. Remember to remove dirt from the drain holes in the doors and in the sills after washing the car. Do not use any corrosive cleaning agents but use water and a non-scratching sponge instead. Related information • • • • Cleaning the exterior (p. 644) Polishing and waxing (p. 644) Automatic car wash (p. 646) High-pressure washing (p. 647) }} * Option/accessory. 645 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE • • Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 647) Automatic car wash Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 648) • • • Cleaning wheel rims (p. 649) The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly. It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the car fresh. Rustproofing (p. 649) Automatic parking brake activation setting (p. 449) An automatic car wash is a simple and quick way of washing the car, but it cannot reach everywhere. Washing the car by hand is recommended to achieve a good result, or to supplement automatic car washes with washing by hand. NOTE Volvo recommends that the car is not washed in an automatic car wash during the first few months (this is because the paintwork has not fully hardened). IMPORTANT For car washes where the car is pulled forward with rolling wheels, the following applies: 1. Before washing the car, make sure that the automatic rain sensor is deactivated, otherwise there is the risk of it starting and damaging the wiper arms. 2. Make sure that the door mirrors are retracted, any auxiliary lamps secured, antennas retracted or removed, otherwise they risk being damaged by the automatic car wash. 3. Drive into the car wash. 4. Switch off the "Automatic braking at standstill" function using the button on the tunnel console. 5. Switch off the "Automatic parking brake application" function via the top view of the centre display. 6. Switch off the engine by turning the start knob in the tunnel console clockwise. Hold the knob in place for at least 2 seconds. IMPORTANT Before driving the car into an automatic car wash, deactivate the functions for automatic braking when stationary and automatic parking brake application. If these functions are not deactivated, the brake system will jam when the car is stationary and the car will not be able to move. 646 The car is ready for the car wash. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE High-pressure washing Cleaning the wiper blades The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly. It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator. Use car shampoo. The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly. It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the car fresh. Wash the car in a car wash with oil separator. Use car shampoo. High-pressure washing Wiper blades Asphalt, dust and salt residue on wiper blades, as well as insects, ice etc. on the windscreen, impair the service life of wiper blades. High-pressure washing (p. 647) When using high-pressure washing, use sweeping movements and make sure that the nozzle does not come closer than 30 cm (13 in.) to the surface of the car. Do not spray directly onto the locks. Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 647) Related information Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 648) • • • • • • IMPORTANT The system will automatically switch to P mode unless the above step is followed. The wheels are locked in P mode, which they should not be when putting the car through an automatic car wash. Related information • • • • • • • • Cleaning the exterior (p. 644) Polishing and waxing (p. 644) Handwashing (p. 645) Cleaning wheel rims (p. 649) Rustproofing (p. 649) • • When cleaning, set the wiper blades in service position. NOTE Cleaning the exterior (p. 644) Polishing and waxing (p. 644) Wash the wiper blades and windscreen regularly with a lukewarm soap solution or car shampoo. Do not use any strong solvents. Handwashing (p. 645) Automatic car wash (p. 646) Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 647) Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 648) Cleaning wheel rims (p. 649) Rustproofing (p. 649) Related information • • • • • • Cleaning the exterior (p. 644) Polishing and waxing (p. 644) Handwashing (p. 645) Automatic car wash (p. 646) High-pressure washing (p. 647) Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 648) }} 647 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE • • Cleaning wheel rims (p. 649) Rustproofing (p. 649) Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly. It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the car fresh. Carry out cleaning in a cleaning area with an oil separator, and use car shampoo. Exterior plastic, rubber and trim components A special cleaning agent available from Volvo dealers is recommended for the cleaning and care of coloured plastic parts, rubber and trim components, e.g. glossy trim mouldings. When using such a cleaning agent the instructions must be followed carefully. Avoid washing the car with detergent with a pH value below 3.5 or above 11.5. This can cause discolouration of anodised aluminium components*, as illustrated. We advise against use of abrasive polishing agents, as illustrated. Parts that should be washed using a cleaning agent with a pH value between 3.5 and 11.5. IMPORTANT Avoid waxing and polishing on plastic and rubber. When using degreasant on plastic and rubber, only rub with light pressure if it is necessary. Use a soft washing sponge. Polishing glossy trim mouldings could wear away or damage the glossy surface layer. Polishing agent that contains abrasive must not be used. 648 * Option/accessory. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Cleaning wheel rims Rustproofing Avoid washing the car with cleaning agent with a pH value lower than 3.5 or higher than 11.5. This may result in discolouration of anodised aluminium parts such as roof rack and around the side windows. The car should be washed as soon as it becomes dirty. This means that the car is easier to clean since the dirt does not attach as firmly. It also reduces the risk of scratches and keeps the car fresh. Carry out cleaning in a cleaning area with an oil separator, and use car shampoo. The car has effective protection against corrosion. Never use metal polishing agent on anodised aluminium parts, this can result in discolouration and destroy the surface treatment. Rims IMPORTANT Related information • • • • • • • • Cleaning the exterior (p. 644) Polishing and waxing (p. 644) Only use rim cleaning agent recommended by Volvo. Strong rim cleaning agents can damage the surface and cause stains on chrome-plated aluminium rims. Handwashing (p. 645) Related information Automatic car wash (p. 646) • • • • • • High-pressure washing (p. 647) Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 647) Cleaning wheel rims (p. 649) Rustproofing (p. 649) • • Cleaning the exterior (p. 644) Polishing and waxing (p. 644) Handwashing (p. 645) Automatic car wash (p. 646) High-pressure washing (p. 647) Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 648) Cleaning wheel rims (p. 649) Rustproofing (p. 649) Anti-corrosion protection for the body consists of metallic protective coatings on the sheet metal, a high-quality painting process, corrosion-protected and minimised metal overlap, and shielding plastic components, abrasion protection and supplemental rust inhibitor on exposed areas. In the chassis, exposed components of the wheel suspension are made of corrosion-resistant cast aluminium. Inspection and maintenance The car's anti-corrosion protection normally requires no maintenance but a good way to further reduce the risk of corrosion is to keep the car clean. Strong alkaline or acidic cleaning solutions must always be avoided on glossy trim components. Any stone chips should be rectified as soon as they are discovered. Related information • • • • • • Cleaning the exterior (p. 644) Polishing and waxing (p. 644) Handwashing (p. 645) Automatic car wash (p. 646) High-pressure washing (p. 647) Cleaning the wiper blades (p. 647) }} 649 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE • • Cleaning exterior plastic, rubber and trim components (p. 648) Cleaning wheel rims (p. 649) Car paintwork The paintwork consists of several layers and is an important part of the car's rustproofing, and should therefore be checked regularly. The most common types of paintwork damage are stone chips, scratches, and marks on the edges of wings, doors and bumpers. To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork should be rectified immediately. Related information • • Touching up minor paintwork damage Paint is an important part of the car's rustproofing and should therefore be checked regularly. The most common types of paintwork damage are stone chips, scratches, and marks on e.g. the edges of wings, doors and bumpers. Repair paint damage To avoid the onset of rust, damaged paintwork should be rectified immediately. Touching up minor paintwork damage (p. 650) NOTE When paint is repaired the surface must be clean and dry. The temperature of the surface should be at least 15 °C (59 °F). Colour codes (p. 651) Materials that may be needed • Primer21 – a special adhesive primer in a spray can is available for e.g. plastic-coated bumpers. • Basecoat and clearcoat - available in spray cans or as touch-up pens/sticks22. • • Masking tape. Fine sand paper21. If the damage has not reached down to the metal, the touch-up paint can be applied directly after the surface has been cleaned. 21 22 650 If required. Follow the instructions that are included with the package for the touch-up pen/stick. MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE For scratches, implement the same procedure but mask around the damaged area to protect the undamaged paintwork. Touch-up pens and spray paints for touching up paintwork are available from Volvo dealers. Colour codes Colour code The colour code label is located on the car's right-hand rear door pillar and becomes visible when the right-hand rear door is opened. NOTE 1. Apply a piece of masking tape over the damaged surface. Then remove the tape to remove any loose paint. If the damage is down to the metal, use of a primer is appropriate. In the event of damage to a plastic surface, an adhesive primer should be used to give better results - spray into the lid of the spray can and brush on thinly. 2. 3. Before painting, gentle polishing using a very fine polishing agent may be carried out locally if required (e.g. if there are any uneven edges). The surface is cleaned thoroughly and left to dry. Stir the primer well and apply using a fine brush, a matchstick or similar. Finish off with a basecoat and clearcoat once the primer has dried. If the stone chip has not penetrated down to the meal and an undamaged layer of paint remains in place, fill in with base coat and clear coat as soon as the surface has been cleaned. Related information • • Car paintwork (p. 650) Colour codes (p. 651) Exterior colour code Any secondary exterior colour code It is important that the correct colour is used. Related information • • Car paintwork (p. 650) Touching up minor paintwork damage (p. 650) 651 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Replacing the wiper blade, rear window Replacing the wiper blade, rear window The wiper blades sweep water away from the windscreen and rear window. Together with the washer fluid they clean the windows and ensure visibility for driving. Windscreen and rear window wiper blades can be replaced. 3. Press the new wiper blade into place. You should hear a click. Check that it is firmly installed. 4. Lower the wiper arm. IMPORTANT Check the blades regularly. Neglected maintenance shortens the service life of the wiper blades. Related information Lift the wiper arm from the window and pull the lower section of the blade to the right. Grip the centre of the wiper arm and lift it from the windscreen to lock position. NOTE There is a lock position at half extension angle that may feel like resistance, this lock prevents the arm from falling back against the windscreen. The wiper arm must be pulled past the lock for wiper blade replacement. Grip the lower part of the blade and pull to the right until the blade loosens from the arm. 652 • • Using the rain sensor (p. 176) Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 177) • Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 179) • Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 177) • Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 178) • • • Filling washer fluid (p. 655) • • Wiper blades in service position (p. 654) Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 653) Using windscreen wipers (p. 175) Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 174) MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Replacing windscreen wiper blades Fold up the wiper arm when it is in service position. Service position is activated/deactivated via the function view in the centre display when the car is stationary and the windscreen wipers are not on. Press the button located on the wiper blade mounting and pull straight out parallel with the wiper arm. The wiper blades sweep water away from the windscreen and rear window. Together with the washer fluid they clean the windows and ensure visibility for driving. Windscreen and rear window wiper blades can be replaced. Replacing a windscreen wiper blade Slide in the new wiper blade until a "click" is heard. NOTE When replacing the wiper blades, note that they have different lengths. The blade on the driver's side is longer than on the passenger side. Related information • • Using the rain sensor (p. 176) Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 177) 3. Check that the blade is firmly installed. 4. Fold the wiper arm back towards the windscreen. • Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 179) The wiper blades are different lengths • Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 177) • Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 178) • • • Filling washer fluid (p. 655) • • Wiper blades in service position (p. 654) Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 652) Using windscreen wipers (p. 175) Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 174) 653 MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Wiper blades in service position In some situations, the windscreen's wiper blades must be set in service position (vertical position), e.g. when they shall be replaced. are not on. Service mode is activated/deactivated via the function view in the centre display: Press the Wiper Service Position button. The light indicator in the button illuminates when service mode is activated. When activated, the wipers move to the service position. To deactivate the service mode, press Wiper Service Position again. The light indicator in the button extinguishes when service mode is deactivated. The wiper blades also exit the service position if: Wiper blades in service position. In order to change, clean or lift the wiper blades (e.g. for scraping off ice from the windscreen) they must be in service position. IMPORTANT Before placing the wiper blades in the service position, make sure that they are not frozen down. Activating/deactivating service mode Service mode can be activated/deactivated when the car is stationary and the windscreen wipers 654 • • • • Windscreen wiping is activated. Windscreen washing is activated. The rain sensor is activated. The car is driven away. IMPORTANT If the wiper arms in service position have been folded up from the windscreen, they must be folded back down onto the windscreen before the activation of wiping, washing or the rain sensor, as well as before driving. This is to avoid scraping the paint on the bonnet. Related information • • Using the rain sensor (p. 176) Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 177) • Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 179) • Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 177) • Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 178) • • • Filling washer fluid (p. 655) • • Using windscreen wipers (p. 175) Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 653) Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 652) Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 174) MAINTENANCE AND SERVICE Filling washer fluid Washer fluid is used for cleaning the headlamps as well as the windscreen and rear window. Washer fluid with antifreeze must be used when the temperature is under the freezing point. Prescribed grade: Washer fluid recommended by Volvo – with frost protection during cold weather and for temperatures below freezing point. IMPORTANT Use Volvo genuine washer fluid or equivalent with a recommended pH of between 6 and 8, in working dilution (e.g. 1:1 with neutral water). • Using the rain sensor's memory function (p. 177) • Using the rear window wiper and washer (p. 178) • • • Wiper blades in service position (p. 654) • • Replacing windscreen wiper blades (p. 653) Replacing the wiper blade, rear window (p. 652) Using windscreen wipers (p. 175) Wiper blades and washer fluid (p. 174) IMPORTANT Use washer fluid with antifreeze when the temperature is below freezing to avoid the fluid freezing inside the pump, reservoir and hoses. Washer fluid is filled into the reservoir with the blue cap. The reservoir is used for windscreen washer, rear window washer and headlamp washers* Volume: • Cars with headlamp washing: 5.5 litres (5.8 qts). • Cars without headlamp washing: 3.5 litres (3.7 qts). NOTE When approx. 1 litre (1 qt) of washer fluid remains in the reservoir, the message Washer fluid Level low, refill is shown in the driver display, together with the symbol. Related information • • • Using the rain sensor (p. 176) Using windscreen and headlamp washers (p. 177) Using automatic rear windscreen wiping when reversing (p. 179) * Option/accessory. 655 SPECIFICATIONS SPECIFICATIONS Type designations The decals in the car contain information such as chassis number, type designation, colour code, etc. Label location The illustration is schematic - details may vary depending on market and model. Knowing the car's type designation, vehicle identification and engine numbers can facilitate all contact with an authorised Volvo dealer regarding the car and when ordering spare parts and accessories. 658 SPECIFICATIONS Decal for type designation, vehicle identification number, permissible maximum weights and code designation for exterior colour and type approval number. The decal is positioned on the door pillar, and will be visible when the right-hand rear door is opened. Decal A/C system for cars with refrigerant R134a. Label for parking heater. Decal for engine code and the engine's serial number. Label for engine oil. Decal A/C system for cars with refrigerant R1234yf. }} 659 SPECIFICATIONS || NOTE It is not intended that the decals illustrated in the owner's manual should be exact replicas of those in the car. They are included to show their approximate appearance and locations in the car. The information that applies to your particular car can be found on the decal on the car. Decal for gearbox type designation and serial number. Decal for the car's identification number - VIN (Vehicle Identification Number). Further information on the car is presented in the registration document. 660 Related information • Air conditioning — specifications (p. 670) SPECIFICATIONS Dimensions Measurement of car length, height, etc. can be read in the table. Dimensions mm inches A Ground clearanceA 227 8.9 B Wheelbase 2984 117.5 C Length 4950 194.9 D Load length, floor, folded seatB 2040 80.3 1260C 49.6C E Dimensions mm inches Load length, floor 761/898D 30.0/35.4D 1220E 48.0E 554F 21.8F F HeightG 1776 69.9 G Load height 816 32.1 Dimensions H Front trackH Front trackK mm inches 1665I 65.6I 1673J 65.9J 1668I 65.7I 1676J 66.0J }} * Option/accessory. 661 SPECIFICATIONS || I Dimensions mm inches Rear trackH 1667I 65.6I 1675J 65.9J 1671I 65.8I 1679J 66.1J 1192 46.9 Rear trackK J K Load width, floor Width 1923L 75.7L 1931M 76.0M 1958N 77.1N Dimensions mm inches L Width including door mirrors 2140 84.3 M Width including folded-in door mirrors 2008 79.1 A B C D E F G H I J K L M N At kerb weight + 2 people. (Varies slightly depending on tyre dimension, chassis option, etc.) Does not apply to cars with 3 or 4 seats. From the second seat row in a car with 7 seats*. Car with 3 or 4 seats. Car with 5 seats. Car with 7 seats. Including roof antenna, for kerb weight. Car without air suspension. Applies to cars with 19 inch wheels. Applies to cars with 20, 21 and 22 inch wheels. Car with air suspension. Body width. Width for car with 19-inch wheels. Width for car with 20-, 21- and 22-inch wheels. Related information • 662 Weights (p. 663) SPECIFICATIONS Weights Max. gross vehicle weight, etc. can be read on a label in the car. Kerb weight includes the driver, the fuel tank 90% full, plus and all oils and fluids. The weight of passengers and accessories, and towball load (when a trailer is hitched) influence the load capacity and are not included in the kerb weight. Permitted max. load = Gross vehicle weight Kerb weight. NOTE The documented kerb weight applies to cars in the standard version - i.e. a car without extra equipment or accessories. This means that for every accessory added the loading capacity of the car is reduced correspondingly by the weight of the accessory. Examples of accessories that reduce load capacity are the different equipment levels (e.g. Kinetic, Momentum, Summum), as well as other accessories such as towbar, load carrier, space box, audio system, auxiliary lamps, GPS, fuel-driven heater, safety grille, carpets, cargo cover, power seats, etc. The decal is positioned on the door pillar, and will be visible when the right-hand rear door is opened. Max. gross vehicle weight Weighing the car is a certain way of ascertaining the kerb weight of your own particular car. Max. train weight (car+trailer) Max. front axle load Max. rear axle load WARNING The car's driving characteristics change depending on how heavily it is loaded and how the load is distributed. Equipment level Max. load: See registration document. Max. roof load: 100 kg. Related information • • Type designations (p. 658) Towing capacity and towball load (p. 664) 663 SPECIFICATIONS Towing capacity and towball load Towing capacity and towball load for driving with a trailer can be read in the tables. Max. weight braked trailer NOTE Use of vibration dampers on the towbar is recommended for trailers heavier than 1800 kg. Engine Engine codeA Gearbox Max. weight braked trailer (kg) T8 Twin Engine B4204T35 Automatic 2400 T8 Twin Engine B4204T28 Automatic 2400 Max. towball load (kg) 110B 140C 110B 140C 110B T8 Twin Engine B4204T34 Automatic 2400 140C 140D A B C D 664 The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine. Applies to cars with 7 seats. Applies to cars with 4 seats. Applies to cars with 3 seats. SPECIFICATIONS IMPORTANT When driving with a trailer, it is permitted to exceed the vehicle's gross vehicle weight (including towball load) by a maximum of 100 kg (220 lbs), provided that speed is limited to 100 km/h (62 mph). National legal requirements for the vehicle combination, such as speed, etc. must be observed. Max. weight unbraked trailer Max. weight unbraked trailer (kg) Max. towball load (kg) 750 50 Related information • • • • Type designations (p. 658) Weights (p. 663) Driving with a trailer (p. 489) Trailer stability assist* (p. 491) * Option/accessory. 665 SPECIFICATIONS Engine specifications Engine specifications (power, etc.) for each respective engine alternative can be found in the table below. Engine Engine codeA NOTE Not all engines are available in all markets. Output Output Max. rated power Max. rated power Torque (kW/rpm) (hp/rpm) (kW/rpm) (hp/rpm) (Nm/rpm) No. of cylinders T8 Twin Engine B4204T35 235/5700 320/5700 262/5700 356/5700 400/2200-5400 4 T8 Twin Engine B4204T28 233/6000 318/6000 – – 400/2200-5400 4 T8 Twin Engine B4204T34 223/6000 303/6000 – – 400/2200–4800 4 A The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine. Electric drive motor Max. power output: 65 kW (87 hp). Torque: 240 Nm. Related information • • • 666 The Twin Engine variant is driven both by a petrol engine and an electric drive motor (ERAD – Electric Rear Axle Drive). Type designations (p. 658) Engine oil — specifications (p. 667) Coolant — specifications (p. 669) SPECIFICATIONS Engine oil — specifications Engine oil grade and volume for each respective engine alternative can be read in the table. Volvo recommends: Engine Engine codeA Oil grade Volume, incl. oil filter T8 Twin Engine B4204T35 T8 Twin Engine B4204T34 5,6 T8 Twin Engine B4204T28 5,6 (litres, approx.) A Castrol Edge Professional V 0W-20 or VCC RBS0-2AE 0W-20 5,6 The engine code, component number and serial number can be found on the engine. Related information • • • • Type designations (p. 658) Adverse driving conditions for engine oil (p. 668) Checking and filling with engine oil (p. 616) Engine oil (p. 615) 667 SPECIFICATIONS Adverse driving conditions for engine oil IMPORTANT In order to fulfil the requirements for the engine's service intervals all engines are filled with a specially adapted synthetic engine oil at the factory. The choice of oil has been made very carefully with regard to service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact. Adverse driving conditions can lead to abnormally high oil temperature or oil consumption. Below are some examples of adverse driving conditions. Check the oil level more frequently for long journeys: • • • • An approved engine oil must be used in order that the recommended service intervals can be applied. Only use a prescribed grade of oil for both filling and oil change, otherwise there is a risk of the service life, starting characteristics, fuel consumption and environmental impact of the car being affected. towing a caravan or trailer in mountainous regions at high speeds in temperatures colder than -30 °C (-22 °F) or hotter than +40 °C (+104 °F). The above also apply to shorter driving distances at low temperatures. If engine oil of the prescribed grade and viscosity is not used, engine related components may become damaged. Volvo Car Corporation disclaims any liability for any such damage. Choose a fully synthetic engine oil for adverse driving conditions. It provides extra protection for the engine. Volvo recommends that oil changes are carried out at an authorised Volvo workshop. Volvo recommends: Related information • • 668 Engine oil — specifications (p. 667) Engine oil (p. 615) SPECIFICATIONS Coolant — specifications Transmission fluid — specifications Brake fluid — specifications Prescribed grade: Ready-mixed coolant approved by Volvo. If concentrated coolant is used, mix with 50% water (of approved water quality, not salt water, etc.). Consult a Volvo dealer if unsure. Under normal driving conditions, the transmission fluid does not need to be changed during the service life of the gearbox. Ho
advertisement
* Your assessment is very important for improving the workof artificial intelligence, which forms the content of this project